apeosport c6550 i/c5540 i docucentre c6550 i/c5540 i...

ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 IDocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I

User Guide

Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, Microsoft Network, and Windows Server areeither trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Novell, NetWare, IntranetWare and NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, PostScript3, and PostScript Logo aretrademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, MacOS and TrueType aretrademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

HP, HPGL, HPGL/2, and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.

Xerox, The Document Company and Ethernet are registered trademarks.DocuWorks and CentreWare are trademarks.

The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk. FujiXerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.

Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus orcomputer hacking.

Important

(1) This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied ormodified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.

(2) Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.(3) We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages. (4) Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual. Unauthorized

operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorizedoperation of the equipment.

An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and ForeignTrade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.

Table of Contents

1

Table of Contents

Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 1

1 Before Using the Machine ...................................................................................... 11

Preface ...................................................................................................................... 12

Using This Guide ....................................................................................................... 13

Guides Supplied.................................................................................................... 13

Organization of this Guide .................................................................................... 14

Conventions .......................................................................................................... 15

Safety Notes .............................................................................................................. 16

WARNING - Electrical Safety Information............................................................. 17

Laser Safety Information....................................................................................... 17

Operational Safety Information ............................................................................. 18

Maintenance Information ...................................................................................... 19

Ozone Safety Information ..................................................................................... 19

For Consumables.................................................................................................. 19

Radio Frequency Emissions ................................................................................. 19

Product Safety Certification .................................................................................. 20

The Objectives of the International Energy Star Program ......................................... 21

2 Sided Feature .................................................................................................... 21

Power saving feature (Lower Power mode/Sleep mode)...................................... 21

About License............................................................................................................ 22

OpenSSL .............................................................................................................. 22

SSLeay ................................................................................................................. 23

Heimdal................................................................................................................. 24

JPEG Code ........................................................................................................... 24

Illegal Copies and Printouts....................................................................................... 25

2 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 27

Machine Components................................................................................................ 28

Power On / Off ........................................................................................................... 33

Powering On ......................................................................................................... 33

Powering Off ......................................................................................................... 33

Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 34

Power Saver mode .................................................................................................... 35

Changing the Power Saver Mode Change Interval............................................... 35

Exiting the Power Saver Mode.............................................................................. 37

Control panel ............................................................................................................. 38

Customizing of the Control Panel ......................................................................... 40

3 Copy.......................................................................................................................... 41

Copying Procedure.................................................................................................... 42

Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................... 42

2

Step 2 Selecting Features .....................................................................................44

Step 3 Entering the Quantity..................................................................................45

Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.................................................................................45

Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status ................................................46

Operations during Copying.........................................................................................47

Stopping the Copy Job ..........................................................................................47

Changing the Number of Copies ...........................................................................48

Interrupting the Copy Job ......................................................................................48

Basic Copying ............................................................................................................50

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...........................................50

Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ...................................................52

Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy) ...........................................................54

Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position).............................57

Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the document) .................57

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)........................................................57

Image Quality .............................................................................................................58

Image Quality Presets (Selecting Image Quality) ..................................................58

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................59

Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast)....................60

Sharpness/Color Saturation(Adjusting the Sharpness and Color Saturation of Images)...................................61

Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents).............................61

Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..............................................................62

Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone) .........................................................................62

Gloss Level (Enhancing Gloss of the Document) ..................................................63

Scan Options..............................................................................................................64

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies).............................................................64

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .............................65

2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages).............................66

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)...................................67

Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ........68

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ...................69

Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position) .....................................................69

Image Rotation (Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally) .......................71

Mirror Image/Negative Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)....................72

Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)....................73

Output Format ............................................................................................................74

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies).............................................................74

Finishing (Outputting by Specifying Finishing).......................................................75

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) ...................................................................76

Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies) ...................................................................79

Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies) ................................................80

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet) ........................................81

Table of Contents

3

Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)........................... 82

Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)........................................ 83

Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Paper) ............................................................ 84

Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)................................... 85

Set Numbering (Printing Control Number on the Background)............................. 89

Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded paper).................................................................... 92

Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) ...................... 93

Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)................................................ 93

Job Assembly ............................................................................................................ 94

Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation) ...... 94

Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) ..................................... 96

Document > 50 sheets (Adding Originals) ............................................................ 97

Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area when Copying)......................... 98

4 Scan ........................................................................................................................ 101

Scanning Procedure ................................................................................................ 102

Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 102

Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 104

Step 3 Starting the Scan Job .............................................................................. 105

Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status ............................................. 107

Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data........................................................................ 107

Stopping the Scan Job ............................................................................................ 108

E-mail ...................................................................................................................... 109

Address Book...................................................................................................... 109

Keyboard............................................................................................................. 110

Sender ................................................................................................................ 111

Recipient Name/E-mail Address ......................................................................... 111

From.................................................................................................................... 112

Subject ................................................................................................................ 112

Mail Contents ...................................................................................................... 112

Scan to Mailbox ....................................................................................................... 113

Document List ..................................................................................................... 113

Network Scanning ................................................................................................... 114

Scan to FTP/SMB.................................................................................................... 115

Transfer Protocol ................................................................................................ 115

Address Book...................................................................................................... 115

Specifying a Forward Destination ....................................................................... 116

Basic Scanning........................................................................................................ 117

Output Color (Selecting the Color to Scan)......................................................... 117

2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ................................... 118

Original Type (Select the Document Type)......................................................... 119

File Format (Selecting the Format of Scanned Data) ......................................... 119

Image Quality .......................................................................................................... 121

4

Photograph Scanning (Scanning a Color Photograph)........................................121

Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast) ........................121

Sharpness (Adjusting Document Sharpness)......................................................122

Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents)...........................122

Background Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)..................122

Color Space (Specifying Color Space) ................................................................123

Scan Options............................................................................................................124

Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)..........................................124

2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of the Document) .................................124

Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .......................124

Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)..............................................................125

Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ......126

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .................127

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)...................................................128

Output Format ..........................................................................................................129

Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio) .........................129

Read Status (MDN) .............................................................................................130

Split Send (Sending in Sections) .........................................................................130

File Name (Specifying a Filename to Save) ........................................................130

Reply To (Set the Address for Reply) ..................................................................130

File Name Conflict (Setting Procedures When a File Name is Overlapped) .......131

Document Name (Specifying a Filename to Save to)..........................................131

Encryption (Sending Encrypted E-mail by S/MIME) ............................................132

Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) ..............132

5 Check Mailbox ........................................................................................................133

Check Mailbox Procedure ........................................................................................134

Step 1 Opening the [Check Mailbox] Screen.......................................................134

Step 2 Selecting the Mailbox ...............................................................................134

Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ..................................................134

Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents .................................................................135

Selecting a Mailbox ..................................................................................................136

Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ..................................................................137

Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox.............................................................138

Configuring/Starting Job Flow ..................................................................................139

Creating a Job Flow.............................................................................................139

Job Flow Restrictions...........................................................................................142

6 Job Flow Sheets .....................................................................................................143

Job Flow Procedure .................................................................................................144

Step 1 Displaying the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen.................................................144

Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow ................................................................................144

Step 3 Confirming/Changing a Job Flow .............................................................145

Step 4 Starting a Job Flow...................................................................................145

Job Flow List ............................................................................................................146

Table of Contents

5

Job Flow Sheet Filtering ..................................................................................... 146

Confirming/Changing Job Flow ............................................................................... 147

7 Stored Programming............................................................................................. 149

Stored Programming Overview ............................................................................... 150

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs................................................... 151

Registering Stored Programs.............................................................................. 151

Deleting Stored Programs................................................................................... 152

Entering/Changing Stored Program Name ......................................................... 152

Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs ................................................. 153

Calling Stored Programs ......................................................................................... 154

8 Computer Operations............................................................................................ 155

Overview of Features .............................................................................................. 156

Print Driver .......................................................................................................... 156

Network Scanner Utility 2.................................................................................... 157

CentreWare Internet Services............................................................................. 158

Printing .................................................................................................................... 161

E-mail Printing ......................................................................................................... 162

Setup................................................................................................................... 162

Sending E-mail.................................................................................................... 162

Importing Scanned Data.......................................................................................... 164

Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application ............................................... 164

Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2 ........................................................................ 166

Importing using CentreWare Internet Services ................................................... 168

Import using WebDAV protocol........................................................................... 170

9 Paper and Other Media ......................................................................................... 173

Paper Types ............................................................................................................ 174

Paper Type ......................................................................................................... 174

Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 177

Loading Paper in the Trays 1 to 2....................................................................... 178

Loading Paper in the Tray 3................................................................................ 178


Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass) ................................................................ 180


Loading Tab Paper ............................................................................................. 181

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays ................................................................... 183

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 1 to 2..................................................... 183

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 3 to 4..................................................... 184

Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 6.............................................................. 186

Changing Paper Settings......................................................................................... 188

10 System Settings..................................................................................................... 191

System Settings Procedure ..................................................................................... 192

6

Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .....................................................192

Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Password.......................192

Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu ......192

Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen ..............................193

Step 5 Setting the Feature...................................................................................194

Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode........................................................194

System Settings Menu List .......................................................................................195

Entering Text ............................................................................................................203

Common Settings.....................................................................................................204

Machine Clock/Timers .........................................................................................204

Audio Tones.........................................................................................................207

Screen Defaults ...................................................................................................209

Paper Tray Settings .............................................................................................210

Set Numbering.....................................................................................................215

Image Quality Adjustment....................................................................................217

Reports ................................................................................................................219

Maintenance ........................................................................................................219

Other Settings......................................................................................................220

Copy Mode Settings .................................................................................................227

Basic Copying Tab...............................................................................................227

Copy Defaults ......................................................................................................229

Copy Control........................................................................................................233

Original Size Defaults ..........................................................................................235

Reduce/Enlarge Presets......................................................................................236

Custom Colors .....................................................................................................237

Network Settings ......................................................................................................238

Port Settings ........................................................................................................238

Protocol Settings..................................................................................................239

Machine E-mail Address/Host Name...................................................................239

POP3 Server Settings..........................................................................................239

SMTP Server Settings .........................................................................................239

Domain Filter .......................................................................................................239

Remote Authentication Server Settings...............................................................240

PKI (Public Key) Settings.....................................................................................241

Other Settings......................................................................................................242

Print Mode Settings ..................................................................................................243

Allocate Memory ..................................................................................................243

Delete Form.........................................................................................................245

Other Settings......................................................................................................246

Scan Mode Settings .................................................................................................249

Basic Scanning Tab.............................................................................................249

Scan Defaults ......................................................................................................250

Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults .................................................................................252

Scan Size Defaults ..............................................................................................252

Table of Contents

7

Output Size Defaults ........................................................................................... 253

Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..................................................................................... 254

Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 254

E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 256

E-mail Defaults.................................................................................................... 256

Address Search (Directory Service).................................................................... 256

Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 259

Mailbox/Stored Document Settings ......................................................................... 262

Mailbox Settings.................................................................................................. 262

Stored Document Settings .................................................................................. 263

Job Flow Settings .................................................................................................... 264

Setup Menu ............................................................................................................. 265

Mailbox................................................................................................................ 265

Job Flow Sheets ................................................................................................. 267

Address Book...................................................................................................... 274

Paper Size/Type ................................................................................................. 277

System Administrator Settings ................................................................................ 278

System Administrator Login ID ........................................................................... 278

System Administrator Password ......................................................................... 278

Maximum Login Attempts ................................................................................... 279

Login Setup/Auditron Administration ....................................................................... 280

Create/Check User Accounts.............................................................................. 280

Reset User Accounts .......................................................................................... 282

Meter (Copy Jobs) for System Administrator ...................................................... 283

User Details Setup .............................................................................................. 284

Charge Print Settings.......................................................................................... 285

Password Entry from Control Panel.................................................................... 286

Login Setup/Auditron Mode ................................................................................ 287

11 Job Status .............................................................................................................. 289

Job Status Overview................................................................................................ 290

Checking Current/Pending Jobs.............................................................................. 291

Checking Completed Jobs....................................................................................... 292

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents ................................................................ 293

Charge Print........................................................................................................ 293

Secure Print ........................................................................................................ 294

Sample Print ....................................................................................................... 296

Delayed Print ...................................................................................................... 297

Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs ............................................................... 298

Handling Error Terminations.................................................................................... 299

12 Machine Status ...................................................................................................... 301

Overview of Machine Status.................................................................................... 302

Machine Status........................................................................................................ 303

8

Machine Information ............................................................................................303

Paper Tray ...........................................................................................................304

Overwrite Hard Disk.............................................................................................305

Print Mode ...........................................................................................................305

Billing Meter/Print Report .........................................................................................308

Billing Meter .........................................................................................................308

User Account Billing Meter ..................................................................................309

Print Report/List ...................................................................................................310

Consumables ...........................................................................................................316

Faults........................................................................................................................317

13 Authentication and Auditron Administration ......................................................319

Overview of Authentication.......................................................................................320

Users Controlled by Authentication .....................................................................320

Types of Authentication .......................................................................................320

Features Controlled by Authentication.................................................................321

Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox ......................................................323

Job Flow Sheet Types .........................................................................................323

Types of Mailboxes..............................................................................................327

Linking Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox ...................................................................330

Overview of Auditron Administration ........................................................................332

Authentication and Auditron Administration.........................................................332

Manageable Features and Services ....................................................................332

14 Maintenance............................................................................................................337

Replacing Consumables ..........................................................................................338

Replacing Toner Cartridges.................................................................................339

Replacing the Waste Toner Container.................................................................340

Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)...........................................342

Replacing Drum Cartridge R2/R3/R4 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)...........................................346

Replacing the Staple Cartridge (with Finisher C or Booklet finisher C) ...............349

Replacing the Staple Cartridge for booklet (gutter) (with Booklet finisher C) ......351

Emptying Punch Scrap Container (with Finisher C or Booklet finisher C) ...........352

Cleaning the Machine...............................................................................................354

Cleaning the Exterior ...........................................................................................354

Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass ..........................................354

Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass.....................................355

Cleaning Document Feeder Rollers.....................................................................355

Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment .....................................................................357

Printing a Report ......................................................................................................361

15 Problem Solving .....................................................................................................363

Troubleshooting........................................................................................................364

Table of Contents

9

Machine Trouble...................................................................................................... 366

Image Quality Problems .......................................................................................... 371

Trouble during Copying ........................................................................................... 376

Unable to Copy ................................................................................................... 376

The Copy Result is not What was Expected....................................................... 377

Trouble during Printing ............................................................................................ 381

Unable to Print .................................................................................................... 381

The Printed Result is not what was Expected..................................................... 382

Trouble during Scanning ......................................................................................... 384

Unable to Scan with the Machine ....................................................................... 384

Unable to Import Scanned Document into Computer ......................................... 385

Unable to Send the Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB) ............. 386

Problems with Sending E-mail ............................................................................ 386

Image not What was Expected ........................................................................... 386

Error Codes ............................................................................................................. 389

Other Errors ........................................................................................................ 405

Paper Jams ............................................................................................................. 406

Paper Jams in the Trays 1 to 2 ........................................................................... 407

Paper Jams in the Tray 3.................................................................................... 407


Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)..................................................................... 408


Paper Jams in the Transfer Module.................................................................... 411

Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover ................................................................. 412

Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover............................................................... 413

Paper Jams in the Output Tray ........................................................................... 414

Paper Jams in the Finisher C or the Booklet finisher C ...................................... 415

Document Jams ...................................................................................................... 426

Stapler Faults .......................................................................................................... 429

Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge (Finisher C or Booklet finisher C) .............. 430

Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge (Booklet finisher C)....................... 431

16 Large Color Control Panel .................................................................................... 433

Control Panel........................................................................................................... 434

Customizing of the Control Panel ....................................................................... 436

Differences between Standard Control Panel and Large Color Control Panel ....................................................................................... 437

General Differences ............................................................................................ 437

Differences in Copying........................................................................................ 437

Differences in Scanning ...................................................................................... 440

Differences in E-mail........................................................................................... 440

Differences in Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................... 440

Differences in Network Scanning........................................................................ 441

Differences in Scan to FTP/SMB ........................................................................ 441

10

Differences in Check Mailbox ..............................................................................441

Differences in Stored Programming.....................................................................442

Differences in Job Flow Sheet .............................................................................442

Differences in Job Status Screen ........................................................................442

Differences in System Settings............................................................................443

17 Appendix .................................................................................................................449

Specifications ...........................................................................................................450

Printable Area...........................................................................................................458

Standard Printing Area ........................................................................................458

Extended Printing Area........................................................................................458

Using ESC/P Emulation ...........................................................................................459

About Emulation ..................................................................................................459

Fonts....................................................................................................................460

Output functions...................................................................................................460

Print Features in ESC/P Emulation Mode............................................................461

Settings in ESC/P Emulation Mode .....................................................................461

Table of Magnifications........................................................................................467

Paper Size and Number of Possible Printing Characters ....................................472

Using PDF Direct Print .............................................................................................475

Setting Items for the PDF Direct Print Feature ....................................................475

PCL Emulation .........................................................................................................477

HP-GL2 Emulation ...................................................................................................480

Hard Clip Area .....................................................................................................485

Printable Area ......................................................................................................486

Auto Layout..........................................................................................................488

List of Options ..........................................................................................................495

Notes and Restrictions .............................................................................................496

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine..............................................496

Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting Job..........................................................496

Simple Procedures ...................................................................................................498

Scan Settings.......................................................................................................498

Copy Settings ......................................................................................................498

Common Function Settings .................................................................................498

Index...............................................................................................................................501

1 Before Using the Machine

This chapter contains descriptions about how to use this document, as well as cautions on using the product safely and legally.

Preface .......................................................................................................12

Using This Guide ........................................................................................13

Safety Notes ...............................................................................................16

The Objectives of the International Energy Star Program ..........................21

About License .............................................................................................22

Illegal Copies and Printouts ........................................................................25


12

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Preface

Thank you for selecting the Fuji Xerox ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I, DocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I.

This guide provides all the necessary copy/print/scan operating procedures, maintenance information like how to clear paper jams, daily care, setting various items, and precautions.

This guide assumes that the operator has a basic knowledge of the operating environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer.

Please read this guide thoroughly to obtain the best performance on this product. After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.

For instructions on configuring your network environment, refer to the Network Administrator Guide. For information about optional accessories for the printer functionality, also refer to the guide provided with each optional accessory.

Since the machine is equipped with anti-counterfeit features, in some rare cases, certain kinds of documents may be unable to copy.

February 2005

Fuji Xerox

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol .Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.

As a member of the International Energy Star Program, Fuji Xerox confirms this product satisfies the requirements for International Energy Star Program standards.

Fuji Xerox shares the global concern about environmental conservation and has integrated that concern in its business activities–from research and development to disposal. We have implemented a number of programs to lessen the burden on the environment. For example, we have totally eliminated ozone-depleting chlorofluorocarbons from our manufacturing facilities.We are committed to leadership in the conservation of resources by reusing and recycling post-consumer waste material such as paper, cartridges, and parts from our customer's copiers and printers. Along with our efforts to make environmental values a part of the Fuji Xerox culture, ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I, DocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I adopts recycled components that satisfy our strict quality standards.

Important Note:This equipment will be inoperable when main power fails.

Using This Guide

13

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Using This Guide

This section describes the organization of this guide.

Guides Supplied

We provide the following guides for optimum usage of the machine.

Included Manuals

Several manuals are included with this product. They are referred to as accompanying manuals.

These accompanying manuals include descriptions on configurations and operation of the product.

The below manuals are included with the machine.

User Guide (This Document)

This guide describes all the necessary steps for copy/print/scan, clearing paper jams, daily care, setting the various items and safety information.

Network Administrator Guide

This document is aimed toward network administrators, as a guide to setting up the network environment.

Quick Reference Guide

Introduces the main features of the machine, as well as simple operating instructions.

Manual (HTML)

A guide to installing print driver, configuring the printer environment, etc. This manual is included in the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.

Guides for Optional Accessories

Optional accessories are also available for the machine. User Guides are provided with the optional accessories exclusively for the ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I, DocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I. These User Guides are referred to as "guides for optional accessories". Guides for optional accessories are provided in two forms, printed or as On-line Help.

Guides for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for operating optional accessories and installing software.


14

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Organization of this Guide

This guide consists of the following chapters.


Describes how to use this document, as well as cautions on using the product safely and legally.

2 Product Overview

Describes basic information such as identifying the major components, how to switch the machine on and off, how to use the touch screen, and how to set the power saver feature.

3 Copy

Describes the basic operations and features of copying.

4 Scan

Describes the basic operations and features of scanning.

5 Check Mailbox

Describes the basic operations and features of Mailbox.

6 Job Flow Sheets

Describes operations using a job flow created by a remote system, as well as the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.

7 Stored Programming

Described the stored programming features that enables to record a series of operations.

8 Computer Operations

Describes operations performed from a computer, such as printing, importing scanned documents, as well as using CentreWare Internet Services.

9 Paper and Other Media

Describes the types of paper that can be used on the machine, precautions when handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.

10 System Settings

Describes how to use the system settings.

11 Job Status

Describes the job status feature.

12 Machine Status

Described the machine status feature.

13 Authentication and Auditron Administration

The machine has an authorization feature to restrict use of features of the machine, as well as administration features to monitor usage statuses.

Using This Guide

15

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

14 Maintenance

Describes procedures for replacing consumables, cleaning the machine, auto gradation adjustment, and printing reports/lists.

15 Problem Solving

Describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.

16 Large Color Control Panel

Describes differences in features of a standard control panel and an optional large color control panel.

17 Appendix

Describes the specifications, printable area, ESC/P emulation, PDF direct print, optional accessories list, cautions/restrictions, and a list of simple procedures.

Conventions

In this document, “computer” refers to a personal computer or workstation.

The following icons are used in this guide.

Important Indicates important information that you should read.

Note Indicates additional information on operations or features.

The following conventions are used in this guide:

" " : The cross-reference is within this guide.

" " : Refers to names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen messages and input text.

[ ] : Refers to folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed in the touch screen, as well as the names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and menu names.

< > button: Indicates a hardware button on the computer.

< > key: Indicates a key on the keyboard of the computer.

Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:

, ,Long Edge Feed (LEF): Loading with one of the long edges of the document or paper.

, ,Short Edge Feed (SEF): Loading with one of the short edges of the document or paper.

LEF Orientation SEF Orientation

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction


16

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Safety Notes

Read these safety notes carefully before using this product to make sure you operate the equipment safely.

Your Fuji Xerox product and recommended supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency approval, and compliance to established environmental standards. Please read the following instructions carefully before operating the product and refer to them as needed to ensure the continued safe operation of your product.

The safety and environment testing and performance of this product have been verified using Fuji Xerox materials only.WARNING • Any unauthorized alteration, which may include the addition of new functions or connection

of external devices, may impact the product certification. Please contact your authorized Service Provider for more information.

Warning Markings

All warning instructions marked on or supplied with the product should be followed.

Electrical Supply

This product shall be operated from the type of electrical supply indicated on the product data plate label. If you are not sure that your electrical supply meets the requirements, please consult your local power company for advice.

WARNING•This product must be connected to a protective earth circuit.

This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. This plug will fit only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. To avoid risk of electric shock, contact your electrician to replace the electrical outlet if

you are unable to insert the plug into it. Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to an electrical outlet that lacks an earth connection terminal.

Operator Accessible Areas

This equipment has been designed to restrict operator access to safe areas only. Operator access to hazardous areas is restricted with covers or guards, which would require a tool to remove. Never remove these covers or guards.

Maintenance

Any operator product maintenance procedures will be described in the customer documentation supplied with the product. Do not carry out any maintenance procedures on this product which are not described in the customer documentation.

Cleaning Your Product

Before cleaning this product, unplug the product from the electrical outlet. Always use materials specified for this product. The use of other materials may result in poor performance and may create a hazardous situation. Do not use aerosol cleaners, they may be explosive and flammable under certain circumstances.

Warning This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there is the possibility of personal injury.

Warning This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there are heated surfaces, which should not be touched.

Safety Notes

17

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

WARNING - Electrical Safety Information

Only use the power cord supplied with the equipment.

Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet easily accessible. Do not use an extension cord. If you do not know whether an outlet is grounded, consult a qualified electrician.

This equipment is to be used on a branch circuit that has larger capacity than rated ampere and voltage of the machine. See data plate on the rear panel for the rated ampere and voltage of this equipment. If the machine needs to be moved to a different location, contact a Fuji Xerox Service Representative or your authorized local representative or service support organization.

Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in an electric shock.

Do not place this equipment where people might step on or trip over the power cord.

Do not place objects on the power cord.

Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlocks.

Do not obstruct the ventilation openings.

Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings on the equipment.

If any of the following conditions occur, switch off the power to the machine immediately and disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet. Call an authorized local service representative to correct the problem.

- The equipment emits unusual noises or odors.- The power cord is damaged or frayed.- A wall panel circuit breaker, fuse, or other safety device has been tripped.- Liquid has spilled into the equipment.- The equipment is exposed to water.- Any part of the equipment is damaged.

Disconnect Device

The power cable is the disconnect device for this equipment. It is attached to the back of the machine as a plug-in device. To remove all electrical power from the equipment, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet.

Laser Safety Information

CAUTION • Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure.

With specific regard to laser safety, the equipment complies with performance standards for laser products set by government, national and international agencies as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit hazardous light, as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of customer operation and maintenance.


18

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Operational Safety Information

To ensure the continued safe operation of your Fuji Xerox equipment, follow these safety guidelines at all times.

Do These:

Always connect equipment to a correctly grounded power outlet. If in doubt, have the outlet checked by a qualified electrician.

This equipment must be connected to a protective earth circuit.

This equipment is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. This plug will fit only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. To avoid risk of electric shock, contact your electrician to replace the electrical outlet if you are unable to insert the plug into it. Never use a plug that lacks an earth connection terminal to connect the product to an electrical outlet.

Always follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or supplied with the equipment.

Always exercise care when moving or relocating equipment. Please contact your local Fuji Xerox Service Department, or your local support organization to arrange relocation of the product to a location outside of your building.

Always locate the equipment in an area that has adequate ventilation, and space for servicing. See installation instructions for minimum dimensions.

Always use materials and supplies specifically designed for your Fuji Xerox equipment. Use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance.

Always unplug this equipment from the electrical outlet before cleaning.

Do Not Do These:

Never use a plug that lacks an earth connection terminal to connect the product to an electrical outlet.

Never attempt any maintenance procedures that are not specifically described in the customer documentation.

This equipment should not be placed in a built-in unit unless proper ventilation is provided. Please contact your authorized local dealer for further information.

Never remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no operator serviceable areas within these covers.

Never locate the equipment near a radiator or any other heat source.

Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings.

Never override or “cheat” any of the electrical or mechanical interlock devices.

Never operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or odors. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and contact your local Fuji Xerox Service Representative or Service Provider immediately.

Safety Notes

19

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Maintenance Information

Do not attempt any maintenance procedures that are not specifically described in the customer documentation supplied with the machine.

Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of cleaners that are not approved may cause poor performance of the equipment, and could create a dangerous condition.

Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in the customer documentation. Keep all these materials out of the reach of children.

Do not remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no parts behind these covers that you can maintain or service.

Do not perform any maintenance procedures unless you have been trained to do them by an authorized local dealer or unless a procedure is specifically described in the customer documentation.

Ozone Safety Information

This product will produce ozone during normal operation. The ozone produced is heavier than air and is dependent on copy volume. Adhering to the correct environmental conditions as specified in the installation instructions will ensure that the concentration levels meet safe limits.

For Consumables

Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on the package or container.

Keep all consumables away from the reach of children.

Never throw toner, toner cartridges or toner containers into an open flame.

Never use a vacuum cleaner when you clean spilled toner. It can cause explosion as the toner fills the vacuum cleaner and gets sparks. Use a broom or a wet cloth.

Radio Frequency Emissions

United States, Canada, Europe, Australia/New ZealandNote • This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital

device, pursuant to International Standards. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the customer documentation, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference at their own expense.

Changes and modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by Xerox/Fuji Xerox may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.


20

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Product Safety Certification

This product is certified by the following Agency using the Safety standards listed.

This product was manufactured under a registered ISO9001 Quality system.

Agency Standard

NEMKO IEC60950-1 Edition 1 (2001)

The Objectives of the International Energy Star Program

21

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

The Objectives of the International Energy Star Program

To protect the global environment and conserve energy resources, the International Energy Star Program encourages the following product features. Fuji Xerox confirms ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I, DocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I satisfies the requirements for this program.

2 Sided Feature

To reduce the volume of copy paper used, the 2 sided copying feature is set as a default for the machine. You can copy two 1 sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper. You can also make 1 sided copies. For information about this feature, refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)" (P.64).

Power saving feature (Lower Power mode/Sleep mode)

This product has a power saving feature which switches the machine to the Low Power mode automatically if the machine is on and not operated for a certain period of time. By default, the fuser power automatically cuts when the printer is idle for more than 15 minutes. The printer is then in energy save mode.

This feature can be configured for a range of 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments. For information about this feature, refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.35).


22

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

About License

OpenSSL

Copyright (c)1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

About License

23

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

SSLeay

Copyright (c)1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]). All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.


1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.


3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-)

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS"AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]


24

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Heimdal

Copyright (c)2000 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved.


1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.


3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

JPEG Code

This printer's software uses a portion of the codes created by the Independent Software Group.

Illegal Copies and Printouts

25

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Illegal Copies and Printouts

Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of items that may be illegal to copy or print in your country.

Currency

Banknotes and checks

Bank and government bonds and securities

Passports and identification cards

Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner

Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments

This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.

Notice:

This machine is provided with the recognition function to prevent the copying of currency. Also, in case currency or securities are copied, the forgery tracing function can identify a machine used for the copy.

Note that the recognition function prevents a limited range of illegal copies. Always put your machine under careful charge to prevent illegal copies from being made.

2 Product Overview

This chapter describes basic operation about the machine, such as the names of each component, switching on and off of the machine, and the operation of the touch screen and power saving settings.

Machine Components.................................................................................28

Power On / Off ............................................................................................33

Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................34

Power Saver mode .....................................................................................35

Control panel ..............................................................................................38

2 Product Overview

28

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Machine Components

This section describes the main components and their functions of the ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I, DocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I (hereinafter called “the machine”).

Warning

Do not touch areas with warning labels indicating high temperature. You may get burned.

1

2 43

5

6

7

98

11 10

13

14

15

12

Machine Components

29

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

No. Component Function

1 Duplex automatic document feeder

This automatically feeds 2 sided originals from a stack.

2 Document glass Load documents here.

3 Control panel It consists of operation buttons, LED indicators and a touch screen.

Refer to "Control panel" (P.38).

4 Power switch Switches the power of the machine on/off.

5 Toner cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to replace the toner cartridge.

6 Front cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams or replace consumables.

7 Tray 1, 2, 3, 4 Load papers here.

8 Bottom left cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.If the Tray 6 is installed in the machine, move the Tray 6 to the left first.

9 Locking casters Used for locking the wheels of the machine. Lock these casters after moving the machine to its installation site.

10 Tray 6 (optional) Load papers here.

11 Tray 6 top cover Move the Tray 6 to the left and then open the top cover to clear paper jams.

12 Tray 5 (bypass) Used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and other special media) that cannot be loaded in the Trays 1 to 4, and 6.

13 Tray 5 (bypass) top cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

14 USB2.0 interface connector (optional)

Use to connect a USB cable.

15 Ethernet 10Base-T / 100Base-TX connector

Use to connect a network cable.

2 Product Overview

30

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

1920

21

22

23

24

26

25

2728

2930

32

31

17

1816

Machine Components

31

Pro

du

ct Overview

2


16 Left cover The left cover slightly opens when the top cover is opened. Open this cover widely to clear paper jams.

17 Top cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

18 <Confirmation> indicator This indicator lights to confirm that the document is loaded correctly.

19 Document guides Use this guides to align the edges of the document.

20 Document feeder tray Load documents here.

21 Document output tray Receives scanned documents.

22 Document stopper Used when copying or scanning large size documents such as A3. Open the stopper rightward when using it.

23 Output tray Receives documents.Two types of trays are available: a normal output tray and an optional offset stacking tray.

Note • When paper whose size is less than A4 is output from the machine withan output stacking unit, push in the extension flap.

24 Circuit breaker Circuit breaker automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage is detected.

25 Bottom right cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.If a finisher is installed in the machine, open the front cover of the finisher first.

26 Waste toner container cover

Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to replace the waste toner container.

27 Waste toner container Used to collect waste toner.

28 Fuser Fuses the printed image on the paper by fusing the toner. Do not touch this unit as it is extremely hot.

29 Lever Used to draw out the transfer unit.

30 Transfer unit Transfers toner images on the drum to paper. Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

31 Drum cartridges A drum cartridge comprises of photosensitive elements. Drum cartridges are arranged in order R1, R2, R3 and R4 from the left as you face the main body.

32 Toner cartridges Four toner (image forming powder) cartridges are provided: Black (K1, K2), Cyan (C), Magenta (M) and Yellow (Y).

2 Product Overview

32

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Finisher C, Booklet finisher C

Note • A finisher C and a booklet finisher C are optional. In text descriptions, the finisher C or booklet finisher C is abbreviated as “finisher”.


1 Punch scrap container Collects the scraps from the puncher. Draw out the box when throwing the dust away.

2 Output tray Receives documents.

3 Exit cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

4 Finisher tray Receives documents.

5 Staple cartridge Staples are stored. Remove this cartridge to replace staples or clear staple jams.

6 Booklet tray(Booklet finisher C only)

Receives documents, when folding is selected in the Booklet Creation.

7 Front cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper or staple jams, replace staples, or throw punch dust away.

8 Booklet unit(Booklet finisher C only)

This unit is for folding documents in half and stapling the folded documents.

9 Booklet staple cartridge Two staple cartridges for booklet creation (gutter) are installed. Remove this cartridge to replace staples or clear staple jams.

8

9 7

6

4

1

5

3

2

Power On / Off

33

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Power On / Off

Switch on the power before operating the machine.

The machine is ready for operation within 150 seconds after the power is switched on. It may take longer due to the image quality adjustment according to the machine condition.

Turn the machine off at the end of the day or when it is not in use for a long period of time. Also, use [Power Saving] feature when not in use for a while to reduce the power consumption.Important • Switching off the power of the machine may cause loss of data being processed.

For information about power saving feature, refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.35).

Powering On

The procedure for turning on the power is as follows.

1 Open the cover and press the power switch to the [ | ] position to turn the power on.

Note • The “Please wait...” message indicates that the machine is warming up. The machine cannot be used while it is warming up.

Powering Off

The procedure for turning the power off is as follows.Important • Switching off the power of the machine during data processing stored in the memory may

cause loss of data being processed.

1 Before turning the power off, make sure that all copy or print jobs have completely finished. Also, make sure that the Online indicator is not lit.

Important • Never turn the power off in the following instances:

• While data is being received

• While jobs are being printed

• While jobs are being copied

• While a scan is being executed

2 Press the power switch to the [ ] position.

Important • Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for a while after the power switch is turned off. Therefore, do not unplug the power cord from the power outlet immediately after turning the power switch off.

Note • Before you turn the power back on after turning it off, first make sure that the touch screen has gone out.

2 Product Overview

34

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Circuit Breaker

The machine is provided with circuit breaker.

In the event of a current leakage, the breaker will automatically cut off the power circuit to prevent any leakage or fire from occurring.

The circuit breaker is normally pressed to the upper side, respectively, as shown in the figure on the right.

If the circuit breaker is pressed to the lower sides, respectively, unusual conditions may occur. Please contact our Customer Support Center.

Power Saver mode

35

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Power Saver mode

The machine is installed with a Power Saver feature that will automatically cut off the electricity to the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration.

The Power Saver feature has two modes, a [Low Power mode] and [Sleep mode].

The machine enters the [Low Power mode] after the preset time has elapsed if the machine is left unused for a fixed period of time. The machine then enters the [Sleep mode] if a further preset time elapses.

Low Power Mode

(Power consumption: ApeosPort C6550 I/DocuCentre C6550 I142.7 WApeosPort C5540 I/DocuCentre C5540 I134.5 W)

In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power.

The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is canceled.

Sleep Mode

(Power consumption: ApeosPort C6550 I/DocuCentre C6550 I5.7 WApeosPort C5540 I/DocuCentre C5540 I3.8 W)

In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode.

The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is canceled.

Changing the Power Saver Mode Change Interval

The procedure for setting the Power Saver feature is as follows.

To activate the Power Saver feature, set the Sleep Mode button to Enabled, and set both the times until the activation of Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode.Note • The time to activation of Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode can each be specified in 1

minute increments, from 1 to 240 minutes.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the UserID with the numeric keypad or a keyboard displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].

Note • The default UserID is “11111”. When using the Authentication feature, a password is required. The default password is “x-admin”.

<Log In/Out> button

2 Product Overview

36

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

3 Select [System Settings].


5 Select [Common Settings].

6 Select [Machine Clock/Timers].

7 Select [ ].

8 Select [Auto Power Saver], and select [Change Settings].

9 Using [ ] [ ], configure a power saver mode migration time from 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.

From Last Selection to Low Power Mode

Set the time to move to the [Low Power Mode] after the last operation.Note • The default for [From Last Selection to Low Power Mode] is [15] minutes.

From Last Selection to Sleep Mode

Set the time to move to the [Sleep Mode] after the last operation.Note • The default for [From Last Selection to Sleep Mode] is [60] minutes. Configure the [From

Last Selection to Sleep Mode] time to be longer than the [From Last Selection to Low Power Mode] time.

10 Select [Save].

11 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [System Settings] screen is displayed.

12 Select [Exit] to exit the System Administration mode.

Power Saver mode

37

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Exiting the Power Saver Mode

The following describes how to exit the Power Saver mode.The Power Saver mode is exited in the following instances:

Pressing the <Power Saver> button

Receiving data

1 Press the <Power Saver> button.<Power Saver> button

2 Product Overview

38

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Control panel

The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.


1 Brightness dial Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. Use this dial to adjust the brightness of touch screen when it is too dark to read.

2 Touch screen This touch screen displays messages required for operation and buttons for various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations in screens and set features.

3 <Online> indicator This indicator lights when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a client.

4 <Job in Memory> indicator This indicator lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.

5 <Job Status> button Pressing this button allows you to confirm or cancel currently executing or completed jobs, or to confirm or print saved documents.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Job Status> button.

6 <Review> button Press this button to open the [Review] screen. In this screen, you can check a list of the status of copy and scan features whose settings have changed from the defaults. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Review> button.

7 <Machine Status> button Pressing this button allows you to confirm the machine status and meters, check the state of consumables, and print reports.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Machine Status> button.

8 <Log In/Out> button When this button is pressed, the UserID input screen is displayed for System Administration mode or Login Setup/Auditron Administration.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Log In/Out> button.

9 <Power Saver> button If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power consumption is lowered to enter the Power Saver mode. In the Power Saver mode, this button lights up. To cancel the Power Saver mode, press this button again.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Power Saver> button.

10 Power switch Switches the power of the machine on/off.

11 <Clear All> button Returns the statuses of all displayed services to their default values. The machine will be reset to this state after it is turned on.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Clear All> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃�

C

2 3

11

10

12

13

14

1 4 9

16

5 6 7 8

15 1718

�

Control panel

39

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

12 <Interrupt> button Select this button to temporarily stop a continuous copy job or printing to give another job higher priority. During an interrupt, the interrupt indicator lights up. Pressing the <Interrupt> button again cancels the interrupt and the previous operation is resumed.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Interrupt> button.

When interrupting, some jobs such as print jobs set by a client cannot be executed. For more information, refer to "Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting Job" (P.496).

13 <Stop> button Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Stop> button.

14 <Start> button Press this button to start copying or scanning.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Start> button.

15 Numeric keypad Press these buttons to enter the number of copies, passwords and other numerical values.In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the “numeric keypad”.

16 <C> (Clear) button Press this button if you have entered the wrong numerical value with the numeric keypad.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <C> button.

17 <Copy> <Custom 2> <Custom 3> buttons

Used to call a custom feature.You can assign a feature to the buttons selected from the features displayed on the [All Services] screen and [Language].

For information about registering a feature with a button, refer to "ScreenDefaults" (P.209).

18 <All Services> button Used to display the [All Services] screen.In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the <All Services> button.

You can change the features that appear in the menu. For more information, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.209).


2 Product Overview

40

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Customizing of the Control Panel

You can customize the <Custom> buttons and items on the [All Services] screen.

Assigning a Feature to Custom Buttons

By assigning a feature to Custom buttons (<Copy>, <Custom 2>, and <Custom 3>), you can switch to that feature without returning to the [All Services] screen.

The factory default settings for these buttons are, "Copy" for the 1st button, and none for the 2nd and 3rd buttons. You can assign a feature to the buttons selected from the features displayed on the [All Services] screen and [Language].For information about assigning features, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.209).

Attach the labels included in this product when you have changed the assignment. If you have used a feature for which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down the feature using a permanent marker and attach it to the appropriate Custom button.

Customizing the [All Services] Screen

You can customize the types of features and the location of buttons on the [All Services] screen. The following shows the factory default settings.For information about assigning features, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.209).

Note • When the feature is not available the button will not be displayed. Also, if the feature is unavailable due to hardware problems, the button will be grayed out.

Copy

E-mail

Scan to Mailbox

Network Scanning

Scan to FTP/SMB

Check Mailbox

Stored Programming

Job Flow Sheets

Language

Setup Menu

Auto Gradation Adjustment

Print Mode

Changing Feature Screen

You can customize the setting screen for the following features on the [All Services] screen.

Copy

E-mail

Scan to Mailbox

Network Scanning

Scan to FTP/SMBFor information about change settings, refer to "Basic Copying Tab" (P.227) and "Basic Scanning Tab" (P.249).

3 Copy

This chapter describes the [Copy] screen and copy features.

Copying Procedure .....................................................................................42

Operations during Copying .........................................................................47

Basic Copying.............................................................................................50

Image Quality..............................................................................................58

Scan Options ..............................................................................................64

Output Format.............................................................................................74

Job Assembly .............................................................................................94

3 Copy

42

Co

py

3

Copying Procedure

This section describes the basic copy procedures. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Step 1 Loading Documents .........................................................................................................42

Step 2 Selecting Features ............................................................................................................44

Step 3 Entering the Quantity.......................................................................................................45

Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.......................................................................................................45

Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status .....................................................................46

Step 1 Loading Documents

There are two methods for loading documents:

Document feeder

Single sheet

Multiple sheets

Document glass

Single sheet

Bound documents, such as books

Document Feeder

The document feeder (250 sheets) supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 139.7 x 210 mm (A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5 inches, 5.5 x 8.5 inches ) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).

The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.

The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.67).

Note • The standard document sizes that can be auto-detected depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "Paper Size Settings" (P.222).

For information about copying documents of mixed size, refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.68).

Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams in the document feeder.

• 2 sided scanning of lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) is not supported.

Document type (weight) Number of sheets

Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) 250

Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) 250

Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2)

150


100

Copying Procedure

43

Co

py

3

1 Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the documents.

2 Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.

Note • When loading a large document such as A3, pick up the document feeder tray and open the document stopper rightward.

3 Place the document face up (the face of 2 sided document up) in the center of the document feeder.

Note • The <Confirmation> indicator lights up when the document is loaded correctly.

When loading the document in the document feeder, you can set timing for lifting up the document feeder tray. For more information, refer to "Document Feeder Tray Elevation" (P.226).

Document Glass

On the document glass, you can place a single sheet, or a book or other similar document up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).

The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.67).


1 Open the document cover.

Warning

Do not press the document with excessive force when copying heavyweight documents. A broken document glass may injure you.

Do not look on the light during copying, when you make copies with the document cover open. It may cause eyestrain or pains in your eyes.

3 Copy

44

Co

py

3

2 Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.

3 Close the document cover.

Note • When a standard size document is placed on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.

Step 2 Selecting Features

You can select the features from the [Copy] tab.Note • Features displayed may vary depending on the model you are using.

• To use the Login Setup feature or Auditron Administration feature, you need a UserID and Password, or just a UserID. Ask the system administrator for the UserID and Password.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Copy].

3 If the previous settings still remain, press the <Clear All> button.

4 Select the features to set from each tab as necessary.

For information about each of these features, refer to the following sections.

"Basic Copying" (P.50)

"Image Quality" (P.58)

"Scan Options" (P.64)

<All Services> button

<Clear All> button

Copying Procedure

45

Co

py

3

"Output Format" (P.74)

"Job Assembly" (P.94)

Step 3 Entering the Quantity

You can enter up to 9,999 for the number of copies.

1 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad. The number of copies entered appears on the upper right of the touch screen.

2 If you enter an incorrect value, press the <C> button and enter the correct value.

Step 4 Starting the Copy Job

1 Press the <Start> button.

Important • If the document has been set in the document feeder, do not press the document while it is being conveyed.

Note • If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.

• You can set the next job during copying.

If you have more documents

If you have another document, select the [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. You can scan multiple documents for later output.

1 Select [Next Original] while scanning is in progress.

Note • When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document.

• When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.

numeric keypad

<C> button

<Start> button

3 Copy

46

Co

py

3

2 Load the next document.

3 Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, load the next document and press the <Start> button.

4 When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Confirm the job status.

Note • Select [ ] to display the previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen.

<Job Status> button

Operations during Copying

47

Co

py

3


This section describes available operations during copying. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Stopping the Copy Job ............................................................................................................... 47

Changing the Number of Copies................................................................................................ 48

Interrupting the Copy Job........................................................................................................... 48

Stopping the Copy Job

To cancel copying, follow the procedure below.

1 Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the Control Panel.

2 Select [Stop].

3 If the screen in procedure 1 does not appear, press the <Job Status> button.

4 Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop].

<Stop> button

<Job Status> button

3 Copy

48

Co

py

3

Changing the Number of Copies

You can change the number of copies during scanning or copying the document.


2 Select [Change Quantity...].

3 Set the number of copies with the numeric keypad.


Note • You can set the values greater than the number of copies that have already copied. If you set the same value as the number of copies that have already copied, the copy job is not executed.

Interrupting the Copy Job

You can temporarily suspend the current continuous copy job to give another job higher priority.

1 Press the <Interrupt> button.

Note • The interrupt indicator lights up to indicate the machine is in the job interrupt mode.

2 Load the interrupt document and set features if necessary.

3 Set the number of copies with the numeric keypad.


<Stop> button

<Interrupt> button


49

Co

py

3

5 After you have finished making the interrupt copy, press the <Interrupt> button.

Note • The interrupt indicator goes out to indicate the interrupt is canceled.

• Remove the interrupt document from the document glass when using the document glass.


3 Copy

50

Co

py

3

Basic Copying

You can set the basic features on the [Basic Copying] screen. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ................................................................50

Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ........................................................................52

Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy) ...............................................................................54

Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position) ...............................................57

Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the document) .......................................57

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)...........................................................................57

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy].

2 Select features on the [Basic Copying] screen that appears first.

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)

You can select a ratio to make enlarged or reduced copies.

1 Select the copy ratio from [Reduce/Enlarge].

100%

Copies are made at the same size as the original document.

Auto%

The copy ratio is automatically set based upon the document and paper sizes, and the document is copied to fit in the selected paper.Note • If you select [Auto%], specify a value other than [Auto] for [Paper Supply].

Ratio (3rd to 4th Buttons)

Select from preset ratios.You can change the indicated ratios. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button" (P.228) and "Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button" (P.229).

[More...]

Display the [Reduce/Enlarge] screen.Refer to "When [Preset %] is Selected", “When [Variable %] is Selected”, “When [Independent X-Y%] is Selected”, or “When [Calculator %] is Selected”.

Basic Copying

51

Co

py

3

When [Preset %] is Selected

You can select from preset standard copy ratios.

1 Select [Preset %].

2 Select the copy ratio.

100%

Copies are made at the same size as the original document.

Auto%

The copy ratio is automatically set based upon the document and paper sizes specified in [Paper Supply], and the document is copied to fit in the specified size.Note • If you select [Auto%], specify a value other than [Auto] for [Paper Supply].

Presets % (7 Types)

Select from among 7 preset ratios.You can change the indicated ratios. For more information, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.236).

Copy All (Full Screen)

The document is copied at a slightly reduced size to prevent image loss at the edge of the original. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.Important • If you select [Copy All], you need to set border erase dimensions to 0mm depending on the

size of the document. If the border erase documents is set to 0mm, the edge of the copied document may get dirty or the image loss may occur.

When [Variable %] is Selected

You can enter any ratio for copying. Set the ratio within the range from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

1 Select [Variable %].

2 Specify the ratio with the numeric keypad or [ ] and [ ].

Note • If you enter an incorrect value, select <C>.

When [Independent X-Y%] is Selected

You can specify different height and width ratios to scale the height and width independently.

1 Select [Independent X-Y%].

2 Use [ ] and [ ] to specify the height and width ratios.

Auto

Copies are made with the height and width ratios set automatically to match the paper size. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.

3 Copy

52

Co

py

3

Auto (Copy All)

The height and width ratios are set automatically to match the paper size and the document is copied at a slightly reduced size to prevent image loss at the edge of the original. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.

X (25 - 400), Y (25 - 400)

Set the height and width ratios within the range from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

XY

You can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the same amount.

When [Calculator %] is Selected

You can specify a different size for the height and width.

If you specify both the original document size and the copy size, the copy ratios for the height and width are calculated automatically according to the sizes that you entered. The calculation results are indicated by copy ratios within the range from 25 to 400%.

1 Select [Calculator %].

2 Enter the value for the original document width in [Original Size] of [X] (width) using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

3 Enter the value for the copy size width in [Copy Size] of [X] (width) using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

4 In the same way, enter the original document height value and copy size height value in the [Original Size] and [Copy Size] of [Y] (height), and select [Next].

Note • To change the copy ratios you have entered, select [Next], move [ ], and enter the values again.

X (25 - 400), Y (25 - 400)

The automatically calculated ratio is displayed depending on the values entered in [Original Size] and [Copy Size].

Original Size

Set the height and width of the original document size from 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

Copy Size

Set the height and width of the copy size from 1 to 999 mm in 1mm increments.

Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)

You can select the tray loaded with the copy paper you want to use.

1 Select the paper tray from [Paper Supply].

Basic Copying

53

Co

py

3

Auto

Based on the original document size and set ratios, the machine automatically selects the tray loaded with the appropriate paper and makes copies.Note • If you select [Auto], specify a value other than [Auto %] for [Reduce/Enlarge].

Trays (2nd to 4th Buttons)

Select from preset paper trays.You can change the paper trays to display. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Paper Supply - 2nd Button" (P.228), "Paper Supply - 3rd Button" (P.228) and "Paper Supply - 4th Button" (P.228).

[More...]

Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.Refer to "[Paper Supply] Screen" (P.53).

[Paper Supply] Screen

You can select a paper tray that does not appear on the [Basic Copying] screen.

1 Select [More...].

2 Select the paper tray.

Auto

Based on the original document size and set ratios, the machine automatically selects the tray loaded with the appropriate paper and makes copies.

Trays 1 to 4, and 6

You can select paper from the 5 trays.

Bypass...

The [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.53).

[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen

If you want to make copies on paper that cannot be loaded in the Trays 1 to 4, or 6, use the Tray 5 (bypass).

1 Select [Bypass...].

2 Select the paper type.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Paper Size

Select from [Auto Size Detect], [Standard Size], and [Non-standard Size].

When [Auto Size Detect] is selected, the paper size is identified automatically.Note • [Auto Size Detect] can only detect standard sizes.

3 Copy

54

Co

py

3

Paper Type

Select the paper type.

When [Standard Size] is Selected

Select the paper size from standard sizes and select the paper type.

1 Select [Standard Size].

2 Select the paper size and paper type.


When [Non-standard Size] is Selected

Set the X (width) within the range from 148 to 488 mm and the Y (height) within the range from 100 to 330 mm in increments of 1 mm.Important • When copying both sides on a non-standard size paper, specify the size within the range

from 182 to 488 mm for the X (width) direction and from 140 to 330 mm for the Y (height) direction.

1 Select [Non-standard Size].

2 Enter the paper size using [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

3 Select the paper type.


Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)

You can set the output color to use when copying.Note • If output color restrictions have been set, there are restrictions on which colors are available

for copying. For information about output color restrictions, refer to "Account Limit" (P.281).

1 Select the color to use from [Output Color].

Auto

The machine automatically determines the color of the original document and makes copies in full color if the original document is color and in a single color (black) if the document is black-and-white.

Full Color

Copies are made in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.

Basic Copying

55

Co

py

3

Black

The machine makes copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.

Dual Color

The machine makes copies of color documents in two preset colors.You can change the colors to display. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Dual - Target Area Color" (P.230) and "Dual - Non-target Area Color" (P.230).

[More...]

Display the [Output Color] screen.

[Output Color] Screen

You can copy in full color, dual color, and single color.

1 Select [More...].

2 Select the desired output color type for copying.

Auto

The machine automatically determines the color of the original document and makes copies in full color if the original document is color and in a single color (black) if the document is black-and-white.

Full Color

Copies are made in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.

Black

The machine makes copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.

Dual Color

The document is separated into specified source colors and unspecified colors and then copied in the specified dual colors. If you select [Dual Color], you can set the following items:

Source Color

The [Source Color] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[Source Color] Screen" (P.56).

Target Area Color

The [Target Area Color] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[Target Area Color] Screen" (P.56).

Non-target Area Color

The [Non-target Area Color] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[Non-target Area Color] Screen" (P.56).

Single Color

The [Color Selection] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Color Selection] Screen" (P.56).

3 Copy

56

Co

py

3

[Source Color] Screen

Select the color to scan (extract) from the document.

1 Select [Dual Color].

2 Select [Source Color].

3 Select [Other than Black] or [Color Selection].

4 If you selected [Color Selection], select the color to scan.

Other than Black

Colors other than black are scanned.

Color Selection

From 6 predetermined colors, you can specify single or multiple colors to scan.

[Target Area Color] Screen

You can change the color that was extracted by [Source Color] to one of the 7 predetermined colors and 6 custom colors. From the displayed [Target Area Color] screen, select a color.For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.237).


2 Select [Target Area Color].

3 Select a color.

[Non-target Area Color] Screen

You can change a color that was not extracted to one of the 7 fixed colors and 6 custom colors. From the displayed [Non-target Area Color] screen, select one color.For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.237).


2 Select [Non-target Area Color].

3 Select a color.

[Color Selection] Screen

The machine makes copies in the single specified color regardless of the colors in the document.

You can select a color from 6 predetermined colors and 6 custom colors. From the displayed [Color Selection] screen, select a color.For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.237).

Basic Copying

57

Co

py

3

1 Select [Single Color].

2 Select [Color Selection].

3 Select a color.

Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position)

This feature is the same as [Margin Shift] of the [Scan Options] screen. For information, refer to "Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position)" (P.69).

Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the document)

This feature is the same as [Border Erase] of the [Scan Options] screen. For information, refer to "Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)" (P.69).

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)

You can adjust the copy density to one of 7 levels. Copying is darker when you move [ ] to the left and lighter when you move it to the right.Note • [Lighten/Darken] of the [Basic Copying] screen and [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/ Darken/

Contrast] in the [Image Quality] screen are the same.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] to select from 7 density levels.

3 Copy

58

Co

py

3

Image Quality

On the [Image Quality] screen, you can configure the document image quality features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Image Quality Presets (Selecting Image Quality).......................................................................58

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)...........................................................................59

Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast) .......................................60

Sharpness/Color Saturation (Adjusting the Sharpness and Color Saturation of Images) ...........61

Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents).................................................61

Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..................................................................................62

Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone) ............................................................................................62

Gloss Level (Enhancing Gloss of the Document).......................................................................63


2 Select the [Image Quality] tab and then select a feature on the [Image Quality] screen that appears.

If color reproducibility is poor, perform auto gradation adjustment. For information about auto gradation adjustment, refer to "Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment" (P.357).

Image Quality Presets (Selecting Image Quality)

If you select an image quality of [Image Quality Preset], the [Auto Exposure], [Lighten/Darken/Contrast], [Sharpness/Color Saturation], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings are automatically adjusted and copies are made at a quality that matches the images.Note • If the settings of other image quality features are changed after selecting an image quality in

[Image Quality Preset], the Image Quality Presets setting will return to its default (state of nothing being selected).

1 Select [Image Quality Presets].

2 Select the image quality.

Normal

Copies are made with the [Auto Exposure], [Lighten/Darken/Contrast], [Sharpness/Color Saturation], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings at their defaults.

Lively

The color saturation is raised to reproduce images that appear fresher and livelier.

Image Quality

59

Co

py

3

Bright

Reproduces images that have a brighter appearance with enhanced contrast. Select this item to make copies of documents such as posters that are intended to attract people's attention.

Warm

Reproduces colors that have a slightly low density as brighter and warmer colors with more dominant red in them. Select this item when, for example, you wish skin to appear pinker or subdued warm colors to have more warmth.

Cool

Reproduces blue colors that appear even clearer. Select this item, for example to make water or sky bluer or to reproduce subdued cold colors more clearly.

Background Suppression

This setting prevents document background suppression.

Auto Contrast

This setting sharpens the image by adjusting the brightness and hue of the original.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)

When making copies of photographs, text and other documents, you can make copies at the image quality corresponding to each type of document. Copies of the document can be reproduced at a more faithful image quality by selecting the document type that matches the document.

1 Select [Original Type].

2 Select the document type.

Auto

This item sets [Output Color] of the [Basic Copying] screen according to the document type preset in the System Administration mode.For information about the auto setting of [Original Type], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.229).

Text & Photo

Select when making copies of documents containing both text and photos. The machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas and sets the appropriate image quality for each area of the document. For photo areas, specify the photo type from [Halftone], [Photograph], and [Color Copies].

Halftone

Select when photo areas of the document is printed matter such as a pamphlet.

Photograph

Select when photos have been pasted on document. This prevents the copy from being reproduced bluish.

3 Copy

60

Co

py

3

Xerographic Copies

Select this item for documents that are copies or prints made on a color copier such as the ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I, DocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I. This prevents colors from being reproduced faint.

Text

Select this item to make sharp copies of text. Sharp copies of graphs, illustrations, etc. are also made in this mode.

Normal Text

Select this item for printed documents, inked text documents, etc.

Light Text

Select this item for documents with light image density such as a document written in pencil to increase the copy density.

Lightweight originals

Select this item to reduce blurs of tracing paper and background suppression for lightweight documents.

Note • Whether [Lightweight originals] is displayed depends on the specifications. For information about the display method, refer to "Original Type - Lightweight Originals" (P.234).

Photo

Select this item for making copies of photos. In the same way as for Text & Photo, specify the photo type from [Halftone], [Photograph] and [Color Copies].

Map

Select this item for making copies of documents that have text on colored backgrounds such as maps.

Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast)

You can adjust the copy density and contrast.Note • [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] and [Lighten/Darken] of [Basic Copying] are

the same.

• If [Lighten/Darken] or [Contrast] is selected when the Image Quality Presets is set, the values set in the Image Quality Preset are cleared.

1 Select [Lighten/Darken/Contrast].

2 Adjust with [ ] and [ ].

Lighten/Darken

You can select from 7 copy density levels between [Lighter] and [Darker].

The copy color density increases the nearer the level is to [Darker] and the copy color density decreases the nearer the level is to [Lighter].

Contrast

You can select from 5 contrast levels between [Lower] and [Higher].

The nearer the level is to [Higher], the greater the difference between light parts and dark parts as light parts become lighter and dark parts become darker. [Lower] contrasts decrease the difference between light and dark areas.

Image Quality

61

Co

py

3

Sharpness/Color Saturation(Adjusting the Sharpness and Color Saturation of Images)

You can adjust the sharpness and color saturation.Note • If [Sharpness] or [Color Saturation] is selected when the Image Quality Presets is set, the

values set in the Image Quality Preset are cleared.

1 Select [Sharpness/Color Saturation].


Sharpness

You can select from 5 sharpness levels between [Softer] and [Sharper].

The nearer the level is to [Sharper], the sharper the contours of images. The nearer the level is to [Softer], the softer the contours of images.

Color Saturation

You can select from five color saturation levels between [Lower] and [Higher].

The brightness of color in documents increases the nearer the level is to [Higher] and the brightness of color in documents decreases the nearer the level is to [Lower].

Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents)

When copies are made with [Black] of [Output Color], the background color of documents such as newspapers and colored paper documents is erased.

When making copies with [Full Color], [Dual Colors], or [Single Color] of [Output Color], the background of white documents is erased.Note • When [Document Type] is set to [Photo], the [Auto Exposure] feature does not work.

1 Select [Auto Exposure].

2 Select [On] or [Off].

Off

The background color of the document is included during copying.

On

The background color of the document is excluded during copying.

3 Copy

62

Co

py

3

Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance)

The strength of the four colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) can be adjusted in 7 levels for each of their low, medium, and high density ranges.Note • If [Color Balance] is selected when the Image Quality Presets is set, the values set in the

Image Quality Preset are cleared.

1 Select [Color Balance].

2 Select the button for the color you want to adjust.

3 Use [ ] and [ ] to adjust the color balance for each density.

Low Density

Use this item to adjust the strength of the low density.

Medium Density

Use this item to adjust the strength of the medium density.

High Density

Use this item to adjust the strength of the high density.

Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone)

The tone of color documents can be adjusted to make subtle changes to the overall tone of the document. You can adjust the tone 2 levels at a time by moving the bar to the left or right.

The bottom bar of the [Color Shift] screen indicates the tone of the document and the upper bar indicates the tone after adjustment. If you select a color shift button, you can move the lower bar to change the overall tone of the document to the tone of the upper bar.

For example, if Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the left towards R (red) on the upper bar, the yellow in fruit becomes reddish to give an apple a riper-looking tone. This changes all colors. For example, R (red) becomes more M (magenta) and G (green) becomes more Y (yellow).

If Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the right towards G (green) on the upper bar, the yellow in fruit becomes greener. This changes all colors. For example, M (magenta) becomes more R (red) and R (red) becomes more Y (yellow).Note • Confirm that [Full Color] is selected in [Output Color] of the [Basic Copying] screen. Tone

adjustment is not available when [Output Color] is set to [Black].

• If [Color Shift] is selected when Image Quality Presets is set, the values set in the Image Quality Presets are cleared.

1 Select [Color Shift].

2 Select the color shift buttons.

Image Quality

63

Co

py

3

Gloss Level (Enhancing Gloss of the Document)

This feature lowers the copying speed to add a glossy touch to the output.

The following paper can be used for the gloss level feature:

Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight paper 1 (105 - 176 g/m2), heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), coated paper (105 - 176 g/m2), coated paper 1 (side 2), and punched paper.Note • A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to display [Gloss Level] in the

[Image Quality] tab. For more information, refer to "Gloss Level" (P.226).

• When you use the Build Job features, [Gloss Level] can be set to each set of the job. In this case, the copy procedure may pause due to adjustment of the machine when changing the settings. In addition, the document is divided into chapters at the positions where the gloss level changes.

1 Select [Gloss Level].

2 Select [Normal] or [Enhanced].

3 Copy

64

Co

py

3

Scan Options

On the [Scan Options] screen, you can configure features for scanning documents.The following shows the reference section for each feature.

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies) .................................................................................64

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) ...................................................65

2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages) .................................................66

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document).......................................................67

Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ...........................68

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) .........................................69

Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position).........................................................................69

Image Rotation (Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally)...............71

Mirror Image/Negative Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) .......................................72

Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents).......................................73


2 Select the [Scan Options] tab and then select a feature on the [Scan Options] screen.

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)

Copies of 1 sided and 2 sided documents can be made on one side or both sides.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Scan Options] screen are the same.

1 Select [2 Sided Copying].

2 Select any item.

1 1 Sided

Makes a copy of a 1 sided document on one side of the paper.

1 2 Sided

Makes a copy of a 1 sided document on both sides of the paper.

2 2 Sided

Makes a copy of a 2 sided document on both sides of the paper.

2 1 Sided

Makes a copy of a 2 sided document on one side of the paper.

Scan Options

65

Co

py

3

Originals

Head to Head

Select this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the same orientation.

Head to Toe

Select this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the opposite orientation. This appears when [2 - 2 Sided] or [2 - 1 Sided] is selected.

Copies

Head to Head

Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the copy to be the same as that of the document.

Head to Toe

Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the copy to be the opposite of that of the document. This appears when [1 - 2 Sided] or [2 - 2 Sided] is selected.

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)

The Bound documents feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate sheets of paper in page order. This feature is useful if you need to make separate copies from facing pages of bound documents such as a booklet.Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.

• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

• When you want to make copies in page order, select [Face Down] from [Output Orientation] in the [Output Format] tab.

1 Select [Book Copying].

2 Select any item.

Off

The document is not copied as a bound document.

Left Page then Right

Copies are made from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left page.

Right Page then Left

Copies are made from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the right page.

Top Page then Bottom

Copies are made from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top page.

Both Pages

Copies are made of both pages in page order.

3 Copy

66

Co

py

3

Left Page Only

Copies are made of the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Right Page Only

Copies are made of the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Top Page Only

Copies are made of the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Bottom Page Only

Copies are made of the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Binding Erase

Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)

You can assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound document so that pages face each other in the same way as the document. You can also specify the start page and the end page from the left and right facing pages.Note • Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 Select [2 Sided Book Copy].

2 Select any item.

Off

The document is not copied as a 2 sided book copy.


Copies are made of both pages from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left page.


Copies are made of both pages from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the right page.


Copies are made of both pages from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top page.

Start Page & End Page

Displays the [2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] screen.Refer to "[2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] Screen" (P.67).

Scan Options

67

Co

py

3

Binding Erase


[2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] Screen

You can set the copy start page and end page.

1 Select [Start Page & End Page].

2 Set [start page] and [end page].

Start Page

Select the copy start page from the following items.

[Left Page]/[Right Page]

You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

[Top Page]/[Bottom Page]

You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

End Page

Select the copy end page from the following items.

[Left Page]/[Right Page]

You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

[Top Page]/[Bottom Page]

You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)

You can set the scan size for the document.

Specify the size of the document when scanning non-standard size documents or when making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document.

When a document size is specified, it is scanned at the specified size regardless of the size of the loaded document. This feature allows you to copy the document with adding or deleting the margin.

1 Select [Original Size].

2 Select the size of the document. If you select a non-standard size, specify values for the X and Y directions.

Auto Size Detect

Scan sizes are detected automatically.Note • If the document size cannot be detected, a screen to input the document size appears.

3 Copy

68

Co

py

3

Standard Size

Select a document size from a list of 11 pre-configured types.You can change the indicated document sizes. For more information, refer to "Original Size Defaults" (P.235).

Free

Enter the desired scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document. Set the size in the document glass X (horizontal) direction within the range 15 to 432 mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments. The scale on the outside of the document glass is a useful reference for specifying the document size.

Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)

When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents and make copies onto paper that matches the respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper to make copies on so that copies are made on the same size of paper.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


• Be sure to load A5 documents vertically.

• When loading a B5 size document with A3 or A4 size documents in a vertical direction, place the B5 document also in a vertical direction.

• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5 portrait and B4 landscape. If the combination of the document sizes is not our recommendation, the documents can be fed at an angle may not be copied properly.

Note • [Original Orientation] is set in reference to the direction set for the first page of the document. Load the rest of the document from the second page onwards in the same direction as that of the first page of the document.

1 Select [Mixed Size Originals].


Off

Select this item when all documents are of the same size.

On

When documents of different sizes are copied, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

Scan Options

69

Co

py

3

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)

When you make copies with the document cover open or make copies from a book, black shadows sometimes appear along the edges and center margin of the paper. If this happens, you can make copies with the shadows erased.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • When making 2 sided copies, the same border erase amount is set for the top and bottom sides.

• If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase dimensions will be reduced or enlarged in proportion to the ratio you configured.

For information about the areas that can actually be printed, refer to "Printable Area" (P.458).

1 Select [Edge Erase].


3 Use [ ] and [ ] to set the width to erase for each of the top and bottom, left and right, and center.

Normal

The border erase amount is set to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right. If you do not want to erase the edges, set each value to 0 mm.

Edge Erase

You can erase only the amount necessary.

Top & Bottom Erase

Shadows at the top and bottom of the document are erased. Edges at the top and bottom are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Left & Right Erase

Shadows on the left and right of the document are erased. Edges on the left and right are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Binding Erase

Shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages are erased. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position)

Copies can be made with the document image position shifted to the left, right, top, or bottom of the paper or with the document center shifted to the center of the paper. You can also make copies with a margin added to the top, bottom, left, or right. When making 2 sided prints, you can set the shift positions for both Side 1 and Side 2.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • The image shift amount is set in accordance with the paper. Even if you set copies to be enlarged or reduced in Reduce/Enlarge, the image shift amount is not affected.

3 Copy

70

Co

py

3

1 Select [Image Shift].

2 Select any item.

No Shift

Copies are made without the position of the document image being shifted.

Auto Center

Copies are made so that the center of the document matches the center of the paper.

Image Shift/Variable Shift

You can set the margin amount. Set the top & bottom, and left & right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Side 1

Displays the [Image Shift - Side 1] screen.

Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen" (P.70).

Side 2

Displays the [Image Shift - Side 2] screen.

Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen" (P.71).

Mirror Shift

When copying with the same setting as Side 1, Check [Mirror Shift].

[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen

You can set the image shift of Side 1.

1 Select [Side 1].

2 Select any item.

No Shift


Auto Center

Copies are made so that the center of the document matches the center of the paper. You can adjust the top & bottom, and left & right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Corner Shift

Copies are made with the document image shifted to the edges or corners of the paper. You can select from 8 shift directions. You can adjust the top & bottom, and left & right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Variable Shift

Enter the margin values for copying. Set the top & bottom, and left & right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Scan Options

71

Co

py

3

[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen

You can set the image shift of Side 2.

1 Select [Side 2].

2 Select any item.

No Shift


Auto Center

Copies are made so that the center of the document matches the center of the paper. You can adjust the top & bottom, and left & right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Corner Shift

Copies are made with the document image shifted to the edges or corners of the paper. You can select from 8 shift directions. You can adjust the top & bottom, and left & right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Variable Shift

Enter the margin values for copying. Set the top & bottom, and left & right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Image Rotation (Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally)

If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of the document that is loaded, the machine automatically rotates the document image to make copies with the document and paper orientations matched. You can also select where to use as a reference for image rotation if documents are of mixed orientations.

The image rotation feature can only be used to make copies to paper of A4 and 8.5 x 11 inches or smaller.

1 Select [Image Rotation].

2 Select any item.

Off

Copies of documents are made as they are, even if they are orientated differently.

Always On

Copies are made with the document image automatically rotated so that the orientation of the document matches that of the paper.

On during Auto

Copies are made with the document image automatically rotated so that the orientation of the document matches that of the paper when [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Auto] of [Paper Supply] is selected.

3 Copy

72

Co

py

3

Rotation Direction

Displays the [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] screen.Refer to "[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen" (P.72).

[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen

You can set the reference position for rotation.

1 Select [Rotation Direction].

2 Select a rotation reference position.

Staple Position

When the finisher is installed, [Staple Position] is displayed. If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated to match the stapling edge based on the staple feature settings.

Portrait Original - Left Edge

If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated so that the top edge of a landscape document is aligned with the left edge of a portrait document.

Portrait Original - Right Edge

If documents are of mixed orientations, the image will be rotated so that the top edge of a landscape document is aligned with the right edge of a portrait document.

Mirror Image/Negative Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)

Copies can be made with the left and right sides of the document image reversed or the colors reversed in Output Color of the document image.Note • When Output Color is set to Black or Single Color, the density (contrast) is reversed for black

and white.

• When Output Color is set to Full Color, the complementary colors are reversed.

• When [Negative Image] and [Edge Erase] are set simultaneously, the edge erase area turns to white.

1 Select [Mirror Image/Negative Image].

2 Select [On] or [Off] for [Mirror Image] and [Negative Image].

Scan Options

73

Co

py

3

Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)

In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the set document must be configured.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the head of the document.

1 Select [Original Orientation].

2 Select [Head to Top] or [Head to Left] in accordance with the orientation of the document loaded.

Head to Top

Select this item when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the document glass or document feeder.

Head to Left

Select this item when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the document glass or document feeder. Be sure to select [Head to Left] when the top of the document is placed facing the left side (horizontal text).

3 Copy

74

Co

py

3

Output Format

On the [Output Format] screen, you can configure features for outputting documents. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies) .................................................................................74

Finishing (Outputting by Specifying Finishing) .........................................................................75

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .......................................................................................76

Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies) ........................................................................................79

Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)..............................80

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet) ...........................................................81

Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets).................................................82

Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) .............................................................83

Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Paper) .................................................................................84

Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)........................................................85

Set Numbering (Printing Control Number on the Background) .................................................89

Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded paper) ........................................................................................92

Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)............................................93

Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)....................................................................93


2 Select the [Output Format] tab and then select a feature on the [Output Format] screen.

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)

This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] in the [Scan Options] tab. For information, refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)" (P.64).

Output Format

75

Co

py

3

Finishing (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)

You can specify the copy output method.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.

If the offset stacking module is installed, the output position of copies is offset alternately to distinguish each set of copies.

If the finisher is installed, each set of copies can be stapled or punched, and then output.

The output destination is automatically selected depending on the selected feature. Documents are delivered on the output tray when [Auto] is selected, or on the finisher tray when [Collated/Stapling/Punching] or [Uncollated] is selected. For the machine with the booklet finisher C, when [Folding/Stapling] for [Booklet Creation] or [Bi-Folding] for [Folding] is selected, documents are delivered on the booklet tray.

1 Select [Finishing].

2 Select any item.

Auto

Copies are output collated when auto document feeder, 2 Sided Book Copy, Covers, [Blank Separators & Distribution Sets] or [No Separators + Distribution Sets] of [Transparency Separators], Booklet Creation, Stapling, Build Job, Sample Set, and [Document 50 sheets] are set.

Collated/Stapling/Punching

The machine can output sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order.

Uncollated

The machine can output the specified number of copies and sort sheets by page.

Stapling

Displays the [Copy Output - Stapling] screen.Refer to "[Copy Output - Stapling] Screen" (P.75).

Hole Punching

Displays the [Finishing - Hole Punching] screen.Refer to "[Finishing - Hole Punching] Screen" (P.76).

[Copy Output - Stapling] Screen

You can set stapling. The number of pages that can be stapled is 2 to 50 (P paper and J paper). Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight paper 1 (105 - 176 g/m2), heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), heavyweight paper 2 (177 - 280 g/m2), heavyweight paper 2 (side 2), coated paper (105 - 176 g/m2), coated paper 1 (side 2), punched paper, tab paper (105 - 176 g/m2), and custom paper 1 to 5 can be stapled.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


3 Copy

76

Co

py

3

1 Select [Stapling].

2 Select the stapling position.

Off

Stapling is not performed.

Staple Position

Select from 5 staple positions: 1 Staple, Top Left; 2 Staples, Left; 2 Staples, Top; 1 Staple, Top Right; and 2 Staples, Right.Note • The staple direction appearing on the screen and the direction in which staples are actually

stapled may differ depending on the combination of the document size and orientation. For example, the actual staple direction is vertical although the staple direction appearing on the screen is slanting.

[Finishing - Hole Punching] Screen

You can set the position for punching.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


1 Select [Hole Punching].

2 Sets the position for punching.

Off

No punch position is selected.

Punch Position

Select from 3 punching positions: 2 holes, Left; 2 holes, Top; and 2 holes, Right.

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)

The machine can copy pages laid out so as when multiple-page sheets are overlaid and folded along the center (gutter), a booklet is created in page order. You can also set the binding shift and attach a cover when making booklets.

When the booklet finisher C is installed, Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling become available.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • If the number of pages in the booklet is not a multiple of four, the remaining pages will be output as blank pages.

• If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in "Auto Paper Off" (P.233) is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary.

1 Select [Booklet Creation].

2 Select any item.

Output Format

77

Co

py

3

Off

Booklet Creation is not applied to copies.

Left Bind/Top Bind

Copies are made to enable left binding or top binding.

Right Bind

Copies are made to enable right binding.

Copy Booklet

You can output the copies of scanned documents as they are by specifying Bi-fold/Stapling. Select this when you do not need a document to be copied in page order.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


Binding Shift

Displays the [Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] Screen" (P.77).

Covers

Displays the [Booklet Creation - Covers] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation - Covers] Screen" (P.78).

Subsets

Displays the [Booklet Creation - Subsets] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation -Subsets] Screen" (P.78).

Finishing

Displays the [Booklet Creation - Finishing] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Finishing] Screen" (P.79).

Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Last Original as Back Cover

The last page of the original is used as the back cover of the booklet. Select the check box to use the last page as the back cover. When using [Subsets] to separate booklets, the cover will be made on the last page of the last subset.Note • Depending on the number of pages in the original, a blank sheet may be inserted before the

last page.

[Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] Screen

You can specify a ratio within the range from 0 to 50mm in 1 mm increments.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] to specify a binding shift value.

3 Copy

78

Co

py

3

[Booklet Creation - Covers] Screen

You can attach a cover to a booklet.

1 Select [Covers].

2 Select [On].

3 If you selected [On], select [Off] or [On] in [Printed Covers].

Printed Covers

Off

A blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.

On

The document is copied to the cover from the first page. When you only want to copy to the outside of the cover, insert a blank sheet of paper for the page that will become the inside of the cover.

Body Pages Tray

Displays the [Booklet Creation - Covers - Body Pages Tray] screen.

Select the tray to use. Select trays with paper of the same size and orientation for the copy paper and the cover.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.53).

Covers Tray

Displays the [Booklet Creation - Covers - Covers Tray] screen.

Select the tray to use for covers. Select trays with paper of the same size and orientation for the copy paper and the cover.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.53).

[Booklet Creation -Subsets] Screen

A booklet is divided by every number of sheets specified when there was much number of sheets of a document. It can copy so that what made each 2-sided copy could be piled up become a booklet. This feature can be set to from 1 to 50 pages in 1 page increments.Note • When specifying [Folding], set the dividing number of sheets in the range from 1 to 15.

1 Select [On].

2 Set the number of copies using [ ] and [ ] or with the numeric keypad.

Output Format

79

Co

py

3

[Booklet Creation-Finishing] Screen

When the booklet finisher C is installed, Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling become available.

1 Select any item.

Off

No Finishing is carried out.

Folding

Outputting copies folded in half. The number of copies that can be folded is 5. When the number is more than 5, the document is divided by every 5 sheets.

Folding + Stapling

The copies are folded in half and stapled at the center.

The number of copies that can be treated is 2 to 15.

Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies)

You can make copies with a cover attached.

The front cover can be output before the first page of the document on a different type of paper (e.g. colored paper or heavyweight paper).Important • When you select this feature, if the number of the document pages exceeds the maximum

that the machine can scan, the document already scanned cannot be printed. In this case, cancel the job following the message displayed. The number of the document pages that can be scanned is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the total numbers are about 1,500 pages for color documents or about 6,000 pages for black and white documents, if the document size is A4 (Xerox standard document). This figure could be used only as a guide, since the maximum number of the document pages depend of the types, sizes and direction of the document.


• When making 2 sided copies, copies are made on both sides of the top cover/back cover in accordance with the page order of the document.


1 Select [Covers].

2 Select [Front Cover] or [Front & Back Covers].

3 Select whether or not to attach a cover to the copy.

Off

A cover is not attached.

Front Cover

Make copies with a cover output on a different type of paper before the first page of the document. Also, if [On] of [Printed Covers] is selected, copies can be made from the first page of the document on a different type of paper.

3 Copy

80

Co

py

3

Front & Back Covers

Outputs covers on a different type of paper before the first page and after the last page of the document. Also, if [On] of [Printed Covers] is selected, copies can be made on a different type of paper for the cover on the first page and last page of the document.

Printed Covers

Off

A blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.

On

The document is copied to the cover from the first page. When you only want to copy to the outside of the cover, insert a blank sheet of paper in the document.

Body Pages Tray

Displays the [Covers - Body Pages Tray] screen.

Select the tray to use. Select trays with paper of the same size and orientation for the copy paper and the cover.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.53).

Covers Tray

Displays the [Covers - Covers Tray] screen.

Select the tray to use for covers. Select trays with paper of the same size and orientation for the copy paper and the cover.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.53).

Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)

A blank sheet can be output inserted as a separator between copied transparencies. At the same time, only the required number of copies for distribution is printed. When loading transparencies, make sure that the paper for the separators (or for distribution) is loaded at the same orientation as that of the transparencies.Important • Use V516 (Xerox film [no border]) transparency sheets. Using transparency sheets for color

(V556/V558 [with white boarder]) may cause a malfunction or paper jam.

Note • When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (bypass), we recommend loading them vertically.


1 Select [Transparency Separators].

2 Select any item.

No Separators

Transparency separators are not used.

Blank Separators

A blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time a transparency is copied. Only one set of copies can be made.

Output Format

81

Co

py

3

Blank Separators + Distribution Sets

A blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time a transparency is copied. At the same time, only the required number of copies for distribution is printed.

No Separators + Distribution Sets

Copies are made on transparencies and only the required number of copies for distribution is printed.

Transparency Tray

Displays the [Transparency Separators - Transparency Tray] screen. Select the tray for transparency films.

Select trays with paper of the same size and orientation for the transparency films and the separators.When [More...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.53).

Separators Tray

Displays the [Transparency Separators - Separators Tray] screen. Select the tray to use for separators.

Select trays with paper of the same size and orientation for the transparency films and the separators.When [More...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.53).

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)

When the machine is equipped with a document feeder, 2, 4, or 8 sheets of documents can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

When you select [Multiple Up], [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected automatically. The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that they fit on the selected paper.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • When [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is canceled (a new copy ratio is selected), image loss may occur depending on the document image size of the document.

• When margin shift is set, shift is executed on the whole document. For this reason, image loss at the edge of the original may occur depending on the document image size of the document.

• When Edge Erase is set, edges are erased for each document copied to the whole document.

• Select the other than [Auto] for the paper tray of [Paper Supply] on the [Basic Copying] screen. If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in "Auto Paper Off" (P.233) is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary.

1 Select [Multiple-Up].

2 Select any item.

1 Up

Multiple Up is not applied.

2 Up

Two document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

3 Copy

82

Co

py

3

4 Up

Four document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

8 Up

Eight document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

Image Order

You can select the layout for copying the documents together.

Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)

An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets.

This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting together the copies spread over multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can be pasted together. This paste margin is fixed to 10 mm.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • This feature is not supported by a document feeder.

1 Select [Poster].

2 Select [Output Size] or [Enlargement %].

Off

Poster is not applied to copies.

Output Size

You can select from 7 paper sizes.

Paper Tray Settings

Displays the [Poster - Paper Tray Settings] screen.

Select the paper tray to use.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.53).

When [Enlargement %] is Selected

You can specify a different ratio for the height and width.

1 Select [Enlargement %].

2 Use [ ] and [ ] to specify the height and width ratios.

X (10 - 400), Y (100 - 400)

Set the height and width ratios within the range from 100 to 400% in 1% increments.

XY

You can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the same amount.

Output Format

83

Co

py

3

Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)

A document image can be copied on one sheet of paper repeatedly for a specified number of times.

When the copy ratio is set to [Auto], the repeated copies of the image are reduced to fit on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image are arranged.

Note • When making repeat copies at the same size as the document image, specify a number of repeats that will fit on the paper.


1 Select [Repeat Image].

2 Select [Auto Repeat] or [Variable Repeat].

Off

Image Repeat is not applied.

Auto Repeat

The machine automatically sets the number of copies according to the document size, paper size, and copy ratio, and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the paper.Note • Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size.

Variable Repeat

Specify the number of times to repeatedly copy the document image along each of the long and short sides of the paper. You can specify from 1 to 23 repeats along the long side (Y) and from 1 to 33 repeats along the short side (X).

Image Layout

Evenly Spread

Images are copied on the paper with the paper evenly divided up by the repeated number of images.

Side by Side

The repeat images are copied to the paper consecutively.

3 Copy

84

Co

py

3

Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Paper)

You can copy images from a document tab paper by specifying the copied position, so that the image would be copied onto the tab.

Sizes of Tab paper can be copied are A4 , 8.5 x 11 inches .

An available tray for this feature is only the Tray 5 (Bypass). When loading the tab paper in the Tray 5 (bypass), load the paper with the side to be copied facing up and with the edge opposite to the tab to be fed first.

1 Select [Tab Margin Shift].

2 Select any item.

Off

Not copied on the Tab paper.

Shift to Tab

Copy the image on the edge of the document to the only the tab part of the paper.

Specify [Shift Value] to shift the image being on the edge of the document so that the image would be copied onto the tab. Only the image shifted can be copied.

Shift All

Copy whole image of the document to the index paper.

Specify the [Shift Value] when you also want to shift the image on the edge of the document onto the tab for copying.

Shift Value

Set the height and width of the copy size from 0 to 15mm in 1mm increments.

Tab Stock Settings

Displays the [Tab Margin Shift - Tab Stock Settings] screen.Refer to "[Tab Margin Shift - Tab Stock Settings] screen" (P.84).

[Tab Margin Shift - Tab Stock Settings] screen

Select paper tray and paper size for loading tab paper.

1 Select [Tab Stock Settings].

2 Select [Paper Size] and [Paper Type].

paper Size

Select the size of tab paper.

paper Type

Select the type of tab paper.

Output Format

85

Co

py

3

Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)

You can add a stamp, date, and page number not included on the document to copy paper when outputting copies.

You can select from already provided formats for the stamp type, date, page number, and printing position.Important • When you select this feature, if the number of the document pages exceeds the maximum


Note • The annotation image and character size is not changed even if you set the enlarge/reduce setting.

• If Stamp, Date, and Page Number are specified at the same time, we recommend confirming that none of the positions overlap before making copies.

• If [Multiple-Up] is set, the annotation is added to the combined image.

• If [Repeat Image] or [Booklet Creation] is set, the annotation is added to each individual image.

1 Select [Annotation].

2 Select any item.

Stamp

Displays the [Stamp] screen.Refer to "[Stamp] Screen" (P.85).

Date

Displays the [Date] screen.Refer to "[Date] Screen" (P.86).

Page Number

Displays the [Page Number] screen.Refer to "[Page Number] Screen" (P.86).

[Stamp] Screen

You can add one of the following stamps to copies: CONFIDENTIAL, Copy Prohibited, URGENT, IMPORTANT, Circulation, Side 2 Recycled, DRAFT, and VOID

1 Select [Stamp].

2 Select [On].

Off

No stamp is added.

On

A stamp is added.

3 Copy

86

Co

py

3

Text

Displays the [Stamp - Text] screen.You can select from 8 character types for the stamp.

Position

Displays the [Stamp - Position] screen.You can select from 9 positions for the stamp.

Print On

Displays the [Stamp - Print On] screen.You can select the page(s) to print the stamp from [First Page Only] and [All Pages].

More...

Displays the [Annotation - Stamp - More...] screen.You can select from 3 sizes and 7 colors for the stamp.Note • If [Date] and [Page Number] are both set, specify [Black].

[Date] Screen

You can make copies with a date added. The printed date is the date and time that the copy was made.The format of the date printed on can be changed. For more information, refer to "Date Format" (P.215).

1 Select [Date].

2 Select [On].

Off

No date is added.

On

A date is added.

Print On...

Displays the [Date - Print On] screen.You can select the page(s) to print the date from [First Page Only] and [All Pages].

Position

Displays the [Annotation - Date - Position] screen.You can select from 6 positions for the date.

[Page Number] Screen

You can add a page number to copies.

1 Select [Page Number].

2 Select [On].

Off

No page number is added.

Output Format

87

Co

py

3

On

A page number is added.

Style

Displays the [Page Number -Style] screen.Refer to "[Page Number - Style] Screen" (P.87).

Position

Displays the [Page Number -Position] screen.You can select from 6 positions for the page number.

Print On

Displays the [Page Number -Print On] screen.Refer to "[Page Number - Print On] Screen" (P.88).

[Page Number - Style] Screen

You can set the style for the page number.

1 Select [Style].

2 Select the style for the page number.

1, 2, 3

A page number is added.

-1-, -2-, -3-

A hyphen is added to the left and right of the page number. (Example: -1-)

1/N, 2/N, 3/N

The total number of pages is added to the right side of the page number. (Example: 1/50, 2/50)If [1/N, 2/N, 3/N] is selected, you can select the following items:

Auto

The number of pages of the document is automatically counted as the total number of pages.

Enter Number

You can specify the total number of pages within the range from 1 to 9999.

Page1, Page2, Page3

“Page” is added in front of the page number. (Example: Page1, Page2)

3 Copy

88

Co

py

3

[Page Number - Print On] Screen

You can specify the page(s) to add a page number.

1 Select [Print On].

2 Select any item.

All Pages

A page number is added to all pages.

Enter First Page Number

Refer to "When [Enter First Page Number] is Selected" (P.88).

Enter Last Page Number

Refer to "When [Enter Last Page Number] is Selected" (P.88).

Enter First and Last Page No.

Refer to "When [Enter First and Last Page No.] is Selected" (P.89).

Include Covers

Add a check to include a cover.

Start Number

Specify the start page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 9999. To enter the number with the numeric keypad, select [Enter Number Using Keypad] and then enter the number.

When [Enter First Page Number] is Selected

Specify the start page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 9999.

1 Select [Enter First Page Number].

2 Use [ ] and [ ] or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the start page number.

When [Enter Last Page Number] is Selected

Specify the end page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 9999. The start page is fixed to 1.

1 Select [Enter Last Page Number].

2 Use [ ] and [ ] or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the last page number.

Output Format

89

Co

py

3

When [Enter First and Last Page No.] is Selected

You can specify the start and the end page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 9999.

1 Select [Enter First and Last Page No.].

2 Use [ ] and [ ] or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the start and end page numbers.

Set Numbering (Printing Control Number on the Background)

You can faintly print a sequential control number on the background of each copy set. For example, if you set “1” for the start page, “1” is printed on all page of the first copy set and “2” is printed on all pages of the second set.

To prevent, for instance, the duplication of confidential documents for distribution at conferences, you can use sequential numbering to associate distribution copies to people.Important • When you select this feature, if the number of the document pages exceeds the maximum


1 Select [Set Numbering].

2 Select any item.

Control Number

Displays the [Set Numbering - Control Number] screen.Refer to "[Set Numbering - Control Number] Screen" (P.90).

Text

Displays the [Set Numbering - Text] screen.Refer to "[Set Numbering - Text] Screen" (P.90).

User Account Number

Displays the [Set Numbering - User Account Number] screen.Refer to "[Set Numbering - User Account Number] Screen" (P.90).

Date and Time

Displays the [Set Numbering - Date and Time] screen.Refer to "[Set Numbering - Date and Time] Screen" (P.91).

Serial Number

Displays the [Set Numbering - Serial Number] screen.Refer to "[Set Numbering - Serial Number] Screen" (P.91).

3 Copy

90

Co

py

3

Text Effect

Displays the [Set Numbering - Text Effect] screen.Refer to "[Set Numbering - Text Effect] Screen" (P.91).


[Set Numbering - Control Number] Screen

You can set a control number within the range from 1 to 9999.

1 Select [On].

2 Set the start number using [ ] and [ ] or with the numeric keypad.

Off

No control number is printed.

On

A control number is printed. Enter the start number of the control number.

[Set Numbering - Text] Screen

Select the text to print on the copy.

1 Select [On].

Select any text.

Off

No text is printed.

On

Text is printed. You can select from 3 character types for the set numbering.

[Set Numbering - User Account Number] Screen

When using User Administration or Auditron Administration, a user account number is printed.Note • [User Account Number] is the No. (User Administration Number) registered by users in

Login Setup/Auditron Administration.

• Displays when using Auditoron Administration. If the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is used, [User Account Number] is displayed even when no data is collected. In this case, even if [On] is selected for [User Account Number], the No. registered by users (User Administration Number) is not printed on.

1 Select [On].

Output Format

91

Co

py

3

Off

The user account number is not printed.

On

The user account number is printed. However, nothing is printed if user authorization has not taken place.

[Set Numbering - Date and Time] Screen

You can print the date and time that copying started.For information about the format for the date, refer to "Date Format" (P.215).

1 Select [On].

Off

No date and time are printed.

On

The date and time are printed.

[Set Numbering - Serial Number] Screen

The serial number of the machine is printed.

1 Select [On].

Off

No serial number is printed.

On

The serial number is printed.

[Set Numbering - Text Effect] Screen

You can set the text effect.If you set a text effect and make a copy, the text set in [Control Number], [Text], [UserAccount Number], [Date and Time] or [Serial Number] on the [Set Numbering] screenis embedded in the background. When copying the output copy with the text effect, theembedded text is either printed in [Embossed] or [Outline] state.


For information about the background pattern, refer to "Background Pattern" (P.216).

1 Select [On].

2 Select [Embossed], or [Outline].

3 Copy

92

Co

py

3

Off

Print the specified text as it is.

Embossed

When copying the output copy with the text effect, the embedded text is printed in an embossed state.

Outline

When copying the output copy with the text effect, the embedded text is printed in an outline state.

You can set the color, character size, density, and other set numbering print settings in [System Settings]. For information about other advanced settings, refer to "Set Numbering" (P.215).

Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded paper)

You can make copies to be folded in half.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


• The supported paper orientation is only . Select the tray whose orientation is set to .


1 Select [Folding].

2 Select any item.

Off

A copy is not folded.

Bi-Fold

Copies are folded in half.

Print Inside

Folds copies so that the image is printed inside.

Print Outside

Folds copies so that the image is printed outside.

Output Format

93

Co

py

3

Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)

Repeatedly copies one original onto equally divided areas according to the specified number of copies.Note • When anything other than [Auto%] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], image loss may occur

at edges depending on the image size of the document.


1 Select [Preset Repeat Image].

2 Select any item.

Off

One copy of the document image is made on a single sheet of paper.

2 Images

Two copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.

4 Images

Four copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.

8 Images

Eight copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.

Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)

You can select whether copies should be output facing up or down.

1 Select [Output Orientation].

2 Select any item.

Auto

Automatically determines whether the copies should be output facing up or down.

Face Up

Copies are output facing up and delivered from the last page.

Face down

Copies are output facing down and delivered from the last page.

Face Up Reverse Order

Copies are delivered from the first page facing up.Note • Whether [Face Up Reverse Order] is displayed depends on the system setting. For

information, refer to "Output Orientation - Reverse Order" (P.234).

3 Copy

94

Co

py

3

Job Assembly

On the [Job Assembly] screen, you can configure the Build Job features. The following shows the reference section for features that can be configured on [Job Assembly].

Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation).........94

Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)...........................................................96

Document > 50 sheets (Adding Originals) .................................................................................97

Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area when Copying) . 98


2 Select the [Job Assembly] tab and then select a feature on the [Job Assembly] screen that appears.

Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation)

This feature allows you to change and save settings individually for each document page or stack and then to finally make copies of documents with different settings as one job.

1 Select [Build Job].


3 When [On] is selected, you then configure print settings.


Off

Build Job is not applied.

On

Build Job is applied. feature buttons appear on the screen. The settings for the entire document are set first.Important • The features set here cannot be changed or cancelled during the operation.

For the features that can be set here, refer to "Copying Features for an Entire Document" (P.95).

Job Assembly

95

Co

py

3

Copying Features for an Entire Document

Finishing

For information about the feature, refer to "Finishing (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)" (P.75).

Booklet Creation

For information about the feature, refer to "Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)" (P.76).

Covers

For information about the feature, refer to "Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies)" (P.79).

Annotation

For information about the feature, refer to "Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)" (P.85).

Set Numbering

For information about the feature, refer to "Set Numbering (Printing Control Number on the Background)" (P.89).

Output Orientation

For information about the feature, refer to "Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)" (P.93).

[Copy Job] Screen

The following describes the screen that appears while the Build Job is being executed.

Chapter Start...

Displays the [Build Job - Chapter Start/Separators] screen.Refer to "[Build Job - Chapter Start/Separators] Screen" (P.96).

Change Settings...

The Copy screen appears and you can change the settings for the loaded document. After setting the features, press the <Start> button on the control panel to start scanning of the document. To return to the previous screen, press the <#>.

Cancel

The document data stored by the Build Job feature is cleared and the job is canceled.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <C> button or <Clear All> button on the

control panel.

Last Original

Select this to end scanning of documents. The build job starts.

Next Original

Select this when you have another document. This is on when using the Build Job feature.

3 Copy

96

Co

py

3

Start

When you load the next document and press the <Start> button, the machine starts to scan the loaded document.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

[Build Job - Chapter Start/Separators] Screen

You can set the chapter start and separators.

Off

The next stack of documents is copied after the previous stack.

Chapter Start

The next stack of documents is copied from side 1 of a new sheet of paper.If [Chapter Start] is not selected and copying of the first loaded document ends on side 1, copying for the next document will begin on side 2 of the last page of the first document.

When [Chapter Start] is selected and [Multiple Up] is marked, even if all documents are divided for every chapter before all of them are assembled in [Multiple Up] feature, the next stack of document is copied from Side 2 of a paper.

Separators

Separators can be inserted. Select the paper tray to use for the separators from [Separators Tray].

Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)

When making multiple sets of copies, you can make a proof set to check the finished output and then print the remaining copies. You can select to continue or cancel the job after the confirmation. you can also change the number of copies. The number of sets to be copied can also be changed. The sample is included in the total number of sets.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


1 Select [Sample Set].

2 Select [On].

Off

No sample set is made.

On

A sample set is made.

Job Assembly

97

Co

py

3

[Copy Job] Screen

The machine pauses and displays the [Copy Job] screen after a proof set is copied.

Settings Change...

The [Settings Change...] screen is displayed. Uncheck the settings you want to cancel.This button is displayed only when the settings that can be cancelled

Change Quantity...

The [Change Quantity...] screen is displayed. Enter the number of sets including a proof set using the numeric keypad.Note • When you enter “1” for the number of sets and then press the <Start> button, the machine

does not start copying.

Cancel

The remaining copies are canceled.

Start

The remaining copies are made.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Document > 50 sheets (Adding Originals)

This feature allows you to copy sheets of documents which you cannot load into the document feeder at one time. This feature also enables you to copy multiple documents as one job by the document glass.

If you set this feature, you can add documents by the document glass. The [Next Original] message that is usually displayed while scanning documents is always selected in this mode. Note • If the [Finishing] is set to [Auto], the output is automatically sorted.

1 Select [Document 50 sheets].

2 Select [On].

Off

[Last Original] will be selected on the screen displayed during scanning of a document.

On

[Next Original] will be selected on the screen displayed during scanning of a document.

3 Copy

98

Co

py

3

[Copy Job] Screen

The [Copy Job] screen appears when copying begins.

Cancel

The document data stored by [Document > 50 sheets] feature is cleared and [Document > 50 sheets] is canceled.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <C> button or <Clear All> button on the

control panel.

Last Original

Select this to end scanning of documents.

Next Original

Select this when you have another document. This is on when using the [Document > 50 sheets] feature.

Start

When you load the next document and press the <Start> button, the machine starts to scan the loaded document.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area when Copying)

Specify an area to delete everything outside or inside of when copying. Up to 3 areas can be specified.

1 Select [Delete Outside/Delete Inside].

2 Select any item.

Off

Turn off [Delete Outside/Delete Inside].

Delete Outside

Delete outside of the selected area when copying.

Delete Inside

Delete inside of the selected area when copying.

Area Settings

The [Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen is displayed. Select up to 3 areas, from [Area 1] to [Area 3].Note • X represents the number of the area displayed.

Refer to "[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen" (P.99).

Job Assembly

99

Co

py

3

Originals

For 2 sided documents, specify the side of the area you want to delete outside of or inside of.

Both Sides

The setting is applied to both sides of the document.

Side 1 Only

The setting is applied to only to Side 1 of the document.

Side 2 Only

The setting is applied to only to Side 2 of the document.

[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen

Set the area to delete outside of or inside of. The quadrangle with a diagonal line and 4 straight sides connecting the coordinates, X1/Y1 and X2/Y2 is deleted or extracted area. By making the top right comer of a document into the starting point, the X-axis is set as the direction of width, and the Y-axis is set as the direction of length.

You can specify a value of 0 to 432 mm for the width (X) and the length (Y) in 1mm increments.Note • Specify the 2 coordinates from the top right corner of the document.

• When specifying multiple areas, the specified areas can overlap each other.

• When [Reduce/Enlarge] is enabled, the specified area will be reduced/enlarged accordingly.

1 Select [Area X].

Note • X shows an area number.

2 Enter the value for X1 in [X1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

3 Enter the value for Y 1 in [Y1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

4 Enter the value for the X2 in [X2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

5 Enter the value for the Y2 in [Y2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

Note • To change the coordinates you have entered, select [Next], move , and enter the value again.

• If all of [X1], [Y1], [X2], and [Y2] are set to [0], the area will be invalid. If no other area is specified, the delete outside/inside function cannot be used.

Clear Area X

Clear all the specified areas.Note • X represents the number of the area displayed.

Next

moves to the next coordinate.

4 Scan

This chapter describes the scan features provided by this product.The network settings of the machine must be configured in order to use the scan features. For information about network settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

Important • Scan features are not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Scanning Procedure .................................................................................102

Stopping the Scan Job..............................................................................108

E-mail........................................................................................................109

Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................................113

Network Scanning.....................................................................................114

Scan to FTP/SMB .....................................................................................115

Basic Scanning .........................................................................................117

Image Quality............................................................................................121

Scan Options ............................................................................................124

Output Format...........................................................................................129

4 Scan

102

Scan

4

Scanning Procedure

This section describes basic scan procedures. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................102

Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................104

Step 3 Starting the Scan Job......................................................................................................105

Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status ....................................................................107

Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data ...............................................................................................107

Step 1 Loading Documents

There are two methods for loading documents:

Document feeder

Single sheet

Multiple sheets

Document glass

Single sheet

Bound documents, such as books

Document Feeder

The document feeder (250 sheets) supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 140 x 210 mm (A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5 inches, 5.5 x 8.5 inches ) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).

The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.

The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)" (P.125).


For information about scanning documents of mixed size, refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.126).

Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams in the document feeder.

• 2 sided scanning of lightweight paper documents (38 - 48 g/m2) is not supported.

Document type (weight) Number of sheets

Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) 250

Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) 250


150


100

Scanning Procedure

103

Scan

4

1 Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the documents.

2 Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.

Note • When loading a large document such as A3, pick up the document feeder tray and open the document stopper rightward.

3 Place the document face up (the face of 2 sided document up) in the center of the document feeder.

Note • The <Confirmation> indicator lights up when the document is loaded correctly.

When loading the document in the document feeder, you can set timing for lifting up the document feeder tray. For more information, refer to "Document Feeder Tray Elevation" (P.226).

Document Glass

On the document glass, you can place a single sheet, or a book or other similar document up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).

The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Scan Size] field.For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)" (P.125).



Warning

Do not press the document with excessive force when scanning heavyweight documents. A broken document glass may injure you.

Do not look on the light during scanning, when you scan documents with the document cover open. It may cause eyestrain or pains in your eyes.

4 Scan

104

Scan

4

2 Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.

3 Close the document cover.

Note • When a standard size document is placed on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.

Step 2 Selecting Features

You can select features from the [Basic Scanning] tab.

From the [Menu] tab, you can select from 4 scan modes: E-mail, Scan to Mailbox, Network Scanning, and Scan to FTP/SMB.

E-mail

Scans a document and sends the scanned data as an e-mail attachment.

Scan to Mailbox

Scans a document and saves the scanned data to a mailbox of the machine.You need to create a mailbox in advance. For information on how to create a mailbox, refer to "Mailbox" (P.265).

Network Scanning

Scans a document after specifying the file (job template) set with scanning conditions, information about the forwarding destination server and others.

Scan to FTP/SMB

Scans a document and sends the scanned data to a network computer via the FTP or SMB protocols.For information about each of these modes, refer to the sections listed below.

E-mail........................................................................................................................................109

Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................................................................113

Network Scanning.....................................................................................................................114

Scan to FTP/SMB .....................................................................................................................115

Note • Features displayed may vary depending on the model you are using.

• When using the Auditron mode, a UserID and password might be required. Ask the machine administrator for the UserID and password.

• The network settings of the machine must be configured in order to use the scan features. For information about network settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

Below is an explanation of how to use the Scan to Mailbox feature.



Scanning Procedure

105

Scan

4

2 Select [Scan to Mailbox].

3 If the previous settings still remain, press the <Clear All> button.

4 Specify the mailbox to save to.

5 Select the features to set from each tab as necessary.

For information about each of these features, refer to the following sections.

"Basic Scanning" (P.117)

"Image Quality" (P.121)

"Scan Options" (P.124)

"Output Format" (P.129)

Step 3 Starting the Scan Job


Important • If the document has been set in the document feeder, do not press the document while it is being conveyed.

Note • If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.

• The following job configurations can be performed while scanning.

<Clear All> button

<Start> button

4 Scan

106

Scan

4

If You Have More Documents

If you have another document, select the [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan several documents as one set of data.

Up to 999 pages can be stored.Note • If the number of document pages exceeds this maximum, then scanning stops. Follow the

displayed message, and either abort the operation, or save the scanned document data.

1 While documents are being scanned, select [Next Original].

Note • When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.

• When using the document feeder, set the next documents after the first documents are all scanned.

• You can change the scan settings for the next document by selecting [Change Scan Settings] displayed after selecting the [Next Original].

2 Load the next document.

3 Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, load the next document and press the <Start> button.

4 When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

Scanning Procedure

107

Scan

4

Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status


2 Confirm the job status.


Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data

When you select Scan to Mailbox, the document stored in a mailbox of the machine is imported into your computer. Importing can be done in the following ways:

Import using application

Uses a network scan driver.For information, refer to "Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application" (P.164).

Import using Mailbox Viewer 2

Uses Mailbox Viewer 2 (application software) produced by Fuji Xerox.For more information, refer to "Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2" (P.166).

Import using CentreWare Internet Services

Uses CentreWare Internet Services.For more information, refer to "Importing using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.168).

Import using WebDAV protocol

Uses application supporting the WebDAV protocol produced by Fuji Xerox, such as CentreWare EasyOperator.For more information, refer to "Import using WebDAV protocol" (P.170).

<Job Status> button

4 Scan

108

Scan

4

Stopping the Scan Job

Follow the procedure below to cancel a scan.


2 Select [Stop].

3 If the screen in procedure 1 does not appear, press the <Job Status> button.

4 Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop].

Note • When a scan is cancelled, scan data already stored in a mailbox is deleted.

<Stop> button

<Job Status> button

E-mail

109

Scan

4

E-mail

You can scan a document and send the scanned data as an e-mail attachment. For more information, refer to below.Note • This feature is only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

Address Book ........................................................................................................................... 109

Keyboard .................................................................................................................................. 110

Sender....................................................................................................................................... 111

Recipient Name/E-mail Address.............................................................................................. 111

From ......................................................................................................................................... 112

Subject...................................................................................................................................... 112

Mail Contents ........................................................................................................................... 112

In addition, the [Mail Delivery Notification (MDN)] and [Split Send] features in the [Output Format] screen are only available under the E-mail feature. For more information, refer to below.

Read Status (MDN).................................................................................................................. 130

Split Send (Sending in Sections).............................................................................................. 130

1 Select [E-mail] from the [All Services] screen.

2 In the [E-mail] screen, choose a recipient from the address book, or enter one with your keyboard.

Address Book

This describes entering a recipient using the Address Book. You can also enter a recipient directly via the keyboard.

When selecting an address with a certificate from the Address Book, an encrypted E-mail can be sent.For information about settings of the Address Book, refer to "Address Book" (P.274).

Searching Address

1 Select [Address Book].

2 Once the [Address Book] screen appears, choose either [Local Address List] or [Remote Search (Directory Svc.)] as an address book type.

Note • The screen at right appears when [Remote Search (Directory Svc.)] is selected for the Address Book.

For information about Remote Search, refer to "Address Search (Directory Service)" (P.256).

3 Select the necessary fields, select [Enter/Change Keyword], and enter a keyword or keywords.

Recipient Name

Up to 32 characters are allowed. Example: John Smith

4 Scan

110

Scan

4

E-mail Address

Up to 128 characters are allowed. Example: [email protected]

Custom Items

This field is selected when you want to search on items other than the above. Up to 60 characters are allowed.

Note • When searching on multiple keywords, search using the AND clause.

• Only 1 Custom Item can be selected.

4 Select [Search Now].

5 After searching completes, specify the recipient from the displayed screen, and select either [To], [CC], or [BCC] for the recipient type.

Note • The screen at right appears when [Remote Search (Directory Svc.)] is selected for the Address Book.

• Select [ ] to display the previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen.

• Select [Recipient Name/E-mail Address], and select [Show Details] to bring up the [Details] screen.

For information about Remote Search, refer to "Address Search (Directory Service)" (P.256).

Opening the Local Address List


2 When the Address Book screen appears, select [Local Address List].

3 In the [Go to], use the numeric keypad to enter a 3 digit Address Number.

4 The specified number is displayed at the top of the list. Specify the recipient from the displayed screen, and select either [To], [CC], or [BCC] for the recipient type.


• Select [Recipient Name/E-mail Address], and select [Show Details] to bring up the [Details] screen.

For information about settings of the Address Book, refer to "Address Book" (P.274).

Keyboard

Enter an address using the keyboard.

1 Select [Keyboard].

2 Select the recipient type by selecting [To/CC/BCC].

Note • The displayed recipient type changes when selecting the button.

3 Use the keyboard shown in the touch screen to specify a recipient up to 128 characters.

E-mail

111

Scan

4

Sender

This is used to add a recipient address to [To], [CC], or [BCC].

1 Select [Sender].

2 Select the recipient type.

Recipient Name/E-mail Address

You can confirm or change a recipient name or E-mail address selected.

Clear

Deletes the recipient.

1 Select the item to be deleted from [Recipient Name/E-mail Address].

2 Select [Clear] from the pop-up menu displayed.

Note • When selecting [Cancel], you can cancel the pop-up menu.

Change Settings

You can confirm or change the E-mail Address, Recipient Name, and S/MIME Certificate.

1 Select the item you want to confirm or change from [Recipient Name/E-mail Address].

2 Select [Change Settings] from the pop-up menu displayed.


3 Select the item to be set or changed, and select [Change Settings].

E-mail Address

Enter an E-mail address using the keyboard shown.

Recipient Name

Enter a recipient name using the keyboard shown.

If a recipient name has been registered in the Address Book, the recipient name appears.

4 Scan

112

Scan

4

S/MIME Certificate

You can confirm whether there is a linked certificate or not.

When S/MIME communication is available and an address is linked with a certificate, you can confirm the contents of the S/MIME certificate.For more information about S/MIME communication, refer to "S/MIME Settings" (P.241).

From

Set a sender's e-mail address.

You can specify only one address as a sender's address.Up to 128 characters are allowed.Note • When using the authorization feature, a mail address registered in user information is

automatically set. For more information about user information, refer to "Create/Check User Accounts" (P.280). When a digital signature is added, the mail address of the machine is entered in this field. If the mail address is changed, the digital signature becomes invalid.

1 Select [Address Book] or [Keyboard] from the pop-up menu that displayed by selecting [From].


2 If selecting [Keyboard], enter an e-mail address using the keyboard displayed.If selecting [Address Book], select an e-mail address from the address list displayed.

For more about the address book, refer to "Address Book" (P.109).

Subject

Set a Subject.

1 Select [Subject] and enter a subject using the keyboard displayed.

Note • When [Auto], the subject is [Scan data from XXX] (where XXX is the host name).

• Up to 128 characters are allowed.

Mail Contents

Enter a content of an E-mail.

1 Select [Mail Contents] and enter a content using the keyboard displayed.

Note • Up to 256 characters are allowed.

Scan to Mailbox

113

Scan

4

Scan to Mailbox

You can scan documents on the machine and save the scanned data to the machine’s mailbox. To use the Scan to Mailbox feature, select [Scan to Mailbox].An mailbox needs to be registered. For more information on registering a mailbox, refer to "Mailbox" (P.265).

1 Select [Scan to Mailbox] from the [All Services] screen.

2 In the [Save in:] screen, specify a mailbox to save the scanned data.

Note • If a password is set for the mailbox, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and select [Confirm]. If you have forgotten the password, reconfigure the mailbox password in System Administration mode.

Mailbox

Select the mailbox to store the scanned data. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Go to

Use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit mailbox number. That mailbox then appears at the top of the list.

Document List

Select a mailbox and select this button to confirm or delete documents stored in the mailbox.

Document List

You can confirm or delete documents stored in the mailbox.

1 Select [Document List].

2 Select the document to confirm or delete.

Note • If the scanned data is not displayed, select [Refresh].

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Document Name] or [Stored Date].

No of Docs:

When a mailbox is selected, and it contains documents, the number of stored documents is displayed.

Select All

Selected when deleting or printing all documents in the mailbox.

Print/Delete

Used to print or delete selected documents. You can also rename documents.Note • Scanned documents cannot be printed.

4 Scan

114

Scan

4

Network Scanning

Scans a document after specifying the file (job template) set with scanning conditions, information about the transfer destination server and other information.

Job templates are created on a computer using the job template utility of CentreWare Scan Service and stored on a server. Scanned data is converted to TIFF or JPEG format, and automatically sent to the server. The machine automatically receive the job template stored on the server.For information about CentreWare Scan Services, refer to the CentreWare Scan Services Installation Guide.

Note • CentreWare Scan Services (optional) is required to use this feature.

• This feature is only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

1 Select [Network Scanning] from the [All Services] screen.

Note • If a created job template is not displayed, select [Refresh].

2 Specify a job template.

Job Template

Select a job template that is configured with the scan parameters you want. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Go to

Entering a job template number via the numeric keypad causes that job template to appear at the top of the list.

Template Description

You can display a description of the job template.

Template Description

You can display a description of the job template. However, a description only appears if it has been set when the job template was created.

1 Select the job template, and select [Template Description].

Scan to FTP/SMB

115

Scan

4

Scan to FTP/SMB

You can convert scanned data to TIFF, DocuWorks, or PDF formats, and then use the FTP or SMB protocols to send the data to a computer on the network. For more information, refer to below.Note • Before scanning, a shared folder for saving scanned data must be created on the computer.

If a FTP protocol is used to transfer, the FTP service must be set. For information on the computer settings, refer to the documentation supplied with your operating system. For information on compatible operating systems, refer to "Scan Feature Specifications" (P.454).

• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Transfer Protocol...................................................................................................................... 115

Address Book ........................................................................................................................... 115

Specifying a Forward Destination............................................................................................ 116

1 Select [Scan to FTP/SMB] from the [All Services] screen.

Note • Fields displayed vary depending on the selected protocol.

2 Specify a forward destination from the [Save in] screen.

Transfer Protocol

Select [Transfer Protocol], and in the next screen, select either [FTP], [SMB], or [SMB (UNC Format)] as a transfer protocol. For information about each protocol, refer to "Specifying a Forward Destination" (P.116).

Address Book

You can select a server name, login name, etc. from the Address Book.


2 Select the recipient in which the data is stored.

Important • You can only use recipients configured for SMB or FTP. Mail addresses are not available.


For information about settings of the Address Book, refer to "Address Book" (P.274).

Details

In the screen that appears, you can confirm the [Recipient Name], [Transfer Protocol], [Server Name/IP Address], [Save in] etc.

4 Scan

116

Scan

4

Specifying a Forward Destination

Enter values for the fields appropriate to the selected protocol, and specify a forwarding destination to save to.

1 Select the item to be set.

Note • You can also choose [Address Book] to enter a recipient from the Address Book.

• To delete the characters, select [Backspace].

2 Enter values using the keyboard shown.

Note • Fields displayed vary depending on the selected protocol.

Server

Displayed when either [FTP] or [SMB] is selected. Enter either a server name or server IP address. Up to 64 characters are allowed.

Example: myhost.fujixerox.co.jp

(myhost: server name, fujixerox.co.jp: domain name)

Shared Name

Displayed when either [FTP] or [SMB] is selected. Enter a shared name. Up to 64 characters are allowed.

Save in:

Displayed when either [FTP] or [SMB] is selected. Enter a directory name. Up to 128 characters are allowed.

Save in:

Displayed when [SMB(UNC format)] is selected. Enter “\\Host Name\Shared Name\Directory Name”. Up to 260 characters are allowed.

Login Name

Enter the login name for the computer you are forwarding to. Up to 32 characters are allowed. When [SMB] is selected or no login name is required for a forward destination, this field can be skipped.

Password

Enter the password for the login name. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Basic Scanning

117

Scan

4

Basic Scanning

This screen is displayed in [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], and [Scan to FTP/SMB]. The Basic Scan screen allows you to configure basic features. For more information, refer to below.

Output Color (Selecting the Color to Scan) ............................................................................. 117

2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ........................................................ 118

Original Type (Select the Document Type) ............................................................................. 119

File Format (Selecting the Format of Scanned Data)............................................................... 119

Note • When selecting [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Output Format] cannot be set.

• When selecting [Network Scanning], settings for [Output Color] and [Output Format] in the job template cannot be changed.

1 On the [All Services] screen, select either [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to FTP/SMB].

2 Select the [Basic Scanning] tab.

Output Color (Selecting the Color to Scan)

You can set the output color for the documents to be scanned.

1 Select the output color from [Output Color].

Auto

The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine scans in full color when the document is colored, otherwise scans in monochrome.Note • The features which can be set in the [Image Quality] screen when [Auto] is selected, are the

same as if [Full Color] is specified for the [Output Color] when a color document is loaded, or the same as if [Black] is specified for the [Output Color] when a monochrome document is loaded.

Full Color

Choose to scan a color document.

Grayscale

Scan a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color).

Black

Scan a document in monochrome 2 tone. You can select the document type in the [Original Type].

4 Scan

118

Scan

4

2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)

You can automatically scan both sides of a 2 sided document.

When setting the binding style, front / back information can also be included in the scanned data.

1 Select any item.

1 Sided

Select to scan only 1 side of the document.

2 Sided (H to H)

Select when both sides of a 2 sided document are in the same position.

2 Sided (H to T)

Select when both sides of a 2 sided document are in opposite positions.

More...

The [2 Sided Originals] screen is displayed.Refer to "[2 Sided Originals] Screen" (P.118).

[2 Sided Originals] Screen

Select when you want to specify the document's orientation and scan both sides.

1 Select either [1 Sided] or [2 Sided].

2 When [2 Sided] is selected, select [Originals].


Originals

Displayed when [2 Sided] is selected in the Originals screen.

Head to Head

Select when both sides of a 2 sided document are in the same position.

Head to Toe

Select when both sides of a 2 sided document are in opposite positions.

Originals Orientation

To scan using the document feeder, the orientation must be set to indicate the top of the document.

Load the document in the [Head to Left] orientation when [File Format] is set to [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], [TIFF], or [JPEG]. When viewing scanned documents on a computer, the document is displayed in the right orientation.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the head of the document.

Basic Scanning

119

Scan

4

Head to Top

Select when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the document glass or the document feeder.

Head to Left

Select when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the document glass or the document feeder. Be sure to select [Head to Left] when the top of the document is placed facing the left side (horizontal text).

Original Type (Select the Document Type)

When scanning a document with [Output Color] set to [Black] in the [Basic Scanning] screen, select the document type.

1 Select [Original Type].

Text & Photo

Select when scanning documents containing both text and photos. This setting automatically scans text and photo areas with the optimum document quality per area.

Text

Select when scanning text clearly.

Photo

Select when scanning photos.

File Format (Selecting the Format of Scanned Data)

You can select the format of scanned data.Note • When selecting [Scan to Mailbox], [Output Format] cannot be set.

• If an High-compression Image Kit is installed, the machine can store PDF and DocuWorks files with higher compression rates.

1 Select the [File Format].

TIFF/JPEG Auto

Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page: [JPEG] for full color and grayscale images, [TIFF] for monochrome.

PDF

Saves as a PDF file.

4 Scan

120

Scan

4

DocuWorks

Saves as a DocuWorks file.Note • To browse or print a DocuWorks file on a computer, one of the following software is required.

- DocuWorks Ver. 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light Ver. 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web Ver. 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Ver. 3.x and DocuWorks Downgrader(V4 to V3)

Multi-page TIFF

Saves multiple pages as 1 TIFF file.

More...

The [File Format] screen is displayed.Refer to "[File Format] Screen" (P.120).

[File Format] Screen

You can select the other file formats here.

TIFF

Saves each page as a TIFF file.

JPEG

Saves as a JPEG file. When either [Full Color] or [Grayscale] are selected for [Output Color], configure the image compression method. You can also configure the compression ratio with the [Image Compression] in the [Output Format] screen.

PDF High Compression

Saves as a PDF file with a high compression rate.

DocuWorks High Compression

Saves as a DocuWorks file with a high compression rate.

When selecting [DocuWorks High Compression], you can create thumbnail images of the scanned data.Important • Creating thumbnail images increases the size of the scanned data. Check the size before

you send it by E-mail.

• DocuWorks 5.0.x and earlier versions (including trial version) do not support high-compressed DocuWorks files.

Note • To browse or print a DocuWorks file on a computer, one of the following software is required.- DocuWorks Viewer Light 5.1 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 5.1 or later

Thumbnail

Off

No thumbnail images are created.

On

Thumbnail images are created.

Image Quality

121

Scan

4

Image Quality

In the [Image Quality] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to FTP/SMB], you can configure the image features. For more information, refer to below.

Photograph Scanning (Scanning a Color Photograph)............................................................. 121

Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast) ........................................... 121

Sharpness (Adjusting Document Sharpness) ........................................................................... 122

Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents).............................................. 122

Background Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background) ...................................... 122

Color Space (Specifying Color Space)..................................................................................... 123


2 Select the [Image Quality] tab, and configure each feature.

Note • [Color Space] is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to activate [Color Space]. For more information, refer to "Color Space" (P.255).

Photograph Scanning (Scanning a Color Photograph)

Configure when scanning a color photograph.

This feature is only available when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color] in the [Basic Scanning] screen.Important • This feature is not supported by a document feeder.

1 Select [Photograph Scanning].

2 Select [On].

Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast)

You can set the scan density for the documents to be scanned.

In addition, when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color] or [Grayscale] in the [Basic Scanning] screen, you can also adjust contrast.

1 Select [Lighten / Darken / Contrast].


4 Scan

122

Scan

4

Lighten/Darken

You can select from among 7 density levels between [Lighter] and [Darker]. Scan density is darker the closer you get to [Darker], and lighter the closer you get to [Lighter].

Contrast

You can select from 5 levels between [Lower] and [Higher].The nearer the level is to [Higher], the greater the difference between light parts and dark parts as light parts become lighter and dark parts become darker. [Lower] contrasts decrease the difference between light and dark areas.

Sharpness (Adjusting Document Sharpness)

The contours of images can be made to look sharper or more blurred. Sharpness can be set in 5 levels from [Softer] to [Sharper].

1 Select [Sharpness].

2 Sharpness can be set in 5 levels from [Softer] to [Sharper].

Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents)

When a document is scanned in [Monochrome] or [Grayscale] for Output Color, scans can be made with the background color of the document such as newspapers or colored paper documents suppressed.

When [Output Color] is set to [Full Color], white backgrounds are suppressed.

1 Select [Auto Exposure].

2 Select [On].

Off

Document backgrounds are scanned with no filtering.

On

Document background color is suppressed when scanned.

Background Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)

When scanning a 2 sided document printed on thin paper, you can suppress the image on the reverse side.

Only enabled when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color] or [Grayscale] in the [Basic Scanning] screen.Important • This feature cannot be used with [Photograph Scanning].

Image Quality

123

Scan

4

1 Select [Background Suppression].

2 Select [On].

Color Space (Specifying Color Space)

You can specify color space for scans.Important • [Color Space] is available when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color].

Note • This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to display [Color Space] on the [Scan Options] screen. For more information, refer to "Color Space" (P.255).

1 Select [Color Space].

2 Select either [Standard] or [Device].

Standard

Color space for scanned data conforms to sYCC.

Device

Used to perform advanced color processing.Note • You can find profile data in the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.

• When [Device] is selected, the image quality features described below are changed to their defaults.Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Background Suppression, Contrast, Auto Exposure

• When [Output Color] is set to [Auto], [Standard] is applied to color pages of the documents.

4 Scan

124

Scan

4

Scan Options

In the [Scan Options] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to FTP/SMB], you can configure the scan options. For more information, refer to below.

Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)...............................................................124

2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document).........................................................118

Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) ...............................................124

Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size) ...................................................................................125

Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) .........................126

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .......................................127

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)........................................................................128


2 Select the [Scan Options] tab, and configure each feature.

Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)

You can set the resolution for the documents to be scanned.

As the resolution increases, the scan becomes more detailed, but the data size also increases. As the data size increases, scan and transfer times increase as well.

1 Select [Scan Resolution].

2 Select the resolution.

2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of the Document)

This feature is the same as [2 Sided Originals] in the [Image Quality] tab. For information, refer to "2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.118).

Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)

The Book Scanning feature allows you to scan facing pages of a document onto separate sheets of paper in page order.

This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans from facing pages of bound originals such as a booklet.Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.

• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

Scan Options

125

Scan

4

1 Select [Book Scanning].

2 Select any item.

Off

The document is not scanned as a bound document.


Scans from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left page.


Scans from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the right page.


Scans from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top page.

Both Pages

Scans both pages in page order.

Left Page Only

Scans the left page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Right Page Only

Scans the right page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Top Page Only

Scans the top page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Bottom Page Only

Scans the bottom page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Binding Erase


Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)

You can set the scan size for the document.

Specify the scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when making scans at a size different from the size of the currently loaded document.

When a document size is specified, it is scanned at the specified size regardless of the size of the loaded document. This feature allows you to scan the document with adding or deleting the margin.

4 Scan

126

Scan

4

1 Select [Scan Size].

2 Select a size.

Auto Size Detect

Scan sizes are detected automatically. The machine can detect the following document sizes.

Note • If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

• You can change document sizes that can be detected automatically on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "Paper Size Settings" (P.222).

Standard Size

Select a document size from a list of 11 pre-configured types.

Free Size

Enter the desired scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document. Set the size in the document glass X (horizontal) direction within the range 15 to 432 mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments. The scale on the outside of the document glass is a useful reference for specifying the document size.

Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)

When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents with the sizes matching the respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper so that scanning is made on the same size of paper.Important • When selecting [Full Color] for [Output Color], and [2 Sided] for [2 Sided Originals], set the

[Scan Resolution] to a maximum of [400dpi].

• Be sure to load A5 documents vertically.

• When loading a B5 size document with A3 or A4 size documents in a vertical direction, place the B5 document also in a vertical direction.

• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5 portrait and B4 landscape. If the combination of the document sizes is not our recommendation, the documents can be fed at an angle may not be copied properly.


• When setting the [Reduce/Enlarge] to [Auto %] and specifying an [Output Size], the scan is performed with automatic reduce/enlarge to the specified size.

• If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

Document feeder Document Glass

Document size B5, B5 , B4, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11 inches, 8.5 x 11 inches , 11 x 17 inches, 16K , 8K

B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11 inches , 16K, 16K , 8k

Scan Options

127

Scan

4

1 Select [Mixed Size Originals].

2 Select [On].

Off

Select this item when all documents are of the same size.

On

When scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document)

When you scan the document cover open or scan a book, black shadows sometimes appear along the edges or center margin of the output scanned image. If this happens, you can scan with the shadows erased.Note • When making 2 sided scans, the same border erase amount is set to the top and reverse

sides.

• When selecting [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase dimensions will be reduced or enlarged in proportion to the ratio you configured.



3 Use [ ] and [ ] to set the width to erase for each of the top and bottom, left and right, and center.


Normal

The border erase amount is set to 2 mm for the top, bottom, left and right.

If you do not want to erase edges, set each [Edge Erase] value to 0 mm.

Edge Erase

You can erase only the amount necessary.

Top & Bottom Erase

Shadows at the top and bottom of the document are erased. Edges at the top and bottom are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. The edge erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Left & Right Erase

Shadows on the left and right of the document are erased. Edges on the left and right are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. The edge erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Binding Erase

Shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages are erased. The binding erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

4 Scan

128

Scan

4

Original Orientation

In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the set document must be configured.For more information, refer to "Originals Orientation" (P.118).

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)

You can set the scanning ratio for the documents to be scanned.

1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge].

2 Select the scanning ratio.

100%

Scan is made at the same size as the document.

Preset % (7 types)

Select from among 7 preset ratios.You can change the indicated ratios. For more information, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.254).

Variable %

You can scan by selecting a variable ratio. The ratio can be set within the range 25 - 400% in 1% increments.

Auto %

Automatically sets the scanning ratio based on the document size and specified [Output Size].Note • White space after scanning with [Auto %] is blank data.

Output Format

129

Scan

4

Output Format

In the [Output Format] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to FTP/SMB], you can configure the output formats. For more information, refer to below.

Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio) ............................................. 129

Read Status (MDN).................................................................................................................. 130

Split Send (Sending in Sections).............................................................................................. 130

File Name (Specifying a Filename to Save)............................................................................. 130

Reply To (Set the Address for Reply)...................................................................................... 130

File Name Conflict (Setting Procedures When a File Name is Overlapped)........................... 131

Document Name (Specifying a Filename to Save to) .............................................................. 131

Encryption (Sending Encrypted E-mail by S/MIME).............................................................. 132

Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) .............................. 132


2 Select the [Output Format] tab.

Note • Fields displayed vary depending on the selected feature.

Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio)

When scanning a document from the [Basic Scan] screen with [Output Color] set to [Full Color] or [Grayscale], select the image compression ratio.

1 Select [Image Compression].

2 You can select from among 5 levels of compression, including the 3 below.

Note • If an High-compression Image Kit is installed, and when [PDF High Compression] or [DocuWorks High Compression] is selected for [Output Format], 3 image compression levels are available.

High

Image is saved with high compression. Image quality degrades, but file size decreases.

Normal

Image is saved with standard compression. Results in a standard image quality and file size.

Low

Image is saved with low compression. Image quality improves, but file size increases.

4 Scan

130

Scan

4

Read Status (MDN)

When using the [E-mail] feature, you can configure mail send results to inform you of whether the recipient has read the message. The recipient must support the MDN feature.Note • When multiple mails are sent using [Split Send], then Read Status is requested for each

mail.

• The return e-mail recipient is the [Reply To] address if the [Reply To] address is defined. Otherwise, the return recipient is the [From] address.

• This feature is only available when the settings of the recipient is set to return to the read status.

1 Select [Read Status (MDN)].

2 Select [On].

Split Send (Sending in Sections)

When using the [E-mail] feature, you can split a large attachment by pages, and send as separate e-mails. You can also configure the machine not to split.For information about setting for page division, refer to"Max No. of Pages for Split Send" (P.261).

Note • [Split Send] is only available when the [File Format] in the [Basic Scanning] screen is set to [PDF], [DocuWorks], or [Multi-page TIFF].

1 Select [Split Send].

2 Select [Split by page].

File Name (Specifying a Filename to Save)

When using the [E-mail] or [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify the name of the file to save to. Up to 28 characters are allowed.

1 Select [File name].

2 Enter a filename using the keyboard shown.

Note • When saving each page as a one file, the page number is added to the end of the file name.

• When specifying a job template, the file name is taken from the template, and cannot be changed.

Reply To (Set the Address for Reply)

When using the [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify the address for reply.

1 Select [Reply To].

2 Enter an address for reply.

Output Format

131

Scan

4

Clear Field

Deletes address entered in [Reply To].

Enter Sender's Address

The address set in [From] is entered as a reply address.Note • When an address is entered in [From] on the [E-mail] screen, you can select [Enter Sender's

Address].

Address Book

For more information, refer to "Address Book" (P.109).

File Name Conflict (Setting Procedures When a File Name is Overlapped)

When using the [Scan to FTP/SMB] feature, you can set the procedure when file name is overlapped with another file mane store in the mailbox specified.

1 Select [File Name Conflict].

2 Select any item.

Cancel Job

If a file of the same name already exists in the forwarding destination, cancel the job and do not save.

Change Name and Save

If a file of the same name already exists in the forwarding destination, automatically change the file name and save. The machine adds a number from 0001-9999 to the end of the file name.

Overwrite Name and Save

Replace the existing file with the new one and save.

Document Name (Specifying a Filename to Save to)

When using the [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify the name of the document to save to. Up to 28 characters are allowed.

1 Select [Document Name].

2 Enter a filename using the keyboard shown.

Note • When specifying a job template, the document name is taken from the template, and cannot be changed.

4 Scan

132

Scan

4

Encryption (Sending Encrypted E-mail by S/MIME)

When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send encrypted E-mail by S/MIME.

When sending encrypted E-mail, select an mail address with a certificate that can be encrypted from the Address Book.Note • To display [Encryption] on the [E-mail] tab, S/MIME communication must be enabled. For

more information, refer to "S/MIME Settings" (P.241).

1 Select [Encryption].

2 Select [Off] or [On].

Off

Send an e-mail without encryption.

On

Send an e-mail with encryption.

Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)

When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send E-mail with a digital signature by S/MIME.

Digital Signature allows a recipient to confirm whether contents of the E-mail are changed, or whether the E-mail is sent from a proper sender or not.Note • To display [Digital Signature] on the [E-mail] tab, S/MIME communication must be enabled.

For more information, refer to "S/MIME Settings" (P.241).

To use this feature, the machine mail address must be linked to a certificate.For information, refer to "Device Certificate - S/MIME" (P.241).

1 Select [Digital Signature].


Off

Send an e-mail without a digital signature.

On

Send an e-mail with a digital signature.

5 Check Mailbox

This chapter describes the mailbox and [Check Mailbox] screen.Note • The check mailbox feature is not available for some models. An optional package is

necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Check Mailbox Procedure.........................................................................134

Selecting a Mailbox...................................................................................136

Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ..................................................137

Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox .............................................138

Configuring/Starting Job Flow...................................................................139

5 Check Mailbox

134

Ch

eck Mailb

ox

5

Check Mailbox Procedure

This section describes basic procedures for Check Mailbox. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Step 1 Opening the [Check Mailbox] Screen............................................................................134

Step 2 Selecting the Mailbox ....................................................................................................134

Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ......................................................................134

Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents......................................................................................135

Step 1 Opening the [Check Mailbox] Screen

Follow the procedure below to open the [Check Mailbox] screen.Note • Features displayed may vary according to the machine's configuration.


2 Display the next screen, and select [Check Mailbox].

Step 2 Selecting the Mailbox

Access to the selected mailbox may be restricted, depending on the authorization settings.For information about selectable mailboxes depending on the authorization feature, refer to "Types of Mailboxes" (P.327).

1 Select a mailbox.


For information about the [Check Mailbox] screen, refer to "Selecting a Mailbox" (P.136).

Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents

1 Select a document.

For information about the [Document List] screen, refer to "Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents" (P.137).


Check Mailbox Procedure

135

Ch

eck Mailb

ox

5

Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents

The following shows the reference sections for operations available in the [Check Mailbox] screen.

Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox .......................................................................... 138

Configuring/Starting Job Flow................................................................................................. 139

5 Check Mailbox

136

Ch

eck Mailb

ox

5

Selecting a Mailbox

Access to the selected mailbox may be restricted, depending on user authorization settings.For information about selectable mailboxes depending on the authorization feature, refer to "Types of Mailboxes" (P.327).

1 Select a mailbox.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. You can directly access a mailbox by entering a three-digit mailbox number in the [Go to] with the numeric keypad.

• An arrow is displayed next to mailboxes that have a linked job flow, and which have been configured for auto start.

• When a mailbox is selected, and it contains documents, the number of stored documents is indicated in [No. of Docs.] in the lower right area of the screen.

• If a password entry screen appears, enter the password and select the [Confirm] button.


Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents

137

Ch

eck Mailb

ox

5

Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents

1 Select a document.

Note • The number of documents saved is displayed in [No. of Docs.].

• Select [Refresh] to display the updated information.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. When [Select All] is selected, all documents in the mailbox are selected. Selection will be canceled if the button is selected again.

• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Doc. Name] or [Stored Date].

• At the left of the document name, an icon showing the document contents is displayed.: Scanned document: Printed document

When selecting printed documents, [Job Flow Settings] cannot be selected.

• Up to 9 documents can be selected separately. You can also select all documents. When selecting individual documents, a number appears to the left of the document icon indicating the order in which it was selected. Documents are processed in this order.

5 Check Mailbox

138

Ch

eck Mailb

ox

5

Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox

1 Select a document to be processed and select [Print/Delete].

2 To print a document, select [Print]. To delete a document, select [Delete].

Note • Selecting [Change Doc. Name] allows you to rename the document. However, this is unavailable when multiple documents are selected.

• Selecting [Print Settings] allows you to change the print settings for the selected document. For the items in the Print Settings, refer to "Print Settings" (P.138).

Print Settings

Batch Print

You can set butch printing.

When selecting [Batch Print], multiple documents can be printed as one document. Documents are connected in selected order.

Quantity

Change the number of sets to be printed.

Paper Supply

Select paper for printing.

2 Sided Print

Select settings for 2-sided printing.

Stapling/Hole-Punching

Select setting for stapling and punching.

Configuring/Starting Job Flow

139

Ch

eck Mailb

ox

5


The following shows the reference sections for operations available in [Job Flow Setting].

Creating a Job Flow.................................................................................................................. 139

Job Flow Restrictions ............................................................................................................... 142

Creating a Job Flow

Job Flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.

A job flow operates on documents stored in a mailbox, and are started in the following ways: 1) manually or automatically start a job flow when a document is stored to a mailbox, or 2) select a job flow to act on documents stored in the mailbox.

To start a job flow automatically, you must first link a mailbox with the job flow. Documents are automatically processed by the job flow when they stored in the mailbox.Important • If the authentication feature is not used, a job flow created from [Check Mailbox] can only be

used/edited/duplicated/deleted in the mailbox where the job flow is created. These types of job flows are not displayed in the [Job Flow Sheets] screen. When using the authentication feature, job flows whose owners are authenticated are displayed on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.

Features that can be registered are listed below.

Forward

Multiple forward recipients can be configured for each forwarding method.Important • Forward via FTP, SMB, and E-mail are only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

FTP

Forward via FTP. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.

SMB

Forward via SMB. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.

E-Mail

Forward via E-mail. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.

Print

Prints documents stored in a mailbox.



5 Check Mailbox

140

Ch

eck Mailb

ox

5

2 Display the next screen, and select [Check Mailbox].

3 Select a mailbox and select [Document List].

4 Select [Job Flow Settings].

Note • To operate a job flow on a document, select the target document before selecting this button.


• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Doc. Name] or [Stored Date].

5 Perform a job flow.

Auto Start

Select auto start of a job flow to a document stored in a mailbox. If this box is checked, the job flow automatically starts when a document is stored.

Start

Select documents from the mailbox and select this button to start the job flow linked to this mailbox.Important • Always print the job history report to confirm the results after executing a job flow. For

information about the job history report, refer to "Job Status" (P.310).

Cut Link

Cancels the link between a mailbox and its job flow.

Create/Change Link

[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen" (P.141).

Select Job Flow Sheet

When selecting this button while documents are selected, the [Select Job Flow Sheet] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen" (P.142).


141

Ch

eck Mailb

ox

5

[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen

You can cancel the link between a mailbox and its job flow.Note • Creating and canceling links, and auto start settings can also be performed when creating a

mailbox.

1 Select a job flow to link, and select [Save].

Important • No link is created when selecting [Close] without selecting a job flow. If the selected job flow is already linked, then the link is cancelled.


• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Name] or [Last Updated].

• At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed.: Mailbox Document

Sheet Filtering

The [Sheet Filtering] screen appears.For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.141).

Create

The [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen appears.For more information, refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.269).

Details

The [Details] screen appears.For more information, refer to "Edit/Delete" (P.273).

[Sheet Filtering] Screen

You can filter the job flows displayed. Screen display may vary, depending on authorization feature settings.Displayed job flows may vary depending on authorization features. Refer to "Job Flow Sheet Types" (P.323).

1 Select the filtering conditions, then select [Save].

Note • Job flow sheets whose [Job Flow Target] is [Mailbox] are only displayed on [Check Mailbox].

5 Check Mailbox

142

Ch

eck Mailb

ox

5

[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen

For a selected document, you can specify a job flow and start it.

1 Select the job flow, and press the <Start> button.



• At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed.: Mailbox Document

Sheet Filtering

The [Sheet Filtering] screen appears.For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.141).

Create

The [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen appears.For more information, refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.269).

Details

The [Details] screen appears.For more information, refer to "Edit/Delete" (P.273).

Edit Destination

If the selected job flow sheet setting is editable, the [Edit] screen appears. You can temporarily change the settings.Important • This feature is only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

For information, refer to "Confirming/Changing Job Flow" (P.147).

Job Flow Restrictions

Job flows can be assigned to an individual, shared by many users, or only accessible from the specified mailbox to which they are linked.Job flow restrictions may vary depending on authorization features. For information, refer to "Job Flow Sheet Types" (P.323).

6 Job Flow Sheets

This chapter describes scan operations using a job flow created on a network computer and registered with the machine. The [Job Flow Sheets] screen is also explained.

Job flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.Important • This feature is only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

Job Flow Procedure..................................................................................144

Job Flow List .............................................................................................146

Confirming/Changing Job Flow.................................................................147

6 Job Flow Sheets

144

Job

Flo

w S

heets

6

Job Flow Procedure

The following shows the reference sections for Job flow procedures.Important • This feature is only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

Step 1 Displaying the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ......................................................................144

Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow ......................................................................................................144

Step 3 Confirming/Changing a Job Flow..................................................................................145

Step 4 Starting a Job Flow ........................................................................................................145

Step 1 Displaying the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen

Follow the procedure below to open the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.Note • Features displayed may vary from device model to model.


2 Display the next screen, and select [Job Flow Sheets].

Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow

1 Select a job flow.

Note • Job flow made at [Check Mailbox] or [Mailbox] is displayed in the list when you login as system administrator.

For more information about [Job Flow Sheets] screen, refer to "Job Flow List" (P.146).


Job Flow Procedure

145

Job

Flo

w S

heets

6

Step 3 Confirming/Changing a Job Flow


2 To confirm job flow contents, select [Details]. To change contents, select [Edit].

For more information about configuring and changing job flow, refer to "Confirming/Changing Job Flow" (P.147).

Step 4 Starting a Job Flow

1 Load the document.

Note • A job flow containing application linkage does not require loading documents.


Important • Always print the job history report to confirm the results after executing a job flow. For information about job history reports, refer to "Job Status" (P.310).

6 Job Flow Sheets

146

Job

Flo

w S

heets

6

Job Flow List

Job flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.

When using CentreWare EasyOperator to select registered job flows on a network computer, select job flows from this list.Note • To enable communication with network computers, the [SOAP port] on this device must be

opened.

• Job flows created on a network computer or stored in a pool server cannot be changed/duplicated/deleted. However, fields that allow changes can be temporarily changed and used.

For information about port settings, refer to "Port Settings" (P.238).

Job Flow Sheet Filtering

You can filter the Job flows displayed. The screen display depends on the user authentication feature settings.Displayed job flows may vary depending on authorization features. Refer to "Job Flow Sheet Types" (P.323).

1 Select [Sheet Filtering].

Note • Select [Refresh] to display the updated information.



2 Select the filtering conditions for job flow sheets displayed, then select [Save].

Note • Job flows whose [Job Flow Target] is [Mailbox] cannot be used in [Job Flow Sheet].

• When a pool server is set, [Pool Server] in [Save Sheets in] is available. For information about the feature, refer to "Job Flow Settings" (P.264).

Confirming/Changing Job Flow

147

Job

Flo

w S

heets

6

Confirming/Changing Job Flow

You can confirm a job flow and temporarily change its parameters. However, only fields that have been give change permission when the Job Flow was created can be edited.





2 To confirm job flow contents, select [Details]. To change contents, select [Edit].

3 Select the group from the [Group of Items], and select [Change Settings].

Note • Data included in the job flow is displayed in the [Group of Items].

4 Select the items to be changed and select [Change Settings].

Note • A triangle icon appears at the left of groups that have mandatory fields.

• Data included in the job flow is displayed in the [Items] and [Current Settings].

5 Contents of the displayed screen vary according to the settings. You can make changes on this screen.


This chapter describes the Stored Programming features provided by the machine.

Stored Programming Overview.................................................................150

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................151

Calling Stored Programs...........................................................................154


150

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Stored Programming Overview

Frequently used features can be registered as Stored Programming and recalled by a single button operation. In addition, you can also register a screen to open from a shortcut button.

Stored Programming not only remembers feature settings, but also can record a series of operations. This enables you to record the hierarchy of displayed screens for each step.

For example, Stored Programming can be used when you want to record a procedure starting from pressing the <Machine Status> button, to displaying the [Report Job] screen to print a job history report.

The following shows the reference sections for registering and recalling stored programs.

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................................................151

Calling Stored Programs ...........................................................................................................154

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs

151

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7


The [Stored Programming] screen allows you to set the following items:Registering Stored Programs.................................................................................................... 151

Deleting Stored Programs ........................................................................................................ 152

Entering/Changing Stored Program Name............................................................................... 152

Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs...................................................................... 153


2 Select [Setup Menu].

3 Select [Stored Programming].

Registering Stored Programs

Up to 58 actions can be registered with one stored program. Up to 40 stored programs can be registered in the machine.

Below describes the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.Important • If registered settings such as tray paper size and comments, or default values in the system

settings are changed after a stored program is registered, then the program's content also changes.

Note • Services using System Settings, Job Flow Sheet, Network Scanning, or Address Book cannot be registered.

• The registering procedure for a stored program is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (paper jam, etc.) appears.

1 Select [Store].

2 Select the number to register.

Note • Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot be overwritten.


3 Set the feature you want to register.

Note • The machine produces an audible tone while a stored memory is registered.

4 Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For more information, refer to "Stored Programming Tone" (P.208).


152

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Deleting Stored Programs

Below describes the procedure for deleting stored programs.

1 Select [Delete].

2 Select the number to delete.


3 Select [Yes].

Yes

Deletes a stored program.Note • Deleted stored programs cannot be restored.

No

Cancels deleting a stored program.

Entering/Changing Stored Program Name

Below describes the procedure for entering or changing a name of a stored program.

Up to 18 characters are allowed for a stored program's name.For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.203).

1 Select [Enter/Change Name].

2 Select the number to register or change a name.


3 Enter a name, and select [Save].


153

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs

Below describes the procedure for assigning or changing a icon of a stored program.

Nine icons are available.

1 Select [Assign/Change Icon].

2 Select the number to assign or change a icon.


3 Select a icon, and select [Save].


154

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Calling Stored Programs

This describes the procedure for calling a stored program.

When calling a specified stored program, the last screen shown when you registered the stored programming appears.


2 Display the next screen, and select [Stored Programming].

3 Select the number of a stored program containing the features you want to use.

Note • You can only select registered numbers.


4 After a stored program is called, select other features if necessary.

5 Press the <Start> button if necessary.


<Start> button


This chapter describes operations performed from a personal computer, such as printing, importing scan documents, as well as using CentreWare Internet Services.Note • Features described in this section are not available for some models. An optional

package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• The computer screen images shown in this section are as of February 2005.

Overview of Features................................................................................156

Printing......................................................................................................161

E-mail Printing ..........................................................................................162

Importing Scanned Data ...........................................................................164


156

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

Overview of Features

This section describes an overview of features available on a computer.

Print Driver

In order to print from your computer, a print driver must be installed on the computer.For instructions on installing a print driver, refer to the manual contained in the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.

Print Driver Screen

Main Features

The major print features of the machine are the followings:To learn about other print features, click [Help] in the print driver screen and refer to the print driver's online help. For information about how to print, refer to "Printing" (P.161).

Note • In the [Printer] tab of the properties, there are some features that cannot be used without configuring optional settings. Unavailable features are disabled in gray.

Multiple Up

Prints multiple pages onto 1 sheet of paper.

2 Sided Print

Data is printed on both sides of paper.

Poster

Splits 1 page of print data into multiple sheets of paper and expands the printed image to fit the size of each sheet. Used when making large posters, etc.

Booklet

Two sided printing and page allocation are carried out for printing a booklet with a correct page order.

Warning

Do not use the included CD-ROM with any device other than a compatible CD-ROM player. Excessive audio volume could lead to ear damage, or damage to speakers.


157

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

Transparency Separators

A blank sheet of paper is automatically inserted as a separator each time when a transparency is printed.

Stamp

Prints fixed text, such as “Confidential”, over the print data.

Secure Print

Temporarily stores the print data on the machine, and waits for a print command from the device before printing. Used when printing confidential documents, etc.For information about how to print, refer to "Secure Print" (P.294).

Sample Print

When printing multiple sets of a document, you can first print 1 copy for confirmation, and then print the rest from the machine.For information about how to print, refer to "Sample Print" (P.296).

Delayed Print

Temporarily stores the print data on the machine, and prints the data at specified time.For information about how to print, refer to "Delayed Print" (P.297).

Charge Print

Temporarily stores the print data on the machine for each UserID, and waits for a print command from the machine before printing.For information about how to setup charge printing, refer to "Charge Print Settings" (P.285). For information about how to print, refer to "Charge Print" (P.293).

E-mail Print

Receives e-mail with TIFF or PDF documents attached from a computer. Received e-mail is automatically printed.For more information, refer to "E-mail Printing" (P.162).

Network Scanner Utility 2

Using Network Scan Utility 2, you can import scan documents stored on the device's mailbox onto a network computer.

There are 2 types of Network Scanner Utility 2:

Note • Use the included CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM to install Network Scanner Utility 2.

Network Scan Driver Mailbox Viewer 2


158

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

Network Scan Driver

The Network Scan Driver is used to allow client-side application software to import documents (scan data) stored on the machine's mailbox via the network.For more information, refer to "Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application" (P.164).

Mailbox Viewer 2

The Mailbox Viewer 2 is used to import documents stored in the machine's mailbox without using any application software.For more information, refer to "Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2" (P.166).

CentreWare Internet Services

CentreWare Internet Services requires a TCP/IP environment, and enables you to view the status of the machine and its jobs, as well as change settings via a web browser. You can also import documents saved in a mailbox.For information about importing documents, refer to "Importing using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.168).

An explanation of CentreWare Internet Services is also provided in the Network Administrator Guide.

CentreWare Internet Services Screen

The [CentreWare Internet Services] screen is made up of 4 frames (divided windows).At the top and bottom are frames that occupy the full width of the browser. Between those are 2 frames on the left and right. The contents displayed in each frame change depending on the feature in use (services, jobs, status, properties, maintenance, support).Note • You can read explanations of CentreWare Internet Services via the online help by clicking

on [Help] in the top frame.

Top Frame

This frame appears at the top of the window. It includes the logo, the machine name, a link to online help, and tabs (links) to each feature.For information about each feature provided by CentreWare Internet Services, click [Help] in this frame and refer to the displayed help.

Right Frame, Upper Left Frame

Contents of the right frame and upper left frame change depending on the selected feature. When a feature is selected, configurable features and information are displayed in the right frame and upper left frame.

A link to the Copyright screen is displayed in the [Status] tab.

Top Frame

Right FrameUpper Left Frame

Lower Left Frame


159

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

Lower Left Frame

A link to the Fuji Xerox home page is shown.

Main features provided by CentreWare Internet Services are listed below.

Note • Some field settings only take effect after a reboot (after power cycle of the machine, or after changing a system setting from the control panel).

• When a setting is changed from CentreWare Internet Services during operating the control panel, the setting items changed on the screen of the control panel are not displayed. Power-cycle the printer in this case.

• A user name and password is required to make changes to system administrator settings. The default user name is “11111”. The default password is “x-admin”.

Browser

CentreWare Internet Services supports the following browsers:

For Windows OS

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack1 or later

Netscape 7.0 or later

For MacOS X 10.2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.2 or later

Netscape 7.0 or later

Browser Settings

Before using this service, check the following settings in your browser.

The configuration procedure for Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 is described below.

1 Select [Internet Options] from the [Tools] menu.

Tab name Main features

Services Print CommandPrints a specified file on your PC.

Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package isnecessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Jobs Job List, Job History Report, Deletes Jobs

Status Display Device StatusDisplays the status of paper tray, output tray, and consumables such astoner.Reboot by system administrator

Properties Display and configuration of the below properties Device information and date/time settings, memory and print languagedevice configuration display, counter display, paper tray settings, papersettings, power saver mode settings, mailbox edit, Job Flow edit, securitysettings, ID management, mail notification settings, Auditron settings,Internet Services settings, port settingsPort SettingsProtocol SettingsEmulation SettingsMemory Allocation

Maintenance Display Error History

Support Display Support Data


160

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

2 In the [General] tab, click [Settings] in [Temporary Internet Files].

3 In the [Settings] dialog box, set [Check for newer versions of stored pages:] to either [Every visit to the page] or [Every time you start Internet Explorer].

4 Click [OK].

Proxy Server and Port Numbers

This describes proxy server settings and port numbers when using this service.

Proxy Server

We recommend that you use this service by connecting directly, and not using a proxy server.Note • If using a proxy server, specifying the machine's IP address in the browser results in slower

responses, and could prevent some screens from appearing. In this case, it is necessary to configure the machine's IP address on the browser-side without going through a proxy server. Refer to your browser's documentation for configuration instructions.

Port Number

This service is configured to use port “80” by default. The port number can be changed in [Properties] > [Protocol Settings] > [HTTP]. Usable ports are “1” - “65535”.

If you change the port to a value other than “80”, you must add “:” and the port number after the IP address when typing the URL into your browser.

For example, if the port number is “8080”, the URL is:

http://[the machine's IP address]:8080/

or

http://[the machine's Internet address]:8080/

You can verify the port number in [Settings List] > [Maintenance]. For information about the [Setting List], refer to "Settings List - Common Items" (P.310).

Note • If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with “https” instead of “http” to access CentreWare Internet Services.

Starting CentreWare Internet Services

To use this service, perform the following procedure on your computer.

1 Start up the computer and the browser.

2 Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press the “Enter” key.

Note • If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered in the domain name server, you can access the device using a combination of the host name and the domain name as an “Internet address”. For example, if the host name is “myhost”, and the domain name is “fujixerox.com”, then the Internet address is “myhost.fujixerox.com”.

• Contact your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address to enter.

• When specifying a port number, add “:” and a port number to the end of the Internet address.

• If using the authorization feature on the machine, enter a UserID and Password into the [User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the UserID and Password.

• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with “https” instead of “http” to access CentreWare Internet Services.

Printing

161

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

Printing

This section describes print procedures.Print procedures vary depending on the application software you are using. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the application.

To learn about print features, click [Help] in the print driver screen and refer to the print driver’s online help.

1 Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.

2 Confirm the [Printer Name] and click [Properties] if necessary.

3 Configure the properties if necessary.

4 Click [OK].

5 Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.


162

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

E-mail Printing

You can send e-mail with TIFF or PDF documents attached from a computer to the machine. Received e-mail is automatically printed. This feature is called “E-mail Printing”.Note • This feature is only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

Setup

To use the E-mail Printing feature, the following setup is necessary. Check with your system administrator or network administrator whether these settings have been completed.

Network Environment Settings

Register a user account.

E-mail Environment Settings

Configure the port, machine's e-mail address, TCP/IP environment, e-mail server, etc.For information about Network Settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

Login Setup/Auditron Administration Settings

When a print job is in effect of the Login Setup/Auditron Administration, set [Non-Account Print] to [enable] for [Auditron Settings] in the [Properties] tab ofthe CentreWare Internet Services.

Sending E-mail

This example describes how to use Outlook Express to send e-mail from a computer to each printer.

1 Use your e-mail client to create the e-mail body, and then attach a TIFF or PDF document if available.

Important • Only plain text is permitted in the e-mail body. Change the body text format to plain text from within your e-mail client.

Note • Attached files whose extension is not “.tif” or “.pdf” may not print correctly.

• Up to 31 documents can be attached.

2 Enter the machine's e-mail address for a recipient.

E-mail Printing

163

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

3 Send the e-mail.

Note • The printer prints the attached documents with the following settings: Offset output specification is disabled in both cases.TIFF formatted attached file:Default values of a logical printer configured by [Memory Allocation Settings] of [TIFF] in [Emulation Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services.PDF formatted attached file:Settings of the PDF direct print when [Print Processing Mode] of the PDF direct print is set to [PDF Bridge].Default values of a logical printer configured by [Logical Printer Number] of [PostScript] in [Emulation Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services when [Print Processing Mode] of the PDF direct print is set to [PS].


164

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

Importing Scanned Data

There are 4 methods for importing documents from a machine mailbox to your computer.

Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application .................................................................164

Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2............................................................................................166

Importing using CentreWare Internet Services.........................................................................168

Import using WebDAV protocol...............................................................................................170

These procedures are described below.

Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application

The following describes methods for using application software to import a document stored on a machine mailbox.

The Network Scan Driver is used to import stored documents.

The Network Scan Driver is used to allow client-side application software to import documents (scan data) stored on the machine's mailbox via the network.For instructions on installing the Network Scan Driver, refer to the manual contained in the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.

To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] and refer to the Network Scan driver's online help.

1 Launch the application software to import the document.

Important • The application must support TWAIN. TWAIN is a standard for scanners and other input devices.

Note • For information about supported applications, refer to the “Readme” contained in the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.

2 From the [File] menu, select the command to choose the scanner (source).

3 Select [FX Network Scan], and click [Select].

4 From the [File] menu, select the command to import the image from the scanner.

5 From the displayed list, click the scanner name of the machine, and click [Select Scanner].

Note • If no items are shown in the list, click [Refresh]. The application searches for scanners.

• Click [Options] to change the way scanner names are displayed.

• Only scanners connected to the same network are automatically shown in the list. To view scanners from other networks, click [Options] and change the settings. For information about changing settings, refer to "Changing Network Scan Driver Settings" (P.166).


165

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

6 In the [Mailbox No.] field, input the mailbox number (001 - 500) that contains the document you want to import, and input a password (up to 20 digits) into the [Password] field.

Note • When you check the [Save Password] check box, you can skip steps 5 to 7 the next time you select the same mailbox.

• Clicking [Change Scanner] returns to step 5, where you can reselect a scanner.

7 Click [Open Mailbox].

8 Select a document to import from the list, and click [Import].

Note • You can select one or more documents.

• [Import], [Update], and [Delete] are available from the menu that appears when you right-click the list.

When import begins, a dialog appears like the one shown at right. Scan data is forwarded from the mailbox to the client.

Once forwarding ends, the document is loaded into the application software and is deleted from the mailbox.Note • If importing one page at a

time, documents that have pages not yet imported are shown in the list with a [*].

• With the exception of DocuWorks, for most applications, the Network Scan Driver expands the compressed data and passes it to the application as a BMP file.

• It can be configured not to delete the document in the mailbox after forwarding. For how to configure, refer to "Delete Documents After Retrieval" (P.266).


166

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

Changing Network Scan Driver SettingsTo learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] and refer to the Network Scan driver's online help.

Display Method for the Scanner Name

You can change the display method for the scanner name shown when that scanner is selected.

To change the scanner name display method, click [Options] in the scanner select dialog box and configure the display.

If a scanner is registered by [Scanner registration], the scanner in a different subnetwork can be displayed.

Import Method for Scanned Documents

You can change the display method and import method for documents when importing them from a mailbox.

To change the import method, click [Settings] in the document select dialog box, and configure the settings in the dialog box that appears.

Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2

The following describes methods for using Mailbox Viewer 2 to import a document stored on the machine's mailbox.

The Mailbox Viewer 2 is used to import documents stored in the machine's mailbox without using any application software.Important • Mailbox Viewer 2 does not support importing one document at a time. All documents stored

on the selected mailbox are imported.

For instructions on installing Mailbox Viewer 2, refer to the manual contained in the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.

To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] and refer to the Mailbox Viewer 2 online help.

1 Click [Start] and select [Programs] > [FujiXerox] > [Network Scanner Utility 2] > [Mailbox Viewer 2].

Note • When a different program folder was specified during installation, choose the specified name instead of [Network Scanner Utility 2].


167

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

2 From the displayed list, click the scanner name of the machine, and click [Select Scanner].

Note • If no items are shown in the list, click [Refresh]. The application searches for scanners.

• Click [Options] to change the way scanner names are displayed.

• Only when the machine is connected to the same network, the scanner name is automatically shown in the list. To view the machine connected to other networks, click [Options] and register an IP address and scanner name.

3 In the [Mailbox No.] field, input the mailbox number (001 - 500) that contains the document you want to import, and input a password (up to 20 digits) into the [Password] field.

Note • When you check the [Save Password] check box, you can skip steps 2 to 4 the next time you select the same mailbox.

• Clicking [Change Scanner] returns to step 2, where you can reselect a scanner.

4 Click [Open Mailbox].

5 Click [Import].

Important • Mailbox Viewer 2 does not support importing one document at a time. All documents stored on the selected mailbox are imported when you click [Import].

Note • To import documents, the [Auto Import] check box must be checked in the [Settings] dialog box.

For information about Mailbox Viewer 2 settings, refer to "Import Method for Scanned Documents" (P.168).

6 Clicking [Import] removes all stored documents from the mailbox, and saves them in the specified directory.

For information about directory service, refer to "Scan Settings" (P.168).


168

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

Changing Mailbox Viewer 2 SettingsTo learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] and refer to the Mailbox Viewer 2 online help.

Display Method for the Scanner Name

You can change the display method for the scanner name shown when that scanner is selected.

To change the scanner name display method, click [Options] in the scanner select dialog box and configure the display.

If a scanner is registered by [Scanner registration], the scanner in a different subnetwork can be displayed.

Import Method for Scanned Documents

You can change the display method and import method for documents when importing them from a mailbox.

To change the import method, click [Settings] in the document select dialog box, and configure the settings in the dialog box that appears.

Scan Settings

When [Auto Import] is checked, you can configure the import method for documents removed from the mailbox.

Importing using CentreWare Internet Services

Describes methods for importing documents stored on the machine's mailbox using CentreWare Internet Services.

Using CentreWare Internet Services, you can import documents stored in the machine's mailbox without using any application software.For an outline of CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.158).

1 Start up the host device and the browser.


169

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

2 Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press the “Enter” key.

Note • If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered in the domain name server, you can access the device using a combination of the host name and the domain name as an “Internet address”. For example, if the host name is “myhost”, and the domain name is “fujixerox.com”, then the Internet address is “myhost.fujixerox.com”.

• Contact your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address to enter.

• When specifying a port number, add “:” and a port number to the end of the Internet address.

• If using the authorization feature on the machine, enter a UserID and Password into the [User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the UserID and Password.

• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with “https” instead of “http” to access CentreWare Internet Services.

3 Select a [Mailbox] from the [Properties] tab.

4 In the [Mailbox Number] field, input the mailbox number (1 - 500) that contains the document you want to import, and input a password (up to 20 digits) into the [Password] field.

5 Click [Document List].

6 Place a check next to the documents to import, and click [Retrieve].

Note • To retrieve a color document as a JPEG, place a check next to [Retrieve Page], and specify the page number.

7 Click [Save this link].

To learn about operating details, click [Help] on the top frame and refer to the online help.


170

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

Import using WebDAV protocol

The following describes methods for using our application software such as CentreWare EasyOperator supporting WebDAV protocol to import a document stored on the machine's mailbox.

You can import documents stored in the machine’s mailbox without using any application software.

Since the WebDAV protocol uses a HTTP port, if HTTP communications is encrypted, communications for importing scanned documents using the WebDAV protocol is also encrypted.

To use the WebDAV protocol, the following ports must be activated at the machine in advance.

- SNMP- Internet Service (HTTP)- SOAP- WebDAV

Also, select UDP of transport protocol at SNMP port using CentreWare InternetServices after activating the ports above.For information about Network Settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide. For information about operation on application software, refer to your application software’s documentation.

This example describes how to use CentreWare EasyOperator to import a document stored on the machine's mailbox.

1 Click [Start] and select [Programs] > [FujiXerox] > [CentreWare EasyOperator] >[EasyOperator].

2 Add the machine’s mailbox to[Mailbox] on the left frame of thedisplayed window.

Add the machine’s mailbox storingdocuments you import.For information about operation of addinga mailbox, refer to the online help.

3 Click [Refresh] from the [View] menu.


171

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

8

4 Click [+] on the left of [Mailbox] todisplay the added mailbox.Select the added mailbox to displaythe documents on the right frame.

5 Click [Show Thumbnail] from the[View] menu to display thumbnails.

6 Select the document you import by referring the thumbnail.

7 Click [Retrieve] from the [Tools] menu.

8 On the [Browse...] dialogue box, specify where the document is to be stored then click[OK].


This chapter describes the types of paper that can be used on the machine, precautions when handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.

Paper Types .............................................................................................174

Loading Paper ..........................................................................................177

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays.....................................................183

Changing Paper Settings..........................................................................188


174

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

Paper Types

This section describes the kinds of paper available for this device.

Use of inappropriate paper may result in paper jams, cause reduced print quality, malfunctions and other trouble. To make full and effect use of the machine's performance, we recommend using only paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.

If you want to use paper not recommended by Fuji Xerox, contact our Customer Support Center.Important • The printed image may fade due to moisture such as water, rain or vapor. For more


Paper Type

Plain Paper (Printable Paper)

When using supplier paper (known as printable paper) for copying or printing, make sure that it complies with the following specifications. However, it is recommended that you use the standard paper types introduced on the next page, to achieve clear copy and print results.

Important • Printing with paper whose type or size differs from the paper specified by the print driver, or printing from a tray not supporting the loaded paper can result in paper jams. To ensure correct printing, select the correct paper size, paper type, and paper tray.

Note • Basic weight means a weight of 1 m2 of a paper sheet.

• Ream weight means weight of 1,000 sheets of paper in duodecimo size (788 x 1,091mm).

• When copying with a non-standard paper size from Tray 5 (bypass), you must manually enter the paper size. In addition, if you use a non-standard paper size often, you can preset the size in the device. Then the preset size appears under [Standard Sizes] in the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen. For more information, refer to "Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults" (P.214).

• You can set image quality processing. For more information, refer to "Image Quality" (P.213).

Paper tray Weight Loadable quantity

Paper tray 1 to 2 64 to 176 g/m2 560 sheets (Xerox P paper)

Tray 3 980 sheets (Xerox P paper)

Tray 4 1,280 sheets (Xerox P paper)

Tray 5 (bypass) 64 to 280 g/m2 Up to 27mm 250 sheets(Xerox P paper)

Tray 6 (high capacity)(optional)

64 to 176 g/m2 2 sheets (Xerox P paper)

Paper Types

175

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

Standard

Recommended paper

Usable paper

Paper stock that can be used

Special Media

Copy or print can be made on the following paper by using tray 5 (bypass). These papers are called Special Media. The types of the special media that can be used are as follows.

Note • For more information about other heavyweight or special media, contact our Customer Support Center.

*1:When making copies, refer to "Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)" (P.52). When printing, refer to the online help.

Paper GSM

FX P Paper 64 g/m2

Colotech+ 90 g/m2

FX J Paper 80 g/m2

FX JD Paper 98 g/m2

OHP (V516) -

FXK-X(A704 A4) 75 g/m2

AG KXPI Blue(A3) 80 g/m2

Paper Q 80 g/m2

Premier(3R91720) 80 g/m2

Purple Wrap 80 g/m2

No.1 (Xerox Brand) 80 g/m2

No2. (Package Green) 80 g/m2

Purple Wrap (212A00297) 80 g/m2

Premier(Black) 80 g/m2

Business(3R91820) 80 g/m2

Paper GSM (Unit g/m2) and Paper type

FXK-H(H804 A4) 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

Indagiat(K704 A4) 75 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

Paper N 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

Performer (3R90649) 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

AG KXPI Red 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

No. GA(Package:Orange) 70 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

Paper Paper Type

Labels 3R97408 Label 1 (105 - 176 g/m2)


176

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

Storing and Handling Paper

Please keep the following points in mind when storing paper

Store paper inside a cabinet or other dry place. Paper that has absorbed moisture can cause paper jams and image quality defects.

After opening a package of paper, wrap up the remaining paper to store it. It is recommended that you include moisture prevention packets.

Paper should be stored flat to prevent bends or warping.

Please adhere to the following when setting paper into the tray

Align the stack of paper neatly before setting it in the tray.

Do not use paper that is folded, creased, or heavily warped.

Do not use waved or curled paper.

Do not load paper of mixed size together into the tray.

Transparency paper and label paper can cause paper jams, and multiple sheets can be fed to the printer at once. Be sure to carefully fan these types of paper.

When continuously outputting onto transparencies, transparency sheets may sometimes stick to each other. Remove transparencies from the output tray every 20 or so sheets, and fan them to cool them down.

Loading Paper

177

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

Loading Paper

This section describes how to load paper.

Types of paper loaded in trays

The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper in trays. You need to set a paper type, however. Normally, each of the trays is set to plain paper. When loading paper other than plain paper in trays, change the paper type setting. Plain paper, recycled paper and bond paper can also be named and set as user-defined paper. Up to five paper types can be set as user-defined paper.For information about changing the paper type in trays, refer to "Paper Size/Type" (P.211).

Automatic Tray Selection

If you set paper source on the [Paper/Output] tab to [Paper Tray] in the PCL print driver's properties screen when making prints, the machine automatically selects the corresponding paper tray according to the size and orientation of the document to print. This is called [Automatic Tray Selection].

When making copies, automatic tray selection is active if [Auto] is selected for [Paper Select]. If the machine judges that there are two or more corresponding trays in automatic tray selection, the machine gives higher priority to the tray having the highest [Paper Type Priority] set at [Tray Paper Type]. During automatic tray selection, trays whose [Paper Type Priority] setting is set to [Off] are not targeted in [Automatic Tray Selection]. Also, if the [Paper Priority] setting is exactly the same, automatic tray selection is determined by [Tray Priority].

Adding paper

When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayedon the control panel. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying orPrinting is automatically resumed when paper is added.

Note • Fan the paper well before loading paper in a tray. It prevents paper from adhering to each other and reduces paper jams.

• Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected in the automatic tray selection.

• When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, select the tray containing the paper of the same size and orientation that was being used for copying or printing, and continue copying or printing (Auto Tray Switch feature). During this operation, a tray containing paper of type whose [Paper Priority] setting is set to [Off] cannot be switched to.

For information about setting [Paper Type], [Paper Type Priority], [Paper Tray Priority], and setting the paper substitute feature, refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.210). The same settings can also be made from CentreWare Internet Services.


178

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

Loading Paper in the Trays 1 to 2

Following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Trays 1 to 2.For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.183).

1 Pull out the tray towards you until it stops.

Important • While the machine processes a job, do not pull the tray out that the job uses.

• Do not add new paper to the paper on the tray in order to prevent paper jams or making mistakes of paper loading. Remove any paper remaining in the tray and then load the paper on newly loaded paper.

2 Load and align the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on facing up.

Important • Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line (MAX in the figure). It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

• Do not place any paper or things in the empty space on the right side of the Tray 1 or 2. It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

3 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.

Loading Paper in the Tray 3

Following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Tray 3.For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.183).

1 Pull out the Tray 3 towards you until it stops.



Warning

When pulling out the paper tray, do it slowly. If pulled out with too much force, the tray can hit and injure your knees.

Warning


Loading Paper

179

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9





Following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Tray 4.For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.183).







Warning



180

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)

When printing or copying with paper sizes or types that cannot be set in the Trays 1 to 4 and 6, use the Tray 5 (bypass).The following describes how to load paper into Tray 5 (bypass).To make detailed instructions during printings, specify the instructions using the [Tray/Output] tab in the print driver. When doing this, also specify the type of paper to load.Important • Do not supply new paper until the loaded paper run out in order to prevent paper jams or

making mistakes of paper loading.

1 Open the Tray 5 (bypass) as necessary.

Note • If necessary, extend the extension flap. The extension flap can be extended in two stages. When pulling out the extension flap, do it gently.

2 Hold the center of the paper guides and slide them to the desired paper size.

3 Load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing up, and insert the paper lightly along the paper guide until it comes to a stop.

Important • Do not load mixed paper types into the tray.

• Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line (MAX in the figure). It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

4 When loading a non-standard paper size on the Tray 5 (bypass), move the paper guides to accommodate the paper.

Loading Paper

181

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9


Following describes the procedure for loading paper in the optional Tray 6.For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.183).




2 Load and align the edge of the paper against the right edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on facing up.

Important • Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line. It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.


Loading Tab Paper

Following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in the Tray 5.Important • Tab paper cannot be loaded on the Trays 1 to 4 and 6.

• Tab paper can be used only for [Tab Margin Shift], and [Covers/Separators].

1 Open the Tray 5 (bypass).

Note • If necessary, extend the extension flap. The extension flap can be extended in two stages. When pulling out the extension flap, do it gently.

Warning



182

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

2 Hold the center of the paper guides and slide them to the desired paper size.

3 Load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing up and the top edge frontward, and insert the paper lightly along the paper guide until it comes to a stop.

Important • Do not load mixed paper types into the tray.

• Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line (MAX in the figure). It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays

183

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9


The following describes how to change the paper size for the Trays 1 to 4.Note • The paper types for the Trays 1 to 4 and 6 are preset. Normally, plain paper is set. When

changing the setting to a different paper type, change the paper quality settings to match the type of paper to be loaded to maintain high print quality.For more information about paper type, refer to "Paper Size/Type" (P.211).

• Non-standard paper can be loaded in the Trays 1 and 2. When setting a non-standard paper, you must register the paper size in advance. For information about assigning features, refer to "Paper Size/Type" (P.211).

For information about paper size, "Main Unit and Copier Specifications" (P.450)

For a description of how to make copies on non-standard size paper, refer to "Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)" (P.52). For a description of how to print to non-standard size paper, refer to the print driver's online help.

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 1 to 2

Following describes how to change the paper size for the Trays 1 to 2.

1 Pull out the tray towards you until it stops.



2 Remove any paper loaded on the tray.

3 Hold the long-side paper guide and slide it to the desired paper size (1). Hold the short-side paper guide on the right side and slide it to the desired paper size (2).

4 Check the position of the paper guides and then release them.

Warning


1

2


184

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9



• Do not place any paper or things in the empty space on the right side of the Tray 1 or 2. It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

6 Move the two paper guides while holding their grips so that they lightly contact the edges of the paper.


Note • Affix the paper size label to the front of the paper tray.

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 3 to 4

Following describes how to change the paper size for the Trays 3 to 4.

Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 3





3 Hold the paper guide and slide it to the desired paper size.


Warning



185

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9



6 Hold the paper guide and move it to gently touch the edge of the paper.








3 Hold the paper guide and slide it to the desired paper size.




6 Hold the paper guide and move it to gently touch the edge of the paper.



Warning



186

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9


Following describes how to change the paper size for the Tray 6.





3 Open the end guide and unscrew the screw. Then remove the guide from the Tray.

4 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into holes corresponding to the paper size (1). Insert the screw into a hole corresponding to the paper size on the top of the guide and screw up (2).

5 Unscrew the screw of the front guide and remove the guide from the Tray.

Warning


1

2


187

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

6 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into holes corresponding to the paper size (1). Insert the screw into a hole corresponding to the paper size on the top of the guide and screw up (2).

7 Pull the lever up of the end guide and move it along the slot (1). Set the lever at the position corresponding to the paper size (2) and press the lever down (3).

Note • The slot on the left of 8.5 is not used.

8 Open the end guide and load and align the edge of the paper against the right edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on facing up.

Note • Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line (MAX in the figure) or the maximum capacity of the Tray.

9 Close the end guide tightly.

Note • Set the guide to gently touch the edge of the paper. If the position of the guide is not correct, the paper may not be fed properly and cause paper jams.


1

2

1

2

3


188

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

Changing Paper Settings

The following describes how to change the paper type on trays and how to set image quality processing by individual paper type.

Image quality best suited to the paper type can be obtained by setting the desired image processing to particular paper types.Note • For custom paper 1 to 5 to which the user assigns any name.

For information about how to set names to custom paper 1 to 5, refer to "Custom Paper Name" (P.210).

For information about image quality processing for different paper types, refer to "Image Quality" (P.213).


2 Enter the UserID with the numeric keypad or a keyboard displayed by pressing [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].

Note • The default UserID value is “11111”. When using the Authentication feature, a password is required. The default password value is “x-admin”.




6 Select [Paper Tray Settings].

<Log In/Out> button

Changing Paper Settings

189

Pap

er and

Oth

er Med

ia

9

7 Select [Paper Size/Type].

8 Select the paper tray whose paper type setting is to be changed at [Items], and select [Change Settings].


9 Select [paper type].

10 Select the paper type to change, and select [Save].


11 Make sure that [Paper Type] you changed is the newly entered value, and select [Close].

12 Select [Close].

13 Select [Image Quality].

14 Select the paper type whose image processing is to be changed at [Items], and select [Change Settings].


15 Select the image processing value to change, and select [Save].

16 Make sure that the [Current Settings] at the [Items] you changed is the newly entered value, and select [Close].

17 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [System Settings] screen is displayed.


10 System Settings

The machine has factory default (initial) settings, but you can customize the system settings. To change the settings, enter System Administration mode, and use the [System Settings] screen.

This chapter contains information for System Administrators on the features used to change the settings and on the setting procedures.

System Settings Procedure ......................................................................192

System Settings Menu List .......................................................................195

Entering Text ............................................................................................203

Common Settings .....................................................................................204

Copy Mode Settings .................................................................................227

Network Settings.......................................................................................238

Print Mode Settings ..................................................................................243

Scan Mode Settings..................................................................................249

E-mail Settings..........................................................................................256

Mailbox/Stored Document Settings ..........................................................262

Job Flow Settings .....................................................................................264

Setup Menu ..............................................................................................265

System Administrator Settings..................................................................278

Login Setup/Auditron Administration ........................................................280

10 System Settings

192

System

Settin

gs

10

System Settings Procedure

To make or change the system settings, it is necessary to be in the System Administration mode.

This section describes the basic procedures for system settings. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .........................................................................192

Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Password............................................192

Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu ..........................192

Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen....................................................193

Step 5 Setting the Feature .........................................................................................................194

Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ...........................................................................194

Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode


Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Password

To enter System Administration mode, enter the system administrator UserID. If you are using the authentication feature, a password may be required.It is recommended to change the system administrator UserID and password immediately after installing the machine. For more information, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.278).



Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu


<Log In/Out> button

System Settings Procedure

193

System

Settin

gs

10

User Mode

While still in the System Administration mode, you can carry out normal operations such as copying and scanning.Note • To exit a mode entered from [User Mode], use the following procedure.

(1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.(2) In the [Log In] screen, select [Cancel].

System Settings

You can set or register the system settings.

Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen

In the [System Settings] screen, select an item.For the items that can be selected in the system settings, refer to "System Settings Menu List" (P.195).


System Settings

You can set or change the default values.

Common Settings

These settings relate to the machine itself.For information, refer to "Common Settings" (P.204).

Copy Mode Settings

You can set the copy feature defaults, copy operation control, button indications, and so on.For information, refer to "Copy Mode Settings" (P.227).

Network Settings

You can set the ports, protocols, and so on.For the items in the Print Settings, refer to "Network Settings" (P.238).

Print Mode Settings

You can set the memory settings, print time operation, and so on.For information, refer to "Print Mode Settings" (P.243).

Scan Mode Settings

You can set the scanner feature defaults, button indications, and so on.For information, refer to "Scan Mode Settings" (P.249).

E-mail Settings

You can set the e-mail feature defaults, address search, and so on.For information, refer to "E-mail Settings" (P.256).

Mailbox/Stored Document Settings

You can set the settings relating to mailboxes.For information, refer to "Mailbox/Stored Document Settings" (P.262).

10 System Settings

194

System

Settin

gs

10

Job Flow Settings

You can set the settings relating to a pool server in which job flows are stored.For information, refer to "Job Flow Settings" (P.264).

Setup Menu

You can create mailboxes, and create and change address book.For information, refer to "Setup Menu" (P.265).

System Administrator Settings

You can set the system administrator ID and system administrator password for entering System Administration mode.For information, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.278).

Login Setup/Auditron Administration

You can set restrictions on users using feature of the machine, or set restrictions on individual users.For information, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Administration" (P.280).

Step 5 Setting the Feature

1 Set any feature.

2 After setting the feature, select [Save].

Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode

1 When the settings are completed, select [Close] until the [System Settings] screen appears.

2 Select [Exit].

System Settings Menu List

195

System

Settin

gs

10


The following table shows a list of the items that can be set. Note that the items appearing depend on the configuration of the machine.

System Settings

Common Settings

Machine Clock/Timers(P.204) Date(P.205)Time(P.205)NTP Time Synchronization(P.205) Connection to Time Server(P.205) Connection Interval(P.205) Time Server IP Address(P.205)Auto Clear(P.206)Auto Job Release(P.206)Auto Print(P.206)Auto Power Saver(P.206)Time Zone(P.207)Daylight Savings(P.207)

Audio Tones (P.207) Control Panel Select Tone(P.207)Control Panel Alert Tone(P.207)Machine Ready Tone(P.207)Copy Job Complete Tone(P.208)Non-Copy Job Complete Tone(P.208)Fault Tone(P.208)Alert Tone(P.208)Out of Paper Warning Tone(P.208)Low Toner Alert Tone(P.208)Stored Programming Tone(P.208)Auto Clear Alert Tone(P.208)Base Tone(P.208)

Screen Defaults(P.209) All Services(P.209)Custom Buttons 1 to 3(P.209)Job Type on Job Status Screen(P.210)Default Language(P.210)

Paper Tray Settings(P.210) Custom Paper Name(P.210)Paper Size/Type(P.211) Paper Size(P.211) Paper Type(P.212) Auto Paper by Output Color(P.212)Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Menu(P.212)Paper Tray Attributes During Loading(P.212)Paper Tray Priority(P.212)Paper Type Priority(P.213)Image Quality(P.213)Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults(P.214)Auto Tray Switching(P.215)

10 System Settings

196

System

Settin

gs

10

Copy Mode Settings

Set Numbering(P.215) Date Format(P.215)Text Effect(P.215)Text Size(P.216)Background Pattern(P.216)Color(P.216)Density(P.216)Text/Background Contrast(P.216)Force Set Numbering - Copy Job(P.216)Force Set Numbering - Client Print(P.216)Force Set Numbering - Mailbox Print(P.216)

Image Quality Adjustment(P.217) Image Quality(P.217) Photo & Text Recognition(P.217) Output Color Recognition(P.217) Photo Reproduction Level(P.217) Color Copy Auto Exposure(P.218) B/W Copy Auto Exposure(P.218) Image Enhancement(P.218)Auto Gradation Adjustment(P.218)

Reports (P.219) Job History Report(P.219)2 Sided Report(P.219)

Maintenance (P.219) Initialize Hard Disk(P.220)Delete All Data(P.220)Software Options(P.220)

Other Settings (P.220) Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray)(P.221)Auto Job Promotion(P.221)Default Print Paper Size(P.221)Paper Size Settings(P.222)Millimeters/Inches(P.224)Keyboard Input Restriction(P.224)Operation of Up/Down Buttons(P.224)Display Consumables Screen(P.224)Overwrite Hard Disk(P.224)Data Encryption(P.225)Service Rep. Restricted Operation(P.225)Software Download(P.226)Document Feeder Tray Elevation(P.226)Gloss Level(P.226)

Basic Copying Tab(P.227) Features Allocation(P.227)Paper Supply - 2nd Button(P.228)Paper Supply - 3rd Button(P.228)Paper Supply - 4th Button(P.228)Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button(P.228)Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button(P.229)


197

System

Settin

gs

10

Copy Defaults (P.229) Paper Supply(P.229)Reduce/Enlarge(P.229)Output Color(P.229)Single Color(P.229)Dual Color - Source Color(P.230)Dual - Target Area Color(P.230)Dual - Non-target Area Color(P.230)Original Type(P.230)Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)(P.230)Original Type - Auto (Black)(P.230)Lighten/Darken(P.230)Contrast(P.230)Sharpness(P.230)Color Saturation(P.230)Auto Exposure(P.230)Color Balance - Yellow(P.231)Color Balance - Magenta(P.231)Color Balance - Cyan(P.231)Color Balance - Black(P.231)Color Shift(P.231)2 Sided Copying(P.231)Mixed Size Originals(P.231)Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges(P.231)Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges(P.231)Center Erase/Binding Erase(P.231)Image Shift - Side 1(P.231)Image Shift - Side 2(P.231)Image Rotation(P.232)Image Rotation Direction(P.232)Original Orientation(P.232)Copy Output(P.232)Output Orientation(P.232)Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value(P.232)Stamp Position(P.232)Stamp Color(P.232)Stamp Size(P.232)Date Position(P.232)Page Number Style(P.232)Page Number Position(P.232)Sample Set(P.232)

Copy Control (P.233) Memory Full Procedure(P.233)Maximum Stored Pages(P.233)2 Sided Originals Scan Options(P.233)Auto Paper Off(P.233)Mixed Size Originals - Copy to Side 2(P.233)Fine-tune 100%(P.234)Auto Exposure (Text & Photo)(P.234)Auto Exposure (Text)(P.234)Text & Photo (Halftone) Originals(P.234)Original Type - Lightweight Originals(P.234)Output Orientation - Reverse Order(P.234)Output Orientation - Auto (1 Sheet)(P.235)Stamp Density(P.235)Stamp Position on Side 2(P.235)Date Position on Side 2(P.235)Page Number Position on Side 2(P.235)

Original Size Defaults(P.235) Original Size Defaults 1 ～ 11

Reduce/Enlarge Presets(P.236) Reduce/Enlarge Presets 1～ 7

10 System Settings

198

System

Settin

gs

10

Network Settings

Custom Colors(P.237) -

Port Settings (P.238) USBLPDNetWareSMBIPPEtherTalkSalutationPort9100SNMPFTP ClientReceive E-mailSend E-mailMail Notice ServiceUPnP DiscoveryBMLinksInternet Service (HTTP)SOAPWebDAV

Protocol Settings(P.239) Ethernet SettingsTCP/IP - Get IP AddressTCP/IP - IP AddressTCP/IP - Subnet MaskTCP/IP - Gateway AddressTCP/IP - IP Filter

Machine E-mail Address/Host Name(P.239)

E-mail AddressHost NameDomain Name

POP3 Server Settings(P.239) POP3 Server SetupPOP3 Server IP AddressPOP3 Server NamePOP3 Server Port NumberPOP3 Server Check IntervalPOP3 Server Login NamePOP3 Server PasswordPOP Password Encryption

SMTP Server Settings(P.239) SMTP Server SetupSMTP Server IP AddressSMTP Server NameSMTP Server Port NumberE-mail Send AuthenticationSMTP AUTH Login NameSMTP AUTH Password

Domain Filter (P.239) Domain FilteringDomains 1 to 50

Remote Authentication Server Settings(P.240)

Authentication System(P.240)Remote Authentication Server 1 through 5(P.240) Server - Server Setup(P.240) Server - IP Address(P.240) Server - Server Name(P.240) Server - Port Number(P.240) Server - Realm Name(P.240)


199

System

Settin

gs

10

Print Mode Settings

Scan Mode Settings

PKI (Public Key) Settings(P.241) HTTP - SSL/TLS Settings(P.241) HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication(P.241) HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number(P.241)S/MIME Settings(P.241) Device Certificate - S/MIME(P.241) S/MIME Communication(P.241) Receive Untrusted E-mail(P.241) Message Digest Algorithm(P.241) Contents Encryption Method(P.242) Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail(P.242) Certificate Auto Store(P.242)

Other Settings (P.242) E-mail Receive Protocol

Allocate Memory(P.243) PostScript Memory(P.244)ESC/P Form Memory(P.244)HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory(P.244)Receiving Buffer - USB(P.244)Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool(P.244)Receiving Buffer - NetWare(P.244)Receiving Buffer - SMB Spool(P.244)Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool(P.245)Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk(P.245)Receiving Buffer - Port 9100(P.245)

Delete Form (P.245) ESC/P(P.245)

Other Settings (P.246) Print Area(P.246)Substitute Tray(P.246)Paper Type Mismatch(P.246)Unregistered Forms(P.247)Print ID(P.247)Banner Sheet(P.247)Banner Sheet Tray(P.247)PostScript Default Color(P.247)PostScript Paper Supply(P.247)PostScript Font Absence(P.247)PostScript Font Substitution(P.248)

Basic Scanning Tab(P.249) Feature in 2nd Column(P.250)Reduce/Enlarge - 2nd Button(P.250)Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button(P.250)Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button(P.250)

Scan Defaults (P.250) Output Color(P.250)Original Type(P.251)File Format(P.251)Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail(P.251)Thumbnail - Scan to FTP/SMB(P.251)Lighten/Darken(P.251)Contrast(P.251)

10 System Settings

200

System

Settin

gs

10

E-mail Settings

Scan Defaults (P.250)(Continued from previous page)

Sharpness(P.251)Auto Exposure(P.251)Background Suppression(P.251)Color Space(P.251)Original Orientation(P.251)Scan Resolution(P.251)Mixed Size Originals(P.251)Edge Erase(P.252)Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges(P.252)Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges(P.252)Center Erase/Binding Erase(P.252)Image Compression(P.252)

Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults(P.252) Transfer Protocol

Scan Size Defaults(P.252) Scan size buttons 1 to 11

Output Size Defaults(P.253) Output Size buttons 1 to 8

Reduce/Enlarge Presets(P.254) Preset % 1 to 7

Other Settings (P.254) Scan Service(P.254)Memory Full Procedure(P.254)Maximum Stored Pages(P.255)2 Sided Originals Scan Options(P.255)Color Saturation(P.255)Auto Exposure Level(P.255)Background Suppression Level(P.255)Color Space(P.255)TIFF Format(P.255)Image Transfer Screen(P.255)

E-mail Defaults(P.256) Subjectpage. 256

Address Search (Directory Service)(P.256)

Directory Service (LDAP)(P.257)Primary Server(P.257)Primary Server Port Number(P.257)Secondary Server(P.257)Secondary Server Port Number(P.258)Login Name(P.258)Password(P.258)Search Root Entry DN(P.258)Scope of Search from Root Entry(P.258)Object Class of Search Target(P.258)Server Application(P.258)Attribute Type of Recipient Name(P.258)Attribute Type of Last Name(P.259)Attribute Type of First Name(P.259)Attribute Type of E-mail Address(P.259)Attribute Type of Custom Items 1 to 3(P.259)Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3(P.259)Attribute Type of Certificate(P.259)Maximum Search Results(P.259)Search Time-Out(P.259)


201

System

Settin

gs

10


Job Flow Settings

Setup Menu

Other Settings (P.259) Maximum E-mail Size(P.260)Maximum Address Entries(P.260)Incoming E-mail Print Options(P.260)Auto Print Error Mail(P.260)Response to Read Status (MDN)(P.260)Read Status (MDN)(P.261)Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail(P.261)Max No. of Pages for Split Send(P.261)

Mailbox Settings(P.262) Documents Retrieved By Client(P.262)

Stored Document Settings(P.263) Document Expiry Date(P.263)Delete Charge Print Documents(P.263)Delete Secure Print Documents(P.263)Delete Sample Print Documents(P.263)

Pool Server(P.264) -

Pool Server Login Method(P.264) -

Job Flow Sheet List Access Default(P.264)

-

Mailbox (P.265) Mailbox Name(P.266)Password(P.266)Check Password(P.266)Delete Documents After Retrieval(P.266)Delete Documents with Expiry Date(P.266)Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox(P.267)

Job Flow Sheets(P.267) Name(P.269)Description(P.269)Send as E-mail(P.269)Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)(P.270)Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2)(P.271)Print(P.272)Edit/Delete(P.273)

Address Book (P.274) Address Type(P.275)E-mail Address(P.275)Recipient Name(P.275)Last Name(P.275)First Name(P.275)Custom Item 1(P.275)Custom Item 2(P.276)Custom Item 3(P.276)S/MIME Certificate(P.276)Transfer Protocol(P.276)Server Name/IP address(P.276)Shared Name (SMB Only)(P.276)Save in(P.276)Login Name(P.276)Password(P.277)Port Number(P.277)

10 System Settings

202

System

Settin

gs

10



Paper Size/Type(P.277) -

System Administrator Login ID(P.278) -

System Administrator Password(P.278) -

Maximum Login Attempts(P.279) -

Create/Check User Accounts(P.280) UserID(P.281)User Name(P.281)Password(P.281)E-mail Address(P.281)Account Limit(P.281) Color Access(P.281) Account Limit(P.282)Reset Total Impressions(P.282)Reset Account(P.282)

Reset User Accounts(P.282) All User Accounts(P.283)All Color Access Settings(P.283)All Account Limits(P.283)Total Impressions(P.283)Meter (Print Jobs)(P.283)

Meter (Copy Jobs) for System Administrator (P.283)

-

User Details Setup(P.284) UserID Characters(P.284)Hide User ID(P.284)Account ID Characters(P.284)Hide Account ID(P.284)Failed Access Log(P.285)Store User Details(P.285)

Charge Print Settings(P.285) PJL Receive Command Control(P.285)PJL Output Command Control(P.285)Receive Control(P.285)

Password Entry from Control Panel(P.286)

-

Login Setup/Auditron Mode(P.287) Local Machine Access(P.287)Network Access(P.287) Check User Details(P.287)Remote Access(P.287) Guest User(P.287) Guest Password(P.287)Auditron Mode(P.288)Mailbox Access(P.288)

Entering Text

203

System

Settin

gs

10

Entering Text

During operations, a screen sometimes appears for the entry of text. This section describes how to enter such text.

In the text you can enter the following characters: numerals, letters, and symbols.

Item Description

Entering letters and numerals Select [Alphanumeric].If you select [Shift], capital letters appear. To return to lowercase, select [Shift] once more.

Entering symbols Select [Symbol].

Entering a space Select [Space].

Deleting characters Select [Backspace]. You can delete one character at a time.

10 System Settings

204

System

Settin

gs

10

Common Settings

In [Common Settings], you can make settings relating to the machine itself. The following shows the reference section for each item.

Machine Clock/Timers..............................................................................................................204

Audio Tones..............................................................................................................................207

Screen Defaults .........................................................................................................................209

Paper Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................210

Set Numbering ..........................................................................................................................215

Image Quality Adjustment ........................................................................................................217

Reports ......................................................................................................................................219

Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................219

Other Settings............................................................................................................................220

1 In the [System Settings] screen, select [System Settings].

For the method of displaying the [System Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.192).


3 Select the feature to be set.

Machine Clock/Timers

You can set the clock time, or the timer interval until power saving or reset features take effect.

1 Select [Machine Clock/Timers].



3 Select [ ], [ ], or the numeric keypad to enter a value.

Note • Depending on the item, entry with the numeric keypad may not always be possible.

4 Select [Close].

Common Settings

205

System

Settin

gs

10

Date

Set the date in the system clock of the machine. The date set here is printed on lists and reports.

1 Select [Date], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the date format.

3 Select Year/Month/Day.

Time

Set the time in the system clock of the machine, using 12-hour or 24-hour format.The time set here is printed on lists and reports.

1 Select [Time], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the display format.

3 When [12-Hour Clock] is selected, select [AM] or [PM].

4 Set the hours and minutes.

NTP Time Synchronization

You can obtain the time from a time server (NTP: Network Time Protocol), to synchronize the machine time to the time server time.

1 Select [NTP Time Synchronization], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select any item, and select [Change Settings].

Connection to Time Server

Select whether to connect to a time server. If you select [Off], the machine does not obtain the time from a time server.

Connection Interval

Select the time interval at which a connection is made to the time server.

Select an interval from 1 to 500 hours in 1 hour increments.

Time Server IP Address

Set the IP address of the time server from which the time is obtained, using values 0 to 255.Note • 244.XXX.XXX.XXX to 255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.

10 System Settings

206

System

Settin

gs

10

Auto Clear

If a given time period elapses with no operation, the machine automatically returns to the initial screen.

Set the time from 1 to 4 minutes in 1 minute increments. In order not to set this feature, select [Off].Note • Even if [Off] is selected, when there is no operation for 1 minute on the screen waiting for a

job command after scanning, the machine cancels the waiting condition and starts to process the job.

1 Select [Auto Clear], and select [Change Settings].


3 If you selected [On], set the time.

Auto Job Release

Set the period to cancel the current job and start the next job when an error occurs (document or paper jams, running out of paper, etc.) during making copies or printing documents. In this case, jobs that can be continued are limited to those that only use parts of the machine not affected by the error.

Set the period from 4 to 99 minutes in 1 minute increments. In order not to set this feature, select [Off].

1 Select [Auto Job Release], and select [Change Settings].



Auto Print

Set the period to start the next print job after finishing a copy job.

Set the value from 1 to 240 seconds in 1 second increments. If you select [Off], once the machine is ready, printing can start immediately.

1 Select [Auto Print], and select [Change Settings].



Auto Power Saver

In power saving mode, there is a Low Power mode and a Sleep mode, and when the set time has elapsed, these modes are switched to in the following way, thus reducing the power consumption.

Last selection on the machine Low Power mode Sleep mode

1 Select [Auto Power Saver], and select [Change Settings].

2 Set Low Power mode and Sleep mode.

Common Settings

207

System

Settin

gs

10

From Last Selection to Low Power Mode

Set the time to change to the Low Power mode after the last selection.

Set the time from 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute increments.Note • Configure the [From Last Selection to Sleep Mode] time to be longer than the [From Last

Selection to Low Power Mode] time.

From Last Selection to Sleep Mode

Set the time to change from the last selection to sleep mode from 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.

Time Zone

Set the time difference from GMT.

Daylight Savings

With this feature enabled, the machine automatically adjusts the current time when the summer time starts and ends. Specify the start and end dates of summer time period.

Audio Tones

Select whether or not to sound an alarm, for example when a job ends or there is a fault.

1 Select [Audio Tones].



3 Select the setting value.

4 Select [Save].

Control Panel Select Tone

Select the sound to be made when a button displayed on the screen is correctly selected.

You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Control Panel Alert Tone

Select the sound to be made when a button that cannot be selected is selected, or an error occurs.


Machine Ready Tone

Set the sound for when the machine is ready to copy or print, after powering on, for example.


10 System Settings

208

System

Settin

gs

10

Copy Job Complete Tone

Select the sound to be made when a copy completes normally.


Non-Copy Job Complete Tone

Select the sound to be made when a job other than copying completes.


Fault Tone

Select the sound to be made when there is an error termination.


Alert Tone

Select the sound to be made when a fault such as a paper jam occurs, and the fault is left unattended to.


Out of Paper Warning Tone

Select the sound to be made when there is no paper in the paper tray and the job is left unattended to.


Low Toner Alert Tone

Select the sound to be made when the toner cartridge is due to be replaced.


Stored Programming Tone

Select the sound to be made while recording in job memory.

You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud].Note • It is not possible to disable this sound.

Auto Clear Alert Tone

Select the sound to be made when the automatic clear feature is enabled and it is 5 seconds before automatically returning to the initial screen.


Base Tone

For a button that toggles (changes setting each time it is pressed), set the sound to be made when in the home position. In the machine this sound is made when the <Interrupt> button is released.


Common Settings

209

System

Settin

gs

10

Screen Defaults

Set the initial screen display when the power is turned on.

1 Select [Screen Defaults].


3 Set the setting value.

4 Select [Close].

All Services

Set the layout of buttons that appear in the [All Services] screen when pressing the <All Services> button on the control panel.

The layout of buttons in this screen is corresponding to the layout of those on the [All Services] screen when pressing the <All Services> button.Note • It is not possible to assign the same feature to more than one button.

1 Select [All Services], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the button in the position where you want to display a feature.


3 Select [Features] or [Additional Features].

4 Select the features to be displayed.

Feature

You can select a feature button. The feature buttons are the oval buttons in the [All Services] screen.

If you select [Not Set], the selected button position will remain empty.

Additional Features

You can select an auxiliary feature button. The auxiliary features appear in the [All Services] screen as rectangular buttons.

If you select [Not Set], the selected button position will remain empty.

Custom Buttons 1 to 3

You can assign features to the custom buttons on the control panel: Custom 1 to Custom 3.

To leave a feature unassigned, select [Not Set].

10 System Settings

210

System

Settin

gs

10

1 Select [Custom Button 1], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the feature to be assigned.


Job Type on Job Status Screen

Select the job types to be shown on the [Completion Status] screen of the [Job Status] screen when the <Job Status> button on the control panel is pressed.

Select from [All Jobs], [E-mail/Scan Jobs], [Auto Transfer Jobs], and [Print Jobs].

Default Language

You can select the language displayed on the machine. Select [Korean], [Chinese] or [English].

There are two ways of selecting the language: a method set in the System Administration mode, and a method set by ordinary users.

Setting in the System Administration mode

This sets the standard language when the machine is powered on, and it maintained when powered off and on again.

Setting by ordinary users

The language setting in [Language] in the [All Services] screen is lost when the machine is powered off.

Important • When set to [English], do not use characters other than ASCII characters.

Paper Tray Settings

Set the items relating to the paper and trays, including the types of paper loaded in the trays, precedence, and image processing settings for each paper.

1 Select [Paper Tray Settings].




5 Select [Save].

Custom Paper Name

You can set a custom name to custom paper 1 to 5, plain paper, bond paper, and recycled paper. You can use letters, numerals, and symbols in the name, up to 24 characters.

For example, you can use a name showing its usage, such as “Color” for colored paper, and “Covers” for bond paper.For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.203).

Common Settings

211

System

Settin

gs

10

1 Select [Custom Paper Name].


3 Enter the name.

Paper Size/Type

You can set Paper Type and Size for paper loaded in trays and Auto Paper by Output Color.Note • Only paper types can be set to the Tray 5 (bypass).

1 Select [Paper Size/Type].




Paper Size

The machine automatically detects standard size paper loaded into the Trays 1, and 2. However, when a nonstandard size paper is loaded, it is necessary to specify the width and height.Important • Align the paper guide to the paper edge in a tray. It prevents paper from paper jams or

errors. In such cases, use the tray 5 (bypass).

• Paper size loaded in tray 3 to 4 cannot be changed.

1 Select [Paper Size].

2 Select [Auto Size Detect] or [Variable Size].

3 When [Variable Size] is selected, set the numeric values using [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

Auto Size Detect

Standard sized paper loaded in trays is automatically detected.

Variable Size

When setting non-standard size into the Tray 1 to 2, set the size in the X (horizontal) direction within the range 182 to 432 mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 140 to 297 mm in 1mm increments.

10 System Settings

212

System

Settin

gs

10

Paper Type

For the Trays 1 to 4 and 6, you can select from 6 paper types, and custom paper types 1 to 5.For the Tray 5 (bypass), you can select 18 paper types and custom paper types 1 to 5.

1 Select [Paper Type].

2 Select the type of paper.


Auto Paper by Output Color

The automatically selected paper tray can be designated according to the output color settings. In any mode other than the specified output color mode, the designated tray will not be selected when the paper tray is set to auto. Choose from [All Output Colors], [When Color is Selected], or [When Black is Selected].

Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.

You can select the Trays 1 to 4 and 6.

1 Select [Auto Paper by Output Color].

2 Select the [Output Color].

Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Menu

You can select whether [Paper Size/Type] is displayed in the [Setup Menu] screen or not.

Paper Tray Attributes During Loading

You can select whether the [Change Settings] screen ([Paper Size/Type] screen) for the target tray is displayed or not when pulling out or inserting the tray.

Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected.

Paper Tray Priority

Set the paper tray priority sequence for automatic tray selection.


You can select the Trays 1 to 4 and 6. Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected.

1 Select [Paper Tray Priority].

2 Select [Change Settings].

Common Settings

213

System

Settin

gs

10

3 Select any of numbers 1 to 5, to assign a tray from Trays 1 to 4 and 6.

Note • You cannot set the same paper tray to different positions in the sequence.

Paper Type Priority

Set the paper type priority sequence for automatic tray selection.


You can set plain paper, bond paper, recycled paper and custom paper 1 to 5.

The paper type setting takes precedence over the tray priority sequence.If different paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper selection is determined by tray priority sequence.For information about the tray priority sequence, refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.212).

1 Select [Paper Type Priority].


3 Select the priority sequence.

Image Quality

You can specify the image quality processing method for each of plain paper, recycled paper, heavyweight paper 1, heavyweight paper 1(side 2), heavyweight paper 2, heavy paper 2(side 2), and custom paper 1 to 5.

When the machine is copying or printing, the type of paper set in [Paper Type], and the image quality processing specified for that type of paper are used to control the image quality.



3 Select image quality processing.

4 Select [Save].

10 System Settings

214

System

Settin

gs

10

Refer to the following table for the items that can be set.For information about paper characteristics and notes on use, refer to "Paper Type" (P.174).

Note • Setting values with (S) are set by our customer engineer.

• Setting values with (side 2) are used to set for printing on the reverse side of printed paper.

Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults

Set the paper sizes shown in the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen for [Paper Selection] when copying with Tray 5 (bypass).

You can assign 11 paper sizes to Tray 5 standard size buttons 1 to 11.

If a nonstandard size paper is frequently used for copying, by setting this size, it is no longer necessary to set the paper dimensions each time a copy is made. It is also convenient to set the commonly used paper sizes toward the top.

1 Select [Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults].


3 Select the paper size.

A/B Series Size

You can select from 10 sizes of A and B series.

Inch Size

You can select from 16 sizes of inch series.

Setting values Meaning

Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2) Paper having ream weight of 64 - 80 g/m2.

Plain B (81 - 104 g/m2) Paper having ream weight of 81 - 104 g/m2.

Plain C Thin coated paper, intermediate paper, etc.

Recycled A (64 - 80 g/m2) Recycled paper with rough surface having ream weight of 64 - 80 g/m2.

Recycled B (81 - 104 g/m2) Recycled paper with rough surface having ream weight of 81 - 104 g/m2.

Heavyweight 1A (105 - 128 g/m2)

Paper having ream weight of 105 - 128 g/m2.

Heavyweight 1B (129 - 176 g/m2)


Heavyweight 2A (177 - 256 g/m2)


Heavyweight 2B (257 - 280 g/m2)


Heavyweight 2C Postal cards having ream weight of not less than 177 g/m2.

Heavyweight 2D Postcards having ream weight of not less than 177 g/m2.

Heavyweight 2E - Envelopes Envelopes, etc.

Coated 1A (105 - 128 g/m2) Coated paper having ream weight of 105 - 128 g/m2.

Coated 1B (129 - 176 g/m2) Coated paper having ream weight of 128 - 176 g/m2.

Common Settings

215

System

Settin

gs

10

Others

You can select from 13 other sizes.

Variable Size

You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 148 - 488 mm, and the height (Y) from 100 to 330 mm in 1 mm increments.

Auto Tray Switching

Set the method of auto tray switching when the selected tray runs out of paper.

1 Select [Auto Tray Switching].


3 Select the method of switching.

Enable during Auto Paper

When the paper selection is [Auto] only, the machine automatically selects a tray containing appropriate paper.

Always Enable

Regardless of the setting of [Paper Supply], the machine automatically selects a tray containing appropriate paper according to the situation.Note • Auto tray switching cannot be worked at the following.

・When Tray 5 (Bypass) is selected・When a tray containing paper other than plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper or user-defined paper is selected・When a tray containing paper set to [Automatic Tray switching Off] at [Paper Type Priority] is selected

Set Numbering

You can configure the set numbering.

Date Format

Set the format for printing dates in annotations and set numbering. This setting is common to annotation and set numbering.

Three types of format are available: 20yy/mm/dd, dd/mm/20yy, and mm/dd/20yy.

Text Effect

Set the text effects for Set Numbering.

Off

A text effect is not applied.

10 System Settings

216

System

Settin

gs

10

Embossed

The text hidden in the background is printed as embossing. The text part of the text is printed with the pattern set in [Set Numbering - Background Pattern].

Outline

The text hidden in the background is printed as white cutout. In the background other than the text printed as white cutout, the pattern set in [Set Numbering - Background Pattern] is printed.

Text Size

Set the size of the text printed in set numbering.

You can select from 3 point sizes: 48 point, 64 point, and 80 point.

Background Pattern

Set the background pattern to be used for the set numbering text effect.

You can select from eight patterns: wave, circle, stripe, chain, beam, rhombic, sunflower, and fan.

Color

Set the color used for printing set numbering text.

You can select from 3 colors: black, magenta, and cyan.

Density

Set the density for printing the text in set numbering.

You can select from three levels from lighter to darker.

Text/Background Contrast

Set the text/background contrast for printing set numbering.

You can select from contrast levels 1 to 9. Set the text/background contrast after checking the results of printing a [Text Effect Sample List].For information about sample printing, refer to "Text Effect Sample List" (P.315).

Force Set Numbering - Copy Job

Set whether to force set numbering printing for copying.

Force Set Numbering - Client Print

Set whether to force set numbering printing for printing from a client computer.

Force Set Numbering - Mailbox Print

Set whether to force set numbering printing for printing from the mailbox.

Common Settings

217

System

Settin

gs

10

Image Quality Adjustment

You can set the image quality and auto gradation adjustment settings.

1 Select [Image Quality Adjustment].




5 Select [Save].

Image Quality

You can select the image quality processing method when the machine is scanning an original.





Photo & Text Recognition

You can change the level at which the machine separates text from photos while scanning the original, when copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Text & Photo].

Selecting [More Text] makes it easier for very fine print to be recognized as text.Selecting [More Photo] makes it easier for newspaper and advertisement halftone images to be recognized as photos.

Output Color Recognition

In the [Basic Copying] screen, when copying with [Output Color] set to [Auto], you can change the level at which the machine distinguishes monochrome and color images.

Selecting [More Black] makes originals more easily recognized as monochrome.Selecting [More Color] makes originals more easily recognized as color.

Photo Reproduction Level

When copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Text & Photo], you can adjust the color reproduction level in the areas determined by the machine to be photos.

Selecting [More Text] emphasizes the dense parts of the image, yielding a bold copy effect.Selecting [More Photo] makes the gradation of the photo parts of the image softer.

10 System Settings

218

System

Settin

gs

10

Color Copy Auto Exposure

Set the method of auto exposure to be used when making color copies.

Set how the machine detects the density of and deletes the background color.

Select [Off] to sample a section of the original and detect the background color.Select [On] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the background color.Important • When you select [On], and if [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] and a ratio not greater

than 60% in [Reduce/Enlarge] is set, a part of an image may not be printed or blank paper may be output.

B/W Copy Auto Exposure

Set the method of auto exposure for copying and scanning black and white (2-color) documents.

Set how the machine detects the density of and deletes the background color.

Select [Off] to sample a section of the original and detect the background color.Select [On] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the background color.Important • When you select [On], and if [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] and a ratio not greater

than 60% in [Reduce/Enlarge] is set, a part of an image may not be printed or blank paper may be output.

Image Enhancement

You can select whether or not to carry out image enhancement. If you select [On], copy data is smoothed, to give a smoother appearance.

Auto Gradation Adjustment

When the color gradation of a printed image is shifted, the gradation can be adjusted. By means of this adjustment, the print image quality of the machine can be maintained at a constant level.For information about procedures for auto gradation adjustment, refer to "Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment" (P.357).

Note • If color gradation is not compensated despite the periodic execution of auto gradation adjustment, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Select [Auto Gradation Adjustment].

Screen Type

Copy Job

Adjusts the gradation for copying documents.

Print Job 1

Basic screen for printing.

For PCL print driversAdjusts the gradation for items other than [CAD] and [Presentation] of [Image Types] in the [Graphics] tab.

For PostScript printersAdjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Standard] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.

Note • Displayed Screen may differ corresponding to settings of [Image Type], [RGB Correction] and [CMYK Correction], when [Auto] is selected.

Common Settings

219

System

Settin

gs

10

Print Job 2

For PCL print driversAdjusts the gradation for [Presentation] at [Image Type] in the [Graphics] tab.

For PostScript printersAdjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Gradation] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.


Paper Supply

Select a tray in which one of the following paper sizes is loaded: A3, A4 , 11 x 17 inches, 8.5 x 11 inches .

Target

Select from [Copy and Print Jobs], [Copy Jobs Only], [Print Jobs Only], and [None].

Reports

These settings relate to printing reports.

1 Select [Reports].




4 Select [Save].

Job History Report

You can select whether or not to automatically print a [Job History Report] when a total of 50 jobs have been processed. All jobs are automatically listed on the printed report.

2 Sided Report

When printing a report/list, select whether to print 1 sided or 2 sided.

Maintenance

You can initialize the hard disk or delete data recorded in the machine.

1 Select [Maintenance].

2 Select the item to be carried out.

10 System Settings

220

System

Settin

gs

10

Initialize Hard Disk

This initializes the hard disk.

The data erased by the formatting includes supplementary fonts, HP-GL/2 form, and SMB folders.Note • Some does not appear for some models.

• The secure print documents and logs are not erased.

1 Select [Initialize Hard Disk].

2 Select the partition to be reformatted, and select [Start].

3 Select [Yes].

4 When the initialization completes successfully, the message on the screen on the right appears; select [Confirm].

Delete All Data

This feature is used to prevent leakage of customer's confidential information, when the machine is replaced. All data registered in the machine is deleted, when executing [Delete All Data].

Do not use this function.

Software Options

This feature is for customer engineer use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Other Settings

These are other settings relating to the machine itself.

1 Select [Other Settings].




4 Select [Save].

Common Settings

221

System

Settin

gs

10

Offset Catch Tray

Set the offset feature for the output tray.

When you select offset stacking, each of output documents is delivered at a slightly shifted position from the position of the previous document. If the previous document is delivered at the front side of the machine, the next document is delivered at the rear side of the machine. Set the operation of this offset feature.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


None

No offset output.

Offset per set

Output paper in the number of copy sets being made.

Offset per job

Output paper with each job offset.

Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray)

Set the offset feature for the finisher tray.

When you select offset stacking, each of output documents is delivered at a slightly shifted position from the position of the previous document. If the previous document is delivered at the front side of the machine, the next document is delivered at the rear side of the machine. Set the operation of this offset feature.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


None

No offset output.

Offset per set

Output paper in the number of copy sets being made.

Offset per job

Output paper with each job offset.

Auto Job Promotion

You can select whether to allow other jobs that can be started to automatically bypass the job, if the machine is unable to start an operation for any reason, (for example, running out of paper in a tray when starting copying or printing). Note • Stored documents such as secure prints and sample prints are excluded from bypassing

permission.

Default Print Paper Size

Set the paper size used when printing reports or lists.You can select from 2 sizes: A4, or 8.5 x 11 inches.

10 System Settings

222

System

Settin

gs

10

Paper Size Settings

Set the paper sizes for standard size originals and for automatic paper detection.

You can select from 5 types: A/B series (8 x 13”), A/B series, A/B series (8K/16K), A/B series (8 x 13”/8 x 14”), and inch series.

Refer to the following table for the combinations of sizes that can be detected automatically.

Paper size group A/B series (8 x 13”) A/B series

Original position

Size/Orientation

Do

cum

ent g

lass

Do

cum

ent feed

er

Trays 1 to

2

Trays 3 to

4

Tray 5 (B

ypass)

Tray 6

Do

cum

ent g

lass

Docum

ent feeder

Trays 1 to

2

Trays 3 to

4

Tray 5 (B

ypass)

Tray 6

A6 O - - - - - O - - - - -

A5 O O O - O - O O O - O -

A5 O - - - - - O O - - - -

A4 O O O - O - O O O - O -

A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O

A3 O O O - O - O O O - O -

B6 O - - - - - O - - - - -

B6 - - - - - - O - - - - -

B5 - - O - O - O O O - O -

B5 - O O O O O O O O O O O

B4 - O O - O - O O O - O -

5.5 x 8.5 - - - - - - - - - - - -

5.5 x 8.5 - O - - - - - - - - - -

7.25 x 10.5 O O - - - - - - - - - -

8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - -

8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - -

8.5 x 11 - O O - - - - O O - - -

8.5 x 11 O O O O - O - O O O - O

8.5 x 13 O O O - - - - - O - - -

8.5 x 14 - - O - - - - - O - - -

11 x 17 O O O - - - - O O - - -

16K - - - - - - - - - - - -

16K - - O - - - - O O - - -

8K - - O - - - - O - - - -

Postcard - - - - - - - - - - - -

Choukei 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -

Photo 2L - - - - - - - - - - - -

4 x 6 - - - - - - - - - - - -

4 x 6 - - - - - - - - - - - -

Common Settings

223

System

Settin

gs

10

Paper size group A/B series (8 K/ 16 K) A/B series (8 x 13”/8 x 14”) Inch series

Original position

Size/Orientation

Do

cum

ent g

lass

Docum

ent feeder

Trays 1 to

2

Trays 3 to

4

Tray 5 (B

ypass)

Tray 6

Do

cum

ent g

lass

Docum

ent feeder

Trays 1 to

2

Trays 3 to

4

Tray 5 (B

ypass)

Tray 6

Do

cum

ent g

lass

Docum

ent feeder

Trays 1 to

2

Trays 3 to

4

Tray 5 (B

ypass)

Tray 6

A6 O - - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -

A5 O O O - O - O O O - O - - - - - - -

A5 O O - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -

A4 O O O - - - O O O - - - - O O - - -

A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O - O

A3 O O O - O - O O O - O - O O O - - -

B6 O - - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -

B6 O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

B5 O O O - O - O - O - O - - - O - O -

B5 O O O O O O O O O O O O - O - - - -

B4 O O O - O - O O O - O - - O O - - -

5.5 x 8.5 - - - - - - - - - - - - O O O - O -

5.5 x 8.5 - - - - - - O O - - - - O O - - - -

7.25 x 10.5 - - - - - - - O - - - - O O O O - O

8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - -

8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

8.5 x 11 - O O - - - O O O - - - O O O - O -

8.5 x 11 - O O O - O O O O O - O O O O O O O

8.5 x 13 - - O - O - O O O - O - - - O - - -

8.5 x 14 - - O - O - - - O - O - O O O - O -

11 x 17 O O O - - - O O O - - - O O O - O -

16K O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

16K O O O - - - - - O - - - - - - - - -

8K O O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Postcard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Choukei 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Photo 2L - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - - -

Photo 2L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

4 x 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - - -

4 x 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

10 System Settings

224

System

Settin

gs

10

Millimeters/Inches

Select whether dimensions on the screen are shown in millimeters or inches.

Keyboard Input Restriction

Select whether to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard on the machine. To prevent characters being garbled when switched from one character set to another, you can restrict the input to ASCII characters only. If you select [On (Standard ASCII only)], the displayed keyboard shows ASCII characters only.

Operation of Up/Down Buttons

Select whether or not there is a continuous scrolling effect when the scroll buttons are held down.

Disable Fast Scrolling

Holding down the scroll buttons does not scroll.

Enable Fast Scrolling

Holding down the scroll buttons causes continuous scrolling.

Display Consumables Screen

Set whether the machine displays the parts status when parts need to be replaced.

Off

Do not display the consumable status screen.

When Power is switched on

Status is displayed at startup.

When Auto Clear is activated

Status displayed when auto clear* is executed.

Overwrite Hard Disk

Select whether or not to carry out hard disk overwrite erasing. If so, you can select whether to overwrite once or three times.

After deleting data from the hard disk, the area on which the data was stored is overwritten. This prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the data recorded on the hard disk. This applies to copy source, and other information stored temporarily by the system.Important • If the machine is powered off during the overwriting operation, unfinished files may remain

on the hard disk.

• The data is erased by overwriting once, but overwriting three times makes it even more definite that the data cannot be recovered. It does, however, take longer.

• During the overwriting process, processing of normal operations may be slowed down.

Note • An optional package is necessary for this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For information about how to check the status during the overwriting process, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.305).

Common Settings

225

System

Settin

gs

10

Data Encryption

Select whether to encrypt the data recorded on the hard disk of the machine.

By setting data encryption, when data is written to the hard disk it is automatically encrypted. The encryption prevents unauthorized access to the stored data. In order to activate this feature, set an encryption key.Note • An optional package is necessary for this feature. For more information, contact our

Customer Support Center.

1 Select [Data Encryption].

2 Select [On].

3 Select [Keyboard], and enter a 12-character encryption key.

Note • The default value for the encryption key is “111111111111” (12 characters).

4 Select [Save].

5 Using the same procedure, enter the same encryption key once more.

Data Restoration

The enciphered data cannot be restored at the following.

When a trouble occurs in the hard disk.

When you have forgotten the encryption key.

When you have forgotten the System Administrator User ID and a password whenmaking the [Customer Engineer Operation Limit] set to [On].

Data encryption feature and changing the settings

When data encryption is started or canceled, and when the encryption key is changed, the machine must be restarted. The corresponding recording area (the hard disk) is reformatted when restarting. In this case, the previous data is not guaranteed.

The recording area stores the following data.- Spooled print data- Secure print, sample print, and similar print data- Forms for the form overlay feature- Mailbox and job flow sheet settings (box name, passwords. etc.)- Documents in mailbox

Important • Be sure to save all necessary settings and documents before starting to use the data encryption feature or changing the settings.

Service Rep. Restricted Operation

Select whether to allow our customer engineer to perform [Overwrite Hard Disk] and [Data Encryption] operation, or to change the system administrator's User ID and password. Important • When [On] is selected, make sure not to forget the system administrator's User ID and

password. If this happens, the machine must be reset to the factory defaults. Contact our Customer Support Center.

Note • An optional package is necessary for this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

10 System Settings

226

System

Settin

gs

10

Software Download

This feature is for customer engineer use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Document Feeder Tray Elevation

When a document is loaded in the document feeder, set to which timing to raise an elevator tray can be performed. Select from [When loading originals] and [When pressing Start].Note • This feature does not appear for some models.

Gloss Level

Set whether to display the gloss level feature.

When [Enable] is selected, the [Gloss] button appears in [Image Quality] of the [Copy] screen.

Select [Enable] if the following feature is used in the print mode of the printer driver.

ART-EX driver : Gloss Level

PostScript driver : High Quality

Note • When you use the print mode above from the printer driver, 1024MB system memory is needen in the machine .

Copy Mode Settings

227

System

Settin

gs

10

Copy Mode Settings

In [Copy Mode Settings], you can make settings relating to the copy feature. The following shows the reference section for each item.

Basic Copying Tab ................................................................................................................... 227

Copy Defaults........................................................................................................................... 229

Copy Control ............................................................................................................................ 233

Original Size Defaults .............................................................................................................. 235

Reduce/Enlarge Presets ............................................................................................................ 236

Custom Colors.......................................................................................................................... 237



2 Select [Copy Mode Settings].


Basic Copying Tab

You can change the tray and an enlargement/reduction ratio appearing in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen. By setting most commonly used tray and ratio settings, you can reduce the number of selection operations for making a copy.

1 Select the [Basic Copying Tab].




4 Select [Save].

Features Allocation

You can set the features that appear in the third and fourth columns from the left of the [Basic Copying] screen. By setting the most commonly used features, you can avoid extra operations such as selecting tubs.

10 System Settings

228

System

Settin

gs

10

1 Select [Features Allocation], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the features to be displayed.

3 From the buttons appearing on the right, select the position where you want to allocate a feature.

Note • The position of the buttons on the right of the screen shows the position of the buttons in the [Basic Copying] screen.

5 Features

The [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], [Paper Supply], [2 Sided], and [Collated/Stapling/Punching] features are displayed in the [Basic Copying] screen. You cannot change the displayed features and their positions.

6 Features

You can set the features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the [Basic Copying] screen. Up to 3 features can be allocated.Note • However, [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Selection] cannot be allocated.

8 Features

You can set the features appearing in the third and fourth columns from the left of the [Basic Copying] screen. Up to 5 features can be allocated. However, [Output Color] at the top in the third column is fixed.Note • In addition, [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Selection] cannot be allocated.

4 Select the feature to be displayed, and select [Save].


5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required.

Paper Supply - 2nd Button

For the 5 feature buttons appearing in [Paper Supply] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen, you can set the second paper tray from the top.

Paper Supply - 3rd Button

For the 5 feature buttons appearing in [Paper Supply] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen, you can set the third paper tray from the top.

Paper Supply - 4th Button

For the 5 feature buttons appearing in [Paper Supply] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen, you can set the fourth paper tray from the top.

Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button

For the 5 feature buttons appearing in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen, you can set the ratio for the third row from the top.

You can select the ratio from the registered R/E Preset buttons.For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.236).

Note • You can set the 3rd button when [6 features] or [8 features] in [Features Allocation] is selected.

Copy Mode Settings

229

System

Settin

gs

10

Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button

For the 5 feature buttons appearing in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen, you can set the ratio for the fourth row from the top.

You can select the ratio from the registered R/E Preset buttons.For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.236).

Note • You can set the 3rd button when [6 features] or [8 features] in [Features Allocation] is selected.

Copy Defaults

This sets the default settings of copy feature settings. When the power is turned on or the machine returns from a Power Save mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the system returns to the defaults set here. By setting features you often use as defaults, you can avoid extra operations required in use.

1 Select [Copy Defaults].




4 Select [Save].

Paper Supply

Set the default value for [Paper Supply] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.

When the default value of [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], [Auto] cannot be selected for [Paper Supply].

Reduce/Enlarge

Set the default value for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.

Select the ratio from the 7 buttons registered as R/E Preset buttons, [100%], and [Auto %], a total of 9 possibilities.

When the default setting for [Paper Supply] is [Auto], [Auto %] cannot be selected for [Reduce/Enlarge].For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.236).

Output Color

Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Basic Copying] screen.

When [No Default] is selected, select the output color in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen before making copies.

Single Color

Set the default value for [Output Color] > [More...] > [Single Color] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen. You can select from 6 preset colors and 6 custom colors.For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.237).

10 System Settings

230

System

Settin

gs

10

Dual Color - Source Color

Set the default value for [Source Color] that appears when [Output Color]>[More...]>[Dual Color] is selected in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.

After selecting [Color Selection], you can select from 6 colors.

Dual - Target Area Color

Set the default value for [Target Area Color] that appears when [Output Color] > [More...] > [Dual Color] is selected in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen. You can select from 7 preset colors and 6 custom colors.For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.237).

Dual - Non-target Area Color

Set the default value for [Non-target Area Color] that appears when [Output Color] > [More...] > [Dual Color] is selected in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen. You can select from 7 preset colors and 6 custom colors.For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.237).

Original Type

Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)

Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.This is valid when an item other than [Black] is selected for [Output Color] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.

Original Type - Auto (Black)

Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.This is valid when [Black] is selected for [Output Color] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.

Lighten/Darken

Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Contrast

Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Sharpness

Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Sharpness/Color Saturation] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Color Saturation

Set the default value for [Color Saturation] of [Sharpness/Color Saturation] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Auto Exposure

Set the default value for [Auto Exposure] in the [Image Quality] screen.

[Auto Exposure] is valid when [Original Type] is set to [Text & Photo], [Text], or [Map].

Copy Mode Settings

231

System

Settin

gs

10

Color Balance - Yellow

Set the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.

You can set density levels of yellow for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density].

Color Balance - Magenta


You can set density levels of magenta for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density].

Color Balance - Cyan


You can set density levels of cyan for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density].

Color Balance - Black


You can set density levels of black for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density].

Color Shift

Set the default value for [Color Shift] in the [Image Quality] screen.

2 Sided Copying

Set the default value for [2 Sided Copying] in the [Scan Options] screen.

Mixed Size Originals

Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Scan Options] screen.

Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges

Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the top and bottom directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges

Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the left and right directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Center Erase/Binding Erase

Set the default value for the binding erase amount of the original in [Edge Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen.Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Image Shift - Side 1

Set the default value for [Side 1] of [Image Shift] in the [Scan Options] screen.

Image Shift - Side 2

Set the default value for [Side 2] of [Image Shift] in the [Scan Options] screen.

10 System Settings

232

System

Settin

gs

10

Image Rotation

Set the default value for [Image Rotation] in the [Scan Options] screen.

Image Rotation Direction

Set the default value for [Image Rotation Direction], If documents are of mixed orientations.


Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Scan Options] screen.

Copy Output

Set the default value for [Copy Output] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.

Output Orientation

Set the default value for [Output Orientation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value

Set the default value for [Shift Value] of [Tab Margin Shift] in the [Output Format] screen.

Stamp Position

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Stamp] is selected for [Annotation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Stamp Color

Set the default value for [Color] displayed when [Stamp] is selected for [Annotation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Stamp Size

Set the default value for [Size] displayed when [Stamp] is selected for [Annotation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Date Position

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Date] is selected for [Annotation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Page Number Style

Set the default value for [Style] displayed when [Page Number] is selected for [Annotation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Page Number Position

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Page Number] is selected for [Annotation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Sample Set

Set the default value for [Sample Set] in the [Job Assembly] screen.

Copy Mode Settings

233

System

Settin

gs

10

Copy Control

These settings relate to copy operation control.

1 Select [Copy Control].




4 Select [Save].

Memory Full Procedure

When the space of the hard disk runs out during scanning originals, a screen appears asking how the partly stored data should be handled.

Once a certain time has elapsed with the confirmation screen displayed, the subsequent processing is determined by these settings.You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For information, refer to "Auto Job Release" (P.206).

Cancel Job

The stored data is discarded.

Run Job

The read-in data is treated as valid, and the part of the original read in is copied.

Maximum Stored Pages

Set the maximum number of stored pages of a copy original. You can set a number from 1 to 999 pages.

2 Sided Originals Scan Options

When placing the 2 sided document in the document feeder, you can set the scanning method. Two methods are available: [2 Sided Simultaneous Scan], and [1 Sided Scan].Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


Auto Paper Off

Select the tray used when [Auto] of [Paper Supply] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen is canceled (the tray used when [Auto] of [Paper Supply] is selected in the [Basic Copying] screen, and [Auto %] or [Independent X-Y %] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge]).

Mixed Size Originals - Copy to Side 2

When the size of side 1 differs from that of side 2 in 2-sided copy, if different size of originals for side 1 and side 2 are selected by automatic paper supply, sets the paper to copy side 2 of original.Important • When the side 1 and side 2 of the originals are different, and if 2-side of originals are copied

of that of same paper, an image may be missing.

Off (Copy on new sheet)

Side 2 is copied on the front of a new sheet.

10 System Settings

234

System

Settin

gs

10

On

Side 2 is copied on the opposite side of Side 1 without changing the paper size.

Fine-tune 100%

You can fine-tune the magnification when copying at 100% (actual size). The set value is applied when [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Preset %] on the [Basic Copying] screen is set to 100%.

Set the value in the X/Y direction within the range 98 to 102% in 0.1% increments.Important • This feature is applied only when a copy is made by the document glass. Moreover, it is not

reflected in the magnification (100%) set by [Variable %], [Independent X-Y%] and [Calculator %].

Note • A magnification displays [100%] even if [Fine-tune 100%] is set.

1 Select [Fine-tune 100%], and select [Change Settings].

2 Enter the magnification using [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

Auto Exposure (Text & Photo)

Set the auto exposure level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text & Photo] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen. The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.

Auto Exposure (Text)

Set the auto exposure level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.

Text & Photo (Halftone) Originals

Set the type of original when [Halftone] of [Text & Photo] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Normal

Copy with standard image quality.

Inkjet Originals

Select when copying an original printed with an inkjet printer. This improves the recognition of inkjet colors.

Highlighted Originals

Select when copying an original marked with a highlight pen. This improves the recognition of the highlight pen colors.

Original Type - Lightweight Originals

When [Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen, set whether to display a special original ([Lightweight Originals]).

Output Orientation - Reverse Order

Specify whether to display [Face Up Reverse Order] under the [Output Orientation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Copy Mode Settings

235

System

Settin

gs

10

Output Orientation - Auto (1 Sheet)

Set operations when the output is one sheet and selecting [Auto] under the [Output Orientation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Stamp Density

Set the translucency of the stamp printed as annotation.You can select from three translucency values: 0% (solid), 25%, and 50%. The 0% represents no translucency.Note • If the stamp with [0%] density is printed over text, the text may no longer be readable.

Stamp Position on Side 2

When an annotation stamp is specified for 2 sided copying, set where to place the stamp printed on the reverse side.

Opposite to Side 1

Print in a position symmetrically opposite to the front side.

Same as Side 1

Print in the same position as the front side.

Date Position on Side 2

When an annotation date is specified for 2 sided copying, set where to place the date printed on the reverse side.

Opposite to Side 1


Same as Side 1


Page Number Position on Side 2

When an annotation page is specified for 2 sided copying, set where to place the page printed on the reverse side.

Opposite to Side 1


Same as Side 1


Original Size Defaults

Set the original sizes that appear in [Original Size] in the [Scan Options] screen.

An original size is assigned to each of the 11 buttons other than [Auto Size Detect].

When frequently making copies of non-standard size originals, by presetting the non-standard size, you can save time to enter the original size each time a copy is made.

10 System Settings

236

System

Settin

gs

10

1 Select [Original Size Defaults].




4 Select [Save].

A/B Series Size


Inch Size


Others


Variable Size

You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.

Reduce/Enlarge Presets

Set the magnifications shown in [Preset %], in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.

You can assign any magnification to each of the R/E Preset buttons 1 to 7.

1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge Presets].




4 Select [Save].

Copy Mode Settings

237

System

Settin

gs

10

Custom Colors

Set the custom colors used for [Single Color] and [Dual Color] in [Output Color].

You can assign custom colors with yellow (0 to 100%), magenta (0 to 100%), and cyan (0 to 100%) to each of custom color buttons 1 to 6.

1 Select [Custom Colors].




Note • Adjust so that the total of yellow, magenta, and cyan does not exceed 240%.

4 Select [Save].

10 System Settings

238

System

Settin

gs

10

Network Settings

In [Network Settings], set the type of interface through which the machine is connected to the client in [Port Settings], and the parameters required for communications in [Protocol Settings].For information about network settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

When using CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more details, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.158), and the Network Administrator Guide.

The following shows the reference section for each item.Port Settings ..............................................................................................................................238

Protocol Settings .......................................................................................................................239

Machine E-mail Address/Host Name .......................................................................................239

POP3 Server Settings ................................................................................................................239

SMTP Server Settings...............................................................................................................239

Domain Filter ............................................................................................................................239

Remote Authentication Server Settings ....................................................................................240

PKI (Public Key) Settings.........................................................................................................241

Other Settings............................................................................................................................242



2 Select [Network Settings].

3 Select the item to be set or changed.

Port Settings

Set the interface by which the machine is connected to the client. In [Port Settings], you can set the following items.For information about port settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

1. USB 7. Salutation 13. Mail Notice Service

2. LPD 8. Port9100 14. UPnP Discovery

3. NetWare 9. SNMP 15. Internet Service (HTTP)

4. SMB 10. FTP Client 16. SOAP

5. IPP 11. Receive E-mail 17. WebDAV

6. Ether Talk 12. Send E-mail

Network Settings

239

System

Settin

gs

10

Protocol Settings

Set the parameters required for communications. In [Protocol Settings], you can set the following items.For information about protocol settings, refer to the Network Administrators Guide.

Machine E-mail Address/Host Name

Set the E-mail address and host name for the machine. In [Machine E-mail Address/Host Name], you can set the following items.For information about E-mail address/host name of the machine, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

POP3 Server Settings

Set the POP3 server. In [POP3 Server Settings], you can set the following items.For information about POP server settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

SMTP Server Settings

Set the SMTP server. In [SMTP Server Settings], you can set the following items.For information about SMTP server settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

Domain Filter

Set the accepted domains. In [Domain Filter], you can set the following items.Note • This feature is only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

For information about domain settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

1. Ethernet Settings 4. TCP/IP - Subnet Mask

2. TCP/IP - Get IP Address 5. TCP/IP - Gateway Address

3. TCP/IP - IP Address 6. TCP/IP - IP Filter

1. E-mail Address

2. Host Name

3. Domain Name

1. POP3 Server Setup 5. POP3 Server Check Interval

2. POP3 Server IP Address 6. POP3 Server Login Name

3. POP3 Server Name 7. POP3 Server Password

4. POP3 Server Port Number 8. POP Password Encryption

1. SMTP Server Setup 5. E-mail Send Authentication

2. SMTP Server IP Address 6. SMTP AUTH Login Name

3. SMTP Server Name 7. SMTP AUTH Password

4. SMTP Server Port Number

1. Domain Filtering 2 to 51. Domains 1 to 50

10 System Settings

240

System

Settin

gs

10

Remote Authentication Server Settings

Set the remote authentication server. Up to 5 servers can be set.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


1 Select [Remote Authentication Server Settings].




4 Select [Save].

Authentication System

You can select the system for authentication from [Kerberos (Windows2000)] and [Kerberos (Solaris)].

Remote Authentication Server 1 through 5

Make the remote authentication server settings.

Server - Server Setup

You can select the remote authentication server specification method from [By IP Address] and [By Server Name].

Server - IP Address

Set the IP address of the remote authentication server using values from 0 to 255.Note • You can set a server IP address when [Server -Server Setup] is set to [By IP Address].

• 224.XXX.XXX.XXX to 255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.

Server - Server Name

You can set the server name of the remote authentication server. Up to 255 characters are allowed.Note • You can set this when [Server - Server Setup] is set to [By Server Name].

Server - Port Number

Set the remote authentication server port number in the range 1 to 65,535.

Server - Realm Name

Set the remote authentication server realm name. Up to 64 characters are allowed.Important • A realm name must be in capital letters. When entering the name with lower-case letters, an

authentication error occurs.

Network Settings

241

System

Settin

gs

10

PKI (Public Key) Settings

Set the HTTP-SSL/TLS.Note • Before setting the HTTP-SSL/TLS communications, the device certificate must be set. For

information about the device certificate, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

1 Select [PKI (Public Key) Settings].

2 Select [HTTP-SSL/TLS Settings].

HTTP - SSL/TLS Settings

Set the HTTP - SSL/TLS.



3 Select [Save].

Device Certificate - SSL Server

You can select linking to certificate.

HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication

Enable or disable the HTTP-SSL/TLS communications.

HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number

Set the HTTP-SSL/TLS communications port number in the range from 1 to 65,535.

S/MIME Settings

Set the S/MIME.



3 Select [Save].

Device Certificate - S/MIME

Select a S/MIME certificate for the machine.For information about the certificate, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

S/MIME Communication

Enable or disable the S/MIME communications.

Receive Untrusted E-mail

Select whether or not to receive untrustworthy E-mail with no certificate.

Message Digest Algorithm

Select a message digest algorithm. Two algorithms are available: SHA1, and MD5.

10 System Settings

242

System

Settin

gs

10

Contents Encryption Method

Select an encryption method for E-mail contents when sending E-mail from the machine. Four methods are available: 3DES, RC2 - 40, RC2 - 64, and RC2 - 128.

Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail

Select whether or not to always add a digital signature to E-mail. You can also select the setting in which the machine asks to add a digital signature the E-mail whenever you send E-mail.

Certificate Auto Store

Select whether or not automatically store a S/MIME certificate attached with the E-mail when receiving E-mail sent from an address registered in the address book.

Other Settings

Make other settings. In [Other Settings], you can set the following items.Note • This feature is only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

For information about other settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

1. E-mail Receive Protocol

Print Mode Settings

243

System

Settin

gs

10

Print Mode Settings

In [Print Mode Settings], you make settings relating to the printer feature.When using CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more details, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.158), and refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

The following shows the reference section for each item.Allocate Memory...................................................................................................................... 243

Delete Form.............................................................................................................................. 245

Other Settings........................................................................................................................... 246



2 Select [Print Mode Settings].


Allocate Memory

For each interface, set the memory capacity for the receiving buffer (temporary storage for data sent from the client).

You can change the receiving buffer capacity depending on the pattern of use and purpose. Increasing the receiving buffer capacity may allow a client to be released sooner from an interface.Important • If you change the memory capacity settings, the memory is reset, and therefore data stored

in all memory areas is lost.

• It is not possible to assign more than the total memory. When the power is turned on, if the settings exceed the available memory capacity, they are automatically adjusted by the system.

1 Select [Allocate Memory].



10 System Settings

244

System

Settin

gs

10


4 Select [Save].

Note • When a port is set to [Disabled], the corresponding items do not appear.

• Depending on the amount of data sent from the client, increasing the memory capacity may not change the time taken to release the client.

PostScript Memory

Specify the memory capacity used for PostScript.

Set a value from 8.00 to 96.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments.Note • The maximum value that can be set varies according to the available memory capacity.

ESC/P Form Memory

Displays destination to save forms used in ESC/P.

HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory

Specify the capacity for HP-GL/2 auto layout memory.

Receiving Buffer - USB

Set the receiving buffer for USB.

Set the value from 64 to 1,024 KB in 32 KB increments.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool

Off

Do not use spooling. While LPD print processing is being carried out for one client, data cannot be received over the same interface from another client.Set a value for the dedicated LPD receiving buffer memory capacity from 1,024 to 2,048 KB, in 32 KB increments.

Memory

Carry out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this setting is selected, set the memory capacity of the receiving buffer for spooling from 0.50 MB to 32.00 MB, in 0.25 MB increments. Note that print data exceeding the set memory capacity is not accepted. In such cases, select [Hard Disk], or [Off].

Hard Disk

Carry out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.

Receiving Buffer - NetWare

Set the NetWare receiving buffer.

Set the value from 64 to 1,024 KB in 32 KB increments.

Receiving Buffer - SMB Spool

Off

Do not use spooling. While SMB print processing is being carried out for one client, data cannot be received over the same interface from another client.Set a value for the dedicated SMB receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1,024 KB in 32 KB increments.

Print Mode Settings

245

System

Settin

gs

10

Memory

Carry out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this setting is selected, set the memory capacity of the receiving buffer for spooling from 0.50 MB to 32.00 MB, in 0.25 MB increments.Note that print data exceeding the set memory capacity is not accepted. In such cases, select [Hard Disk], or [Off].

Hard Disk


Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool

Off

Do not use spooling. While IPP print processing is being carried out for one client, data cannot be received over the same interface from another client.Set a value for the dedicated IPP receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1,024 KB in 32 KB increments.

Hard Disk


Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk

Set the EtherTalk receiving buffer.

Set a value from 64 to 1,024 KB in 32 KB increments.

Receiving Buffer - Port 9100

Set the Port9100 receiving buffer.

Set the value from 64 to 1,024 KB in 32 KB increments.

Delete Form

Delete registered forms for ESC/P.

1 Select [Delete Form].

2 Select the print mode to delete forms.

3 Enter the form number with the numeric keypad, and select [Confirm].

4 Check the form name, and select [Delete Data].

ESC/P

Delete ESC/P emulation forms.

Form Number

When you select an item to delete, you can enter the form number. Enter the form number selected from 1 to 64 (when a hard disk is installed, selected from 1 to 2,048).

Form Name

After you enter the form number and select [Confirm], the form name matching the entered number appears.

10 System Settings

246

System

Settin

gs

10

Other Settings

Make settings relating to the paper used in the printer.





4 Select [Save].

Print Area

Set whether to expand the print area.For information about the printable area, refer to "Printable Area" (P.458).

Substitute Tray

When there is no tray containing the paper size selected by the automatic tray selection, select whether or not to print replaced with paper loaded in another paper tray. In the event of using substitute tray, set the size.

Display Message

Do not use a substitute tray, but display a paper loading message.

Use Larger Size

Replace with the next larger paper size than that selected, and print at the same size.

Use Nearest Size

Replace with the closest paper size to that selected, and print. If necessary, the printing is automatically reduced in size.Note • If there is a client specification, the client specification takes precedence.

Select Tray 5 (Bypass)

Replace with the paper in Tray 5 (bypass).

Paper Type Mismatch

Set the action to be taken when the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match that specified.

Print

Carry on printing, even if the paper type is different.

Display Confirmation Screen

A confirmation screen appears to show procedures.

Display Paper Supply Screen

The [Paper Supply] screen appears to change the paper type of the selected tray.

Print Mode Settings

247

System

Settin

gs

10

Unregistered Forms

When a form specified for printing in a form data file (overlay printing) is not present on the host computer, set whether to print the job or not. If you specify [Print], since the specified form is not present, only the data is printed.

This setting is added to the print settings menu when there is a print specification from the host computer.

Print ID

When printing through a print driver, specify whether to print user authentication information on the paper for distinguishing the user. The first 64 letters of the user information is printed.

Select a position to print from [Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left], or [Bottom Right].Note • To use the Print ID feature, the User ID set by the print driver is necessary beforehand. For

more information about how to set, refer to the print driver's online help.

• When user information is not available, [Unknown User] is printed.

Banner Sheet

Select whether to output banner sheets to separate different outputs.Note • Even if the stapler feature is enabled, banner sheets are not stapled.

• On a print job from a Macintosh, the document name does not appear on the banner sheet.

• When printing banner sheets, they are counted for metering purposes.

Off

Do not print banner sheets.

Start Sheet

Print before a print job.

End Sheet

Print after a print job.

Start Sheet & End Sheet

Print before and after a print job.

Banner Sheet Tray

Set the paper tray used for banner sheets.

Select from [Tray 1] to [Tray 4], and [Tray 6].

PostScript Default Color

Set the default values for AdobePS and PDF color mode.

PostScript Paper Supply

Select whether the PostScript DMS (Deferred Media Selection) feature is enabled or not.

PostScript Font Absence

Set an action when a PostScript font specified in a job is not present.

Cancel Printing

Cancel printing.

10 System Settings

248

System

Settin

gs

10

Substitute Font and Print

Continue printing, using a substitute font. Courier is used as the substitute font.

If a Japanese font is replaced to a substitute font, it cannot be printed properly. When printing with a Japanese font, select [Using ATCx] in [PostScript Font Substitution].

PostScript Font Substitution

When a PostScript font specified in a job is not present, set whether to use ATCx for the substitute font.

The ATCx feature is used to replace a Japanese font not installed in the machine in a job to other Japanese font installed in the machine when printing a document.

Scan Mode Settings

249

System

Settin

gs

10

Scan Mode Settings

Make settings relating to the scanner feature.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


When using CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more details, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.158), and refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

The following shows the reference section for each item.Basic Scanning Tab.................................................................................................................. 249

Scan Defaults............................................................................................................................ 250

Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults ..................................................................................................... 252

Scan Size Defaults.................................................................................................................... 252

Output Size Defaults ................................................................................................................ 253

Reduce/Enlarge Presets ............................................................................................................ 254

Other Settings........................................................................................................................... 254



2 Select [Scan Mode Settings].


Basic Scanning Tab

Set items relating to the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen display.

1 Select [Basic Scanning Tab].




4 Select [Save].

10 System Settings

250

System

Settin

gs

10

Feature in 2nd Column

You can set the features shown in the second column of the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.

You can select from [2 Sided Originals], [Scan Resolution], [Lighten/Darken], and [Reduce/Enlarge].

Reduce/Enlarge - 2nd Button

This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].

Set the magnification shown in the second row from the top of the 5 feature buttons shown in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.

Select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.254).

Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button


Set the magnification shown in the third row from the top of the 5 feature buttons shown in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.


Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button


Set the magnification shown in the fourth row from the top of the 5 feature buttons shown in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.


Scan Defaults

Set the default values for the scanner feature. When the power is turned on or the machine returns from a Power Save mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the system returns to the defaults set here. By setting features you often use as defaults, you can avoid extra operations required in use.The values set become valid after the power has been turned off and on again.

1 Select [Scan Defaults].




4 Select [Save].

Output Color

Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.

Scan Mode Settings

251

System

Settin

gs

10

Original Type

Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.

File Format

Set the default value for [File Format] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.

Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail

Set the default value for [Thumbnail] of [DocuWorks High Compression] in [Output Format] displayed in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen when using the [E-mail] feature.

Thumbnail - Scan to FTP/SMB

Set the default value for [Thumbnail] of [DocuWorks High Compression] in [Output Format] displayed in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen when using the [Scan to FTP/SMB] feature.

Lighten/Darken

Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Contrast

Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] in the [Image Quality] screen. The contrast setting is valid when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color] or [Grayscale].

Sharpness

Set the default value for [Sharpness] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Auto Exposure

Set the default value for [Auto Exposure] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Background Suppression

Set the default value for [Background Suppression] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Color Space

Set the default value for color space in the [Image Quality] screen.Important • When [Device Color Space] is selected as default and "Color Space" (P.255) is set to [Off],

[Auto] of [output Color] in the [Basic scanning] screen does not appear. In addition, when a High-compression Image kit (optional) is installed to the machine, [PDF High Compression] and [DocuWorks High Compression] of [Output Format] also do not appear.


Set the default value for [Original Orientation] when scanning.

Scan Resolution

Set the default value for [Scan Resolution] in the [Scan Options] screen.

You can select from 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, and 600 dpi.


Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Scan Options] screen.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


10 System Settings

252

System

Settin

gs

10

Edge Erase

Set the default value for [Edge Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. You can select from [Normal] or [Variable Erase].


Set the default value for the amount of edges erased from the original in the top and bottom directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.


Set the default value for the amount of edges erased from the original in the left and right directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.


Set the default value for the binding erase amount of the original in [Edge Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Image Compression

Set the default value for [Image Compression] in the [Output Format] screen.

Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults

You can select the default protocol (transfer protocol) used for transfer from FTP, SMB, and SMB (UNC format).

1 Select [Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults].



4 Select [Save].

Scan Size Defaults

Set the original size shown in [Scan Size] in the [Scan Options] screen. An original size is assigned to each of the eleven buttons other than [Auto Size Detect].

When frequently scanning non-standard size originals, by presetting the non-standard size, you can save time to enter the original size each time a document is scanned.

1 Select [Scan Size Defaults].



Scan Mode Settings

253

System

Settin

gs

10


Select [Save].

A/B Series Size


Inch Size


Others


Variable Size

You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.

Output Size Defaults

Set the sizes to be displayed at [Output Size] when selecting [Auto %] for scanning documents at [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Scan Options] screen.

Any output sizes can be assigned to output size buttons 1 to 8.

By setting the commonly used sizes, you can reduce the number of selection operations for scanning.

1 Select [Output Size Defaults].




4 Select [Save].

A/B Series Size


Inch Size


Others


10 System Settings

254

System

Settin

gs

10


Set the magnifications shown in [Preset %] for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Scan Options] screen.

You can assign any magnification to the R/E Preset buttons 1 to 7 other than [100%].

1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge Presets].



3 Select [Preset %] or [Variable %].


5 Select [Save].

Preset %

You can select from 20 ratios for [Preset %].

Variable %

You can set any magnification. Set the value from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

Other Settings

These settings relate to the scanner feature specification.





4 Select [Save].

Scan Service

Set whether or not to use the scanner feature.


While scanning an original, if there is insufficient hard disk space for the scanner, a screen appears, asking how the partly stored data should be handled.

Once a certain time has elapsed with the confirmation screen displayed, the subsequent processing is determined by these settings.You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For information, refer to "Auto Job Release" (P.206).

Scan Mode Settings

255

System

Settin

gs

10

Cancel Job

The stored data is discarded.

Run Job

The read-in data is treated as valid, and the part of the original read in is treated as a complete stored file.


Set the maximum number of stored pages of a scan original. You can set a number from 1 to 999 pages.


When placing the 2 sided documents in the document feeder, you can set the scanning method. Two methods are available: [2 Sided Simultaneous Scan], and [1 Sided Scan].Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


Color Saturation

Set the saturation when scanning a full color original. When carrying out a scan, it is automatically adjusted according to this setting value.

Auto Exposure Level

For a color scan, set the auto exposure level. This is valid when [Auto Exposure] is set to [On].

The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.

Background Suppression Level

Set the show-through prevention level. This is valid when [Background Suppression] is set to [On].

Color Space

Set whether to display the color space feature.

When set to [Enables], [Color Space] buttons appear in the [Image Quality] screen for [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Scan to FTP/SMB], and [Job Template].Important • When [Disabled] is selected as default and "Color Space" (P.251) is set to [Device Color

Space], [Auto] of [Output Color] in the [Basic scanning] screen does not appear. In addition, when a High-compression Image kit (optional) is installed to the machine, [PDF High Compression] and [DocuWorks High Compression] of [Output Format] also do not appear.

TIFF Format

Set the TIFF format for scanned data. You can select from [TIFF V6] and [TTN2].

Image Transfer Screen

Select whether to display a message when the scan of an original is completed.

Hide Message and Screen

Do not show a scan completion message.

Display Message Only

Show a scan completion message.

Display Message and Screen

Show a screen while original is being scanned, and also a scan completion message.

10 System Settings

256

System

Settin

gs

10

E-mail Settings

In [E-mail Settings], you can make settings relating to the mail feature.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For


The following shows the reference section for each item.E-mail Defaults .........................................................................................................................256

Address Search (Directory Service)..........................................................................................256

Other Settings............................................................................................................................259



2 Select [E-mail Settings].


E-mail Defaults

Set the default subject for e-mail. The subject line can be up to 128 characters long.

1 Select [E-mail Defaults].


3 Enter the default subject, and select [Save].

Address Search (Directory Service)

Set the attributes and ranges for searching address books stored in the address search (directory service).Note • This feature only supports address book used with the e-mail scan feature.

1 Select [Address Search (Directory Service)].

2 Select the item to be set, and select [Change Settings].


E-mail Settings

257

System

Settin

gs

10


4 Select [Save].

Directory Service (LDAP)

Select whether to allow the use of address books stored on the directory server.

Even when [Enable] is selected, unless the following conditions are met the directoryserver address book will not be started.

- The IP address must be correctly set.- The directory server (primary) IP address or Internet address must be set.- The port number used for LDAP communications must be set.

Primary Server

Make the directory server settings.

1 Select [Primary Server].



Primary Server Setup

You can select the primary server specification method from [By IP Address] and [By Server Name].

Primary Server IP Address

Set the IP address of the primary server using values from 0 to 255.Note • You can set a server IP address when [Primary Server Setup] is set to [By IP Address].


Primary Server Name

You can set the server name for the primary server. Up to 64 characters are allowed.Note • You can enter a name when [Primary Server Setup] is [By Server Name].

Primary Server Port Number

Set the primary server port number in the range 1 to 65,535.

Secondary Server

Make the directory server (secondary server) settings.

1 Select [Secondary Server].



Secondary Server Setup

You can select the secondary server specification method from [By IP Address] and [By Server Name].

10 System Settings

258

System

Settin

gs

10

Secondary Server IP Address

Set the IP address of the secondary server using values from 0 to 255.Note • You can set a server IP address when [Secondary Server Setup] is set to [By IP Address].


Secondary Server Name

Set the server name for the secondary server. Up to 64 characters are allowed.Note • You can enter a name when [Secondary Server Setup] is [By Server Name].

Secondary Server Port Number

Set the secondary server port number in the range 1 to 65,535.

Login Name

Set the login name for access to the directory server. However, set this only when authentication is required for the directory service. Do not make the setting when authentication is not required.

When setting the login name, you can enter up to 255 characters.

Password

Set a password for access to the directory server. However, set this only when authentication is required for the directory service. Do not make the setting when authentication is not required.

When setting the password, you can enter up to 32 characters.

Search Root Entry DN

You can enter the search root character string with up to 255 characters.

Scope of Search from Root Entry

Select the search range from the search root.

Root entry only

Searches the root level only.

One level below root entry only

Searches from the root, as far as one level below.

All levels below root entry

Searches from the root, including all levels below.

Object Class of Search Target

You can enter the search target object classes with up to 32 characters.

Server Application

You can select the software used for the directory server, from [Microsoft Active Directory], [Novell NetWare 5.*], and [Other Applications].

Attribute Type of Recipient Name

Set the recipient name attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

E-mail Settings

259

System

Settin

gs

10

Attribute Type of Last Name

Set the sender's last name attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Attribute Type of First Name

Set the sender's first name attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Attribute Type of E-mail Address

Set the E-mail address attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Attribute Type of Custom Items 1 to 3

Set the LDAP attribute type of custom items 1 to 3. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3

Set the attribute name assigned to custom items 1 to 3. You can enter up to 16 characters.

Attribute Type of Certificate

Set the attribute type of certificate. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Maximum Search Results

Set the upper limit on the number of searched address results, from 5 to 100. If there are more search results than the upper limit, the search operation is stopped at that number.

Search Time-Out

Select whether or not to set a search time-out.

1 Select [Search Time-Out].



Off

No search time-out limit is set.

On

Set the value from 5 to 120 seconds in 1 second increments.

Other Settings

Make other settings relating to E-mail transmission.





10 System Settings

260

System

Settin

gs

10

4 Select [Save].

Maximum E-mail Size

You can select whether or not to set an upper limit on data size in e-mail transmissions.

Off

There is no limit on data size.

On

Set an upper limit on data size.

Set the value from 50 to 65,535 KB in 1 KB increments.Note • If the data size exceeds the limit, the E-mail transmission is aborted.

Maximum Address Entries

Set the maximum number of addresses that can be specified when sending an E-mail.The number of addresses is the total number in To:/Cc:/Bcc:.

You can set the maximum number of addresses in the range from 1 to 100. If the maximum number of addresses is exceeded, the e-mail transmission is aborted.

Incoming E-mail Print Options

You can select the print operation when the machine receives an E-mail sent to the E-mail address of the machine.

Attachment

The attached document is printed.

Full Headers and Contents

The headers and contents of the E-mail are printed.

When you check a mark to [Print S/MIME Information], S/MIME Information is also printed.

Basic Headers and Contents

The basic headers (From/To/Subject/Date) and the contents of the E-mail are printed.

When you check a mark to [Auto Print], the machine prints only E-mail that has contents.

Auto Print Error Mail

Select whether the error e-mail resulting from an incorrect address, or transmission error should be automatically printed.Note • Job status of error mail is displayed as [Completed-Error] in the [Job Status] screen or the

[Report Job] screen even if the e-mail is printed correctly.

Response to Read Status (MDN)

When the machine receives a read status request (MDN), set whether or not to respond.

Off

Do not respond.

On

Automatically notify that the e-mail has been opened.

E-mail Settings

261

System

Settin

gs

10

Read Status (MDN)

When an e-mail is sent from the machine, select whether a dialog box should open requesting the recipient to return to the read status.

Off

The read status (MDN) feature cannot be used.

On

All users are permitted to use the read status (MDN) feature.

Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail

Select whether to automatically print transmission result e-mails (DSN response/MDN response).

Off

Transmission result e-mail are not automatically printed.

On

Transmission result e-mail are automatically printed.

Print when delivery fails

Printing only when the transmission failed.

Max No. of Pages for Split Send

Select whether to split the attachment data into pages for transmission.When split for transmission, set the number of pages.Important • It is only possible to split into multiple-page files when the output file format is specified as

PDF, DocuWorks or multiple-page TIFF.

1 Select [Page Size for Split Send].


3 When [On] is selected, set the number of pages.

Off

The attachment data is not split for transmission.

On

Set a value from 1 to 999 pages, in 1 page increments.

10 System Settings

262

System

Settin

gs

10


In [Mailbox/Stored Document Settings], make the settings for handling of documents stored in mailboxes. The following shows the reference section for each item.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


Mailbox Settings .......................................................................................................................262

Stored Document Settings.........................................................................................................263



2 Select [Mailbox/Stored Document Settings].


Mailbox Settings

Set actions after receiving documents from a client.

1 Select [Mailbox Settings].



4 Select [Save].

Documents Retrieved By Client

Set whether to delete a document stored in the mailbox when it is retrieved by the client.

Delete according to Mailbox settings

Follow the document automatic deletion settings for each individual mailbox.For information about setting the mailbox, refer to "Delete Documents After Retrieval" (P.266).

Force Delete

Ignore the settings for each individual mailbox, and when a document is retrieved from a mailbox, forcibly delete it.


263

System

Settin

gs

10

Stored Document Settings

Select whether documents stored in a mailbox are automatically deleted. You can specify the retention period and date of deletion.

You can also select whether individual documents are deleted or not.

1 Select [Stored Document Settings].



4 Select [Save].

Document Expiry Date

Set the document retention period. If automatically deleted, you can set the date (elapsed days) and time of deletion. This setting applies to all stored documents.

1 Select [Document Expiry Date], and select [Change Settings].


3 If you selected [On], set the retention period, and the time of deletion after the retention period has expired with [ ] and [ ].

Documents kept for

Set the document retention period in the range 1 to 14 days.

Documents deleted at

Set the time for the document to be deleted after the retention period has expired, in the range from 0 to 23 hours, 00 to 59 minutes.When a storage period is set, set document deletion to enabled. For information, refer to "Delete Documents with Expiry Date" (P.266).

Delete Charge Print Documents

Select whether or not to delete charge print documents after the retention period has expired.

Delete Secure Print Documents

Select whether or not to delete secure print documents after the retention period has expired.

Delete Sample Print Documents

Select whether or not to delete sample print documents after the retention period has expired.

10 System Settings

264

System

Settin

gs

10

Job Flow Settings

In [Job Flow Settings], make a setting for a pool server when job flows are treated and stored using the ApeosWare JF Pool Service.

A pool server is an external server that treats and stores job flows.

When you set a pool server, a job flow list and job flows can be obtained from the pool server.

In order to use a pool server, the machine must be registered in the pool server in advance.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


1 Select [Job Flow Settings].



4 Select [Save].

Pool Server

Select whether to use a pool server.

Pool Server Login Method

Select a pool server login method.

Show login screen

A screen for entering a login name and a password appears when accessing a pool server.

Automatically log in

The machine automatically logs in a pool server. A login name and a password are set here.

Job Flow Sheet List Access Default

Select which of job sheet flow lists stored in the machine or a pool server to be displayed when selecting a job flow.

Setup Menu

265

System

Settin

gs

10

Setup Menu

In [Setup Menu], you can register mailboxes and job flow, and register and update address book entries (mail scan).Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


The following shows the reference section for each item.Mailbox .................................................................................................................................... 265

Job Flow Sheets........................................................................................................................ 267

Address Book ........................................................................................................................... 274

Paper Size/Type........................................................................................................................ 277

1 In the [System Settings] screen, select [Setup Menu].



Mailbox

Register mailboxes to store scan documents. Up to 500 mailboxes can be registered.You can check the current mailboxes in the “Mailbox registration list”. For information, refer to "Mailbox List" (P.313).

1 Select [Mailbox].

2 Select the mailbox to be registered, and select [Create/Delete].


• You can specify the mailbox directly by entering a three-digit number with the numeric keypad.

3 When creating a new mailbox, a password setting screen appears.

Not setting a password

1) Select [Off], and then select [Save].

Setting a password

1) Select [On], and then enter a password.

2) Select [Save].

10 System Settings

266

System

Settin

gs

10



6 Select [Save].

Mailbox Name

Set the mailbox name.

Using the displayed keyboard and the numeric keypad, you can enter up to 20 characters.For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.203).

Password

Set the mailbox password. You can enter up to 20 numeric digits (0 to 9). The password setting is optional.

Check Password

To restrict access to specified users only, you can set a password. When a password is set, it is necessary to enter the password each time a mailbox reading or writing operation is carried out.

Save (Write)

When a mailbox is selected, a password is required.

Print/Delete (Read)

When a document in a mailbox is printed or deleted, password input is required.

Always

For both of the two above operations, a password is required.

Delete Documents After Retrieval

When a document stored in a mailbox is printed, or is retrieved by an external action, set whether the document should be deleted.

Save

The document is left stored.

Delete

After the document is printed, or is retrieved by an external action, it is automatically deleted.

Delete Documents with Expiry Date

Specify whether to enable the feature to delete documents stored in a mailbox at a specified time after a retention period has expired.

Disabled

Even when the set retention period has elapsed, documents are not deleted.

Setup Menu

267

System

Settin

gs

10

Enabled

Documents are deleted at a specified time after the retention period has expired.However, unless the retention period has already been set, even when set to [Enable], documents are not deleted. Set the document retention period.For information about setting the document retention period, refer to "Mailbox Settings" (P.262).

Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox

You can make a link with a job flow and a mailbox. You can determine how documents stored in a mailbox are processed by linking a job flow in which a series of operations are registered to the mailbox beforehand.For the method of registering a job flow, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.267).

1 Select [Link Flow Sheet to Mailbox], and select [Change Settings].

When a job flow is already linked, the screen on the right appears.

Cut Link

Cancels the link between a mailbox and a job flow.

Create/Change Link

A screen for linking a job flow appears. You can select from the existing job flows or create a new job flow.For information about the operation, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.267).

Auto Start

If you select the [Auto Start] check box, when a document is stored in the mailbox, the procedure registered in the job flow is automatically started.

When the [Delete Mailbox] Button is Selected

Deletes the selected mailbox.If there are documents in the mailbox, all documents are deleted. All job flows created in the mailbox are also deleted.Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot be recovered.

Job Flow Sheets

Job flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.

A target of a job flow registered with this feature is documents stored in a mailbox. Two methods are available: 1) manually or automatically start a job flow when a document is stored to a mailbox, or 2) select a job flow to act on documents stored in the mailbox.For information about job flows whose targets are other than documents stored in a mailbox, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.143).

10 System Settings

268

System

Settin

gs

10

To start a job flow automatically, you must make a link with a mailbox and the job flow in advance. Documents are automatically processed by the job flow when they stored in the mailbox.Note • To link a job flow created with [Job Flow Sheets] with a mailbox, start from [Check Mailbox].

For more information, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.139).

Features that can be registered are listed below.

Forwarding specification (FTP, SMB, mail)

Multiple forwarding specifications, multiple processing execution

printing

Restrictions on Using Job Flow

A job flow may be for use by an individual user, for shared use, or for use only when linked with a particular mailbox, and you can use the authentication feature to control access to job flow features.For information about the available job flow features and restrictions on use, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox" (P.323).

1 Select [Job Flow Sheets].

2 Carry out the job flow operation.

Sheet Filtering

You can filter the job flows displayed. The screen display depends on the user authentication feature settings.

1 Select the filtering conditions, then select [Save].

Create

The [Create New Job Flow] screen appears.

Edit/Delete

The [Details] screen appears.

Pool Server Login

A pool server is an external server that treats and stores job flows.

When you set a pool server, a job flow list and job flows can be obtained from the pool server.

In order to use a pool server, the machine must be registered in the pool server by selecting [Enable] for [Pool Server] in [Job Flow Settings].

When [Auto Login] is selected for [Pool Server Login Method] in [Job Flow Settings], the machine automatically logs on the pool server and displays a list of job flows stored in the pool server.

Setup Menu

269

System

Settin

gs

10

When [Auto Login] is not selected, the login screen on the right appears before displaying a list of job flows stored in the pool serer.For more information about [Job Flow Settings], refer to "Job Flow Settings" (P.264).

Create New Job Flow Sheet

Create a new job flow.

1 Select the item to be changed.

Delete Settings

Deletes the setting values of all selected items.

Change Settings

You can confirm or change the settings of the selected items.2 Select [Change Settings].

Name

Set the name for the job flow, of up to 128 characters.

Description

Set the description of the job flow, of up to 256 characters.

Send as E-mail

Specify the recipients for E-mail.

You can specify up to 100 addresses, either selecting from the address book numbers or by direct input.

Address Book

The recipients can be specified from address book. The specified recipient appears in [Recipient Name/E-mail Address] in the [Send as E-mail] screen.

1 Search for recipient.


10 System Settings

270

System

Settin

gs

10

New Recipient

Specify a new recipient. The specified recipient appears in [Recipient Name/E-mail Address] in the [Send as E-mail] screen.

1 Select the item you want to change, and select [Change Settings] to set.

Detailed Settings

You can set the subject, output file format, encryption, and digital signature.

1 Select the item you want to change, and select [Change Settings] to set.

Delete Recipient

This deletes all information for the selected recipients.

Change Settings

You can confirm or change the selected recipients.For information about the method for confirm/change, refer to "Address Book" (P.274).

Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)

Specify where FTP forwarding is to be stored.

Address Book

When the server address is registered in the address book, you can specify the address from the address book. The specified address appears in the [FTP Transfer] screen.For more information about the address book, refer to "Address Book" (P.274).

Setup Menu

271

System

Settin

gs

10

File Format

Specify the output file format.Note • The formats that can be selected depend on the model of scanner installed.

Clear Field

Deletes all information for the selected addresses.

Keyboard

When select one of [Recipient Name], [Server], [Save in], [Login Name], and [Password], an input screen appears.

The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:

Recipient Name: up to 18 characters

Server: up to 64 characters

Save in: up to 128 characters

Login Name: up to 32 characters

Password: up to 32 charactersFor more details, refer to "Address Book" (P.274).

Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2)

Specify where SMB forwarding is to be stored.

Address Book

When the server address is registered in the address book, you can specify the address from the address book. The specified address appears in the [SMB Transfer] screen.For more information about the address book, refer to "Address Book" (P.274).

10 System Settings

272

System

Settin

gs

10

File Format

Specify the output file format.Note • The formats that can be selected depend on the model of scanner installed.

Clear Field

Deletes all information for the selected addresses.

Keyboard

Select one of [Recipient Name], [Server], [Shared Name], [Save in], [Login Name], and [Password] and select the button, to display an input screen.

The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:

Recipient Name: up to 18 characters

Server: up to 64 characters



Login Name: up to 32 characters

Password: up to 32 charactersFor more information, refer to "Address Book" (P.274).

Print

Make print settings.


2 When [On] is selected, you then configure print settings.

Quantity

Set the number of copies, from 1 to 999 in increments of 1.

1 Set the number of copies using [ ] and [ ] or with the numeric keypad.

Setup Menu

273

System

Settin

gs

10

Paper Supply

Select the printing paper tray. When [Auto] is selected, the same paper size as the original size is printed.

1 Select the paper tray.

Auto

A suitable paper tray is automatically selected.

Trays 1 to 4 and 6

You can select paper from the 4 trays.

Bypass...

Prints on paper loaded in the Tray 5 (Bypass).

2 Sided Printing

Selects duplex printing.

Stapling/Hole-Punching

Select setting for stapling and punching.

Edit/Delete

You can check the content of a job flow, and modify/copy/delete.

1 Select a job flow, and select [Edit/Delete].

2 Check the content.

3 Select the desired button.

10 System Settings

274

System

Settin

gs

10

Delete

Deletes the selected job flow.

Copy

Makes a copy of the selected job flow. From the copy of the job flow, you can create a new job flow.The method of creation is the same as when creating a new job flow. For more information, refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.269).

Edit

You can modify the selected job flow settings.The method of modification is the same as when creating a new job flow. For more information, refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.269).

Address Book

You can store frequently used addresses in an address book. The following types of address is available: e-mail, and server (FTP/SMB).

When an address is registered, you can search for it with [Address Book] in the [E-mail] screen.

Up to 500 addresses, including e-mail, and server (FTP/SMB) can be registered.


2 Press the abbreviated number you want to register, and select [Create/Delete].


• By entering a three-digit number with the numeric keypad, you can specify the abbreviated number directly.3

3 Select [Address Type], and select [Change Settings].

4 Select the address type, and select [Close].


6 When the settings are completed, select [Save].

Setup Menu

275

System

Settin

gs

10

When You Selected [E-Mail] as the Address Type

The following items appear.

When You Selected [Server] as the Address Type

The following items appear.

Address Type

You can change the address type.

E-mail Address

Enter the e-mail address (up to 128 characters).For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.203).

Recipient Name

Enter the recipient (up to 18 characters).For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.203).

Last Name

Enter the sender's last name (up to 32 characters).For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.203).

First Name

Enter the sender's first name (up to 32 characters).For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.203).

Custom Item 1

The attribute name set as [Custom Item 1 <attribute name>] is shown as the item name.

You can input any information as an auxiliary item. You can enter up to 20 characters. This is appropriate for information represented by a shortish character string, such as telephone number, employee number, and so on.For more about attribute name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3" (P.259).

Address Type Custom Item 1

E-mail Address Custom Item 2

Recipient Name Custom Item 3

Last Name S/MIME Certificate

First Name

Address Type Save in

Recipient Name Login Name

Transfer Protocol Password

Server Name/IP address Port Number

Shared Name (SMB Only)

10 System Settings

276

System

Settin

gs

10

Custom Item 2


You can input any information as an auxiliary item. You can enter up to 40 characters. This is appropriate for information represented by a longer character string, such as company location or division and so on.For more about attribute name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3" (P.259).

Custom Item 3


You can input any information as an auxiliary item. You can enter up to 60 characters. This is appropriate for information represented by a longer character string, such as company division or address and so on.For more about attribute name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3" (P.259).

S/MIME Certificate

Makes a link with S/MIME certificate. A S/MIME certificate needs to be created in advance.

In order to link a certificate, select a certificate in a screen displayed when selecting [Create/Change Link]. To delete a link, select [Cut Link].Note • When a lot of certificates are registered to the machine, it may take a long time to link a

certificate.

For information about the certificate, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.

Transfer Protocol

Set the forwarding destination protocol. You can select from [FTP] and [SMB].

Server Name/IP address

Enter a name or IP address of a forwarding destination server.

Shared Name (SMB Only)

Enter the shared name set for the SMB folder.Important • Do not use "/" at the head of the shared name. It causes faults when executing a job flow.

Save in

Enter the directory for storing documents. When SMB is selected, use a UNC format.

Forwarding via FTP

Example: To save in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in the root directory.aaa/bbb

Forwarding via SMB

Example: To save in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in a specified volume (UNC format).aaa\bbb

Login Name

When a login name is required to be input by the forwarding destination server, set the login name. For the login name, you can enter up to 32 characters.

Setup Menu

277

System

Settin

gs

10

Password

When a password is required to be input by the forwarding destination server, set the password. For the password, you can enter up to 32 characters.

Port Number

Set the forwarding destination port number. Input a number in the range 1 to 65,535.

When the [Delete All Settings] Button is Selected

Deletes all registered information for the selected address. To delete all registered information, select [Yes].Important • Deleted information cannot be recovered.

Paper Size/Type

This item is the same as [Paper Size/Type] in [Paper Tray Settings] of [Common Settings]. For more information, refer to "Paper Size/Type" (P.211).

A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to display this feature on the [Setup Menu] screen. For more information, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Menu" (P.212).

10 System Settings

278

System

Settin

gs

10


In [System Administrator Settings], you can set the system administrator ID and password.

You are recommended to set the system administrator ID and password to prevent setting changes and ensure security.

The following shows the reference section for each item.System Administrator Login ID................................................................................................278

System Administrator Password ...............................................................................................278

Maximum Login Attempts........................................................................................................279

1 In the [System Settings] screen, select [System Administrator Settings].



System Administrator Login ID

Set the system administrator UserID. You can enter from 1 to 32 characters.Note • The default of the system administrator UserID is “11111”.

1 Select [System Administrator Login ID].

2 Select [On].

3 Select [Keyboard], then in [New System Administrator Login ID], enter the system administrator ID, and select [Save].

4 Select [Keyboard] once more, and in [Re-enter System Administrator Login ID], enter the same system administrator ID, and select [Save].

5 Select [Save].

System Administrator Password

Set the password for System Administration mode. Setting a password is strongly recommended for security.Note • The default of the system administrator password is “x-admin”.

This item appears when in the Login Setup/Auditron Administration operation, you set [Yes] for using a password. Set the password after setting the system administrator UserID.

You can set the password from 4 to 12 numeric digits.For information about enabling and disabling passwords, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.287).


279

System

Settin

gs

10

1 Select [System Administrator Password].

2 Select [Keyboard].

3 Enter the new password from 4 to 2 numeric digits in [New Password], and select [Next].

4 In [Re-enter Password], enter the same password, and select [Save].

Note • To set no password, leave the password blank, and select [Save].

Maximum Login Attempts

If system administrator ID authentication fails repeatedly, you can set a limit beyond which further tries are not allowed.

You can set the number of authentication attempts allowed, from 1 to 10.Note • The count is reset when the machine is restarted.

• To chancel the access rejection state, restart the machine by turning off and on the power.

1 Select [Maximum Login Attempts].

2 Select [On].

3 With [ ] and [ ], set the number of authentication attempts allowed.

4 Select [Save].

10 System Settings

280

System

Settin

gs

10


In [Login Setup/Auditron Administration], to prevent unauthorized users from accessing the machine, you can set different restrictions for each user, or limit the number of pages each user can produce.

When the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is enabled, each user of the machine must enter a UserID and password, thus providing administrative control and accounting for the machine.

The following shows the reference section for each item.Create/Check User Accounts ....................................................................................................280

Reset User Accounts .................................................................................................................282

Meter (Copy Jobs) for System Administrator...........................................................................283

User Details Setup.....................................................................................................................284

Charge Print Settings ................................................................................................................285

Password Entry from Control Panel..........................................................................................286

Login Setup/Auditron Mode .....................................................................................................287

1 In the [System Settings] screen, select [Login Setup/Auditron Administration].


2 Select the feature to set/change.

Create/Check User Accounts

When the login setup/Auditron administration feature is enabled, in order to carry out authentication of registered users, the UserIDs, and user names are registered.

For a user of the machine, you can control the use of output color, or set a limit on the number of pages. For each registered user, you can also check the cumulative number of pages. Up to 1,000 sets of user data can be registered.Note • This item does not appear when [Network Access] or [Remote Access] is selected in "Login

Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.287).

1 Select [Create/Check User Account].

2 Select the [No.] for which you want to register a user, and select [Create/Delete].

Note • [No.] is a user control number.


• By entering a 4-digit UserID with the numeric keypad, you can specify the user directly.


281

System

Settin

gs

10

3 Select any item, and set it.

4 Select [Save].

UserID

You can enter up to 32 characters for a UserID to use the machine.

User Name

Set the user name. Up to 32 characters are allowed.For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.203).

Password

Set the password. Setting a password is strongly recommended for security. You can set the password to from 4 to 12 digits.

E-mail Address

Enter the e-mail address (up to 128 characters). The address set here will be shown as the sender when sending [E-mail].For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.203).

Account Limit

You can set restrictions on the use of output color and limits on the number of pages for copying, scanning, and printing.

1 Select [Account Limit].

2 Select [Copy Service], [Scan Service] or [Print Service].

3 To set [Color Access], select [Color Access], and select the output color that can be used.

4 To set [Account Limit], select [Account Limit], then with the numeric keypad enter the maximum number of pages in the output color.

Note • Selecting [Next] causes the input to switch to the next item.

Color Access

Set the output color that can be used.

Free Access

All color modes can be used.

Black Only

Monochrome only can be used.

10 System Settings

282

System

Settin

gs

10

Color Only

Color only can be used.

Account Limit

Set the maximum number of pages that can be used in a copy or scan.

Color

You can set from 1 to 9,999,999 pages (7 digits) in 1 sheet increments.

Black

You can set from 1 to 9,999,999 pages (7 digits) in 1 sheet increments.

Reset Total Impressions

Reset the current cumulative number of pages for a selected user, returning it to zero.

1 Select [Reset Total Impressions].

Yes

Resets the current cumulative number of pages for users. Once reset, the previous count cannot be restored.

No

Cancels resetting the cumulative number of pages.

Reset Account

Deletes all registered information for the selected user.

1 Select [Reset Account].

Yes

Deletes the registered user data. Once deleted, the data cannot be restored.Important • All job flows, mailboxes, and documents within mailboxes belonging to the user are deleted.

If the user is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of documents is left remaining within a mailbox for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.

No

Cancels the deletion of the user data.

Reset User Accounts

You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation, or reset the auditron. You can also print an auditron report to include all servicesNote • This item does not appear when [Network Access] or [Remote Access] is selected in "Login



283

System

Settin

gs

10

1 Select [Reset User Accounts].

2 When printing an auditron report for all services, select [Print Report].

3 Select the item to delete or reset, and select [Reset].

4 Select [Yes] or [No].

All User Accounts

Deletes all registered information for each user. It also deletes all data including the maximum number of pages, cumulative number of pages, output color restrictions, printer auditron, and so on.Important • All job flows, mailboxes, and documents within mailboxes belonging to the user are deleted.

If the user is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of documents is left remaining within a mailbox for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.

All Color Access Settings

Resets the [Color Access] settings for all users to [Free Access].

All Account Limits

Resets the maximum number of pages for all users to the default (9,999,999 pages).

Total Impressions

Resets all Auditron administration data for all users including the system administrator. The number of pages is also reset to 0.

Meter (Print Jobs)

Resets all printer auditron, and deletes automatically registered job owner names. The count of the number of pages printed is also reset to zero.Note • [Meter (Print Jobs)] is displayed when [Off] is selected for [Print Service] in the Login Setup/

Auditron Administration.

Print Report

An auditron report of all services is printed.

Reset

Deletes or resets the data for the selected item.

Meter (Copy Jobs) for System Administrator

You can check or reset the cumulative number of pages copied using the System Administration mode on the screen. The cumulative number of pages is counted up to 9,999,999 pages for both color and monochrome.Note • This item does not appear when [Network Access] or [Remote Access] is selected in "Login


10 System Settings

284

System

Settin

gs

10

1 Select [System Administrator Copy Meter].

2 This checks the cumulative number of pages.

3 To reset, select [Reset].

User Details Setup

Set the information required when carrying out authentication.

1 Select [User Details Setup].

2 Select any item, and set it.

3 Select [Save].

UserID Characters

If required, you can change the indication that appears as UserID on the [System Administrator Login] screen when the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel is pressed to such as “User Name” or “Number”. The alias can be set to 1 to 15 characters.Note • The value is also reflected in report/list displays, and when accessing from CentreWare

Internet Services.

Hide User ID

You can set the way in which the User ID is shown as it is being input. Use this feature to strengthen security as required.

Show

As you enter the User ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.

Hide

As you enter the User ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).

Account ID Characters

If required, you can change the indication that appears as AccountID on the [System Administrator Login] screen when the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel is pressed to such as “AccountName” or “Number”. The alias can be set to 1 to 15 characters.Note • This item appears when [Network Access] is selected in "Login Setup/Auditron Mode"

(P.287).

• The value is also reflected in report/list displays, and when accessing from CentreWare Internet Services.

Hide Account ID

You can set the way in which the Account ID is shown as it is being input. Use this feature to strengthen security as required.Note • This item appears when [Network Access] is selected in "Login Setup/Auditron Mode"

(P.287).

Show

As you enter the Account ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.


285

System

Settin

gs

10

Hide

As you enter the Account ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).

Failed Access Log

In order to detect unauthorized access, if the number of times that authentication fails within a set time exceeds the [Failed Attempts] value set here, then an error is logged.

1 Select [Failed Access Log].

2 Select [On], and with the numeric keypad enter the number of failures.

Store User Details

You can set the destination to save authentication information. Select NVM or hard disk.Note • This item appears when [Network Access] is selected in "Login Setup/Auditron Mode"

(P.287).

Charge Print Settings

Set how received print jobs should be handled.

1 Select [Charge Print Settings].



4 Select [Save].

PJL Receive Command Control

Print jobs submitted by external equipment can be controlled by PJL commands. The settings for [Receive Control] described later are applied when either [Off] is selected or no PJL command is received.

PJL Output Command Control

Print jobs submitted by an external equipment can be controlled by PJL commands.

Receive Control

When using the authentication feature, set how to handle print jobs for which authentication failed (the print driver did not provide the correct UserID, password, and other authentication information).For information about printing from a print driver, refer to "Printing" (P.161).

Note • Even if [Print Service] in Login Setup/Auditron Administration is set to [Off], [According to Print Auditron] set here is not affected.

10 System Settings

286

System

Settin

gs

10

1 Select [Receive Control].

2 Select [According to Print Auditron] or [Save All].

3 Select the treatment of jobs with invalid authentication and jobs with no UserID.

According to Print Auditron

Operation follows the receiving controls set on the machine. When [According to Print Auditron] is selected, items [Job Login Failure] and [Job without UserID] appear.Note • [Job without UserID] is not displayed by selecting [Non-Account Print] for [Auditron Settings]

in the [Properties] tab of the CentreWare Internet Services. For information about CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.158).

Job Login Failure

Set the action for jobs for which authentication failed.

- When [Save All] is selected, all jobs received are saved.- When [Cancel Job] is selected, jobs received are deleted.

Job without UserID

Set the action for jobs with no UserID input.

- When [Save All] is selected, all jobs received are saved.- When [Cancel Job] is selected, jobs received are deleted.

For information about job saving, refer to "Charge Print" (P.293).

Save All

Regardless of whether the authentication feature is being used or not, all jobs received are saved.For information about job saving, refer to "Charge Print" (P.293).

Password Entry from Control Panel

Set whether a password is required when the system administrator or a user is using the machine.Select [On] to enable "System Administrator Password" (P.278), and "Password" (P.281) for [Create/Check User Account].Select [Off] to not require the password, even if a password is set in the above procedures.Important • The setting of [Password Entry from Control Panel] is used for verification on the machine. A

password must always be input when accessing from remote devices using CentreWare Internet Services or the like, regardless of the use of password setting. Depending on verification procedures, a password may be required for other processes as well.

Note • The system administrator password is also used to change settings from CentreWare Internet Services.


287

System

Settin

gs

10

Login Setup/Auditron Mode

Set whether the Auditron administration feature is enabled or not, and whether to request an authentication operation.

1 Select [Login Setup/Auditron Mode].

2 Select any item.

Off

To operate the machine requires no user login setup/Auditron administration.Note • Even if [Auditron Mode] and [Mailbox Access] are set to [On], this does not feature.

Local Machine Access

The Auditron administration is carried out using the authenticated users already registered on the machine.For information about authentication on the machine, refer to "Authentication and Auditron Administration" (P.332).

Network Access

Auditron administration is carried out using user information managed by the remote accounting service. User information is registered by the remote accounting service.For information about net authentication, refer to "Authentication and Auditron Administration" (P.332).

Note • When set to [Network Access], in the [Authentication] screen which appears when the control panel <Log In/Out> button is pressed, you can enter “Account ID”.

Check User Details

Select whether to check user details.If [Off (Keep logon records)] is selected, [User ID] and [Account ID] must be entered, but are not checked the user information. However, the entered information is logged onto the machine. Select [On] to verify user information.

Remote Access

Verifies remote accounting server. Can be used to manage user information managed on a remote accounting server. User information cannot be registered on the machine.For more information about remote authentication, refer to "Authentication and Auditron Administration" (P.332).

Important • When switching to or from remote access mode, the following information is lost.- All user information- Personal mailboxes and personal job flow sheets


Guest User

Set whether a user not registered with the remote authentication server can use the machine as a guest user.

Guest Password

Configure the guest password as necessary. You can set the password to from 4 to 12 digits.

10 System Settings

288

System

Settin

gs

10

The following items are common settings for each verification feature.

Auditron Mode

Select whether to use the Auditron administration feature when using the copy, scan, and print services. Note that login setup/Auditron administration cannot be used unless the system administrator User ID is set.For information about the items you can manage, refer to "Authentication and Auditron Administration" (P.332).

Note • The items appearing depend on the services provided.

1 Select [Auditron Mode].

2 For the services for which you want to enable the administration feature, select [On].

Copy Service

Administration relating to copy operations.

Scan Service

Administration relating to scanner operations.

Print Service

Administration relating to the printer operations.

Mailbox Access

Set whether to carry out authentication when printing or retrieving documents stored in a mailbox.Note • This item is displayed only when the mailbox is registered.

1 Select [Mailbox Access].

2 Set any item.

Login During Printing

Set whether authentication is required when a document within a mailbox is printed.

Login During Retrieval

Set whether authentication is required when a document within a mailbox is retrieved through the network.

11 Job Status

This chapter describes the job status features.

Job Status Overview.................................................................................290

Checking Current/Pending Jobs ...............................................................291

Checking Completed Jobs........................................................................292

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents..................................................293

Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs ................................................298

Handling Error Terminations.....................................................................299

11 Job Status

290

Job

Statu

s

11

Job Status Overview

With the job status features, you can check current or pending jobs, and check on completed jobs. You can also cancel printing, or preferentially print pending print jobs.

1 Press the <Job Status>button.

In the [Job Status] screen, you can do the following.

Checking Jobs

You can check lists of current and pending jobs, and display more details. You can also cancel an current or pending job.For details, refer to "Checking Current/Pending Jobs" (P.291).

Checking the Status of Completed Jobs

You can display the status of completed jobs. You can also display more details.For details, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.292).

Checking Stored Documents

You can print or delete documents stored with the charge print, security print, sample print, and delayed print features.For details, refer to "Printing and Deleting Stored Documents" (P.293).

Job Priority Printing

You can preferentially print pending print jobs.For details, refer to "Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs" (P.298).

Job Status button

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

291

Job

Statu

s

11

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

This section describes how to check current or pending jobs. In the status screen, you can cancel jobs or preferentially execute jobs.


2 Check the current/pending job.


3 To cancel or preferentially execute a job, select the job.

4 Select [Stop] or [Promote Job].

Stop

Cancels the executing or pending job.

Promote Job

Promotes the job to be executed after the current job.A [ ] will be marked on the [Status] of a job set to [Promote Job].

11 Job Status

292

Job

Statu

s

11

Checking Completed Jobs

This section describes how to check completed jobs.

You can check whether a job has been completed successfully. Also, you can display more details by selecting a job.


2 Select the [Completed Jobs] tab.


3 To check the details of a job, select the job.

4 After checking, select [Close].

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

293

Job

Statu

s

11


This section describes how to print or delete documents stored by the secure print or sample print feature, or documents stored by authentication print receiving control.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


Carry out printing and deletion of stored documents from the following [Job Status] screen.


2 Select the [Stored Documents] tab.

Charge Print

When a authentication feature is in use, print jobs which have failed to authenticate (incorrect information on a printer driver, such as User ID or password) are processed according to the settings in [Charge Print Settings].

This section describes how to print or delete documents stored by the charge print receiving control.For more details on charge print settings, refer to "Charge Print Settings" (P.285).


2 Enter the User ID using the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].

3 Select [Charge Print].

4 Select the user that you want to check, and select [Document List].



• You can also enter a three-digit number with the numeric keypad to directly specify a user.

5 Enter the password, and select [Confirm].

Note • If no password is set, the [Password] screen does not appear.

6 Select the document you want to print or delete.

11 Job Status

294

Job

Statu

s

11

When You Selected [Delete]

This deletes the document stored by the charge print.Note • If you delete all documents of an UserID, the UserID itself will be deleted.

1 Select [Delete].

2 Select [Yes].

Yes

This deletes the document.Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot be recovered.

No

This cancels deleting the document.

When You Selected [Print]

This prints the document stored by the charge print.

1 Select [Print].

2 Select what to do with the document after printing.

Print and Delete

This starts printing the document. After printing, the document is deleted.

Print and Save

This starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.

Cancel

This cancels printing the document.

Secure Print

This section describes how to print and delete documents stored with the secure print feature.For information about secure print operations, refer to the print driver help information.

1 Select [Secure Print].






295

Job

Statu

s

11

3 Enter the password, and select [Confirm].

Note • If no password is set, the [Password] screen does not appear.


Note • Select [Select All] to select all documents. Select this button again to deselect the documents.


This deletes the security print document.

1 Select [Delete].

2 Select [Yes].

Yes


No



This prints the security print document.

1 Select [Print].

2 Select what to do with the document after printing.

Print and Delete


Print and Save

This starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.

Cancel


11 Job Status

296

Job

Statu

s

11

Sample Print

This section describes how to print and delete documents stored with the sample print feature.For information about sample printing operations, refer to the print driver help information.

1 Select [Sample Print].






Note • Select [Select All] to select all documents. Select this button again to deselect the documents.


This deletes the sample print document.

1 Select [Delete].

2 Select [Yes].

Yes


No



This prints the sample print document. After printing the remaining copies, the stored sample print document is deleted.

1 Select [Print].

2 Select [Yes].

Yes


No



297

Job

Statu

s

11

Delayed Print

This section describes how to print and delete documents stored with the delayed print feature.For information about delayed print operations, refer to the print driver help information.

1 Select [Delayed Print].




• [Print Time] shows the time to start printing.


This deletes the document stored with the delayed print feature.

1 Select [Delete].

2 Select [Yes].

Yes


No



This prints the document stored with the delayed print feature. After printing, the document is deleted. If printed manually, the document is not printed again at the scheduled time.

1 Select [Print].

2 Select [Yes].

Yes


No


11 Job Status

298

Job

Statu

s

11

Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs

You can preferentially print pending print jobs.Note • If there are no pending print jobs, then you cannot select [Print Waiting Jobs].


2 Select [Print Waiting Jobs].

Handling Error Terminations

299

Job

Statu

s

11

Handling Error Terminations

This section describes how to handle error terminations.

For a Print Job

When selecting a job whose [Status] is [Completed - Error] in the [Completed Jobs] tab, the error code of the job is displayed in [Status] field. Respond appropriately to the error code.For information about error codes, refer to "Error Codes" (P.389).

For Other Jobs

Print a job status/activity report, and check the execution results.For information about job status/activity reports, refer to "Job Status" (P.310).

12 Machine Status

This chapter describes the features for checking the machine status.

Overview of Machine Status .....................................................................302

Machine Status .........................................................................................303

Billing Meter/Print Report ..........................................................................308

Consumables............................................................................................316

Faults ........................................................................................................317

12 Machine Status

302

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Overview of Machine Status

You can check the machine status and number of printed pages in the screen. You can also print a report/list to check the job history and set/recorded values.

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

In the [Machine Status] screen, you can do the following.

Machine Status Check

You can check the machine configuration, paper tray status, and overwrite hard disk status. You can also set the print mode.For more information, refer to "Machine Status" (P.303).

Meter Check and Report Output

You can check the number of pages printed for each meter, or for each user. You can also print a report/list to check the job history and set/recorded values.For more information, refer to "Billing Meter/Print Report" (P.308).

Consumable Check

You can check the status of consumables.For more information, refer to "Consumables" (P.316).

Fault Check

You can check the faults that have occurred in the machine.For more information, refer to "Faults" (P.317).

<Machine Status> button

Machine Status

303

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Machine Status

In the [Machine Status] screen, you can check the machine configuration and the paper tray status. You can also set the print mode.

Refer to the following sections for the features in the [Machine Status] screen.Machine Information................................................................................................................ 303

Paper Tray ................................................................................................................................ 304

Overwrite Hard Disk ................................................................................................................ 305

Print Mode................................................................................................................................ 305


2 In the [Machine Status] screen displayed, you can check the machine status.

Machine Information

In [Machine Information], you can check the serial number, machine configuration, and software version.

1 Select [Machine Information].

For enquiry on maintenance and operation

This indicates how to make maintenance and operating inquiries.

Serial Number

This indicates the serial number of the machine.

Machine Configuration

The [Machine Configuration] screen is displayed.Refer to"[Machine Configuration] Screen" (P.303).

Software Version

The [Software Version] screen is displayed.Refer to"[Software Version] Screen" (P.304).

[Machine Configuration] Screen

You can check the machine configuration.

1 Select [Machine Configuration].


12 Machine Status

304

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

In the [Machine Configuration] screen, you can check the following items.

Note • [Output Device] indicates whether the finisher (optional) is installed or not. [Finisher Type C] appears when the finisher is installed.

[Software Version] Screen

You can check the software version.

1 Select [Software Version].


In the [Software Version] screen, you can check the following items.

Paper Tray

You can check the paper trays set on the machine. On the screen, you can check the following items.

Tray status

Amount of paper remaining

Paper size

Paper type

1 Select [Paper Tray].

Configuration Code Page Memory Size USB

Auto Document Feeder System Memory Size

Paper Tray Image High Compression Kit

High Capacity Feeder PostScript

Offset Stacking Module ESC/P

Output Device HP-GL/2

Booklet Maker PCL

Hard Disk PDF

Controller ROM IIT Option ROM

IOT ROM ADF ROM

HCF ROM IPS ROM

Finisher C ROM SJFI

IIT ROM SSMI

Machine Status

305

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Overwrite Hard Disk

You can check overwriting status of the hard disk. The "Standby" status indicates the completion of the overwriting process.Note • An optional package is necessary for this feature. For more information, contact our

Customer Support Center.

• [Overwrite Hard Disk] appears only when [Overwrite Hard Disk] is set for [System Settings]. For more information, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.224).

1 Select [Overwrite Hard Disk].

Print Mode

You can set the printer mode.Note • The items displayed depend on the options that are installed.

1 Select [Print Mode].

2 Select [Off-line] or [On-line].

Off-line

The printer cannot accept data. Any data being sent is canceled, and is not printed.

On-line

The printer can accept data.

3 Select a printer language to set a print mode.


Retrieve Programming

You can retrieve a print mode from the memory to use it.

1 Select [Retrieve Programming].

2 Select the memory number to be used.

Factory Defaults

You can use the factory default settings.

Custom Settings

The numbers stored in memory appear.

12 Machine Status

306

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Programming

You can check or change the values set for print mode item numbers.For information on item numbers that can be set in the ESC/P and PDF mode menus, refer to "Settings in ESC/P Emulation Mode" (P.461) and "Setting Items for the PDF Direct Print Feature" (P.475).

1 Select [Programming].

2 Enter a feature number to [Item Number] using the numeric keypad.

3 Select [Confirm] if necessary.

4 Select [Change Value].

5 Enter a new value to [New Value] using the numeric keypad.

6 Select [Save].

Item Number

Enter the item number of the feature you want to set.

Current Value

When you enter a number in [Item Number], the currently set value appears.

New Value

Enter a new value.

Store/Delete Programming

For ESC/P, and HP-GL/2, you can save print modes in memory.You can save up to 20 print modes for ESC/P emulation and HP-GL/2 emulation.

1 Select [Store/Delete Programming].

2 Select [Store Current Selections] or [Delete].

3 Select the memory number you want to store or delete.

Store Current Selections

This stores the current selections. If you select a number already stored, it is overwritten. Overwritten data cannot be restored.

Delete

When you select [Delete] and then the number to be deleted, the number is deleted.Important • The deleted data cannot be restored.

Machine Status

307

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Default Programming

You can start the printer with a print mode stored in memory.

1 Select [Default Programming].

2 Select [Factory Defaults] or [Custom Settings].

3 When you select [Custom Settings], select the memory number to be used.

Factory Defaults

You can use the factory default settings.

Custom Settings

The numbers stored in memory appear.

Password

For PDF emulation, if a password is set to the PDF file, set the password in advance. The PDF file can be printed only when it matches the set password.

You can use up to 32 characters for the password.

1 Select [Password].

2 Select [Keypad].

3 Enter a password (up to 32 characters) into [New Password], and select [Set].

4 Enter the password again into [Re-enter Password], and select [Save].

12 Machine Status

308

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Billing Meter/Print Report

In the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen, you can check the number of pages printed for each meter, or for each user. You can also print a report/list to check the job history and set/recorded values.

Refer to the following sections for the features in the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen.Billing Meter .............................................................................................................................308

User Account Billing Meter......................................................................................................309

Print Report/List........................................................................................................................310

Billing Meter

You can confirm the total number of printed pages by individual meters. The meters are classified by color mode.


2 Select the [Billing Meter/Print Report] tab.


Serial Number

Displays the Serial Number of the machine.

Meter 1

Number of full color copies + Number of full color prints.

Meter 2

Number of B/W copies + Number of B/W prints.

Meter 3

Number of large-size full color prints.

Note • Large-size full color is counted as a print at either of number of full color copies or number of full color prints in meter 1 if a copy or print is made on paper of 279 mm × 400 mm or larger (279 mm or more in the primary scanning direction and 400 mm or more in the secondary scanning direction) when the user has selected color (4-color or 3-color) for copying or printing or a color document has been recognized during document scanning on the scanner.

Meter 4

Meter 1 + Meter 2.


309

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

User Account Billing Meter

You can check the number of pages printed in monochrome and colors by each user.

When the login setup/auditron administration feature is enabled, you can check the billing meter for the currently authenticated User ID.For information about the login setup/auditron administration feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.287).


2 Enter the User ID using the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].

To Check the Billing Meter for the Currently Authenticated User ID

1) Enter the UserID for a user you want to check the billing meter, and select [Confirm].

Note • If a password is required, enter the password.

2) Press the <Machine Status> button.

3) Proceed to step 3.

To Check the System Administrator Meter

1) Enter the UserID for System Administration mode, and select [Confirm].

Note • If a password is required, enter the password.

2) Select [User Mode].

3) Press the <Machine Status> button.

4) Proceed to step 3.


4 Select [User Account Billing Meter].

5 Select the meter you want to check.

Meter (Copy Jobs)

This shows the number of pages copied.

Meter (Scan Jobs)

This shows the number of pages scanned.

12 Machine Status

310

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Meter (Print Jobs)

This shows the number of pages printed.

Print Report/List

This section describes how to print a report/list.Note • The items displayed depends on the features installed.



3 Select [Print Report/List].

Note • The image shown right is the menu displayed by selecting [User Mode] in the System Administration mode.

Job Status

1 Select the [Job Status] tab.

2 Select the report/list to be output.


Job History Report

You can check job results. The data for the latest 200 jobs is printed. Select [All], [Fax/Mail/Scanner], [Auto Forwarding Jobs], or [Print].You can also automatically print a [Job History Report] every 50 jobs.For the Auto Print setting, refer to "Reports" (P.219). The Auto Print feature prints the results of all jobs.

Error History Report

You can print error information about the machine. The latest 50 errors are printed.

Copy Mode Settings

1 Select [Copy Mode Settings].

2 Select [Settings List - Common Items].


Settings List - Common Items

You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy settings of the machine.Note • The same [Settings List] is printed from [Copy Mode Settings], [Print Mode Settings], and

[Scan Mode Settings].


311

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Print Mode Settings

1 Select [Print Mode Settings].

2 Select the report/list to be printed.


Note • The items displayed depend on the options that are installed.




PDF Settings List

This prints the various settings in the PDF printer mode.

TIFF Settings List

This prints each setting in the TIFF printer mode.

TIFF Logical Printers List

This prints the list of logical printers created in the TIFF printer mode.TIFF logical printers are set by CentreWare Internet Services. For information on each item, refer to the online help of CenterWare Internet Services.

ESC/P Settings list

This prints each setting in ESC/P emulation mode.

ESC/P Stored Programming List

This prints the stored programming settings in the ESC/P emulation mode.

ESP/P User Defined List

This prints the saved forms, logos, and patterns that can be used with ESC/P.

Fonts List

This prints the list of fonts available for the machine.Note • Printed information depends on the installed options.

The following shows the reports/lists that can be printed when printer options are installed.

- PS Logical Printers List- PostScript Fonts List- HP-GL/2 Settings List- HP-GL/2 Logical Printers Stored Programming List- HP-GL/2 Palette List

12 Machine Status

312

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

- PCL Settings List- PCL Form Registration List

PS Logical Printers List

This prints the list of logical printers created in PostScript.PS logical printers are set by CentreWare Internet Services. For information on each item, refer to the online help of CenterWare Internet Services.

PostScript Fonts List

This prints the fonts available for PostScript.

HP-GL/2 Settings List

This prints the settings in HP-GL, HP-GL/2, and HP-RTL emulation modes.

HP-GL/2 Stored Programming List

This prints the stored programming settings in HP-GL, HP-GL/2, and HP-RTL emulation modes.

HP-GL/2 Palette List

This prints the sample list in 256 colors that can be set with the pen attribute on HP-GL emulation and HP-GL/2 emulation.

PCL Settings List

This prints the settings of PCL virtual printers.

PCL Form Registration List

This prints the list of forms registered for PCL.

Scan Mode Settings

1 Select [Scan Mode Settings].

2 Select the report/list to be printed.





Extended Features Settings List

You can check the settings of scan features.

Domain Filter List

You can check the permitted domains registered for domain filtering.

Job Template List

This prints the settings of the server storing the job template, which is set with the scan service setting tools of the CentreWare Scan Service (optional).For information about the CentreWare scan service, refer to the "CentreWare Scan Service Installation Guide".


313

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Address Book

You can check the details of registered destinations.

When you specify a range of address numbers, the address book table for the numbers are printed. The page contains the information on 50 address numbers.

If you select [Address Book], the following screen appears to allow you to set a ranges of address numbers. Select ranges, and press the <Start> button.

Mailbox List

This prints the mailbox settings and the procedure for saving to the mailbox, in a table.Note • [Mailbox List] appears when [User Mode] is selected in the System Administration mode.

1 Select [Mailbox List].

2 Select the range of mailbox numbers to be printed.


Job Counter Report

This prints the counter report for each feature.Note • [Job Counter Report] appears when [User Mode] selected in the System Administration mode.

1 Select [Job Counter Report].

2 Select [Job Counter Report].


Auditron Administration

You can print a Auditron Report by user. Note that the Auditron Report by user that appears on the screen depends on whether the auditron administration feature is enabled or not.Note • [Auditron Administration] appears when [User Mode] is selected in the System

Administration mode.

When all auditron features are set to [Off]

When the auditron features are set to [Off], the following screen appears to allow you to print a printer meter report.For information about settings for the auditron feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.288).

12 Machine Status

314

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

1 Select [Auditron Administration].

2 Select [Meter Report (Print Jobs)].


Meter Report (Print Jobs)

You can check how many pages have been printed on the machine, and the total number of sheets of paper used, for each client (job owner). The number of print pages is counted for each of color and monochrome. [Meter Report (Print Jobs)] counts from the time at which the data is initialized.

When the Auditron Feature is Set to [On]

The following screen is displayed to allow you to print the auditron reports of the features which are set to [On] by user and feature.For information about settings for the auditron feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.288).

1 Select [Auditron Administration].

2 Select the Auditron Report feature to be printed.

3 Select ranges of user numbers to be printed.

Note • Selecting [Select All] selects all users.


Auditron Report (Print Jobs)

You can check the total number of pages, and the numbers of color and monochrome pages printed on the machine, by client (job owner). If the number of pages or the color is restricted, its set value appears. [Auditron Report (Print Jobs)] counts from the time at which the data is initialized.Note • [No.] displayed on the report is the No. (User Administration Number) registered with the

Authentication/Auditron Administration feature.

Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)

You can check the total number of pages copied on the machine, and the numbers of color and monochrome print pages. If the number of pages or the color is restricted, its set value appears. [Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)] counts from the time at which the data is initialized.Note • [No.] displayed on the report is the No. (User Administration Number) registered with the

Authentication/Auditron Administration feature.

Auditron Report (Scan Jobs)

You can check the total number of pages, and the numbers of color and monochrome pages scanned on the machine. If the number of pages or the color is restricted, its set value appears. [Auditron Report (Scan Jobs)] counts from the time at which the data is initialized.Note • [No.] displayed on the report is the No. (User Administration Number) registered with the

Authentication/Auditron Administration.


315

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Text Effect Sample List

This prints a number of different samples at different background contrasts. Based on the print samples, you can select the optimum background contrast.Note • [Text Effect Sample List] appears when [User Mode] is selected in the System

Administration mode.

1 Select [Text Effect Sample List].

2 Select [Text Effect Sample List].


12 Machine Status

316

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Consumables

You can check the status of consumables in the [Consumables] screen. The status of consumables is shown as "Ready", "Replace Soon", or "Replace Now". For toner, the amount is shown in percentage (0 to 100%).

The following describes the procedure for checking the status of consumables.For information about how to replace consumables, refer to "Troubleshooting" (P.364).


2 Select the [Consumables] tab.


On the [Consumables] screen, you can check the following items. [Staple Cartridge] and [Punch Scrap Container] appears when the finisher is installed. [Booklet Staple Cartridge] appears when the booklet finisher C is installed.

Important • If using a partly consumed toner cartridge (such as a toner cartridge removed from another ApeosPort C6550 I/C5440 I and DocuCenter C6550 I/C5540 I unit), the indicated status may not match the actual remaining amount. When replacing toner cartridges, we recommend that you use new ones.

Yellow Toner (Y) Drum Cartridge (R2)

Magenta Toner (M) Drum Cartridge (R1)

Cyan Toner (C) Waste Toner Container

Black Toner (K1) Staple Cartridge (R1)

Black Toner (K2) Booklet Staple Cartridge (R2)

Drum Cartridge (R4) Booklet Staple Cartridge (R3)

Drum Cartridge (R3) Hole Punch Container (R4)

Faults

317

Mach

ine S

tatus

12

Faults

This section describes how to check the information of faults occurring in the machine.

The [Error History Report] shows the latest 50 faults. The items displayed include the date and time, error code, and error category.

This section describes how to print the error history.


2 Select the [Faults] tab.

3 Select [Error History Report].


Note • You can also access the [Error History Report] from [Job Status/Activity Report] in the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen.

13 Authentication and AuditronAdministration

The machine has a unique Authentication feature that restricts the ability to use functions, and an Auditron Administration feature that manages the use of each machine feature.

Overview of Authentication .......................................................................320

Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox........................................323

Overview of Auditron Administration.........................................................332


320

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

Overview of Authentication

This section describes the Authentication features used with the machine.

Users Controlled by Authentication

The following is an explanation about the different user types that are controlled by the Authentication feature.

Users are classified into the following four types. The authentication feature restricts operations according to the user type.

System administrator

Authentication registered user

Authentication unregistered user

General users

System Administrators

These are users who can enter and change system settings.

A system administrator uses a special user ID called a System Administrator ID.

To enter the System Administration mode, enter the System Administrator ID into the user ID entry field on the authentication screen.

Authenticated Users

These are users who are registered with the machine.

When an authenticated user uses a service that is restricted, the user must enter their user ID on the authentication screen.

Unauthenticated Users

These are users who are not registered with the machine.

An unauthenticated user cannot use services that are restricted.

General Users

These are general users who are not permitted to use the machine in the authenticated mode.

Types of Authentication

This section describes an overview of the Authentication features that can be used with the machine.

Authentication is carried out using a User ID or a user ID registered on a remote accounting server.

The following shows the three different authentication methods according to the registration of the user information.

Direct Authentication

Uses the user information stored in the machine to manage authentication.

Overview of Authentication

321

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

Network Authentication

Uses the user information from a remote account server to manage authentication.

User information managed by the remote accounting service is sent to the machine from the remote accounting service, and registered on the machine. When the user information managed by the remote accounting service is updated, the user information must be sent from the remote accounting service to the machine.

Network Authentication allows a number of these machines to use user information managed centrally.

External accounting services supported by the machine include CentreWare, EasyAdmin, and so on.

Remote Authentication

Verifies remote accounting server. Can be used to manage user information managed on a remote accounting server. User information cannot be registered on the machine.Important • Use 32 characters or less for a User ID registered to a remote accounting server.

Features Controlled by Authentication

This section describes the features of the machine that is controlled by using the Authentication feature.

The features controlled depend on the way in which the machine is used.

There are two ways of use, as follows.

Local Access

Remote AccessFor information about mailbox and job flow sheet control when the Authentication feature is enabled, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox" (P.323).

Local Access

Local access refers to using the machine by direct operation of the control panel on the machine.

The following features are controlled by local access.

Copy

Copy operations can be restricted.

When copy operations are registered in job memory, the use of the job memory is also restricted.

Scan

The scanner (mail transmission), scanner (box storage), and scanner (PC storage) operations can be restricted on the machine.

When scanner (mail transmission), scanner (box storage), and scanner (PC storage) operations are registered in job memory, the use of the job memory is also restricted.

Mailbox

Even if the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is not used for copy, scan, or print, authentication is required for mailbox operations when the Authentication feature is used on the machine.


322

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

Job Flow

Even if the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is not used for copy, scan, or print, authentication is required for job flow sheet operations when the Authentication feature is used on the machine.

Print

The print operations of documents stored on the machine can be restricted.

This applies to charge print.

Remote Access

Remote access refers to using CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare EasyOperator/EasyAdmin, and similar, to access the machine through a network.

The following features are controlled by local access.

Print

Print directions from a computer can be restricted.

To use the Authentication feature, the authentication information such as a User ID and password must be set on the print driver.

Print data sent to the machine and failed authentication is stored on the machine or deleted, according to the charge print settings.Note • Not restricted when [System Settings] > [Login/Setup Auditron] is set to [Remote Access].

For information about [Remote Access], refer to "Remote Access" (P.287).

CentreWare Internet Services

Even if the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is not used for copy, scan, or print, authentication is required to access the machine with a Web browser when the Authentication feature is used on the machine.Note • Only the system administrator is authenticated when [System Settings] > [Login/Setup

Auditron] is set to [Remote Access]. General users are not available.


CentreWare EasyOperator/EasyAdmin

Even if the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is not used for copy, scan, or print, authentication is required to access the machine when the Authentication feature is being used on the machine.Note • Only the system administrator is authenticated when [System Settings] > [Login/Setup

Auditron] is set to [Remote Access]. General users are not available.


Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox

323

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13


This section describes job flow sheet and mailbox restrictions when the Authentication feature is enabled.

Job Flow Sheet Types

The following four job flow sheet types are available on the machine.Important • The job flow sheets that can be created on the machine are mailbox operation job flow

sheets. Scanner operation job flow sheets can be created on a computer on the network, using the CentreWare EasyOperator or other software.

• A job flow sheet created on a computer on the network cannot be edited or copied on the machine.

Generally Shared Job Flow Sheet

This job flow sheet is created by a general user when the Authentication feature is not enabled.

When the Authentication feature is not enabled, such a job flow sheet can be shared by all users of the machine, and the settings can be changed freely.

When the Authentication feature is used, such a job flow sheet can only be run by the System Administrator.

Mailbox Job Flow Sheet

This job flow sheet is created by a general user or the System Administrator in the Mailbox Registration screen.

The owner of such a job flow sheet is the "mailbox." Users able to use the mailbox where the job flow sheet is created can share it, and freely change settings.

The job flow sheet is available only when the Authentication feature is not used. This job flow sheet is available only for the System Administrator when the Authentication feature is used.

System Administrator Shared Job Flow Sheet

This job flow sheet is created by the System Administrator.

When the Authentication feature is not used, all users of the machine can share the job flow sheet.

When the Authentication feature is being used, all authentication registered users of the machine can share the job flow sheet.

However, only the System Administrator can change the settings of the job flow sheet.

To create an administrator shared job flow sheet, it is necessary to press the <Log In/Out> button, and operate the machine as the System Administrator.


324

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

Personal Job Flow Sheet

This job flow sheet is created by an authentication registered user when the Authentication feature is used.

Such a job flow sheet can only be used by the authentication registered user who created it.

When the Authentication feature is not enabled, such a job flow sheet can only be run by the System Administrator.

The ways of use of job flow sheets that can be used on the machine depend on whether or not the Authentication feature is used.

When the Authentication Feature is not Enabled

When the Authentication Feature is Enabled


When the Authentication feature is not enabled, the relation between the users and the use of a job flow sheet is as follows.

Available job flow sheet operations are different between a job flow sheet created in the mailbox registration ([Mailbox]) screen and a job flow sheet created in the job flow sheet registration ([Job Flow Sheets]) screen.

Mailbox Registration ([Mailbox]) Screen

This section describes operations that can be used from the mailbox registration screen of the machine.

*The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who made the copy.

Important • A job flow sheet created from [File Operation] allows editing, copying, deletion, and selection/execution only from the mailbox in which the job flow sheet was created. Target users are all users who are able to use the mailbox.

• If a job flow sheet is associated with a mailbox in which it can no longer be used as a result of a change in the authentication status, then editing and copying are no longer possible, but it can still be used. If you release the link, the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will be disabled.

Job flow sheet

operation

General users System administrator

Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Creation/registration

- O - - - - O -

Display O O O - O O O O

Editing O O - - O O O O

Copy* O O O - O O O O

Delete O O - - O O O O

Selection/execution

O O O - O O O O

Associatingwith mailbox

O O O - O O O O


325

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

Job Flow Sheet Registration ([Job Flow Sheets]) Screen

This section describes operations that can be used from the Job Flow Sheet Registration screen of the machine.



When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relation between the users and the use of a job flow sheet is as follows.

The same operations can be used from the Mailbox Registration screen and the Job Flow Sheet Registration screen.For more information about the Authentication feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.287).

When [Local Machine Access] is selected, when [Check User Details] is set to [On] in [Network Access], or when you are authenticated as a user other than guest in [Remote Access]

Important • If authenticated as a guest user by [Remote Access], job flow operations are not available because you are treated as an unauthenticated user (general user).

Job flow sheet

operation


Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal


O - - - - - O -

Display O - O - O O O O

Editing O - - - O O O O

Copy* O - O - O O O O

Delete O - - - O O O O

Selection/execution

O - O - O O O O

Associating with mailbox

O - O - O O O O

Jobflow sheetoperation


(general user)

Authenticationregistered user System administrator

Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generall

shared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

(owner)

Personal

(non-owner)

Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal


- - - - - - - O - - - O -

Display - - - - - - O O - O O O O

Editing - - - - - - - O - O O O O

Copy* - - - - - - O O - O O O O

Delete - - - - - - - O - O O O O


326

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13


When [Network Access] >[Check User Details] is set to [Off (Keep logon records)]


Selection/execution

- - - - - - O O - O O O O


- - - - - - O O - O O O O



(general user)

Authenticationregistered user


Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generall

shared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

(owner)

Personal

(non-owner)

Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal


- - - - O - - - - - - O -

Display - - - - O - O - - O O O O

Editing - - - - O - - - - O O O O

Copy* - - - - O - O - - O O O O

Delete - - - - O - - - - O O O O

Selection/execution

- - - - O - O - - O O O O


- - - - O - O - - O O O O



(general user)


Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generall

shared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

(owner)

Personal

(non-owner)

Generallyshared

Box

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal


327

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

Types of Mailboxes

The following three types of mailboxes can be used with the machine.

Generally Shared Mailbox

This is a mailbox created by a general user without using the Authentication feature.

When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this mailbox is shared and its settings can be changed by all users.

When the Authentication feature is enabled, this mailbox can only be operated by a System Administrator.

System Administrator Shared Mailbox

This is a mailbox created by a System Administrator.

When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this mailbox is shared by all users. When the Authentication feature is enabled, this mailbox is shared by all authenticated users.

Only a System Administrator can change the settings.

To create a system administrator shared box, it is necessary to press the <Log In/Out> button to operate the machine as a System Administrator.

Personal Mailbox

This is a mailbox created by an authenticated users using the Authentication feature.

Only the authenticated user that created the mailbox can use this mailbox.

When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this mailbox can only be operated by a System Administrator.

The ways to operate mailboxes that can be used with the machine depend on whether the Authentication feature is enabled or not.




When the Authentication feature is not enabled, the relation between the users and the use of the mailbox is as follows.

Mailboxoperation


Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal


O - - - O -

Display O O - O O O

Deletion O - - O O O

Setting change O - - O O O

Document display O O - O O O

Document deletion O O - O O O


328

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

* The following operations of document registration or retrieval in a mailbox or document retrieval, are not the subject of authentication. - Document retrieval using a scan driver or mailbox viewer

Important • When job flow sheets that become unavailable depending on the authentication status are linked to a mailbox, you can use them but cannot change or copy them. If you release the link, the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed, and disabled.


When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relation between the users and the use of the mailbox is as follows.For information about the Authentication feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.287).

When [Local Machine Access] is selected,when [Check User Details] is set to [On] in [Network Access], or when you are authenticated as a user other than guest in [Remote Access]

Important • If authenticated as a guest user in [Remote Access], you are treated as an unauthenticated user (general user) and job flow operations are not available.

Document registration *

O O - O O O

Document output * O O - O O O

Job Flow

Display O O - O O O

With mailbox

O - - O O O

Auto start O O - O O O

Manual start

O O - O O O

Mailboxoperation


(general user)



Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

(owner)

Personal

(non-owner)

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal


- - - - - O - - O -

Display - O*2 - - O O - O O O

Deletion - - - - - O - O O O

Setting change - - - - - O - O O O

Document display - O*2 - - O O - O O O

Document deletion - O*2 - - O O - O O O

Document registration *1

- O*2 - - O O - O O O

Mailboxoperation


Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal


329

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

*1 The following operations of document registration in a mailbox or document retrieval, are not the subject of authentication. Document retrieval using a scan driver or mailbox viewer.

*2 Available only when the mailbox operations are permitted in the Authentication feature operation setting of the System Administration mode

*3 A job flow sheet associated with the mailbox permits display, auto start, and manual start operations.


When [Network Access] >[Check User Details] is set to [Off (Keep logon records)

Document output *1 - O*2 - - O O - O O O

Job Flow

Display - -*3 - - O O - O O O

With mailbox

- - - - - O - O O O

Auto start - -*3 - - O O - O O O

Manual start

- -*3 - - O O - O O O

Mailboxoperation


(general user)



Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

(owner)

Personal

(non-owner)

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal


- - - O - - - - O -

Display - O*2 - O O - - O O O

Deletion - - - O - - - O O O

Setting change - - - O - - - O O O

Document display - O*2 - O O - - O O O

Document deletion - O*2 - O O - - O O O

Document registration *1

- O*2 - O O - - O O O

Document output *1 - O*2 - O O - - O O O

Job Flow

Display - -*3 - O O - - O O O

With mailbox

- - - O - - - O O O

Auto start - -*3 - O O - - O O O

Manual start

- -*3 - O O - - O O O

Mailboxoperation


(general user)



Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

(owner)

Personal

(non-owner)

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal


330

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

*1 The following operations of document registration in a mailbox or document retrieval, are not the subject of authentication. Document retrieval using a scan driver or mailbox viewer.

*2 Available only when the mailbox operations are permitted in the Authentication feature operation setting of the System Administration mode

*3 A job flow sheet associated with the mailbox permits display, auto start, and manual start operations.


Linking Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox

The ways to link job flow sheets to mailboxes differ, depending on whether the Authentication feature is enabled.





When the Authentication feature is not enabled, the relation between the users and the use of the mailbox is as follows.


When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relation between the users and the use of the mailbox is as follows.For information about the Authentication feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.287).

When [Local Machine Access] is selected,when [Check User Details] is set to [On] in [Network Access], orwhen you are authenticated as a user other than guest in [Remote Access]

Important • If authenticated as a guest user in [Remote Access], job flow and mailbox operations are not available because you are treated as an unauthenticated user (general user).

MailBox

Jobflow


Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Box O - - O O O

General shared O - - O O O

Administrator shared

O - -O O O

Personal - - - O O O


331

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13When [Network Access] >[Check User Details] is set to [Off (Keep logon records)

MailBox

Jobflow


(general user)


Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

(owner)

Personal

(non-owner)

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

General shared - - - - - - - O O O


- - - - - O - O O O

Personal (owner)

- - - - - O - O O O

Personal (non-owner)

- - - - - - - O O O

MailBox

Jobflow


(general user)

Authentication registered user System administrator

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

(owner)

Personal

(non-owner)

Generallyshared

Adm

inistratorshared

Personal

General shared - - - - O - - O O O


- - - - O - - O O O

Personal (owner)

- - - - - - - O O O

Personal (non-owner)

- - - - - - - O O O


332

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

Overview of Auditron Administration

This section describes an overview of the Auditron Administration features that can be used with the machine.

Authentication and Auditron Administration

The machine uses the Auditron Administration feature together with the Authentication feature.

There are three ways of User ID authentication, as follows.

Using Authentication on this Unit

Auditron administration is carried out using authentication registered user information already registered on the machine. Also, for print data sent directly from a computer, the authentication information set in the client side driver is checked against the authentication information registered on the machine before the data is accepted on the machine.

Using Net Authentication

Auditron administration is carried out using user information managed by the remote accounting service.

User information managed by the remote accounting service is sent to the machine from the remote accounting service, and registered on the machine. When the user information managed by the remote accounting service is updated, the user information must be sent from the remote accounting service to the machine.

Net Authentication allows a number of these machines to use user information managed centrally.

External accounting services supported by the machine include CentreWare, EasyAdmin, and so on.

Using Remote Authentication

Verifies remote accounting server. Can be used to manage user information managed on a remote accounting server. User information cannot be registered on the machine.Important • Use 32 characters or less for a User ID registered to a remote accounting server.

Manageable Features and Services

This section describes features and services that can be managed with the Auditron Administration feature.

Features that can be Managed with Authentication and Corresponding Services

The features that can be managed with authentication by User ID and corresponding services depend on whether authentication on this unit is used, or net authentication.For information about the Authentication feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.287).


Network Access

Remote Access


333

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13


The Features and services that can be managed by Local Machine Access are as follows.

*1 Restrictions can be placed on the color modes that can be used. For more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.281).

*2 This feature sets a predetermined limit on the number of sheets that can be used, and when this limit is reached, prevents further operation. For more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.281).

Network Access

When the network authentication is used, the auditron administration information can be managed to auditron administration with remote account server.

The features and services that can be managed on the machine are as follows.

*1 Restrictions can be placed on the color modes that can be used. The settings are made with the remote accounting service.

*2 This feature sets a predetermined limit on the number of sheets that can be used, and when this limit is reached, prevents further operation. The settings are made with the remote accounting service.

Note • Verification does not take place when [System Settings] > [Login/Setup Auditron] > [Network Access] > [Check User Details] is set to [Off (Keep logon records)].

For information about [Network Access], refer to "Network Access" (P.287).

Remote Access

When the remote authentication is used, the auditron administration information can be subjected to auditron administration with remote account server.

The features and services that can be managed on the machine are as follows.

Corresponding service

Restrictions on usePer-user

usage countsUser IDAuthentication

Color mode restrictions *1

Account Limit *2

Copy O O O O

Print O O O O

Charge print O O O O

Scan service O O O O

Report/list - - - -




Color mode restrictions *1

Account Limit *2

Copy O O - -

Print O O - -

Charge print O O - -

Scan service O O - -

Report/list - - - -




Color Access Account Limit

Copy O - - -

Print - - - -


334

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

Important • Different User IDs must be used when a user is registered to two or more domains.

• Log in to a computer to the remote authentication server for printing to identify the user ID.

Jobs that can be Managed for Each Service

For the print and scanner features, different types of job allow statistics to be collected for each feature.

This section describes the information for which Auditron administration is possible for each feature.

Print

This section describes the information for which Auditron administration is possible, for the job types that can be used by print.

*1 Since the job is authenticated when received to the machine, authentication is not required when the job is printed.*2 You can print only when [Non-Account Print] is set to [Enable] in CentreWare Internet Services.

Charge print O - - -

Scan service O - - -

Report/list - - - -

Corresponding service (job)Authenti-

cation

Users for which

auditron are collected

Managed items

NormalPrint

Print driver for the machine

Required Authenticated user

Print color pages/monochrome pages/number of sheets

Other than print driver for the machine(such as when BMLinkS is used)

-*2 Unauthenticateduser


SecurePrint

Document storage Required - -

Document printing Not required *1

Authenticated user


SamplePrint

Sample printBox storage and printing

Required Authenticated user


Sample printBox storage document printing

Not required *1

Authenticated user


Delayed print

Document storage Required - -

Document printing Not required *1

Authenticated user


Charge print

Document storage Not required

- -

Document printing Required Authenticated user


Mail printing -*2 Unauthenticateduser





Color Access Account Limit


335

Au

then

tication

and

Au

ditro

n A

dm

inistratio

n

13

Scan Service

The items you can manage for scan jobs using the Auditron Administration feature are as follows.


Authenti-cation

Users for which

auditron are collected

Managed items

E-mail Required Authenticated user

Scanned color pages/monochrome pages, mail transmission color pages/monochrome pages

Scan to Mailbox Required Authenticated user

Scanned color pages/monochrome pages, stored color pages/monochrome pages

Scan to FTP/SMB Required Authenticated user

Scanned color pages/monochrome pages, file transfer color pages/monochrome pages

Network Scanning Required Authenticated user

Scanned color pages/monochrome pages, file transfer color pages/monochrome pages

14 Maintenance

This chapter describes how to replace consumables, clean the machine, perform auto gradation adjustment, and print a report/list.

Replacing Consumables...........................................................................338

Cleaning the Machine ...............................................................................354

Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment ......................................................357

Printing a Report.......................................................................................361

14 Maintenance

338

Main

tenan

ce

14

Replacing Consumables

The machine is provided with the following consumables and periodical replacement parts. We recommend using the following consumables and periodical replacement parts because they have been made according to standards that match the specifications of the machine.

Handling Consumables/Periodical Replacement Parts

Do not store boxes for consumables/periodical replacement parts upright.

Do not unpack consumables/periodical replacement parts until they are to be used. Avoid storing consumables/periodical replacement parts in the following locations:

- Hot and humid location- Location close to a fire- Location exposed to direct sunlight- Dusty location

Before using consumables/periodical replacement parts, carefully read the instructions and precautions on the packaging.

We recommend having spare consumables/periodical replacement parts ready.

Check the product code of the consumables/periodical replacement parts and contact our Customer Support Center to place your orders.

The use of toner cartridges, waste toner containers, or staple cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only toner cartridges, waste toner containers, and staple cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.

Confirming Status of Consumables

The status of consumables can be confirmed on the [Consumables] screen.The status is indicated by “Ready”, “Order New”, “Replace Now”, or other indications.Also, an indication from 0 to 100% displays the remaining amount of toner.For information about confirming consumables, refer to "Consumables" (P.316).

Type of consumable/Periodical replacement part

Product code Qty/Box

Toner cartridge [Y] CT200571 1 item / 1 box

Toner cartridge [M] CT200570 1 item / 1 box

Toner cartridge [C] CT200569 1 item / 1 box

Toner cartridge [K] CT200568 1 item / 1 box

Drum Cartridge K [R1] (Black) CT350361 1 item / 1 box

Drum Cartridge Y,M,C [R2/R3/R4] (Color) CT350362 1 item / 1 box

Waste toner container ED200103 1 unit / 1 box

Staple cartridge for 50 sheets XE CWAA0540 5000 staples x 3 sets /1 box

Staple cartridge for booklet finisher XC CWAA0501 5000 staples x 4 sets / 1 box


339

Main

tenan

ce

14

Replacing Toner Cartridges

When it is time to replace a toner, a message appears on the display.

If you continue copying or printing without replacing the toner cartridge, a message appears and the machine stops after copying or printing around 1,800 pages for Black (K), or around 1200 pages for Cyan (C), Magenta (M) and Yellow (Y).

Toner cartridges can be replaced, even if the machine is operating.Note • Monochrome copying and printing is available even when color toners are run out. In this

case, only plain paper can be used.

• The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used. The number of pages that you can copy or print is only an estimate and varies depending on conditions such as the content, paper size, paper type, and the computer environment.

Important • When replacing toner cartridges, toner may spill and dirty the floor. We recommend laying paper on the floor beforehand.

• Used toner cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our Customer Support Center.

• The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only toner cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.

• When only a small amount of toner remains in a toner cartridge, the machine may stop during printing and display a message. If this happens, replace the toner cartridge to continue copying or printing.

• Replace toner cartridges while the machine is on.

• If a partially used toner cartridge is used, a message appears and the number of pages that you can copy or print displayed on the screen may differ considerably.

1 Open the toner cover.

2 Hold the handle of the toner cartridge indicated in the message and gently pull it out.

Note • “Y” is for yellow, “M” is for magenta, “C” is for cyan, and “K1” and “K2” are for black.

Warning

Toner remaining in the cartridge can cause an explosion and you can get burnt. Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame.

Never use a vacuum cleaner when you clean spilled toner. It can cause explosion as the toner fills the vacuum cleaner and gets sparks. Use a broom or a cloth moistened with a neutral detergent.

14 Maintenance

340

Main

tenan

ce

14

3 Remove the toner cartridge by holding the handle on the top of the cartridge while gently pulling it out.

Important • Pull out the toner cartridge gently. Otherwise, toner may fly out of the cartridge.

• Return used toner cartridges to our Customer Support Center for disposal.

4 Take out the new toner cartridge of the same color as the old one from its box, and gently tilt the cartridge up and down, and then left and right several times.

5 Insert the toner cartridge in gently until it comes to a stop.

Note • Be sure to insert the toner cartridge until you hear it click into place.

6 Close the toner cover.

Replacing the Waste Toner Container

When the waste toner container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen.

If you continue copying or printing without replacing the waste toner container, a message appears and the machine stops after copying or printing around 3,000 pages.

Warning

Toner remaining in the cartridge can cause an explosion and you can get burnt. Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame.

Warning

Never throw toner, a waste toner container, or a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner can cause an explosion and you can get burnt.

Never use a vacuum cleaner when you clean spilled toner. It can cause explosion as the toner fills the vacuum cleaner and gets sparks. Use a broom or a cloth moistened with a neutral detergent.


341

Main

tenan

ce

14

Important • When replacing the waste toner container, toner may spill and dirty the floor. We recommend laying paper on the floor beforehand.

• Used waste toner containers require special processing during disposal. Return them to our Customer Support Center.

• The use of waste toner containers not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only waste toner containers recommended by Xerox for the machine.

• Replace the waste toner container while the machine is on.

Note • The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.

• The number of pages that you can copy or print is only an estimate and varies depending on conditions such as the content, paper size, paper type, and the computer environment.

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the front cover.

2 Open the waste toner container cover.

3 Grip the handle of the waste toner container and pull out about half of it.

4 Hold the center part on the top of the container, and then remove it.

14 Maintenance

342

Main

tenan

ce

14

5 Hold the used waste toner container firmly with both hands and put it into the provided plastic bag.

Important • Return used waste toner containers to our Customer Support Center for disposal.

• Place the used waste toner container into the special bag and then close it firmly using ring rubber provided with the bag. If the zipper is left open, the toner may leak out during disposal.

6 Hold the center part on the top of a new container and insert it until it comes to a stop.

Important • When inserting the waste toner container, do not grip the handle of the container.

7 Close the waste toner container cover.

8 Close the front cover.

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even slightly open.

Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)

When it is time to replace a drum cartridge, a message “Replace the drum cartridge R1”appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, contact our Customer Support Center.

If you have concluded a spot maintenance contract, refer to this section, then confirm the indicated drum cartridge position (R1) and replace the drum cartridge.

If you continue to use the machine without replacing the drum cartridge after the message appears, the machine will stop and copying or printing will no longer be possible once the following number of pages have been copied or printed.

For ApeosPort C6550 I/DocuCentre C6550 I

About 1,700 pages


About 1,500 pages

Warning

Never throw toner, a waste toner container, or a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner can cause an explosion and you can get burnt.

Warning

Do not heat drum cartridges or scratch the surface of the cartridges. It may harm your health.


343

Main

tenan

ce

14

Important • Before replacing a drum cartridge, you need to receive instruction for how to replace it from our customer engineer.

• Place a black sheet supplied with a new drum cartridge onto the whole unit within 2 minutes after pulling out a unit in which drum cartridges are placed. Image quality may deteriorate when the drum cartridges are exposed to light.

• The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.

Note • Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in unsatisfactory printing.

• Used drum cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our Customer Support Center.

• Replace drum cartridges while the machine is on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.

• The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.


• After the massage “Replace the drum cartridge R1” appears, image quality of printed documents or copies may deteriorate.

1 Take out a new drum cartridge and a black sheet from its container.

Important • Put the drum cartridge on a flat place.

• Do not place the new drum cartridge in an upright position.


3 Pull down the R1-R4 lever.

14 Maintenance

344

Main

tenan

ce

14

4 Grip the handle of the unit and pull out it.

5 Place a black sheet supplied with the new drum cartridge onto the unit other than the drum cartridge R1.

Important • Make sure to place the black sheet. It may affect image quality.

6 Remove the drum cartridge upward while holding rings provided at the both ends of the drum cartridge.

7 Place the replaced drum cartridge into the empty container.

8 Open a bag including a new drum cartridge and take it out.

Important • Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum when you take it out from the bag.

9 Unwrap a sheet covering the drum cartridge and place it under the cartridge.


345

Main

tenan

ce

14

10 Grip rings provided at the both ends of the drum cartridge to uplift.

Important • Do not touch the surface of the drum cartridge.

11 Place the drum cartridge along with the guide with the side marked with ( ) frontward.

12 Press the both ends of the drum cartridge to place it in a horizontal position.

Note • Make sure that the marks ( ) and ( ) face each other.

13 Remove the black sheet from the unit.

14 Insert the unit completely and return the handle to the original position.

15 Return the lever R1-R4 to the original position.



14 Maintenance

346

Main

tenan

ce

14

Replacing Drum Cartridge R2/R3/R4 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)

When it is time to replace a drum cartridge, a message “Replace the drum cartridge RX” appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, contact our Customer Support Center.

If you have concluded a spot maintenance contract, refer to this section, then confirm the indicated drum cartridge position (R2, R3, or R4) and replace the corresponding drum cartridge.

If you continue to use the machine without replacing the cartridge after the message appears, the machine will stop and copying or printing will no longer be possible once the following number of pages have been copied or printed.


About 1,100 pages


About 1,000 pages

Important • Before replacing a drum cartridge, you need to receive instruction for how to replace it from our customer engineer.

• Place a black sheet supplied with a new drum cartridge onto the whole unit within 2 minutes after pulling out a unit in which drum cartridges are placed. Image quality may deteriorate when the drum cartridges are exposed to light.

• The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.

Note • Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in unsatisfactory printing.

• Used drum cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our Customer Support Center.

• Replace drum cartridges while the machine is on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.

• The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.


• After the massage “Replace the drum cartridge RX” appears, image quality of printed documents or copies may deteriorate.

1 Take out a new drum cartridge and a black sheet from its container.

Important • Put the drum cartridge on a flat place.

• Do not place the new drum cartridge in an upright position.

Warning

Do not heat drum cartridges or scratch the surface of the cartridges. It may harm your health.


347

Main

tenan

ce

14


3 Pull down the R1-R4 lever.

4 Grip the handle of the unit and pull out it.

5 Remove the drum cartridge upward while holding rings provided at the both ends of the drum cartridge.

Note • The following example shows how to replace drum R2.

6 Place the replaced drum cartridge into the empty container.

7 Place a black sheet supplied with the new drum cartridge onto the unit.

Important • Make sure to place the black sheet. It may affect image quality.

14 Maintenance

348

Main

tenan

ce

14

8 Open a bag including a new drum cartridge and take it out.

Important • Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum when you take it out from the bag.

9 Unwrap a sheet covering the drum cartridge and place it under the cartridge.

10 Remove the black sheet from the unit.

11 Grip rings provided at the both ends of the drum cartridge to uplift.

Important • Do not touch the surface of the drum cartridge.

12 Place the drum cartridge along with the guide with the side marked with ( ) frontward.

13 Press the both ends of the drum cartridge to place it in a horizontal position.

Note • Make sure that the marks ( ) and ( ) face each other.


349

Main

tenan

ce

14

14 Remove the film on the drum cartridge.

15 Insert the unit completely and return the handle to the original position.

16 Return the lever R1-R4 to the original position.



Replacing the Staple Cartridge (with Finisher C or Booklet finisher C)

When the finisher C or booklet finisher C (optional) is installed and it is time to replace the staple cartridge, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, replace the staple cartridge with a new one.

The following example shows how to replace the staple cartridge in the booklet finisher C. The procedure is the same as for the finisher C.Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and

performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.

Note • To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the front cover of the finisher.

14 Maintenance

350

Main

tenan

ce

14

2 Grip the lever R1 of the staple cartridge holder, and pull out the holder to the right towards you.

3 Remove the staple cartridge holder by gripping the orange lever.

Note • The staple cartridge is firmly held. When remove the staple cartridge, strongly pull the cartridge.

4 Pick the empty staple case with your fingers (1), and then remove the case from the cartridge (2) as shown in the figure.

5 Prepare a new staple case. Insert the front of the staple case into the staple cartridge (1), and push the rear of the case to set (2).

6 Insert the staple cartridge while gripping the orange lever until you hear it click into place.

7 Close the front cover of the finisher.

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher is even slightly open.

1

1

2

1

2


351

Main

tenan

ce

14

Replacing the Staple Cartridge for booklet (gutter) (with Booklet finisher C)

When a booklet finisher (optional) is installed and it is time to replace the booklet staple cartridge, a message appears on the display. When this message appears, replace the staple cartridge with a new one.Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and

performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.

Note • To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.


2 Press the levers R2 and R3 to the right, and pull out the unit.

3 Hold the tabs of the booklet staple cartridge, and then lift to remove it.

4 Holding the tabs of a new booklet staple cartridge, return the cartridge to the original position and gently push it until you hear it click into place.

R2

R3

14 Maintenance

352

Main

tenan

ce

14

5 Return the unit to its original position.



Emptying Punch Scrap Container (with Finisher C or Booklet finisher C)

When the finisher C or booklet finisher C (optional) is installed and the punch scrap container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen. Discard the scraps according to the message.

The following example shows how to replace the staple cartridge in the booklet finisher C. The procedure is the same as for the finisher C.

When pulling the punch scrap container out to dispose the punch scraps, ensure that all scraps are discarded. If there are scraps remaining, the container may be full before the next message is displayed. It may cause machine malfunctions.Important • Pull the container out while the power is on. If you switch off the power when emptying the

scrap container, the machine will not be able to detect that the scraps have been disposed.


2 Pull out the punch scrap container R4.


353

Main

tenan

ce

14

3 Discard all the scraps.

4 Insert the empty punch scrap container until it comes to a stop.



14 Maintenance

354

Main

tenan

ce

14

Cleaning the Machine

The following describes how to clean the machine.

This section is divided into separate descriptions on how to clean the exterior, internal components, document cover/document feeder, and document glass.

Cleaning the Exterior

The following describes how to clean the exterior.Important • Before you start to clean the machine, be sure to switch off and unplug the machine. Turn

the machine off when cleaning to avoid the risk of electric shock.

• Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile liquids or spray insect repellent on the machine as doing so may discolor, deform, or crack covers.

• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or damage documents during copying.

1 Wipe the exterior with a firmly wrung soft cloth moistened with water.

Note • If it is difficult to remove dirt, try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent.

2 Wipe off any excess water from the exterior with a soft cloth.

Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass

If the document cover and document glass are dirty, dirt may appear on copies and the machine may not properly detect document sizes.

To ensure that clean copies are made, clean the machine about once a month.Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint

or coating on plastic parts.


1 Wipe the document cover with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.


2 Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.


Cleaning the Machine

355

Main

tenan

ce

14

Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass

If the film section and document feeder glass are dirty, dirt may appear on copies.

To ensure that clean copies are made, clean the machine about once a month or clean it when a message is shown on the display.Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint



1 Wipe the film section and the document feeder grass and guide with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt on the document cover, glass and guide, and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.


2 Holds the lever to open the part of the figure on the right. Wipe the optical glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt on the optical glass, and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

Important • Do not push the optical glass strongly since it is easy to damage the film around the optical glass surface.


3 Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.


Cleaning Document Feeder Rollers

If the machine is equipped with a document feeder and the document feeder rollers are dirty, dirt may appear on copies and the machine may not properly detect document sizes.

To ensure that clean copies are made, clean the machine about once a month.Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint



14 Maintenance

356

Main

tenan

ce

14

1 Grip the handle of the top cover of the document feeder, and open the top cover until it comes to a stop.

Note • When you fully open the cover, it enters a fixed position. Open the cover gently.

2 While turning the rollers, gently clean it with a soft cloth moistened with water.

Important • Use a cloth that has been firmly wrung to prevent drops of water falling into the machine. Drops of water on internal components may cause a malfunction.


3 Close the top cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.

4 Close the left cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.

Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment

357

Main

tenan

ce

14


The machine can automatically adjust gradation when the reproducibility of density or color in copies and prints has deteriorated. The machine can adjust the gradation for each screen type.

The following three types of screen is available.

Copy Job

Adjusts the gradation for copying documents.

Print Job 1

Basic screen for printing.

For PCL printer driversAdjusts the gradation for items other than [CAD] and [Presentation] of [Image Types] in the [Graphics] tab.

For PostScript printersAdjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Standard] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.


Print Job 2

For PCL printer driversAdjusts the gradation for [Presentation] at [Image Type] in the [Graphics] tab.

For PostScript printersAdjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Gradation] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.


The following paper sizes is available for the gradation adjustment: A3, A4 , 11 x 17 inches, and 8.5 x 11 inches .Note • We recommend executing auto gradation adjustment for all three of the screen types. When

the adjustment for one screen type is complete, specify the next screen type and repeat the procedure.

• If color gradation is not compensated despite the periodic execution of auto gradation adjustment, contact our Customer Support Center.

• The auto gradation adjustment does not execute when [Text] or [Map] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] tab for copying.

• To make sure that [Copy Defaults] in the System Administration mode is set as following before executing auto gradation adjustment:Lighten/Darken: Normal, Color Shift: Normal, Color Saturation: Normal, Color Balance: 0. After finishing the auto gradation adjustment, change the settings of [Copy Defaults] if necessary. For information about the [Copy Default], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.229).



14 Maintenance

358

Main

tenan

ce

14

2 Select [Auto Gradation Adjustment], and then go to step 10.If [Auto Gradation Adjustment] is not displayed on the [All Services] screen, go to step 3.

Note • For the method to display [Auto Gradation Adjustment] on the [All Services] screen, refer to "All Services" (P.209).







8 Select [Image Quality Adjustment].

<Log In/Out> button


359

Main

tenan

ce

14

9 Select [Auto Gradation Adjustment].

10 Load paper.

11 Select the screen type for gradation adjustment.

Note • The example described here is for the [Copy Job] screen.

12 Select the tray that you loaded paper in the step 10 for [Paper Supply], and then select [Close].

Note • Only paper types can be set when you select the Tray 5 (bypass).

13 Select [Target] to set an area for applying the gradation adjustment, and then select [Close].

Note • Normally, select [Copy/Print] for [Applicable Area]. When using external calibration for print output, set [Applicable Area] if necessary.

14 Select [Start].

Note • The message “Printing the Gradation Adjustment Chart. Copy Job” appears and the document for gradation adjustment (Gradation Adjustment Chart) is printed.

15 Align the magenta patch of the printed Gradation Adjustment Chart against the left side of the document glass.

Note • Place the Gradation Adjustment Chart on the document glass.

16 Place at least five sheets of white paper on the Gradation Adjustment Chart to cover the Chart and close the document cover.

Magenta

14 Maintenance

360

Main

tenan

ce

14

17 Select [Start].

The message “Gradation adjustment is in progress. Copy Job” appears and the machine automatically adjusts the gradation. It takes about 30 seconds to complete gradation adjustment.

If the adjustment completes successfully, a completion message appears on the [Auto Gradation Adjustment] screen. If there is a problem, the machine stops adjustment and displays an error message. Solve the problem in accordance with the displayed error message.

18 Select [Confirm].

19 To continue automatic gradation adjustment for other screen types, repeat steps 11 to 17.

20 When you started the auto gradation adjustment from the [All Services] screen, select [Close] and the go to step 2. started the adjustment in the System Administration mode, select [Close] until the [System Settings] screen appears.


22 Make a copy or print to confirm the image quality.

Printing a Report

This section describes how to print a report/ list.Note • The items displayed differ depending on the optional features installed.

• When the <Job in Memory> indicator is lit, you can confirm the documents stored to memory in the [Stored Documents List].

For information about report/list types, refer to "Print Report/List" (P.310).



3 Select [Print Report/List].

4 Select a report or list you want to print and press the <Start> button.

<Machine Status> button

15 Problem Solving

This chapter describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.

Troubleshooting ........................................................................................364

Machine Trouble .......................................................................................366

Image Quality Problems ...........................................................................371

Trouble during Copying ............................................................................376

Trouble during Printing .............................................................................381

Trouble during Scanning...........................................................................384

Error Codes ..............................................................................................389

Paper Jams...............................................................................................406

Document Jams........................................................................................426

Stapler Faults............................................................................................429

15 Problem Solving

364

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Troubleshooting

This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.

See the following for troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems.

Power is not switched On. Cause Is the power switch on the machine off?

No Yes Action Turn the power switch on.

Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.33).

No

Cause Is the power cord plugged into the power outlet?

Action Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power cord. Then turn the power switch on.


No

Cause Is the power cord disconnected from the machine or the rear of the rack?

Action Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power cord. Then turn the power switch on.


No

Cause Is power of the correct voltage being supplied?

Action Make sure that the power supply is 200 V (volts), 10A (amperes).Make sure that power of capacity compatible with the specified maximum power consumption of the machine (2.2kW) is being supplied.

Touch screen is dark. Cause Is the <Power Saver> button on?

No Yes Action The machine is in the Power Saver mode. Press the <Power Saver> button on the control panel to cancel the Power Saver mode.

Refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.35).

No

Cause Is the brightness dial set too low?

Action Use the brightness dial to adjust display brightness.


A message is displayed. Cause Has a paper jam or document jam occurred?

No Yes Action For information on paper jams, refer to "Paper Jams" (P.406).

For information on document jams, refer to "Document Jams" (P.426).

No

Cause An error code displayed?

Action Refer to "Error Codes" (P.389).

The machine is not working properly.

Action Refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.366).

No Yes

Troubleshooting

365

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

If the machine has still not worked properly after taking measures described in this chapter, contact our Customer Support Center.

Poor image quality Action Refer to "Image Quality Problems" (P.371).

No Yes

Trouble during Copy Action Refer to "Trouble during Copying" (P.376).

No Yes

Trouble during printing Action Refer to "Trouble during Printing" (P.381).

No Yes

Trouble during Scanning Action Refer to "Trouble during Scanning" (P.384).

Yes

15 Problem Solving

366

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Machine Trouble

If you think some trouble is occurring on the machine, check the machine status again.

Warning

Precision components and high-voltage power supplies are used on the machine.Never open or remove machine covers that are screwed shut unless specifically instructed in the User Guide. A high-voltage component can cause electric shocks. When opening the panels and covers that are screwed shut to install or detach optional accessories, be sure to follow instructions in the respective the User Guide. Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. Doing so might cause fire or smoke.

Symptoms Check Remedy

Power is not switched On.

Is the power switch on the machine off?

Turn the power switch on.


Is the power cord plugged into the power outlet?

Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power cord. Then turn the power switch on.

Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.33).Is the power cord disconnected from the machine or the rear of the rack?

Is power of the correct voltage being supplied?

Make sure that the power supply is 200 V (volts), 10 A (amperes) when one electric cord is provided.Make sure that power of capacity compatible with the specified maximum power consumption of the machine (2.2kW) is being supplied.

Touch screen is dark.

Is the <Power Saver> button on?

The machine is in the Power Saver mode. Press the <Power Saver> button on the control panel to cancel the Power Saver mode.

Refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.35).

Is the brightness dial set too low?

Use the brightness dial to adjust display brightness.


Machine Trouble

367

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Unable to print, orunable to copy.

Is a message displayed on the touch screen?

Follow the instructions displayed to solve the problem.

Insufficient memory? Set the [Print Mode] to [Speed Priority], try printing again using [Ensure Printing], decrease the number of open ports, increase the print page buffer, or increase by adding on 512 MB memory.

Refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.243).

Note • When there is insufficient memory, theport setting is automatically reset to[Stop] and the machine is restarted.

• For information about adding on memory, contact our Customer Support Center.

Is the print mode [Off-line]? Press the <Machine Status> button and confirm the [Print Mode] in the [Machine Status] screen. If [Print Mode] is [Off-line], select [On-line] in the [Print Mode] screen.

Is the power cord plugged into the power outlet?

Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power cord. Then turn the power switch on.


<Online> indicator does not light even though you instructed it to print.

Is the interface cable disconnected?

Turn the power switch off, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and check the interface cable connection.

For information about Network Settings, refer to Network Administrator Guide.

Is the personal computer's environment correctly set?

Check the print driver and other environment settings on the personal computer.

Is the required interface set?

Check the status of the interface port in use.


Printing is not performed even though printing was instructed on Tray 5 (bypass).

Is paper of the size specified for printing loaded on the tray?

Follow the instructions displayed to load paper of correct size and instruct it to print again.

Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.180).

Unsatisfactory print quality

A probable cause is an image defect.

Remedy the trouble referring to "Image Quality Problems" described later.

Refer to "Image Quality Problems" (P.371).

Text is not printed correctly (text is corrupted).

Non-standard fonts are used for printing.

Check the application or print driver settings. If PostScript is being used, download the required fonts.


15 Problem Solving

368

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

<Online> indicator lights and copies are not delivered with Online still lit.

Data remaining in machine memory.

Cancel printing, or purge remaining data.

Refer to "Checking Current/Pending Jobs" (P.291).

Cannot insert or remove trays.

Did you open a cover or turn power off during printing?

Turn the power off without unnecessarily inserting or removing a paper tray. Wait several seconds and then turn the power switch on. Make sure that the machine is online (ready to receive data) and then insert or remove the paper tray.

Copies are not made at the desired size

Is the document glass or the document cover dirty?

Clean the document glass or the document cover.

Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass" (P.354).

Is the document made of highly transparent material like a transparency?

Place the document on the document glass, and place a white sheet on top of the document before making a copy.

Is the document at the correct position?

Load the document correctly.

Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.42).

Is the document loaded correctly?

Is the document guides at the correct position?

Properly set the document guides.


Is the document folded or bent?

Straighten and properly reset the document.


Is the document a non-standard size?

Enter the document size.

Refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.67).


Machine Trouble

369

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Paper is often jammed or wrinkled.

Is paper loaded properly in the tray?

Load paper correctly.

Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.177).

Is the paper tray set properly?

Firmly push in the paper tray as far as possible to set it properly.


Is the paper damp? Replace with paper from a new ream.


Is the paper curled? Either turn the paper so that the curl is facing down in the paper tray, or replace with paper from a new ream.


Are the paper and paper tray settings correct?

Make sure the paper and paper tray match the configured paper size.

Refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.210).

Are there any torn pieces of paper still remaining inside the machine or is there a foreign object in the machine?

Open the door of the machine or slide out the paper tray to remove the torn paper or the foreign object.

Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.406), or "Loading Paper" (P.177).

Is out-of-spec paper loaded in the tray?

Replace with paper that meets machine specifications.

Refer to "Paper Types" (P.174), or "Loading Paper" (P.177).

Is paper loaded in the paper tray past its maximum fill line?

Load paper in the paper tray so that it does not exceed the maximum fill line.


Is the paper guide set correctly?

Load the paper correctly, and apply the paper guides to a paper lightly.

Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.177), or "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.183).

Is the image size on the paper is almost the same as the paper size?

Increase the amounts of edge erase.

For more information, refer to "Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the document)" (P.57) when you make copies, or to the print driver's online help when you print data.

Is paper cut properly? Some paper are not cut properly depending on a paper type. Fan the paper well before loading paper.

Documents are not fed into the document feeder.

Are the documents too small?

The minimum size of the document that can be loaded on the document feeder is A5.



15 Problem Solving

370

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

An error message is displayed after paper is loaded in paper Tray 5 (bypass) and the <Start> button is pressed.

Check the position of the paper guides of the Tray 5 (bypass).

Set the paper guides to the correct positions.


Documents are often jammed.

Is the right type of document used?

Properly load a document that can be handled by the document feeder.

Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.42).Are you trying to copy irregular shaped documents, business cards, transparencies, or thin documents?

Are you trying to copy documents affixed with sticky labels, paper clips or adhesive tape?

Remove sticky labels, paper clips or adhesive tape from the document before copying.

Are the document guides at the correct position?

Properly set the document guides.


Is part of the document ripped, and a piece of paper remaining in the document feeder?

Open the document feeder cover and check inside.

Refer to "Document Jams" (P.426).

When importing originals of different sizes, is the [Mixed Size Originals] setting set to [On]?

Set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].

Refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.68).

Is an A5-size document loaded horizontally ( ) on the document feeder when the Mixed Size Originals feature is in use?

Load the A5-size document vertically ( ).

A corner of the document is folded.

Is the document curled? Flatten out the curl and load the document again.

Color copies cannot be made.

Is [Output Color] set to [Black]?

Select [Full Color] at [Output Color].

Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)" (P.54).

Is a message prompting toner cartridge replacement displayed on the touch screen?

Replace with the toner cartridge of the color indicated in the message.

Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.339).

Stapler Faults - Refer to "Stapler Faults" (P.429).


Image Quality Problems

371

Pro

blem

So

lving

15


When image quality of the printed document is poor, choose the similar symptom in the following table, and perform the required remedy.

If image quality is not improved by applying the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.


The copy is dirty. Is the document glass or the document cover dirty?

Clean the document glass or the document cover.


Is the document made of highly transparent material like a transparency?

If the document is highly transparent, marks on the document cover will be copied. Place a white sheet of paper on the original document and make a copy.

Is the document colored, of a rough texture or a blueprint?

Either adjust the copy density or image quality and then retry copying.

Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.59), or "Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast)" (P.60).

Are you making copies of glossy printing paper?

Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document glass, and shadows are sometimes copied and reproduced as dirt. Place a transparency or highly transparent film under the document and retry copying.

The copy has black lines.

Is the scanning glass on the feeder dirty?

Clean the document feeder glass.

Refer to "Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass" (P.355).

The copy is too dark.

Is the copy density set to [Dark]?

Adjust the copy density.

Refer to "Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast)" (P.60).The copy is too

light.Is the density of the document too light?

Is the copy density set to [Lighter]?

Tonal reproduction in color copies is poor, resulting in unsatisfactory image quality.

Is tonal reproduction poor? Perform automatic gradation adjustment from the [All Services] screen.

Refer to "Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment" (P.357).

The copy shifts slightly.

Is the paper shifting or is the leading edge of the paper not loaded flush with the tray corners?

Align the edges of the paper, and load the paper again so that is flush against the paper tray corners.


15 Problem Solving

372

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Images on the copy are skewed.

Is the document loaded correctly?

Load the document correctly.


Is paper loaded properly in the tray?



Is the paper guide of the Tray 5 (bypass) set so that the guide touches the paper?



Is the document guides at the correct position?

Load the document correctly, and align the document guides with the edge of the document.


Is the paper tray set properly?

Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to set it properly.


Part of the image is missing on the copy.

Is the paper damp? If the paper is damp, either some parts of the copy are not shown or the copy is smudged and unclear. Replace with paper from a new ream.


Is the loaded paper folded or wrinkled?

Remove the defective paper and replace with paper from a new ream.


Is the document pasted together or folded in?

A probable cause is that the pasted or folded in section is curling back, and has risen up from the surface of the document glass. Place a stack of white sheets on the document to hold the document down flat against the document glass.

A stripe pattern appears in copies.

Is too large a copy ratio set? Stripes sometimes appear in copies at some copy ratios. Adjust the copy ratio.

Refer to "Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" (P.50).


Printing is faint.(smudged, unclear)

The paper is damp. Replace with paper from a new ream.


The drum cartridge is depleted or damaged.

Replace with a new drum cartridge.

Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)" (P.342), or "Replacing Drum Cartridge R2/R3/R4 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)" (P.346).

There is no toner left in the toner cartridge.

Replace with a new toner cartridge.




373

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Black or colored dots are printed.




Black or colored lines are printed.




The scanning glass on the document feeder is dirty.

Clean the document feeder glass.

Refer to "Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass" (P.355), or "Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass" (P.355).

Dirt appears at equal intervals.

Dirt on the paper feed path. Print a few pages.




White dots appear in black filled areas.

The paper in use is unsuitable.

Load suitable paper.






15 Problem Solving

374

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Printed toner smudges when rubbed with your finger.Toner is not fused to the paper.The paper is dirtied with toner.






The entire paper area is printed black.




A probable cause is a high-voltage power supply malfunction.

Contact our Customer Support Center.

Nothing is printed.

Two or more sheets of paper are being fed simultaneously (double-feed).

Fan the paper well and load it again.





A probable cause is a high-voltage power supply malfunction.

Contact our Customer Support Center.

White areas or white or colored stripes appear.








375

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

The entire page is printed faint.

When the print was made using the Tray 5 (bypass), the size and type of the actually loaded paper differed from the setting on the print driver.

Load paper of the correct size and type into the Tray 5 (bypass).


Two or more sheets may be feeding at once.

Fan the paper well and load it again.


Paper becomes wrinkled.Text is blurred.


Replace with paper from a new ream.


Paper is being added while it is being fed.

The paper is damp.

White areas appear or color is missing vertically







Text or images are printed at an angle

The paper guide in the paper tray is not set at the correct position.

Set the horizontal and vertical paper guides to the correct positions.



15 Problem Solving

376

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Trouble during Copying

Describes solutions for problems encountered during copying.

Unable to Copy

Describes solutions when unable to copy.

Document not fed properly from the document feeder

Cause Document size is too small.

Action The minimum size of the document that can be loaded on the document feeder is A5.


Cause The right type of document is not being used.

Action The document feeder cannot be used with irregular sized documents, business cards, transparencies, or thin documents.In addition, documents with tags, paper clips, and cellophane tape cannot be used.


Cause The document guides are in the incorrect position.

Action Set the document guides to correctly match the document size.


Cause Part of the document is ripped, and a piece of paper remaining in the document feeder.

Action Open the document feeder cover, and remove the piece of paper.


Cause Documents of different sizes are set.

Action When using documents of different sizes, you must specify [Mixed Size Originals]. Otherwise, a paper jam will result. When setting documents of different sizes, be sure to specify [Mixed Size Originals].



377

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

The Copy Result is not What was Expected

Described solutions for situations in which the copy result is different from that expected.

The copy is dirty. Cause The document glass or the document cover is dirty.

No Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.


Cause The document is made of highly transparent material like a transparency.

Action If the document is highly transparent, marks on the document cover will be copied. Place a white sheet of paper on the original document and make a copy.

Cause Color paper, rough paper, or blueprint paper is being used.

Action The paper's background color is copied. Either adjust the copy density or image quality, or specify suppress background color, and then retry copying.

Cause Glossy printing paper is being used.

Action Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document glass, and shadows are sometimes copied and reproduced as dirt. Place a transparency or highly transparent film under the document and retry copying.

Copy is too dark, or too light

Cause Copy density is set to [Darker], or to [Lighter].

No Action Adjust the copy density.

Refer to "Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast)" (P.60).

Cause Density of the document is too light.

Action Adjust the copy density.

Refer to "Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast)" (P.60).

Cause The Original Type is inappropriate.

Action Copy black text. If it is too light, select [Text] for [Original Type].

Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.59).

Colors differ between the original and the copy.

Cause Tonal reproduction is misconfigured.

No Action Perform gradation adjustment.


15 Problem Solving

378

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

No Cause A document type appropriate for this document is not selected.

Action In [Original Type], select a type appropriate for the document.

Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.59).

The copy shifts slightly. Cause Paper set in the paper tray is misaligned.

No Action Align the edges of the paper, and load the paper again so that is flush against the front tray corners.


Part of the image is missing on the copy.

Cause The paper is damp.

No Action If the paper is damp, either some parts of the copy are not shown or the copy is smudged and unclear. Replace with paper from a new ream.


Cause Paper with folds or wrinkles has been set in the paper tray.

Action Remove the defective paper and replace with paper from a new ream.


Cause The document is pasted together or folded in.

Action It is possible that the folded in or pasted part of the document is not touching the document glass. Place a stack of white sheets on the document to hold the document down flat against the document glass.

Stripes appear in the copy

Cause The document enlargement ratio is too large.

No Action Stripes sometimes appear in copies at some enlargement ratios. Adjust the copy ratio.

Refer to "Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" (P.50).

Images on the copy are skewed.

Cause The document is not loaded correctly.

No Action Load the document correctly.


Cause The document guides are in an incorrect position.

Action Load the document correctly, and align the document guides with the edges of the document.



379

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

No Cause The paper tray is not set properly.

Action Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to set it properly.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.177).

Cause The paper guide for Tray 5 (bypass) is misaligned.

Action Load the paper correctly, and align the paper guide with the edge of the paper.Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.180).

Copies are not made at the desired size

Cause The document glass or the document cover is dirty.

No Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass" (P.354).


Action Place a white sheet of paper on the original document and make a copy.

Cause The document is misaligned.

Action Load the document correctly.


Cause The document guides are in an incorrect position.

Action Load the document correctly, and align the document guides with the edges of the document.


Cause The document is a non-standard size.

Action Enter the document size and then copy.

Refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.67).

Cause The document is folded or bent.

Action Straighten and properly reset the document.


Unable to take color copies

Cause [Output Color] is set to [Black].

No Action Set [Output Color] to [Auto] or [Full Color].

Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)" (P.54).

A corner of the copy is cut off.

Cause The document exceeds the printable area.

No Action Adjust the reduce/enlarge to make the copy a little smaller.

15 Problem Solving

380

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

No

No stapling done Cause The finisher is not attached.

Action A finisher is needed to perform stapling. Attach a finisher, or cancel stapling from the print options.

Cause The number of pages to staple exceeds 50.

Action A maximum of 50 pages can be stapled. Reduce the number of pages to 50 or lower.

Trouble during Printing

381

Pro

blem

So

lving

15


Describes solutions for problems encountered during printing.

Unable to Print

Describes solutions when unable to print.

Data remains in the printer icon.

Cause The machine is not powered on.

No Action Turn the power on.

Cause The network cable is disconnected from the computer.

Action Connect the network cable to the computer.

Cause The network cable is disconnected from the machine.

Action Connect the network cable to the machine.For information about Network Settings, refer to Network Administrator Guide.

Cause Print mode is set to [Off-line].

Action Press the <Machine Status> button and confirm the [Print Mode] in the [Machine Status] screen. If [Print Mode] is [Offline], select [On-line] in the [Print Mode] screen.

Cause An error occurred with the machine.

Action Check the error details.

Cause The IP address or SMB network path is misconfigured.

Action Configure a correct IP address or SMB network path.


Cause The network connection between the computer and machine is abnormal.

Action Check with your system administrator.

Cause The port is not enabled.

Action Enabled the port in use.


Cause Insufficient space available on the hard disk.

Action Delete unnecessary data to increase free space.

Cause The machine is connected to multiple computers.

Action Wait for a while, and then try printing again.

15 Problem Solving

382

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

The Printed Result is not what was Expected

Described solutions for situations in which the print result is different from that expected.

No

Sent to printer Cause Out of paper.

Action Supply paper to the machine.

Cause No paper for the specified paper size.

Action Set paper for the specified paper size.


Cause Copy operation is performed during interrupt, and interrupt is performed.

Action Cancel the interrupt operation.

Cause An error occurred with the machine.

Action Check the error details.

Cannot print in color Cause In print options, the [Output Color] is set to [Black].

No Action Set [Output Color] to [Auto] or [Color].

No stapling done Cause The finisher is not attached.

No Action A finisher is needed to perform stapling. Attach a finisher, or cancel stapling from the print options.

Cause The number of pages to staple exceeds 50.

Action A maximum of 50 pages can be stapled. Reduce the number of printed pages to 50 or lower.

Cannot print 2 sided Cause Insufficient print page buffer.

No Action Add memory.

Printing performed with a different paper size.

Cause Paper size provided is different from the specified tray size.

No Action Change the paper size set in the tray, or change print options to specify a tray that contains the appropriate size.

The image is cut off on the edge of the paper.

Cause Image exceeds the printable area of the machine.

No Action Increase the printable area, or decrease the document print area.


383

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

No

The printed font differs from the font specified on the computer.

Cause Font replacement is configured on the print driver.

No Action Check the font replacement table.

Cause Non-standard fonts are used for printing.

Action Check the application or print driver settings.If the PostScript is being used, download the required fonts.

Printing does not offset Cause The machine is not equipped with an offset feature.

No Action To output with offset, an offset output unit or finisher is needed.

Printing is slow Cause The print mode specifies Print Quality.

No Action When printing image data that has image quality as a priority, such as pictures, the print speed decreases. Turn off the quality priority in the print mode.

The settings specified for print options do not take effect

Cause A print driver for another model is in use.

No Action Install the print driver for this model.

Cause The optional apparatus cannot be attached to the machine.

Action Check the options attached with the machine, and reset the printer configuration.

There is no edge Cause Image exceeds the printable area of the machine.

No Action Increase the printable area, or decrease the document print area.

Printed colors have changed compared to previous documents.

Cause Tonal reproduction is misconfigured.

Action Perform gradation adjustment.


15 Problem Solving

384

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Trouble during Scanning

Describes solutions for problems encountered during scanning.Note • Scan features are not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For

more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Unable to Scan with the Machine

Describes solutions when unable to scan.

Document not fed properly from the document feeder

Cause Document size is too small.

Action The minimum size of the document that can be loaded on the document feeder is A5.

Refer to "Step 1 Opening the [Check Mailbox] Screen" (P.134).

Cause The right type of document is not being used.

Action The document feeder cannot be used with irregular sized documents, business cards, transparencies, or thin documents.In addition, documents with tags, paper clips, and cellophane tape cannot be used.


Cause The document guides are in the incorrect position.

Action Set the document guides to correctly match the document size.


Cause Part of the document is ripped, and a piece of paper remaining in the document feeder.

Action Open the document feeder cover, and remove the piece of paper.


Cause Documents of different sizes are set.

Action When using documents of different sizes, you must specify [Mixed Size Originals]. Otherwise, a paper jam will result. When setting documents of different sizes, be sure to specify [Mixed Size Originals].



385

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Unable to Import Scanned Document into Computer

Describes solutions when unable to import scanned document into computer.

Unable to find scanner Cause The machine is not powered on.

No Action Turn the power on.

Cause The network cable is disconnected from the computer.

Action Connect the network cable to the computer.

Cause The network cable is disconnected from the machine.

Action Connect the network cable to the machine.


Cause The Salutation port is not enabled.

Action Enable the Salutation port.For information about Network Settings, refer to Network Administrator Guide.

Cause The network connection between the computer and machine is abnormal.

Action Check with your system administrator.

Unable to open Mailbox Cause No Mailbox has been created.

No Action Create a Mailbox.

Refer to "Mailbox" (P.265).

Cause Mailbox password forgotten.

Action Unable to verify password. Set the password to [Off], and then reset the password again.Refer to "Mailbox" (P.265).

Scanner unable to scan data due to TWAIN transmission error.

Cause The scan driver is not installed.

No Action Install the scan driver.

Operation halts during scanning

Cause Is the file size too big?

Action Reduce the resolution, or choose a compressed output file format, and rescan.

Refer to "File Format (Selecting the Format of Scanned Data)" (P.119), or "Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio)" (P.129).

15 Problem Solving

386

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Unable to Send the Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB)

Describes solutions when scanned documents cannot be sent over the network.

Problems with Sending E-mail

Describes solutions when e-mail cannot be sent.

Image not What was Expected

Describes solutions for dealing with situations where the scan data does not produce image data as expected.

Unable to forward over the network

Cause Is the server entered correctly?

Action Check the inputted server.

Cause Is the save location entered correctly?

Action Check the save location.

Cause When using SMB, is the Shared Name entered correctly?

Action Check the Shared Name.

Cause When using SMB (UNC Format), is the save location entered correctly?

Action Check the save location.

Cause Is the login name entered correctly?

Action Check the login name.

Cause Is the password entered correctly?

Action Check the password.

Unable to send e-mail Cause Mail address is incorrect

Action Check the e-mail address.

Cause Maximum sending e-mail size is exceeded

Action Change the maximum sending e-mail size, or reduce the resolution.

Refer to "Maximum E-mail Size" (P.260), or "Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)" (P.124).

The image is dirty Cause The document glass or the document cover is dirty.




387

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

No Cause The document is made of highly transparent material like a transparency.

Action If the document is highly transparent, marks on the document cover will appear on the image. Place a white sheet of paper on the document and scan.

Cause The document is colored, of a rough texture or a blueprint, etc.

Action Either adjust the copy density or image quality and then retry scanning.

Cause Glossy printing paper is being scanned.

Action Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document glass, and shadows are sometimes scanned and reproduced as dirt. Place a transparency or highly transparent film under the document and retry scanning.

Image is too dark, or too light

Cause Scan density is set to [Darker], or to [Lighter].

No Action Adjust the scan density.Refer to "Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast)" (P.121).

Cause The Original Type is inappropriate.

Action Select an image quality appropriate for the document.

Refer to "Original Type (Select the Document Type)" (P.119).

Part of the image is missing.

Cause The document is pasted together or folded in.

No Action It is possible that the folded in or pasted part of the document is not touching the document glass. Place a stack of white sheets on the document to hold the document down flat against the document glass.

The image is not the desired size

Cause The document glass or the document cover is dirty.




Action Place a white sheet of paper on the document and scan.

Cause The document is misaligned.

Action Load the document correctly.


15 Problem Solving

388

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

No Cause The document guides are in an incorrect position.

Action Load the document correctly, and align the document guides with the edges of the document.Refer to "Step 1 Opening the [Check Mailbox] Screen" (P.134).

Cause The document is a non-standard size.

Action Enter the document size and then scan.Refer to "Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)" (P.125).

Cause The document is folded or bent.

Action Straighten and properly reset the document.Refer to "Step 1 Opening the [Check Mailbox] Screen" (P.134).

The image is not color Cause [Output Color] is set to [Black], or [Grayscale].

No Action Select [Full Color] at [Output Color].Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to Scan)" (P.117).

The image is coarse Cause Resolution is too low.

No Action Set a higher resolution.

Refer to "Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)" (P.124).

Cause Image is saved with high compression.

Action Select a lower compression output file format.

Refer to "Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio)" (P.129).

Black & white gradations are not as desired

Cause [Black] is selected for [Output Color].

Action Select [Grayscale] for [Output Color].

Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to Scan)" (P.117).

Error Codes

389

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Error Codes

Explains error codes.

If an error caused the printing to end abnormally, or a malfunction occurred in the machine, then an error message code (***-***) is displayed.

If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after following the listed solution, then contact our Customer Support Center.

Refer to the following table for error codes, and rectify the problem.Important • If an error code is displayed, all print data of the machine as well as print data stored in the

machine's built-in memory is discarded.

Errors are divided into the following [Categories].

C: Copy

P: Print

S: Scan

M: Send as E-mail

O: Others Problems

Error CodeCategory

Cause and RemedyC P S M O

002-770 O O [Cause] Unable to process job template due to insufficient hard disk space.

[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.

003-750 O [Cause] Unable to store any documents with 2 Sided Book Copy feature.

[Remedy] Check the 2 Sided Book Copy settings.

Refer to "2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)" (P.66).

003-751 O O [Cause] The machine is unable to process size, because the specified document area is too small.

[Remedy] Increase resolution or scan area size.

003-752 O [Cause] When setting a mixed size document to Full Color/2 Side and attempting to scan at 600dpi, an error occurs.

[Remedy] Decrease [Scan Resolution] to [400dpi] or less, and rescan.

003-753 O O [Cause] When scanning a mixed size document using the 2 sided simultaneous scan feature with 300, 400, or 600dpi, an error occurs.


003-754003-755

O O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Reprocess the job.

003-757 O O [Cause] When scanning a mixed size document using the 2 sided simultaneous scan feature with400, or 600dpi, an error occurs.


15 Problem Solving

390

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

003-760 O [Cause] An incompatible combination of features are specified in the document scan conditions.

[Remedy] Check the selected options.

003-761 O O [Cause] The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray is different from the paper size of the tray selected for Auto Repeat.

[Remedy] Change the paper size for the tray, or change the [Paper Type Priority] settings.

003-763 O [Cause] An error occurred when reading the Gradation Adjustment Chart.

[Remedy] Place the Adjustment Chart properly on the document glass.


003-795 O [Cause] When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the specified paper size, the reduction/enlargement ratio value exceeds the allowed range.

[Remedy] Take one of the following actions:Manually enter a reduction/enlargement ratio.Change the paper size.

005-274005-275005-280005-281005-282005-283005-284005-285005-286

O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. Contact our Customer

Support Center.

012-211012-212012-213012-221012-223012-224012-225012-226012-227012-228012-229012-230

O [Cause] Finisher malfunctioned.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved

by performing the relevant remedy, Contact our Customer Support Center.

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

391

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

012-260012-261012-263012-264012-265012-266012-270012-271012-282012-283012-284012-291012-295012-296

O [Cause] Finisher malfunctioned.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


016-210016-211016-212016-213016-214016-215016-216016-217

O [Cause] An error occurred on the software settings.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


016-219 O [Cause] The machine does not have the software license.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


016-220016-221016-222016-223016-224016-225016-226016-227016-228

O O [Cause] An error occurred in the document scanner.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


016-450 O [Cause] The SMB host name already exists.[Remedy] Change the host name.


016-454 O [Cause] Unable to retrieve IP address from DNS.[Remedy] Check the DNS configurations and IP address retrieve

method.


016-503 O [Cause] Unable to resolve SMTP server name during E-mail send.

[Remedy] Check that the SMTP server settings from CentreWare Internet Services are correct. Also, check the DNS server settings.

Error CodeCategory


15 Problem Solving

392

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

016-504 O [Cause] Unable to resolve POP3 server name during E-mail send.

[Remedy] Check that the SMTP server settings from CentreWare Internet Services are correct. Also, check the DNS server settings.

016-505 O [Cause] Unable to login to POP3 server during mail send.[Remedy] Check that the user name and password used in the

POP3 server from CentreWare Internet Services are correct.

016-701 O [Cause] PCL print data could not be processed as there was insufficient memory.

[Remedy] Reduce resolution, cancel 2 sided printing or N up, and specify the print data again.

Refer to the print driver's online help.

016-702 O [Cause] PCL print data could not be processed as there was insufficient print page buffer.

[Remedy] Take one of the following actions.Set [Print Mode] to [Speed Priority].Use Ensure Print.Increase the size of the print page buffer.Add on memory.

For information about print modes and print guarantees, refer to the print driver's online help. For information about memory, refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.243).

016-703 O [Cause] Mail specifying a non-registered or invalid mailbox No. was received.

[Remedy] Take one of the following actions.Create a new mailbox with the specified number andrequest the sender to send it again.Request the sender to send to a valid mailbox.

016-704 O [Cause] Documents stored in the mailbox have reached the limit, and hard disk capacity is insufficient.

[Remedy] Remove unnecessary documents from the mailbox, and save the document.

Refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox" (P.138).

016-705 O [Cause] Secure Print documents cannot be registered.[Remedy] Check print options and specify the print data again. If

the hard disk is malfunctioning, contact our Customer Support Center.

Refer to "Secure Print" (P.294).

016-706 O [Cause] The maximum number of Secure Print users has been exceeded, and no space is available on the hard disk.

[Remedy] Remove unnecessary documents stored on the machine, and delete unnecessary Secure Print users.

For information about Secure Print, refer to "Secure Print" (P.294). For information about mailboxes, refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox" (P.138).

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

393

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

016-707 O [Cause] Sample print documents cannot be registered.[Remedy] Check print options and specify the print data again. If


Refer to "Sample Print" (P.296).

016-708 O [Cause] Annotation is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.


016-709 O [Cause] An error occurs in PCL processing.[Remedy] Retry printing.

016-710 O [Cause] Delayed print documents cannot be registered.[Remedy] Check print options and specify the print data again. If


Refer to "Delayed Print" (P.297).

016-711 O O [Cause] The maximum e-mail size has been exceeded.[Remedy] Take one of the following actions and send e-mail again.

Decrease the document numberDecrease the Scan ResolutionReduce the scanning ratioSet the Image Compression higher when large valuescanningHave your System Administrator increase the MaximumE-mail Size

016-712 O Refer to 003-751.

016-713 O [Cause] The input password does not agree with the password set to the mailbox.

[Remedy] Input the correct password.

016-714 O [Cause] Specified mailbox does not exist.[Remedy] Create a new mailbox or specify the existing mailbox.

016-716 O [Cause] Unable to spool TIFF file, because of insufficient disk space.

[Remedy] Remove unnecessary documents and users stored on the machine, and then attach the hard disk. When attaching a hard disk, contact our Customer Support Center.

Refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox" (P.138).

016-718 O [Cause] PCL print data cannot be processed because of insufficient memory.

[Remedy] Reduce resolution, cancel 2 sided printing or N up, and specify the print data again.

016-719 O [Cause] PCL print data cannot be processed because of insufficient print page buffer.

[Remedy] Increase the size of the print page buffer.

016-720 O [Cause] The command that cannot be processed is included in PCL print data.

[Remedy] Check the print data and try to print again.

Error CodeCategory


15 Problem Solving

394

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

016-721 O O [Cause] An error occurred during print processing. Probable causes are as follows:1. Printing was instructed by [automatic tray selection] when [Paper Type Priority] is set to [Automatic Tray switching Off] for all paper in the [Common Settings].2. ESC/P command error

[Remedy] 1. When printing by automatic tray selection, set one of the paper types to a setting other than [Automatic Tray switching Off] in [Paper Type Priority].2. Check print data.

Refer to "Paper Type Priority" (P.213).

016-722 O [Cause] Unsupported staple position is specified.[Remedy] Confirm the staple position and try to print again.

016-723 O [Cause] Unsupported punching position is specified.[Remedy] Confirm the punching position and try to print again.

016-728 O [Cause] An unsupported tag was included in the TIFF file.[Remedy] Check the print data.

016-729 O [Cause] Unable to print because the number of colors/resolution of the TIFF file exceeds the allowed range.

[Remedy] Change the number of colors/resolution for the TIFF file, and specify the print data again.

016-731 O [Cause] Unable to print TIFF data because it was interrupted.[Remedy] Retry printing.

016-732 O [Cause] Unable to registered form specified by emulation with host.

[Remedy] Resend the form data.

016-733 O O [Cause] 1. Unable to retrieve IP address from text on the right side of @ of an address during sending E-mail.2. Unable to resolve Internet address on the right side of @ by DNS.

[Remedy] 1. Check the E-mail address.2. Check the DNS server address.

016-734 O [Cause] A simple address result report cannot be printed.[Remedy] Set a mail reception settings of the device by the

transmission side as [STMP reception].

016-735 O O [Cause] Attempted to print [Job Template List] while updating the job template.

[Remedy] Retry printing after waiting for a period.

016-736 O [Cause] Any data cannot be saved in the forwarding destination directory.

[Remedy] Take one of the following actions:1. Check the free space of the forwarding destination disk.2. Check to see whether you have privileges for the forwarding destination directory.3. Delete “.LCK file” in the forwarding destination directory.

016-746 O [Cause] An unsupported feature is included in received PDF.[Remedy] Print using printer driver.

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

395

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

016-748 O O O [Cause] Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.

[Remedy] Reduce the number of pages of print data, for example, by dividing up the print data or printing one copy at a time when making multiple copies.

016-749 O [Cause] A PJL command syntax error occurred.[Remedy] Either confirm the print settings, or correct the PJL

command.

016-751 O [Cause] A syntax error or parameter error occurs, an undefined command is used, or a PDF file is damaged during PDF Bridge processing.

[Remedy] Print using a print driver.

016-752 O [Cause] A PDF Bridge processing cannot be carried out due to insufficient hard disk space.

[Remedy] Change [Print Mode] to [Normal] from [High Image Quality], or [High Speed] from [Normal]. Or, remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.

016-753 O [Cause] The entered password does not agreed with the password of the PDF file.

[Remedy] Set the correct password in ContentsBridge.

016-755 O [Cause] Attempted to process PDF file which was specified to printing prohibited.

[Remedy] Cancel the printing prohibited specification using Adobe Reader, and try to print again.

016-756 O [Cause] No permissions to use the service.[Remedy] Check with your System Administrator.

016-757 O [Cause] Password is incorrect.[Remedy] Enter the correct password.

016-758 O O O [Cause] No Permissions to use service.[Remedy] Check with your Auditron Administrator.

016-759 O O O [Cause] Maximum number of pages for this service has been reached.

[Remedy] Check with your Auditron Administrator.

016-760 O [Cause] An error occurred during PostScript processing.[Remedy] Take one of the following actions:

Set [Print Mode] to [Speed Priority].Increase PostScript memory.

For information about [Print Mode], refer to the print driver's online help. For information about memory, refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.243).

016-761 O [Cause] An error occurred during image processing.[Remedy] Set the [Print Mode] to [Normal] and instruct printing

again. If this does not remedy printing, print in the Ensure Print mode.

016-762 O [Cause] A print language not installed on the machine was specified.

[Remedy] In [Specify Print Mode] under [Port Settings], specify a print language.

016-764 O [Cause] Can not connect to the SMTP server.[Remedy] Contact the SMTP server administrator.

Error CodeCategory


15 Problem Solving

396

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

016-765 O [Cause] Could not send mail because the hard disk on the SMTP server was full.

[Remedy] Contact the SMTP server administrator.

016-766 O [Cause] An error occurred on the SMTP server.[Remedy] Contact the SMTP server administrator.

016-767 O [Cause] Could not send mail because the mail address was wrong.

[Remedy] Check the mail address and transmit again.

016-768 O [Cause] Could not connect to the SMTP server as the mail address of the machine was incorrect.

[Remedy] Check the mail address of the machine.

016-769 O [Cause] The SMTP server does not support confirmation of mail distribution (DSN).

[Remedy] Send mail without setting confirmation of mail distribution (DSN).

016-771016-772

O [Cause] Unable to retrieve scan data repository address for the CentreWare Scan Service.

[Remedy] Check the DNS address. Or, define the scan data repository address by its IP address.

016-773 O [Cause] The IP address for the machine is not set properly.[Remedy] Check the DHCP environment. Or, specify a fixed IP

address for the machine.


016-774 O O [Cause] Compression conversion is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.


016-775 O O [Cause] Image conversion is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.


016-776 O O [Cause] An error occurred during image conversion processing.[Remedy] A portion of the data might have finished image

conversion processing. Check the data via CentreWare Internet Services.

Refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.158).

016-777 O [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during image processing.[Remedy] The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard

disk, contact our Customer Support Center.

016-778 O [Cause] Conversion processing of scanned image was interrupted, because of insufficient disk space.


016-779 O [Cause] An error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.

[Remedy] Retry scanning.

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

397

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

016-780 O [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.

[Remedy] The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard disk, contact our Customer Support Center.

016-781 O [Cause] Unable to connect to a server when forwarding a file using the CentreWare Scan Service.

[Remedy] Have the network administrator check the network and server environments.

016-782 O [Cause] Unable to login to a server when forwarding a file using the CentreWare Scan Service.

[Remedy] Check the login user name and password.

016-783 O [Cause] Unable to find the specified server path when forwarding a file using the CentreWare Scan Service.

[Remedy] Check the server path name specified by the job template.

For information about the CentreWare scan service, refer to the “CentreWare Scan Service Installation Guide”.

016-784 O [Cause] A write error on the server occurred while forwarding a file using the CentreWare Scan Service.

[Remedy] Check whether space is available on the server directory, and that you have privileges. Also check the file name of the scanned document with no character such as ":", "/", "¥", "*", "?", " "(space), "<", ">", "|", or "^" that cannot be used.

016-785 O [Cause] Unable to forward a file using the CentreWare Scan Service due to insufficient hard disk on the server.

[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the server hard disk to increase free disk space.

016-786 O O [Cause] When using the scan feature, hard disk capacity is insufficient for writing to a file.

[Remedy] Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space, or initialize the hard disk.

016-787 O [Cause] Invalid server IP address specified in a job template.[Remedy] Specify the correct job template.

016-788 O [Cause] Failed to load a file from the Web browser.[Remedy] Take out of the following actions, and try again.

Reload the browser pageRestart the browserPower-cycle the machine.

016-789 O O [Cause] Insufficient space available for mail processing. Processing was interrupted.

[Remedy] Reduce resolution or reduce/enlarge ratio to decrease the data size, or send in several pieces.

016-791 O O [Cause] In [Scan to FTP/SMB], or [Job Template], the forwarding destination or job template save location could not be accessed.

[Remedy] Check whether you can access the specified forwarding destination.

016-792 O [Cause Specified job history could not be acquired, when printing [Job Counter Report]

[Remedy] Specified job history does not exist.

Error CodeCategory


15 Problem Solving

398

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

016-793 O [Cause] The hard disk has run out free space.[Remedy] Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to

increase free disk space, or initialize the hard disk.

016-794 O [Cause] A medium is not inserted correctly.[Remedy] Insert the medium correctly.

016-795016-796016-797

O [Cause] An error occurred when reading data stored in a media.[Remedy] Check the data stored in the media with a computer.

016-799 O [Cause] An illegal print parameter is included.[Remedy] Confirm the print data and options, and specify the print

data again.

021-750021-751021-770021-771021-772

O [Cause] During an inspection or maintenance request, a transmission error occurred, and our Customer Support Center could not be contacted.

[Remedy] Check that the phone lines are connected, and try sending an inspection or maintenance request again after a short time.If the error persists, contact our Customer Support Center.

024-746 O [Cause] A feature (one of paper size, tray, output tray, or 2 sided printing) that is incompatible with the specified paper quality has been specified.

[Remedy] Check the print data.

024-747 O [Cause] An illegal print parameter combination was set. For example a non-standard size was specified, and [Tray Selection] was set to [Auto].

[Remedy] Check the print data. In the above case, select the Tray 5 (bypass).

027-452 O [Cause] IP address already exists.[Remedy] Change the IP address.


027-453 O [Cause] Failed to obtain IP address from DHCP server.[Remedy] Change the IP address manually.


027-500 O O [Cause] Unable to resolve SMTP server name during answer E-mail send.

[Remedy] Check that the SMTP server settings from CentreWare Internet Services are correct.

027-501 O O [Cause] Unable to resolve POP3 server name when using POP3 protocol.

[Remedy] Check that the SMTP server settings from CentreWare Internet Services are correct.

027-502 O O [Cause] Unable to login to POP3 server when using POP3 protocol.

[Remedy] Check that the user name and password used in the POP3 server from CentreWare Internet Services are correct.

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

399

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

027-700 O [Cause] The medium is damaged.[Remedy] Check the media with a computer.


027-702 O [Cause] No data is stored in the medium, or the data stored in the medium is damaged.

[Remedy] Check the data stored in the media with a computer.

027-703 O [Cause] A media reader is not connected with the machine correctly.

[Remedy] Check the connection between the media reader and the machine.

027-706 O [Cause] The S/MIME certificate linked with the mail address cannot be found when sending E-mail.

[Remedy] Import the S/MIME certificate corresponding to the mail address to the machine.

027-707 O [Cause] The S/MIME certificate linked with the mail address has expired when sending E-mail.

[Remedy] Import a new S/MIME certificate to the machine.

027-708 O [Cause] The S/MIME certificate linked with the mail address is not reliable when sending E-mail.

[Remedy] Import a reliable S/MIME certificate to the machine.

027-709 O [Cause] The S/MIME certificate linked with the mail address was discarded when sending E-mail.

[Remedy] Import a new S/MIME certificate to the machine.

027-710 O [Cause] No S/MIME certificate is attached to received E-mail.[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the E-mail with a S/MIME

certificate again.

027-711 O [Cause] No S/MIME certificate is obtained from a received E-mail.

[Remedy] Import the sender's S/MIME certificate to the machine, or attach a S/MIME certificate to S/MIME signature mail sent from the sender.

027-712 O [Cause] A received S/MIME certificate has expired, or is an unreliable certificate.

[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the E-mail with a valid S/MIME certificate.

027-713 O [Cause] A received E-mail is discarded because the E-mail might be altered on its transmission route.

[Remedy] Tell the sender that the E-mail might be altered and ask to send the E-mail again.

027-714 O [Cause] A received E-mail is discarded because a mail address in the From field is not the same as the mail address in the S/MIME signature mail.

[Remedy] Tell the sender that a mail address in the From field is not the same as the mail address in the S/MIME signature mail, and ask to send the E-mail again.

Error CodeCategory


15 Problem Solving

400

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

027-715 O [Cause] A received S/MIME certificate is not registered in the machine, or is not set to use in the machine.

[Remedy] Import the sender's S/MIME certificate to the machine, or change settings to use the S/MIME certificate in the machine when the S/MIME certificate has already been registered.

027-716 O [Cause] A received S/MIME certificate is discarded because the certificate is unreliable.

[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the E-mail with a reliable S/MIME certificate again.

027-720 O [Cause] Unable to find the server of an application interface destination.

[Remedy] Check DNS server address. Or check whether an application interface (CentreWare Flow Service) in installed on the computer is registered by DNS server or not.

027-721 O [Cause] An application interface destination does not exist.[Remedy] Check whether an application linked (CentreWare Flow

Service) operates correctly.

027-722 O [Cause] The jobs was timed out during connection with an application interface destination.

[Remedy] Try to process the job flow again.

027-723 O [Cause] Authentication at the application interface destination (CentreWare Flow Service) fails.

[Remedy] Check a user name and password that is used when creating a job flow.

027-724 O [Cause] An application interface destination could not be accessed.

[Remedy] Check whether CentreWare Flow Service operates correctly. When it is operating, check the log.

027-725 O [Cause] A job operation failed using an application interface.[Remedy] Check whether an application linked (CentreWare Flow

Service) operates correctly. When it is operating, check the log. When it is not operating, check the network environments.

027-726 O [Cause] The job status is unclear during an application interface.[Remedy] Check whether CentreWare Flow Service operates

correctly. When it is operating, check the log.

027-727 O [Cause] A parameter is illegal during an application interface.[Remedy] Try to process the job flow again.

027-728 O [Cause] The number of files that is required to send to external services exceeds the maximum number of files that can be sent.

[Remedy] Try to send again after decreasing the number of pages that is lower than the maximum number.

027-737 O O [Cause] An error occurred while reading data from the job template pool server.

[Remedy] Check to see whether you have privileges for the directory storing the job template.

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

401

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

027-739 O O [Cause] Unable to find the specified job template server.[Remedy] Check the path name for the job template server.

027-740 O O [Cause] Unable to login to job template server.[Remedy] Check the login user name and password.

027-741 O O [Cause] Unable to connect to job template server.[Remedy] Have the network administrator check the network and

server environments.

027-742 O O [Cause] Unable to store job template due to insufficient hard disk space.


027-743 O O [Cause] The specified job template server is incorrect.[Remedy] Check the settings for the job template server.

027-744 O O [Cause] There is a problem in the domain name of the job template server.

[Remedy] Make sure that the DNS server connection and the domain name are registered to the DNS server.

027-745 O O [Cause] The address of the DNS server is not registered on the machine.

[Remedy] Either register the address of the DNS server on the machine, or set the address of the job template server by an IP address.

027-746 O O [Cause] The specified job template pool server protocol settings are incorrect.

[Remedy] Set up the correct port.

027-750 O [Cause] Attempted to command a job flow to a print document. Print documents are not supported by job flows.

[Remedy] Check the document before starting the job flow.

027-751 O [Cause] When following the job flow, an error occurred.[Remedy] Check the settings for the job flow.

027-753 O [Cause] 1. The necessary port for the job flow is either not enabled or is unavailable.2. When the S/MIME communication is disable, a job flow sending e-mail with encryption or digital signature has been executed.

[Remedy] 1. Have your System Administrator check the port status.2. Enable the S/MIME communication or set the job flow sending e-mail without encryption and digital signature.

027-796 O O O [Cause] When the machine is configured to only print attached documents when received by mail, a message with no attachments is discarded upon receipt.

[Remedy] To print the mail body or header information as well, change settings in the Properties screen of CentreWare Internet Services.

Refer to "E-mail Printing" (P.162).

027-797 O O [Cause] Invalid received mail output destination.[Remedy] Specify a correct output destination, and send the mail

again.

Error CodeCategory


15 Problem Solving

402

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

047-210 O O [Cause] An error occurred with the offset stacking module.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved

by performing the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.

062-210 O [Cause] The document feeder malfunctioned.[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

062-211 O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

062-220 O Refer to 062-210.

062-277 O [Cause] A communications error occurred between the document scan unit and the document feeder.

[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

062-278 O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


062-790 O [Cause] The scanned document is copy-protected.[Remedy] Refer to "Illegal Copies and Printouts" (P.25), and check

to see if the document can be copied.

063-210 O Refer to 062-211.

063-220063-230063-240

O Refer to 062-210.

065-210065-211065-212065-213

O [Cause] An error occurred with the machine.[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

065-215065-216

O O O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


065-219065-220

O O O Refer to 062-210.

071-210 O [Cause] The Tray 1 malfunctioned.[Remedy] Check paper loaded in the Tray 1, and power-cycle the

machine. If the machine is not improved by performing the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than the Tray 1 can be used.





Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

403

Pro

blem

So

lving

15



075-210075-211

O [Cause] The Tray 5 (bypass) malfunctioned.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


078-250 O [Cause] The high capacity tray (the Tray 6) malfunctioned.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


116-210 O [Cause] An error occurred with the media reader.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


116-211116-212

O [Cause] A connecting cable is not connected with a media reader correctly.

[Remedy] Connect the connecting cable and power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved by performing the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.


116-705116-706116-707116-708116-709116-716116-717

O Refer to 016-795.

116-701 O O [Cause] 2 sided print could not be made due to insufficient memory.

[Remedy] Print each side.

116-702 O [Cause] Printing was performed using a substitute font.[Remedy] Check the print data.

116-703 O [Cause] An error occurred during PostScript processing.[Remedy] Either confirm the print data, or click [Spool Settings] on

the [Details] tab in the print driver to set bi-directional communications off.

116-710 O [Cause] A probable cause is that the correct document size could not be judged as the receive data exceeded the HP-GL/2 spool size.

[Remedy] Increase the size assigned to HP-GL/2 auto-layout memory.

116-711 O O [Cause] The size and orientation of a specified PCL form does not match with printing paper.

[Remedy] Set the size and orientation of the specified PCL form to match with printing paper, and print it again.

Error CodeCategory


15 Problem Solving

404

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

116-712 O O [Cause] The form cannot be registered due to insufficient PCL form memory.

[Remedy] Remove unnecessary forms or increase space for the PCL form memory.

116-713 O [Cause] Job was divided and printed due to insufficient disk space.


116-714 O [Cause] An HP-GL/2 command error occurred.[Remedy] Check the print data.

116-715 O O [Cause] The form cannot be registered because the number of registered PCL forms reaches the maximum limit.

[Remedy] Remove unnecessary form. The maximum number is 2,048.

116-718 O O [Cause] The specified PCL form is not registered.[Remedy] Use registered forms, or register the form you want to

use. You can confirm the form registration status in the [PCLForm List].

Refer to "PCL Form Registration List" (P.312).

116-720 O [Cause] An error occurred during printing as there was insufficient memory.

[Remedy] Stop unnecessary ports, remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.

116-740 O [Cause] Numerical value operation error occurred as a value exceeding the value limit of the printer was used in the print data.

[Remedy] Check the print data.

116-747 O [Cause] There are too many paper margin values for the HP-GL/2 effective coordinate area.

[Remedy] Reduce the paper margin values, and instruct it to print again.

116-748 O [Cause] There is no plot data in the HP-GL/2 print data.[Remedy] Check the print data.

116-749 O [Cause] Job cancelled because the specified font was unavailable.

[Remedy] Install the font, or setup font replacement on the print driver side.

116-771116-772116-773116-774116-775116-776116-777116-778

O [Cause] There was a problem with parameters in the JBIG data. They were automatically edited.

[Remedy] If any problem occurs in job result, try to process the job again.

116-780 O O [Cause] There is a problem with the document attached to the received mail.

[Remedy] Check the attached document.

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

405

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Other Errors

Remedies are described for situations in which the following messages are displayed.

116-790 O [Cause] The settings for stapling are canceled and prints the data.

[Remedy] Confirm the staple position and try to print again.

123-400 O [Cause] A malfunction occurred in the machine.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


124-705 O [Cause] The settings for punching are canceled.[Remedy] Confirm the punching position and try to print again.

124-706 O [Cause] The settings for folding are canceled.[Remedy] Confirm the folding settings and try to print again.

124-709 O [Cause] The number of pages exceeds the number of pages that can be stapled.

[Remedy] Decrease the number of pages, or cancel the stapling settings, then try to print again.

Error Codemessages

CategoryCause and Remedy

C P S M O

A fault has occurred. Switch off the machine. (xxx-yyy)

O O O O O [Cause] An error occurred.[Remedy] Turn off the power, wait until the touch screen goes dark,

and then turn on power again.If the message persists, record the displayed contents for [(xxx-yyy)]. Switch off the machine immediately, wait for the touch screen to go dark, and contact our Customer Support Center.

Completed with an error.(xxx-yyy)

O O O O O [Cause] An error occurred.[Remedy] Retry the same procedure after waiting for a period.

A fault has occurred. The machine has rebooted. Select [Close]. If the problem persists, call for service.(xxx-yyy)

O O O O O [Cause] An auto-recoverable internal error occurred, and the machine restarted automatically.

[Remedy] Select the [Close] button. The machine is operating normally now. If the error persists, call our Call Center.

Error CodeCategory


15 Problem Solving

406

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Paper Jams

When paper jams inside the machine, the machine stops and an alarm sounds. A message is also displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper.

Gently remove the paper taking care not to tear it. If paper is torn while it is being removed from the machine, remove all torn pieces making sure that none remain inside the machine.

If a paper jam message is displayed again after you have cleared the paper jam, paper is probably jammed at another location. Clear this by following the message.

When you have finished clearing a paper jam, printing is automatically resumed from the state before the paper jam occurred.If a paper jam occurred during copying, press the <Start> button. Copying is resumed from the state before the paper jam occurred.

This section describes how to clear paper jams at the following locations:The references are described below.

Paper Jams in the Trays 1 to 2 ..................................................................................................407

Paper Jams in the Tray 3 ...........................................................................................................407


Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)............................................................................................408


Paper Jams in the Transfer Module...........................................................................................411

Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover .......................................................................................412

Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover.....................................................................................413

Paper Jams in the Output Tray..................................................................................................414

Paper Jams in the Finisher C or the Booklet finisher C ............................................................415

Important • When a paper jam occurs, paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine if you pull out a paper tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine malfunctions. Check where the paper jam occurred first.

• If a piece of jammed paper remains inside the machine, the paper jam message will not disappear from the touch screen.

• Clear the paper jams while the machine is on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.

• Do not touch components inside the machine. This may cause print defects.

Warning

When removing jammed paper, make sure that no bits and pieces of jammed paper are left in the machine. A piece of paper remaining in the machine may cause fire. If a piece of paper is stuck in a hidden area or paper is wrapped around the fuser unit or rollers, do not remove it forcefully. You can get injured or burnt. Switch off the machine immediately, and contact our Customer Support Center.

Paper Jams

407

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Paper Jams in the Trays 1 to 2

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Trays 1 to 2.

1 Pull out the tray where the paper jam occurred.

Important • Paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine if you pull out a tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine malfunction. Check where the paper jam occurred first.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note • If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.


Paper Jams in the Tray 3

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 3.

1 Pull out the Tray 3.





15 Problem Solving

408

Pro

blem

So

lving

15







3 If paper is jammed in the paper feed section, open the inner cover and remove the paper.


Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 5 (bypass).

1 Open the Tray 5 (bypass) top cover to remove the jammed paper.


Paper Jams

409

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

2 Remove all paper loaded in the Tray 5 (bypass).

Important • When two or more sheets of paper are loaded, remove all of the sheets from the tray.


3 Close the top cover.

4 Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned.

5 Insert the paper into the tray with the printing side facing up until its leading edge lightly comes up against the paper feed entrance.




Paper Jams in the Tray 6 Exit................................................................................................... 409

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 Top Cover ........................................................................................ 410

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 .......................................................................................................... 410

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 Exit

1 Gently move the Tray 6 to the left until it stops by gripping the handle on the top left side of the Tray 6.



15 Problem Solving

410

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

3 Gently put the Tray 6 back into position.

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 Top Cover

1 Gently move the Tray 6 to the left until it stops by gripping the handle on the top left side of the Tray 6.

2 Open the Tray 6 top cover.



4 Close the top cover and gently put the Tray 6 back into position.

5 Gently put the Tray 6 back into position.



1

2

Paper Jams

411

Pro

blem

So

lving

15




Paper Jams in the Transfer Module

Following describes how to clear paper jams in the transfer module.


2 Turn the green lever 2 at the center of the transfer module to the right until it is in the horizontal position and then pull the transfer module out to the end.

3 Remove the visible jammed paper.

Warning

Never touch a labeled area (found on the fuser unit or nearby) indicating “High Temperature” and “Caution”. You may get burned.

15 Problem Solving

412

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

4 Remove the jammed paper while opening the lever 2a to the rightward.

5 Pull down the lever 2b and remove the jammed paper.

6 Return the levers 2a and 2b to the original position.

7 Insert the transfer module completely and turn the green lever 2 to the left.

Note • If you cannot turn the lever, pull the transfer module to the middle and insert it again.



Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover

Following describes how to clear paper jams in the bottom left cover.

1 If the Tray 6 is installed, gently move the Tray 6 to the left until it stops by gripping the handle on the top left side of the Tray 6.

Paper Jams

413

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

2 Open the bottom left cover while gripping the release lever.

3 Remove the upper jammed paper.


4 Remove the lower jammed paper.


5 Close the bottom left cover.

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the bottom left cover is even slightly open.

6 If the Tray 6 is installed in the machine, gently put the Tray 6 back into position.

Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover

Following describes how to clear paper jams in the bottom right cover.

1 If the finisher is installed, open the front cover of the finisher and then pull the lever 1a rightward.

15 Problem Solving

414

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

2 Open the bottom right cover while pressing the downward arrow button.

3 Remove the upper jammed paper.


4 Remove the lower jammed paper.


5 Check whether paper is jammed at the lower part of the machine. If there is jammed paper, remove it.


6 Close the bottom right cover.

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the bottom right cover is even slightly open.

7 If the finisher is installed, return the lever 1a to the original position and then close the front cover of the finisher.


Paper Jams in the Output Tray

Following describes how to clear paper jams in the output tray.

1 Remove jammed paper from the output tray.


Paper Jams

415

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Paper Jams in the Finisher C or the Booklet finisher C

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the finisher when the finisher C or the booklet finisher C (optional) is installed.


Paper Jams at the Lever 1a....................................................................................................... 415

Paper Jams at the Lever 1d and the Wheel 1c.......................................................................... 416

Paper Jams at the Levers 1a and 1b.......................................................................................... 416

Paper Jams at the Lever 2a....................................................................................................... 418

Paper Jams at the Lever 2a (Using the Wheel 2c).................................................................... 419

Paper Jams at the Lever 2b....................................................................................................... 420

Paper Jams at the Lever 2b (Using the Wheel 2c) ................................................................... 420

Paper Jams at the Lever 3......................................................................................................... 421

Paper Jams at the Lever 5......................................................................................................... 422

Paper Jams at the 4a (for the Booklet finisher C) .................................................................... 422

Paper Jams at the Lever 4b (for the Booklet finisher C).......................................................... 423

Paper Jams at the Booklet Tray (for the Booklet finisher C) ................................................... 424


Paper Jams at the Lever 1a

1 Open the front cover of the finisher.

2 Move the lever 1a to the right.


4 Return the lever 1a to the original position.

15 Problem Solving

416

Pro

blem

So

lving

15



Paper Jams at the Lever 1d and the Wheel 1c


2 Move the lever 1d to the left and then move the lever 6 upward.

3 Turn the wheel 1c to the direction indicated by the arrow, and then remove the jammed paper.

4 Return the levers 1d and 6 to the original position.



Paper Jams at the Levers 1a and 1b


Paper Jams

417

Pro

blem

So

lving

15



4 If the paper cannot be removed, return the lever 1a and then move the lever 1b to the right.

5 Gently pull out the paper to remove.

6 Return the levers 1b and 1a to the original position.



15 Problem Solving

418

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Paper Jams at the Lever 2a

1 If the edge of the jammed paper comes out from the exit of the output tray, gently pull out the paper to remove.







Paper Jams

419

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Paper Jams at the Lever 2a (Using the Wheel 2c)

1 If the edge of the jammed paper comes out from the exit of the output tray, gently pull out the paper to remove.








15 Problem Solving

420

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Paper Jams at the Lever 2b


2 Move the lever 2b to the right and remove the jammed paper.

3 Return the lever 2b to the original position.



Paper Jams at the Lever 2b (Using the Wheel 2c)


2 Move the lever 2b to the right.

2b

2b

Paper Jams

421

Pro

blem

So

lving

15






Paper Jams at the Lever 3


2 Pull down the lever 3.


15 Problem Solving

422

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

4 Return the lever 3 to the original position.



Paper Jams at the Lever 5

1 Open the exit cover 5 of the finisher upward.


3 Return the exit cover 5 to the original position.

Paper Jams at the 4a (for the Booklet finisher C)


2 Pull out the unit 4.

Paper Jams

423

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

3 Turn the wheel 4a to the left and remove the jammed paper.

4 Return the unit 4 to the original position.



Paper Jams at the Lever 4b (for the Booklet finisher C)


2 Move the lever 4b to the left.

3 Remove the jammed paper if there is.

15 Problem Solving

424

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

4 Pull out the unit 4.

5 Remove all jammed paper that comes out from the left upper side and inside the unit.

6 Return the unit 4 to the original position.




Paper Jams at the Booklet Tray (for the Booklet finisher C)


2 Turn the wheel 4a to the right to eject the jammed paper onto the booklet tray.

Paper Jams

425

Pro

blem

So

lving

15




15 Problem Solving

426

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Document Jams

If a document jams in the document feeder, the machine stops, and an error message is displayed on the screen. Clear the document jam according to the instructions displayed, and then load the document again on the document feeder.

This section describes how to clear document jams at the following locations:Document Jams at the covers....................................................................................................426

Document Jams at the Document Cover...................................................................................428

Note • Remedy differs depending on where the document jam occurs. Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper.

Document Jams at the covers

1 Grip the handle of the top cover of the document feeder, and open the top cover until it comes to a stop.

Note • When you fully open the cover, it enters a fixed position. Open the cover gently.

2 Open the left cover until it comes to a stop.

3 If the document is not caught in the entry of the document feeder, pull out the document.

4 If there are instructions to open the inner cover, lift up the lever with the green arrow label on it, and open the inner cover (1). Remove the jammed document (2).

Important • If the document is stuck, do not pull on it directly. The document could be damaged.

Document Jams

427

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

5 When the inside of the left cover is indicated, remove the jammed document.

6 Close the top cover of the inner cover until you hear it click into place.

7 Close the left cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.

8 If the document cannot be found, pick up the document feeder slowly, and remove the document if it is there, then close the document feeder.

9 If the document is not found in step 8, then pick up the document feeder tray and remove the document.

10 Gently return the document feeder tray.

11 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and load the documentagain following the instructions displayed on the screen.

Note • After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again following the instructions displayed on the screen. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and scanning will resume from the unscanned document sheet.

• Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.

15 Problem Solving

428

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Document Jams at the Document Cover


2 Open the belt of the document cover while gripping the lever, and remove the jammed document.

3 Gently return the belt to the original position.

4 Return the document cover to the original position.

5 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and load the document again following the instructions displayed on the screen.

Note • After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again following the instructions displayed on the screen. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and scanning will resume from the unscanned document sheet.

• Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.

Stapler Faults

429

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Stapler Faults

The following describes stapler troubles when the finisher (optional) is installed.

Follow the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or staples are bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have tried the following solutions.

If staples are stapled on the copies in the manner shown in the figures below, contact our Customer Support Center.

Unstapled Bent staple

One side of staple rising up Staple bent in reverse direction

Flattened staple Entire staple rising up

Staple rising up withcenter pressed in

15 Problem Solving

430

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge (Finisher C or Booklet finisher C)

The following describes how to clear staple jams in the staple cartridge when the finisher C or the booklet finisher C (optional) is installed.



2 Grip the lever R1 of the staple cartridge holder, and pull out the holder to the right towards you.

3 Remove the staple cartridge holder by gripping the orange lever.

Note • The staple cartridge is firmly held. When remove the staple cartridge, strongly pull the cartridge.

4 After removing the staple cartridge, check the inside of the finisher for any remaining staples.

5 Pull up the metal part of the staple cartridge shown in the figure.

Stapler Faults

431

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

6 Remove the jammed staples (1), and return the metal part pulled up in step 5 to the original position (2).

7 Insert the staple cartridge while gripping the orange lever until you hear it click into place.



If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures, contact our Customer Support Center.

Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge (Booklet finisher C)

The following describes how to clear staple jams in the booklet staple cartridge when the booklet finisher C (optional) is installed.


2 Press the levers R2 and R3 to the right (1), and pull out the unit (2).

Warning

Be careful when removing jammed staples to avoid hurting your fingers.

R2

R3

15 Problem Solving

432

Pro

blem

So

lving

15

3 Hold the tabs of the booklet staple cartridge, and then lift to remove it.

4 Remove the jammed staples as shown in the figure.

5 Holding the tabs of the removed booklet staple cartridge, return the cartridge to the original position and gently push it until you hear it click into place.

6 Return the unit to its original position.



If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures, contact our Customer Support Center.

Warning

Be careful when removing jammed staples to avoid hurting your fingers.


This chapter describes differences in features of a standard control panel and an optional large color control panel.

Control Panel ............................................................................................434

Differences between Standard Control Panel and Large Color Control Panel.......437


434

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Control Panel

The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.


1 Touch screen This touch screen displays messages required for operation and buttons for various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations in screens and set features.

2 <Copy>, <Custom 2>, <Custom 3> buttons

Used to call a custom feature.You can assign a feature to the buttons selected from the features displayed on the [All Services] screen and [Language].

For information about registering a feature with a button, refer to "ScreenDefaults" (P.209).

3 <All Services> button Used to display the [All Services] screen.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <All Services> button.

You can change the features that appear in the menu. For more information, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.209). When a large color control panel is installed, the item name displayed is [Screen Defaults].

　　�　　�

Control Panel

435

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

4 <Power Saver> button If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power consumption is lowered to enter the Power Saver mode. In the Power Saver mode, this button is lit. To cancel the Power Saver mode, press this button again.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Power Saver> button.

5 <Clear All> button Returns the statuses of all displayed services to their default values. The machine will be reset to this state after it is turned on.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Clear All> button.

6 <Interrupt> button/indicator Select this button to temporarily stop a continuous copy job or printing to give another job higher priority. During an interrupt, the interrupt indicator lights up. Pressing the Interrupt button again cancels the interrupt and the previous operation is resumed.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Interrupt> button.

7 <Stop> button Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Stop> button.

8 <Start> button Press this button to start copying or scanning.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Start> button.

9 Numeric keypad Press these buttons to enter the number of copies, passwords and other numerical values.In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the "numeric keypad".

10 <C> (Clear) button Press this button if you have entered the wrong numerical value with the numeric keypad.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <C> button.

11 <Log In/Out> button When this button is pressed, if in System Administration mode, or Login Setup/Auditron Administration is in effect, the UserID input screen is displayed.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Log In/Out> button.

12 <Machine Status> button Pressing this button allows you to confirm the machine status and meters, check the state of consumables, and print reports.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Machine Status> button.

13 <Review> button Press this button to open the [Review] screen. In this screen, you can check a list of the status of copy and scan features whose settings have changed from the defaults. You can also check the destination information for sending E-mail. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Review> button.

14 <Job Status> button Pressing this button allows you to confirm or cancel currently executing or completed jobs, or to confirm or print saved documents.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Job Status> button.

15 Brightness dial Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. Use this dial to adjust the brightness of touch screen when it is too dark to read.

16 <Job in Memory> indicator This indicator lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.

17 <Online> indicator This indicator lights when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a client.



436

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Customizing of the Control Panel

You can customize the <Custom> buttons and items on the [All Services] screen.

Assigning a feature to Custom buttons

By assigning a feature to Custom buttons (<Copy>, <Custom 2>, and <Custom 3>), you can switch to that feature without returning to the [All Services] screen.

The factory default settings for these buttons are, “Copy” for the 1st button, and none for the 2nd and 3rd buttons. You can assign a feature to the buttons selected from the features displayed on the [All Services] screen and [Language].For information about assigning features, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.209).

Attach the labels included in this product when you have changed the assignment. If you have used a feature for which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down the feature using a permanent marker and attach it to the appropriate Custom button.

Customizing the [All Services] Screen

You can customize the types of features and the location of buttons on the [All Services] screen. The following shows the factory default settings.For information about assigning features, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.209).

Note • When the feature is not available the button will not be displayed. Also, if the feature is unavailable due to hardware problems, the button will be grayed out.

Copy

E-mail

Scan to Mailbox

Network Scanning

Scan to FTP/SMB

Print Documents

Print Digital Picture

Check Mailbox

Stored Programming

Job Flow Settings

Language

Setup Menu

Auto gradation adjustment

Print Mode

Changing feature screen

You can customize the setting screen for the following features on the [All Services] screen.

Copy

E-mail

Scan to Mailbox

job template

Scan to FTP/SMBFor information about change settings, refer to "Basic Copying Tab" (P.227) and "Basic Scanning Tab" (P.249).

Differences between Standard Control Panel and Large Color Control Panel

437

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16


General Differences

Differences in Copying

Screen Large color control panel Standard control panel

List screen Buttons for jumping to the top page [ ] and to the last page [ ] are displayed.

-

Keyboard screen A [Clear All] button is displayed. The button allows you to delete all characters entered.

-

Tab Item Feature/Location

Large color control panel

Standard control panel

Basic copying

Reduce/Enlarge

Number of choices for [Preset %]

12 types 7 types

Independent X-Y%

Set a ratio directly with the numeric keypad.

-

Paper Supply Number of choices for [Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults]

20 types 11 types

Scan Options

Original Size Number of choices for [Original Size]

17 types 11 types


-[Original Orientation] is added in the setting screen.

-

Edge Erase-

[Original Orientation] is added in the setting screen.

-

-

[Independent Edge Erase] and [Border Erase] are added. (Top Edge/Bottom Edge/ Right Edge/Left Edge)When specifying [Independent Edge Erase], you can select [Same as Side 1] or [Opposite to Side 1] for the side 2 settings.

[Normal], and [Edge Erase] are available.

Image Shift-


-


438

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Output Format

2 Sided Copying


-

Booklet Creation

Covers [Printed covers - 2 sided] is added.

[No Covers], [Blank Covers], [Printed Covers - Print Outside] are available.

Covers

-

You can specify for a front cover and a back cover, individually.

Front Cover[No Covers], [Printed Front Cover - Side 1], [Printed Front Cover - Side 2], and [Printed Front Cover - 2 Sided] are available.Back Cover[No Covers], [Printed Back Cover - Side 1], [Printed Front Back - Side 2], and [Printed Back Cover - 2 Sided] are available.

[Front Cover], [Front + Back Covers], and [No Covers] are available.

Multiple Up-


-

Poster Specifying Ratio Set a ratio directly with the numeric keypad.

-

Annotation-


-

[Stamp - Position] screen

You can specify for [Side 2].[Same as Side 1] and [Opposite to Side 1] are available.

Specifying in the system administrator mode.

[Date - Position] screen



[Annotation - Date] Screen

You can specify [Size].[6 Points], [10 Points], and [24 Points] are available.

10 Points

[Annotation - Page Number] Screen

[-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-] and [Page1/N, Page2/N, Page3/N] are added in [Style].

[-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-]Put total page number beside the right of page number and hyphen the right and left of the page and total page number. (Example: -1/50-, -2/50-)When selecting [-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-], the value specified in [Total Page(N)] screen is used.

[1, 2, 3], [-1-, -2-, -3-], [1/N, 2/N, 3/N], and [Page1, Page2, Page3] are available.


Large color control panel Standard control panel


439

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Output Format

Annotation [Page1/N, Page2/N, Page3/N]“Page” is added in front of the page number and the total number of pages is added to the right side of the page number. (Example: Page1/50, Page2/50)When selecting [Page1/N, Page2/N, Page3/N], the value specified in [Total Page(N)] screen is used.

[Page Number - Position] screen



[Annotation - Page Number] screen

You can specify [Size].[6 Points], [10 Points], and [24 Points] are available.

10 Points

[Page Number - Print On] screen

When specifying [All Pages], you can select [Include Covers/Separators].Add a check to include a cover or separators.

Only [Include Covers] is available.

Set Numbering


-

Job Assembly

Build Job Separators [Printed Separators - Side 1], [[Printed Separators - Side 2], and [Printed Separators - 2 Sided] are added.

Printed Separators - Side 1Copies on the side 1 when inserting separators.Printed Separators - Side 2Copies on the side 2 when inserting separators.Printed Separators - 2-SidedCopy on the both sides when inserting separators.

The number of separators can be set from 1 to 99.You can insert separators for the first document set.

Blank sheets can be inserted.The number of the separator is fixed to one.Separators can be inserted for additional documents.

Covers Cannot be copied on covers. Only a blank paper can be inserted.

Can be copied on covers.

Screen during Copying

A [Sample Set] button is displayed.The sample set feature on the [Job Assembly] tab is displayed.

-




440

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Differences in Scanning

Differences in E-mail

Differences in Scan to Mailbox

Job Assembly

Delete Outside/Delete Inside

-[Original Orientation] is added in the setting screen. -



Scan Options

Scan Size Number of choices for [Scan Size].

17 types 11 types



-

Reduce/Enlarge

Number of choices for [Preset %]

12 types 8 types

Number of choices for [Output Size] of [Auto %]

17 types 8 types

Tab ItemFeature/Location


Basic Scanning

- -

The tab configuration is different.Features in the [E-Mail] tab is included in the [Basic Scanning] tab.

-

Mail Contents-

Up to 512 characters are allowed.




Basic Scanning

- -

The tab configuration is different.Features in the [Save in:] tab is included in the [Basic Scanning] tab.

-




441

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Differences in Network Scanning

Differences in Scan to FTP/SMB

Differences in Check Mailbox



Basic Scanning

- -

The tab configuration is different.Features in the [Job Template] tab is included in the [Basic Scanning] tab.

-




Basic Scanning

- -

The tab configuration is different.Features in the [Save in:] tab is included in the [Basic Scanning] tab.

-



Document list screen

-

[Document Details], [Print], and [Batch Print] buttons are added.

[Document Details] buttonUsed to confirm the selected documents.[Print] buttonUsed to print a selected document.[Batch Print] buttonUsed to print multiple documents as one document.

-

-Up to 100 documents can be selected.

Up to 9 documents can be selected.


442

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Differences in Stored Programming

Differences in Job Flow Sheet

Differences in Job Status Screen



-

Stored Programming

-Up to 100 steps can be registered.

Up to 58 steps can be registered.

-

A stored program for a build job can be registered.Up to 40 stored programs are allowed.Only features that can be used for build jobs are allowed to register in the stored program.

-




-Comments

-Up to 512 characters are allowed.




Completed Jobs

- -

The [Print the Job Report] button is displayed on the screen that appears when selecting a job.Used to print a report about job status information.The name of the report is [Job Report].

-

Current Nd Pending Jobs

- -

The [Display] button is added.The estimated job completion time is displayed. The time is displayed either in the form of cumulative time for all jobs or time required for single job.

Note • The estimated job completion time is not displayed during date processing.

-


443

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Differences in System Settings

Feature Item Details Large color control panel Standard control panel

Common Settings

Machine Clock/Timers -

[Connection Interval] is displayed in the [Machine Clock/Timers] screen.

-

Screen Defaults

-

[All Services] and [All Services - Supplementary Features] are displayed in the [Screen Defaults] screen.The number of buttons displayed is up to 12 for feature buttons and up to 7 for auxiliary feature buttons.

The total number of buttons displayed is 18.

Paper Tray Attributes

-

[Copy Paper Attributes] is added.

Paper Color[Disabled] or [Enabled]Other Attributes[Disabled], [Size Detection], or [Auto Paper by Output Color]

-

-

Corresponding to the above changing, the button name displayed in the [Setup Menu] is changed to [Paper Tray Attributes].

[Paper Size/Type]

Paper Size/Type The name is changed to [Paper Tray Attributes].

-

Number of choices for [Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults]

20 types 11 types

Set Numbering

-[Force Set Numbering - Media Print] is added.

-

Maintenance-

The name is changed to [Maintenance/Diagnostics].

-


444

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Common Settings

Other Settings

-

[Estimated Job Time] is added.Select the types of estimated job completion time for waiting print jobs when the [Display] button on the [Current and Pending Jobs] tab in the [Job Status] screen is pressed.

Cumulative Time for All JobsDisplays the remaining time.Time Required for Single JobDisplays the time required.

-

-[Display Consumables Screen] cannot be specified.

-

Copy Mode Settings

Basic Copying Tab

Features Allocation

The name is changed to [Basic Copying Tab - Features Allocation] and displayed in the [Copy Mode Settings] screen.

7 features (up to 3 frequently used features can be allocated.)10 features (up to 7 frequently used features can be allocated.)

[Frequently Used Features] is added.

FeaturesThe feature buttons in tabs other than a [Basic Copy] screen can be displayed on a [Basic Copy] screen.SettingsThe setting value of the feature buttons in tabs other than a [Basic Copy] screen can be displayed on a [Basic Copy] screen, and it comes to be able to carry out the direct selection of the buttons.

5 features, 6 features, 7 featuresNo [Frequently Used Features] settings



445

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Copy Mode Settings

- -

[Preset Buttons] is added.Frequently used options can be allocated.

Paper Supply - Button 5Reduce/Enlarge - Button 5Stapling - Button 4Stapling - Button 5Punching - Button 4Punching - Button 5

The following buttons are used for [Covers] and [Booklet Creation].

Front Cover Tray - Button 3Front Cover Tray - Button 4Back Cover Tray - Button 3Back Cover Tray - Button 4

-

Copy Defaults The number of Reduce/Enlarge buttons

12 buttons 7 buttons

Edge Erase The amount of edge erase can be set for each edge individually.

Edge Erase - Top EdgeEdge Erase - Bottom EdgeEdge Erase - Left EdgeEdge Erase- Right Edge

A pair of opposed edges has the same settings.

Edge Erase - Top & Bottom EdgesEdge Erase - Left & Right Edges

Stamp - Position You can specify for [Side 2].Same as Side 1Opposite to Side 1

-

Date - Position You can specify for [Side 2].Same as Side 1Opposite to Side 1

-

-

[Stamp - Size] is added.6 points10 points24 points

-

Page Number - Position

You can specify for [Side 2].Same as Side 1Opposite to Side 1

-

-

[Page Number - Size] is added.

6 points10 points24 points

-



446

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Copy Mode Settings

Copy Control Stamp Position on Side 2Date Position on Side 2Page Number Position on Side 2

You can make advanced settings.

Stamp Position - Top LeftStamp Position - Top CenterStamp Position - Top RightStamp Position - Left CenterStamp Position - CenterStamp Position - Right CenterStamp Position - Bottom LeftStamp Position - Bottom CenterStamp Position - Bottom RightDate Position - Top RightDate Position - Top CenterDate Position - Top RightDate Position - Bottom LeftDate Position - Bottom CenterDate Position - Bottom RightPage No. Position- Top LeftPage No. Position - Top CenterPage No. Position - Top RightPage No. Position - Bottom LeftPage No. Position - Bottom CenterPage No. Position - Bottom Right

-

-

[Quantity Display] is added.Quantity and MemoryQuantity and Original CountQuantity (Big Font)

-

Original Size Defaults

The number of buttons





Network Settings

PKI Settings (Public Key Infrastructure)

HTTP - SSL/TLS Settings

The setting method for [HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number] is changed.Use [the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen to specify.The default value is [443].

[Standard (433)] and [Enter Number] are available.



447

Larg

e Co

lor C

on

trol P

anel

16

Scan Mode Settings

Basic Scanning Tab


Positions for settings are two.

Reduce/Enlarge - Button 2Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3

Twelve types of ratios can be selected for Reduce/Enlarge.

Positions for settings are three.

Reduce/Enlarge - 2nd ButtonReduce/Enlarge - 3rd ButtonReduce/Enlarge - 4th Button

Seven types of ratios can be selected for Reduce/Enlarge.

Scan Mode Settings

Scan Size Defaults



Output Size Defaults




The numbers of buttons and ratios

12 buttons, 25 options of ratios allocated to the buttons

7 buttons, 20 options of ratios allocated to the buttons


- -

Divided into [Mailbox Settings] and [Stored Document Settings].[Document Retrieved By Client] is located in [Mailbox Settings].

-


17 Appendix

This chapter describes the specifications, printable area, ESC/P emulation, PDF direct print, optional accessories list, cautions/restrictions, and a list of simple procedures.

Specifications............................................................................................450

Printable Area ...........................................................................................458

Using ESC/P Emulation............................................................................459

Using PDF Direct Print..............................................................................475

PCL Emulation..........................................................................................477

HP-GL2 Emulation....................................................................................480

List of Options...........................................................................................495

Notes and Restrictions..............................................................................496

Simple Procedures ...................................................................................498

17 Appendix

450

Ap

pen

dix

17

Specifications

This section lists the specifications of the ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I, DocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I. In the interests of product development, product specifications and external appearance are subject to change without prior notice.

Main Unit and Copier Specifications

Type Console Type

Color support Full color

Scan resolution 600 x 600 dpi (23.6 x 23.6 dots/mm)

Output resolution 2,400 x 2,400 dpi (94.5 x 94.5 dots/mm)

Color graduation 256 color graduation for each color (16,700,000 colors).

Warm-up time 150 seconds or less (when the room temperature at 20 oC, input voltage 200 V)

Important • It may take longer due to the network condition, or the image quality adjustment according to the machine condition.

Copy document The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17”) for both sheets and books.

Copy (sheet) size Maximum: A3, 330 x 488 mm (13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”).Minimum: A5 (Postcards for the Tray 5 (bypass))Image loss width: First 4mm or less, last 4 mm or less, and top/

front 3mm or less.

[Tray 1 - 2]A5, A4, A4 , A3B5, B5 , B48.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11” , 8.5 x 13”, 8.5 x 14”, 11 x 17”, 16KNon-standard size: X (horizontal) 140 to 297mm Y (vertical) 182 to 432 mm

[[Tray 3 - 4]A4 , 8.5 x 11” , B5

[Tray 5 (Bypass)]A6, A5, A4, A4 , A3, SRA3B6, B5, B5 , B48.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" , 8.5 x 13”, 8.5 x 14”, 11 x 17”, 12 x 18”, 13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”Postcards, return postcards, No. 3 standard envelopes, tab paper (A4 ), tab paper (8.5 x 11” )non-standard size: X from 100 to 330 mm, Y from 148 to 488 mm

Note • When using the Tray 5 (bypass) to copy non-standard sizedocument on both sides, set X from 140 to 330 mm and Y from182 to 488 mm.

Copy paper Paper Tray 1 - 4: 64 - 176 g/m2

Paper Tray 5 (Bypass): 64 - 280 g/m2

Important • It is recommend using Xerox recommended papers. Copying may not be performed correctly depending on the deployment conditions.

Specifications

451

Ap

pen

dix

17

Fast copy time <Document glass>For A4 /monochrome priority mode(the default for the [Color Mode] is [Black] or [No Default])Monochrome: 4.1 secondsColor: 8.9 secondsFor A4 /color priority mode(the default for the [Output Color] is [Full Color], [Auto], [DualColors], or [Single Color])Monochrome: 6.9 secondsColor: 7.6 seconds

<Duplex automatic document feeder >For A4 /monochrome priority mode(the default for the [Color Mode] is [Black] or [No Default])Monochrome: 5.8 secondsColor: 11.2 secondsFor A4 /color priority mode(the default for the [Output Color] is [Full Color], [Auto], [DualColors], or [Single Color])Monochrome: 8.6 secondsColor: 9.9 seconds

Same magnification, from the Tray 1, single sided, and output to the output tray.

Copy reduction/enlargement ratio

Same magnification 1:1± 0.7%

Fixed reduction/enlargement ratios 1:0.500, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.866, 1:1.154, 1:1.225, and 1:1.414

Custom reduction/enlargement ratios 1:0.25 - 1:4.00 (1% increments)

17 Appendix

452

Ap

pen

dix

17

Continuous copy speed

ImportantThe speed may be reduced in order to adjust the image quality.The performance may be reduced depending on the paper type.After delivering the first page, the copy speed for remaining pages becomes the same speed as 1 sided copying.

<ApeosPort C6550 I, DocuCentre C6550 I>Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification

[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 65 pages/min. 50 pages/min.B5, A4 : 47 pages/min. 36 pages/min.B4 : 39 pages/min. 30 pages/min.A3 : 33 pages/min. 25 pages/min.Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification

[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 59 pages/min. 45 pages/min.B5, A4 : 47 pages/min. 36 pages/min.B4 : 39 pages/min. 30 pages/min.A3 : 33 pages/min. 25 pages/min.Paper Tray 5*: Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification


[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 44 pages/min. 40 pages/min.B5, A4 : 36 pages/min. 32 pages/min.B4 : 31 pages/min. 28 pages/min.A3 : 28 pages/min. 24 pages/min.

<ApeosPort C5540 I, DocuCentre C5540 I>Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification

[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 55 pages/min. 40 pages/min.B5, A4 : 40 pages/min. 29 pages/min.B4 : 33 pages/min. 24 pages/min.A3 : 28 pages/min. 20 pages/min.Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification



[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 37 pages/min. 32 pages/min.B5, A4 : 30 pages/min. 26 pages/min.B4 : 27 pages/min. 22 pages/min.A3 : 24 pages/min. 19 pages/min.

* When feeding from paper Tray 5 (bypass try) and the paper size isset to [Auto Size Detect], the printing speed for the first page will beslower.

Specifications

453

Ap

pen

dix

17Print Feature Specifications

Feeding method/Paper capacity

Standard : 560 sheets x 2 trays + 980 sheets + 1,280 sheets + 250 sheets (bypass tray)

Optional : 2,300 sheets (Tray 6 (high capacity))Maximum paper capacity: 5,930 sheets

(standard + Tray 6 (high capacity))

Important • When using Xerox P paper

Continuous copy pages 9999 sheets

Important • The machine may pause temporarily to perform an image stabilization process.

Output tray capacity Output tray: approximately 500 sheets (A4)Finisher tray (optional): approximately 500 sheets (A4)


Power source 200 - 240V, 10A

Maximum power consumption

maximum Power2.2 KW or less

Low Power modeApeosPort C6550 I, DocuCentre C6550 I : 142.7 WApeosPort C5540 I, DocuCentre C5540 I : 134.5 W

Sleep modeApeosPort C6550 I, DocuCentre C6550 I : 5.7 WApeosPort C5540 I, DocuCentre C5540 I : 3.8 W

Important • Consumption figures for low power mode and sleep mode are based on measurements by the International Energy Star Program

Dimensions Width 700.0 x depth 781.0 x height 1,154.0 mm

Weight(excluding papers and options)

ApeosPort C6550 I, DocuCentre C6550 I : 240 kgApeosPort C5540 I, DocuCentre C5540 I : 239 kg

Important • The weight is with a new toner cartridge without any papers.

Minimum Space Requirements

Width 1,574.0 x depth 781.0 mm (when the bypass tray is extended to the maximum).

Type Built-in type

Continuous printing speed

The same as the main body.

Important • The speed is reduced due to the image quality adjustment when [High Image Quality] is specified for the [Print Mode] in a PostScript driver or PCL driver.

• The performance may be reduced depending on the paper type.

Resolution Output resolution: 2,400 x 2,400 dpi (94.5 x 94.5 dots/mm)Data processing resolution:

1,200 x 1,200 dpi (47.2 x 47.2 dots/mm: monochrome)600 x 600 dpi (23.6 x 23.6 dots/mm)

Page description language

PCLPostScript3

Supported protocols Ethernet :TCP/IP (SMB, LPD, Port9100, IPP), NetBEUI (SMB), IPX/SPX (NetWare), Ether Talk*

Important • For Ether Talk, MacOS 7.5.3 - Mac OS 9.2.2, and Mac OS X 10.1.5/10.2.x/10.3.3 are supported.

17 Appendix

454

Ap

pen

dix

17

Scan Feature Specifications

Supported operating systems

PCL : Windows 95/98/Me English versionsWindows NT 4.0 English versionsWindows 2000/XP English versionsWindows Server 2003 English versions

PostScript : Windows 95/98/Me English versionsWindows NT 4.0 English versionsWindows 2000/XP English versionsWindows Server 2003 English versionsMac OS 7.5.3 - Mac OS 9.2.2 English versionMac OS X 10.1.5/10.2.x/10.3.3 English versions

Built-in fonts PCL : European 81 type faces, symbol 35 setsPostScript : European 136 type faces

Emulation ESC/P (VP-1000), HP-GL (HP7586B), HP-GL2/RTL (HP Design Jet 750C Plus), PCL5c/PCL6 (HP Color Laser Jet 5500)

Memory capacity 512 MB (maximum 1 GB)

Interface Standard : Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX)Optional : USB 2.0*

Important • USB 2.0 is supported by Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP English versions, Windows Server 2003 English versions, Mac OS 8.6 -Mac OS 9.2.2 English versions, and Mac OS X 10.1.5/10.2.x/10.3.3 English versions.

Type Color scanner

Scan Size The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17”) for both sheets and books.

Scan resolution 600 x 600dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 200 x 200dpi(23.6 x 23.6, 15.7 x 15.7, 11.8 x 11.8, 7.9 x 7.9 dots/mm)

Scan graduation 10 bits input for each RGB colors, 8 bits output

Document scanning speed

ApeosPort C6550 I, DocuCentre C6550 IMonochrome, 1 sided: 100 pages/min.Color, 1 sided : 50 pages/min.Monochrome, 2 sided: 200 pages/min.

ApeosPort C5540 I, DocuCentre C5540 IMonochrome, 1 sided: 100 pages/min.Color, 1 sided : 50 pages/min.Monochrome, 2 sided: 60 pages/min.

Note • The scanning speed varies by documents and resolutions. Scanto Mailbox for A4 (Xerox standard document) documents with200 dpi.

Interface Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX

Scan to Mailbox Supported protocols:TCP/IP (Salutation, HTTP)

Output format : Monochrome 2 colors: TIFFGray scale/full color: TIFF, JPEG

Driver : TWAIN (Salutation)Driver supported OS:

Windows 95/98/Me English versionsWindows NT 4.0 English versionsWindows 2000/XP English versionsWindows Server 2003 English versions

Important • For information about the latest supported OSs, refer to our web page.

Specifications

455

Ap

pen

dix

17

Document Feeder Specifications

High Capacity Paper Tray Specifications

Scan to FTP/SMB Supported protocols:TCP/IP (SMB, FTP)

Supported OS : Windows 95/98/Me English versions*1

Windows NT 4.0 English versionsWindows 2000/XP English versionsWindows Server 2003 English versionsMac OS X 10.1.5/10.2.x English versions*2

NetWare 5.11J/5.12J*2

*1 Only SMB protocol is supported.

*2 Only FTP protocol is supported.

Important • For information about the latest supported OSs, refer to our web page.

Output format : Monochrome 2 colors: TIFF (compression type: MH, MMR), DocuWorks documents, PDF

Gray scale/full color:TIFF (compression type: JPEG), JPEG, DocuWorks documents, PDF

Send as E-mail*

*This feature is only supported by ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I.

Supported protocols:TCP/IP (SMTP)

Output format : Monochrome 2 colors: TIFF (compression type: MH, MMR), DocuWorks documents, PDF

Gray scale/full color:TIFF (compression type: JPEG), JPEG, DocuWorks documents, PDF

Original size/type Maximum: A3, 11 x 17” (297 x 432 mm)Minimum: A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5”, 5.5 x 8.5” (139.7 x 210 mm)38 - 200 g/m2 (2-sided Simultaneous Scan: 50 - 128 g/m2)

Number of originals held 250


Original changing speed <ApeosPort C6550 I, DocuCentre C6550 I>Monochrome: 65 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)Color : 50 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)

<ApeosPort C5540 I, DocuCentre C5540 I>Monochrome: 55 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)Color : 40 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)

Copy (sheet) size/type A4 , 8.5 x 11” , B564 - 176 g/m2

Feeding stage number/paper capacity

2,300 sheets x 1 stage


Dimensions/weight Width 389.0 x depth 377.0 x height 610.0 mm, 29 kg

Important • The weight does not include any papers.

Floor space when connected to the main body

Width 1574.0 x depth 781.0 mm (for the main body with the high capacity paper tray, the output tray, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)

17 Appendix

456

Ap

pen

dix

17

Finisher C Specifications

Booklet Finisher C Specifications

Tray type Output tray x 1: Collated/Uncollated (offset available)Finisher tray x 1: Collated/Uncollated (offset available)

Paper size/supported papers

Output tray Max.: 13 x 19.2”, Min.: Postcards, 64 - 280 g/m2

Finisher tray Max.: 13 x 19.2”, Min.: B5 , 64 - 176 g/m2

Tray capacity Output tray : 500 sheetsFinisher tray : paper (width < 216 mm): 3,000 sheets

paper (width > 216 mm): 1,500 sheetsmixed size*: 300 sheets

* When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size papers.


Staple Maximum staple pages: 50 sheets (not over 90 g/m2, not over 5.7 mm in thickness)

Size suitable for stapling:Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5Staple position: 1 place (front, top, at an angle),

2 places (parallel)


Punching Size suitable for punching: Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5Number of punching holes:2/4


Dimensions/weight Width 772 x depth 650 x height 1,010 mm, 55 kg(863 mm width when the extension flap is extended)


Width 2,038 x depth 781 mm(for the main body with the finisher C, the extension flap extended, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)

Tray type Output tray x 1 : Collated/Uncollated (offset available)Finisher tray x 1: Collated/Uncollated (offset available)Booklet tray x 1

Paper size/supported papers

Output tray Max.: 13 x 19.2”, Min. : Postcards, 64 - 280 g/m2

Finisher tray Max.: 13 x 19.2”, Min. : B5 , 64 - 176 g/m2

Booklet tray Max.: 13 x 18”, Min. : 8.5 x 11”, 64 - 90 g/m2

Tray capacity Output tray : 500 pagesFinisher tray : 1,500 sheets, Mixed size*: 300 sheetsBooklet tray : 20 sets

* When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size papers.


Staple Maximum staple pages: 50 sheets (not over 90 g/m2, not over 5.7 mm in thickness)

Size suitable for stapling:Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5Staple position: 1 place (front, top, at an angle),

2 places (parallel)Staple for booklet : 15 sheets


Punching Size suitable for punching: Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5Number of punching holes:2/4


Specifications

457

Ap

pen

dix

17

Dimensions/weight Width 921 x depth 650 x height 1,010 mm, 86 kg(1,065 mm width when the extension flap is extended)


Width 2,096 x depth 781 mm(for the main body with the finisher C, the extension flap extended, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)

17 Appendix

458

Ap

pen

dix

17

Printable Area

The printable area is as follows.

Standard Printing Area

The standard area that can be printed leaves a margin of 4.0mm on all four edges of the paper (for 13 x 18”(330 mm width), a margin of 3.5mm left and right). Note that the actual printing area may vary depending on the printer (plotter) control language.

Extended Printing Area

The extended printing area setting allows printing over a maximum area of 323 x 480 mm (print assured area becomes 317 x 480 mm). For copying, the maximum printable are is 297 x 432 mm (print assured area: 297 x 432 mm).

Depending on the paper size, however, the unprintable area is different.Note • To extend the print area, change the PCL print driver or the [Print Area] setting on the touch

screen.

For information on how to make print driver settings, refer to the online help for the print driver. For more about the setting on the control panel, refer to "Print Area" (P.246).

When the paper width is 12.6 inches (320 mm width)

When the paper width is 330mm (320 mm width)

Prin

ting

4mm

3mm

4mm

3mm

Unprintable Area

Printable Area/�

Print Assured Area

Paper feed direction

4mm

4mm

3.5mm3.5mm

Printable Area

6.5mm6.5mm

Unprintable Area

Print Assured Area


Co

pyin

g

4mm

3mm

4mm

3mm

Unprintable Area

Printable Area/�

Print Assured Area


4mm

16.5mm

52mm

16.5mm

Unprintable Area


Printable Area/�

Print Assured Area

Using ESC/P Emulation

459

Ap

pen

dix

17


This section describes how to use ESC/P emulation.

About Emulation

This section describes the emulation of printer languages used on this machine.

Print data is data following certain formal rules (syntax). On this machine, such a set of formal rules (syntax) is referred to as a printer language.

The printer languages supported by this machine are divided into page description languages, that create an image of a page at a time, and emulations, that produce results close to the results of other printers. Note that “emulation” is used to refer to obtaining print results close to the print results from a different printer.

Emulation mode

To print data other than that of the page description language supported by this machine, this machine uses emulation mode.The correspondence between emulation modes and emulated printers is as follows.

Host interfaces and emulation

For each host interface, the supported printer languages are different. The host interfaces supporting each printer languages are as follows.

USB Port

NetWare port

lpd port

SMB port

IPP port

Port 9100 port

Switching printer languages

This machine supports multi-emulation. It is therefore possible to switch among the supported printer languages.

The method of switching among supported printer languages is as follows.

Command switching

Commands are provided for switching among supported printer languages. When this machine receives such a command, it switches the supported printer language.

Auto switching

Data arriving at the host interface is analyzed, and the printer language determined automatically. Then the machine switches to the supported printer language.

Emulation mode Emulated printer

ESC/P emulation mode (ESC/P mode) VP-1000

17 Appendix

460

Ap

pen

dix

17

Switching by interface

Using the control panel, you can set the printer language for each host interface. The supported printer language is selected according to the host interface on which the data is received.

Fonts

This section describes the fonts that can be used for emulation.

Available fonts

The following fonts are available for emulation.

ESC/P emulation

Available fonts are the followings:

Roman

Sans serif

User-defined characters

The machine supports user-defined characters. User-defined characters are only stored in memory. Therefore, they are lost when the machine is powered off. However, by installing an additional internal hard disk, the user-defined characters can be stored on the hard disk, and preserved when the power is switched off. The data volume of the user-defined characters that can be stored on the additional internal hard disk is the same as the amount when stored in memory.

The amount of memory for storing user-defined characters together with other user-defined data is determined by a setting on the control panel. This value is retained when the machine is powered off.

User-defined characters are saved as a bitmap font. User-defined characters cannot be shared among different printer languages.

Font cache

In order to provide high-speed printing, up to a certain size outline fonts are cached. When printing with an outline font, the glyphs are first rendered into bitmaps. To minimize this processing time, the resulting bitmap data is stored in memory. This is referred to as the font cache.

The stored bitmap data is lost when the power is switched off or the system is reset.

Output functions

This section describes the output of printed results.

Output of print waiting jobs

Jobs received by the printer are given priority for printing.For details about procedure which gives priority to print waiting jobs in a printer, refer to"Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs" (P.298).


461

Ap

pen

dix

17

Print Features in ESC/P Emulation Mode

Multiple-up

Multiple-up is the feature to reduce the printing size, and print two or more pages on a single sheet of paper.

You can use the multiple-up feature in ESC/P mode emulation mode. In ESC/P mode, you can print two pages per sheet (2-up).

Form overlays

In ESC/P mode, a form previously registered with the printer can be combined with the print data for printing.

From the touch screen, you can specify the form to be combined.For information about registration of forms, refer to “Reference Manual (ESC/P Support)”.

Barcodes

In ESC/P mode, you can use barcodes. The barcode standards that can be used are as follows.

JAN code

CODE39

CODABAR

Industrial 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5

Interleaved 2 of 5

Forms

You can register forms for use with ESC/P on the machine. Up to 64 forms can be registered.For information about registration of forms, refer to “Reference Manual (ESC/P Support)”.

Settings in ESC/P Emulation Mode

The settings in the ESC/P mode menu are described under two headings: the basic settings and extended settings.

Basic settings

Setting itemItem

number Setting values

Output Color 5 Select the [Output Color].[0] (default) : Color[1] : Black

17 Appendix

462

Ap

pen

dix

17

Paper Tray 3 Selects the paper tray used for printing.[0] : Auto[1] (Default) : Tray 1[2] : Tray 2[3] : Tray 3[4] : Tray 4[5] : Tray 5 (bypass)[6] : HFC1When feeding paper from the bypass tray, start printing by an operation on this machine after the print data has been received. To end this setting, change the "Tray 5 confirm indication" setting.

Important • When one of the Trays 1 to 4 and 6 is selected, the paper loaded in the selected tray determines the paper size, and the [Paper Size] setting is not possible.

Note • When [Auto] is selected, if the same sized paper is loaded in thesame orientation in more than one tray, the feed is in the sequenceTray 1 - Tray 2 - Tray 3 - Tray 4 - Tray 6. If the same sized paper isloaded in more than one tray in different orientations, the paper inlandscape orientation takes precedence.

Document size 1 Sets the size of the original created on the client.[99] (Default) : paper[100] : Continuous forms (10 x 12)[101] : Continuous forms (10 x 11)[102] : Continuous forms (15 x 12)[103] : Continuous forms (15 x 11)[3] : A3[4] : A4[5] : A5[14] : B4[15] : B5[21] : 8.5 x 14[22] : 8.5 x 13[23] : 8.5 x 11[24] : 11 x 17[0] : PostcardThe guaranteed number of printing characters is as follows: for continuous forms (1012), 80 columns by 72 rows; continuous forms (10 x 11), 80 columns by 66 rows; continuous forms (15 x 12), 136 columns by 72 rows; and continuous forms (15 x 12), 136 columns by 66 rows.

Note • When continuous forms are selected for [Original Size], the [PaperPosition] setting cannot be made.

• When [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Preset %] or [Fit to Cut Sheet], then the magnification is set automatically, depending on the combination of original size and paper size. However, if the magnification would be outside the range 45 - 210 %, the original is not resized, and is at actual size print. When 2-up mode is selected, the magnification is set automatically from the combination of original size and one-half of the paper size.

• The orientation set here is that of the original. This does not affect the orientation of paper loaded in the tray.

Paper Orientation

19 Sets the orientation of the paper.[0] (default) : Portrait[1] : Landscape

Setting item Item number Setting values


463

Ap

pen

dix

17

Extended settings

Paper size 2 Sets the paper size for printing. This setting is possible when the [Paper tray] setting is [Auto] or [Tray 5 (Bypass)]. The sizes that can be set are only cut sheets.[3] : A3[4] : A4[5] : A5[14] : B4[15] : B5[21] : 8.5 x 14[22] : 8.5 x 13[23] : 8.5 x 11[24] : 11 x 17[0] : Postcard

Important • When one of the Trays 1 to 4 and 6 is selected, [Paper Size] setting is not possible.

Note • When [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Preset %] or [Fit to Cut Sheet],then the magnification is set automatically, depending on thecombination of original size and paper size. However, if themagnification would be outside the range 45 - 250 %, the original isnot resized, and is at actual size print. When 2-up mode is selected,the magnification is set automatically from the combination oforiginal size and one-half of the paper size.


Paper position 20 Sets the paper position.[0] (Default) : No CSF (left)[1] (Default) : With CSF (center)

Note • When continuous forms are selected for [Original Size], the [PaperPosition] setting cannot be made.

Number of copies output

8 Sets the number of copies to be printed.[1 to 250] (Default)):1 to 250 sheets

Important • When a number of copies to be printed is specified by the client, this setting is reflected in the printing. After printing, the setting on the control panel is also changed to this setting. However, when the number of copies is specified from the NetWare or lpd port, the control panel setting is not changed after printing.


17 Appendix

464

Ap

pen

dix

17

Reduce/Enlarge 54(reduce/enlarge mode)

Sets the magnification for printing an original.[0] (default) : Preset[1] : Continuous magnification[2] : Fit to Cut SheetThe preset magnifications are automatically calculated from the set original size and paper size, to fit the printing area of the original into the printing area of the paper. Therefore, if the original size and paper size are the same, this results in 100% (actual size) printing. When two-up is selected, the printing is such as to fit two pages of the original size in the printing area of one sheet of paper.Continuous magnification is the magnification selected with [Continuous Magnification] in [Reduce/Enlarge]. The reference point for magnification is the upper left corner of the printing area. This is the reference point for all text, images, and graphics.The whole cut sheet area is printed within the printing area.Fit to Cut Sheet refer to the magnification automatically calculated from the set original size and paper size, and means that the physical paper size of the set original size is printed within the printing area of the paper size.

17(Continuous

magnification/vertical

magnification)

Sets the vertical or horizontal magnification for printing the original.[45 to 210] (Default:100):45 to 210 %

Note • When continuous forms are selected for [Original size], both [Preset%] and [Fit to Cut Sheet] produce the same printing results.

18(Continuous

magnification/horizontal

magnification)

2 Up Mode 21 Select 2 up printing or printing one page per sheet. Two-up means that two pages of data are printed on each sheet. Depending on the paper orientation, the two pages are printed side by side, or one above the other.[0] (default) : Off[1] : Forward[2] : Reverse

Important • When the original size is in landscape orientation, specifying [Forward] or [Reverse] has the same effect.

Output Destination

9 Selects the output tray for the printed paper.[0] (Default) : Output tray[80] : Finisher tray (optional)

Tray 5 confirmation

67 When printing from the Tray 5 (bypass) is specified, printing is started with an operation on this machine.[0] : Off[1] (default) : On

Grid lines 22 Selects the method for printing grid lines with two-byte characters. The options are as follows.[0] (default) : Image[1] : Font



465

Ap

pen

dix

17

Two Sides 12 Selects duplex printing.[0] (default) : Off[1] : Head to Head[2] : Head to Toe

Important • When [Paper Size] is set to [Postcard], the [Head to Head] and [Head to Toe] settings cannot be selected.

Fonts 14(alphanumeri

c font)

Selects the font for one-byte characters (ANK: alphanumerics and kana).[0] (default) : Roman[1] : Sans serif

Important • Since this setting is for selecting the default setting, it is not reflected when an extended command is sent.

Printing control 51(blank sheet

ejection)

When a page contains only a new page specification, for example, so that there is nothing to print, this selects whether or not to eject a blank sheet of paper.[0] (default) : Off[1] : On

Note • Even if [Off] is selected, a blank sheet of paper may be produced, ifthe only printing data is user-defined characters representingspaces, or images that are completely white.

• When [Off] is selected, when 2-up printing or 2-sided printing is specified, a page which would be blank is skipped.

52(printing column range)

The right margin position can be extended.[0] (default) : Standard[1] : Extended

Important • When the printing column range is changed from [Extended] to [Standard], the left and right margin values are reinitialized.

• When the right margin position is set with a command, that position is the right margin position.

53(Image

Enhancement)

Sets whether or not to carry out image enhancement.Image enhancement means that black/white boundaries are smoothed out, reducing jaggies, and producing higher apparent resolution.[0] : Off[1] (default) : On


17 Appendix

466

Ap

pen

dix

17

ESCP switches 55(text printing

quality)

Sets the text printing quality mode to high quality (default) or draft.[0] (default) : High quality[1] : Draft

Important • Since the [Text Quality], [Reduced Characters], [Character Code Table], [Page Length], and [1-inch Perforation Skip] settings are for selecting the default settings, they are not reflected when an extended command is sent.

Note • This changes the settings, but does not change the actual printing.

• These settings affect text quality selection commands. For information about text quality selection commands, refer to “Reference Manual (ESC/P support)”.

56(reduced

characters)

When printing one-byte alphanumeric characters, you can print with the characters reduced. This sets whether to reduce or print at actual size.[0] (default) : Off[1] : On

58(1 page length)

Sets the length of a page (printing area) as 11 inches or 12 inches.[0] (default) : 11 inches[1] : 12 inches

59(1-inch

Perforation Skip)

Selects whether to skip a 1-inch gap between pages.[0] (default) : Off[1] : On

Important • This is only effective when [Paper Position] has CSF set to [Off]

60(paper feed

position)

Sets whether the printing start position is 8.5 mm (default) or 22 mm from the top of the paper.[0] (default) : 8.5 mm[1] : 22 mm

61(CR feature)

Sets the action when a CR command is received.[0] (default) : Carriage return[1] : Carriage return and linefeed

Position adjustment

15(vertical position

adjustment)

This feature adjusts the position for printing data, vertically or horizontally, to change the position of the margin.[0] (default) : Off[1 - 500] : -250 to +250 mm

Important • Data outside the printing area is not printed, even with the position adjustment.

16(horizontal

position adjustment)

Escape sequence

62(escape

sequence specification)

Note • An extended command consists of an initial escape sequence, thenthe data identifying the command, followed by parameters if thereare any. The escape sequence is the first two bytes of the extendedcommand (ESC, that is, hexadecimal 1BH, followed by; (semicolon= 3BH)). This setting specifies whether the specified escapesequence is enabled or not. When enabled, you can use text codesfor control. The default setting is disabled.

[0] (default) : Disabled[1] : Enabled

63(escape

sequence characters)

In order to carry out control with text codes, this specifies the extended command escape sequence (first two bytes).Enter two characters from the keyboard that appears on the screen. (Default: &%)



467

Ap

pen

dix

17Table of Magnifications

Preset values

Form Overlay 64 By selecting one of the registered form names (Nos. 01 to 64), the form is always superimposed on the printing.[0] (default) : Off[1 - 64] : No. 1 to No. 64

Important • Since this setting is for selecting the default setting, it is not reflected when an extended command is sent.

• Once a form is selected, even if the form is deleted, the form name is still displayed. Note that after performing form selection with the up and down keys, it is not displayed. In this case, [Off] becomes selected.

Stapling 66 Sets the position for stapling.[0] (default) : Off[1] : Upper left single[2] : Top edge dual[3] : Upper right single[4] : Left edge dual[5] : Right edge dual[6] : Lower single[7] : Bottom edge dual[8] : Lower right single

Delete Type 68 Select a form type.[0] (default) : ESC/P

Punching 69 Sets the position for punching.[0] (default) : Off[1] : Top[2] : Bottom[3] : Left[4] : Right

Punch holes 70 Select the number of punch holes.[0] (default) : 2 holes[1] : 3 holes[2] : 4 holes

Document size

Paper size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 17 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 13 8.5 x 11 Postcard

A3 Longer side

100 70 49 86 60 103 84 78 66 100

Shorter side

100 70 48 86 60 94 72 72 72 100

A4 Longer side

143 100 70 123 86 147 120 112 94 48

Shorter side

143 100 69 123 86 135 103 103 103 45

A5 Longer side

204 143 100 177 123 210 172 160 135 69

Shorter side

207 145 100 178 124 195 149 149 149 65


17 Appendix

468

Ap

pen

dix

17

Unit : [%]

Note • If the magnification for either the longer or the shorter side is outside the range 45 - 210 %, the magnification for both longer and shorter sides is set to 100 %.

Preset values (when 2 up is specified)

B4 Longer side

116 81 57 100 70 119 98 90 76 100

Shorter side

116 81 56 100 70 109 83 83 83 100

B5 Longer side

164 116 81 143 100 171 140 130 109 56

Shorter side

164 116 81 143 100 156 120 120 120 53

11 x 17 Longer side

97 68 48 84 59 100 82 76 64 100

Shorter side

106 74 51 92 64 100 77 77 77 100

8.5 x 14 Longer side

119 83 58 102 72 122 100 93 78 100

Shorter side

139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100


128 90 63 111 77 132 108 100 84 100

Shorter side

139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100


152 106 74 131 92 156 128 119 100 100

Shorter side

139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100

Postcard Longer side

100 100 145 100 178 100 100 100 100 100

Shorter side

100 100 153 100 190 100 100 100 100 100

15 x 11 Longer side

119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100

Shorter side

103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100

15 x 12 Longer side

119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100

Shorter side

95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100

10 x 11 Longer side

147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 50

Shorter side

142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45

10 x 12 Longer side

135 95 66 117 81 139 114 105 89 46

Shorter side

142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45

Document size

Paper size A3/2 A4/2 A5/2 B4/2 B5/2 11 x 17/2

8.5 x 14/2

8.5 x 13/2

8.5 x 11/2

Postcard/2


469

Ap

pen

dix

17

A3 Longer side

70 49 100 60 100 66 50 50 50 100

Shorter side

70 48 100 60 100 72 59 54 45 100

A4 Longer side

100 70 48 86 60 94 72 72 72 100

Shorter side

100 69 48 86 59 103 84 78 65 100

A5 Longer side

143 100 69 123 86 135 103 103 103 45

Shorter side

145 100 69 124 86 149 121 112 94 47

B4 Longer side

81 57 100 70 49 76 58 58 58 100

Shorter side

81 56 100 70 48 83 68 63 53 100

B5 Longer side

116 81 56 100 70 109 83 83 83 100

Shorter side

116 80 55 100 69 120 98 90 76 100

11 x 17 Longer side

68 48 100 59 100 64 49 49 49 100

Shorter side

74 51 100 64 100 77 62 58 48 100


83 58 100 72 50 78 60 60 60 100

Shorter side

97 67 100 84 57 100 82 75 63 100


90 63 100 77 54 84 64 64 64 100

Shorter side

97 67 100 84 57 100 82 75 63 100


106 74 51 92 64 100 77 77 77 100

Shorter side

97 67 46 84 57 100 82 75 63 100


100 145 100 178 124 100 149 149 149 65

Shorter side

100 153 105 190 131 100 185 172 144 71

15 x 11 Longer side

83 58 100 72 100 78 60 60 60 100

Shorter side

72 50 100 62 100 74 60 56 47 100

15 x 12 Longer side

83 58 100 72 100 78 60 60 100 100

Shorter side

66 46 100 57 100 68 55 51 100 100

10 x 11 Longer side

103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100

Shorter side

99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100

17 Appendix

470

Ap

pen

dix

17

Unit : [%]


Fit to cut sheet magnification values

10 x 12 Longer side

95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100

Shorter side

99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100

Document size

Paper size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 17 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 13 8.5 x 11 Postcard

A3 Longer side

98 69 48 85 59 101 83 77 64 100

Shorter side

97 68 47 84 58 91 70 70 70 100

A4 Longer side

138 97 68 120 84 142 117 108 91 100

Shorter side

137 96 66 118 82 129 99 99 99 100

A5 Longer side

196 137 96 169 118 201 165 153 129 66

Shorter side

195 136 94 168 117 183 140 140 140 62

B4 Longer side

113 79 55 98 68 116 95 88 74 100

Shorter side

112 78 54 97 67 105 81 81 81 100

B5 Longer side

160 112 78 138 97 165 135 125 105 54

Shorter side

158 110 76 136 95 149 114 114 114 50

11 x 17 Longer side

95 67 47 82 57 98 80 74 63 100

Shorter side

103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100


116 81 57 100 70 119 98 90 76 100

Shorter side

133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100


125 87 61 108 75 128 105 97 82 100

Shorter side

133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100


147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 100

Shorter side

133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100


100 195 136 100 168 100 100 100 183 94

Shorter side

100 201 139 100 173 100 100 100 207 91


471

Ap

pen

dix

17

Unit : [%]


Fit to cut sheet magnification values (when 2 up is specified)

15 x 11 Longer side

135 95 66 117 81 139 105 114 89 46

Shorter side

142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45

15 x 12 Longer side

135 95 66 117 81 139 105 114 89 46

Shorter side

142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45

10 x 11 Longer side

147 103 72 127 89 151 115 124 97 50

Shorter side

142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45

10 x 12 Longer side

147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 50

Shorter side

142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45

Document size

Paper size A3/2 A4/2 A5/2 B4/2 B5/2 11 x 17/2

8.5 x 14/2

8.5 x 13/2

8.5 x 11/2

Postcard/2

A3 Longer side

69 48 100 59 100 64 49 49 100 100

Shorter side

68 47 100 58 100 70 57 53 100 100

A4 Longer side

97 68 47 84 58 91 70 70 70 100

Shorter side

96 66 46 82 57 99 80 74 62 100

A5 Longer side

137 96 66 118 82 129 99 99 99 100

Shorter side

136 84 65 117 80 140 114 106 88 100

B4 Longer side

79 55 100 68 48 74 57 57 57 100

Shorter side

78 54 100 67 46 81 66 61 51 100

B5 Longer side

112 78 54 97 67 105 81 81 81 100

Shorter side

110 76 53 95 65 114 93 86 72 100

11 x 17 Longer side

67 47 100 57 100 63 48 48 48 100

Shorter side

72 50 100 62 100 74 60 56 47 100


81 47 100 70 49 76 58 58 58 100

Shorter side

93 50 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100

17 Appendix

472

Ap

pen

dix

17

Unit : [%]


Paper Size and Number of Possible Printing Characters

When the paper feed position is 22 mm


87 61 100 75 52 82 63 63 63 100

Shorter side

93 64 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100


103 89 100 89 72 97 74 74 74 100

Shorter side

93 80 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100


195 136 94 168 117 183 140 140 140 62

Shorter side

201 139 96 173 119 207 169 156 131 65

15 x 11 Longer side

95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100

Shorter side

99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100

15 x 12 Longer side

95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100

Shorter side

99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100

10 x 11 Longer side

103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100

Shorter side

99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100

10 x 12 Longer side

103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100

Shorter side

99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100

Paper size

Portrait Landscape

Number of printing columns

Number of printing

rows


Number of printing

rows

A3 113 92 161 63

B4 97 78 139 53

A4 79 63 113 42

B5 68 53 97 35

A5 54 42 79 27

Postcard 35 30 54 19

11 x 17 106 94 166 58


473

Ap

pen

dix

17

When the paper feed position is 8.5 mm

Note • These values are based on a character pitch of 10 cpi, and row pitch of 6 lpi.

• Vertical and horizontal magnifications are both 100 %.

• Depending on the hardware configuration, some paper sizes may not be able to be used.

For fit to cut sheet

8.5 x 14 81 76 136 43

8.5 x 13 81 70 126 43

8.5 x 11 81 58 106 43

Paper size

Portrait Landscape


Number of printing

rows


Number of printing

rows

A3 113 95 161 66

B4 97 82 139 56

A4 79 66 113 45

B5 68 56 97 39

A5 54 45 79 31


11 x 17 106 98 166 62

8.5 x 14 81 80 136 47

8.5 x 13 81 74 126 47

8.5 x 11 81 62 106 47

Paper size

Portrait Landscape


Number of printing

rows


Number of printing

rows

A3 116 99 165 70

B4 101 85 143 60

A4 82 70 116 49

B5 71 60 101 42

A5 58 49 82 34


11 x 17 110 102 170 66

8.5 x 14 85 84 140 51

8.5 x 13 85 78 130 51

Paper size

Portrait Landscape


Number of printing

rows


Number of printing

rows

17 Appendix

474

Ap

pen

dix

17


• Depending on the hardware configuration, some paper sizes may not be able to be used.

For 15-inch continuous forms mode (landscape fixed/left)


For 10-inch continuous forms mode

8.5 x 11 85 66 110 51

Paper size

Portrait Landscape


Number of printing

rows


Number of printing

rows

All supported paper sizes

136 66 136 72

Paper size

Portrait Landscape


Number of printing

rows


Number of printing

rows

All supported paper sizes

80 66 80 72

Paper size

Portrait Landscape


Number of printing

rows


Number of printing

rows

Using PDF Direct Print

475

Ap

pen

dix

17

Using PDF Direct Print

PDF direct print is a feature to print a PDF file by direct use of an lpr command for example, without using a print driver. In this case, the printing follows the control panel settings of the following items.

Note • When using the lpr command to print, specify the number of copies in the lpr command.The [Number of Copies] setting on the control panel is disabled. Note that if the number of copies is not specified in the lpr command, one copy is printed.

• When using the lpr command to print a PDF file, it is necessary to start the LPD protocol on the machine, using the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.

Setting Items for the PDF Direct Print Feature

This section describes the setting items for the PDF direct print feature.

These settings are valid when printing a PDF file without using the Fuji Xerox Contents Bridge utility.Note • When using the Contents Bridge Utility to print a PDF file, refer to the manual within the

CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.

Number of copies output Paper size

Two sides Output color

Printing mode Print processing mode

Collate Password

Layout

Setting itemItem

number Setting values

Number of copies output

401 Sets the number of copies to be printed.[1 to 999] (Default: 1)):1 to 999 copies

Two Sides 402 Selects duplex printing.[0] (default) : Off[1] : Flip on Long Edge[2] : Flip on Short EdgeFlip on Long Edge means duplex printing so that when the paper is bound along the long edge, the orientation is correct for reading.Flip on Short Edge means duplex printing so that when the paper is bound along the short edge, the orientation is correct for reading.

Printing mode 403 Selects whether to give priority to printing quality or speed.[0] (default) : Standard[1] : High speed[2] : High qualityThe Standard setting prints with a standard speed and quality.The High Speed setting prints with priority given to speed.The High Quality setting reduces the printing speed, but gives priority to quality, resulting in better printing.

Collate 404 Selects whether to print multiple copies collated (1, 2, 3... 1, 2, 3...).[0] (default) : Off[1] : On

17 Appendix

476

Ap

pen

dix

17

Layout 405 This section describes the layout when printing.

Note • The setting of this item is only valid when [Print Processing Mode] isset to [PDF Bridge].

[0] (default) : Auto reduce/enlarge[1] : Booklet[2] : 2-up[3] : 4-up[4] : 100% (actual size)The auto reduce/enlarge setting automatically prints with the magnification adjusted to fit the paper size being printed. It automatically selects A4 or letter size from the original size in the PDF file, and prints accordingly.The Booklet setting performs duplex printing with the page imposition such that, according to the pagination of the PDF file to be printed, the result is a booklet. Depending on the pagination, however, a booklet print may not always be possible. In this case, it is printed at setting [0] (Auto Reduce/Enlarge).

Note • When [Paper Size] is set to [A4], printing is on A4 size paper.

• When [Paper Size] is set to [Auto], printing is on A3 or A4 paper.The 2-up setting prints two pages on each sheet of paper. When 2-up is selected, the paper size is fixed at A4.The 4-up setting prints four pages on each sheet of paper. When 4-up is selected, the paper size is fixed at A4.

Paper size 406 Sets the paper size for printing.[0] : Auto[1] (default) : A4The Auto setting automatically determines the paper size, according to the original size of the PDF file to be printed and settings.

Output Color 407 Selects color printing or black and white printing.[0] (default) : Auto[1] : Black and whiteThe Auto setting automatically determines for each page of the original whether it is color or black and white. If colors other than black and white are used, then it is printed in color, and if black and white only are used, black and white printing is used.

Print processing mode

408 When using the PDF direct print feature, selects the mode for print processing.[0] (default : PDF Bridge[1] : PSPDF Bridge processes the PDF using the Fuji Xerox PDF direct print feature.PS processes the PDF using the Adobe PostScript feature.

Note • The printed results may be different when [PDF Bridge] is selectedor when [PS] is selected.

• When [PS] is selected, the setting in [Layout] is disabled.

Password - If a password is set for the PDF file, this passwordmust first be set.Printing is only carried out when password in the PDF file to be printed and the password set here match.You can set up to 30 alphanumeric characters.


PCL Emulation

477

Ap

pen

dix

17

PCL Emulation

The following table shows the emulation parameters and their values for PCL emulation. For information on how to change parameter values, refer to "Print Mode" (P.305)

Parameter Item No. Value

Paper Tray 201 0 (Default): Auto1: Tray 12: Tray 23: Tray 34: Tray 45: Tray 5 (Bypass)

Selects the paper tray. When [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically selects the tray that contains the paper whose size is specified on the [Paper Supply] screen.

Auto Size 202 3: A34 (Default*): A45: A514: B415: B521: 8.5 × 14”22: 8.5 × 13”23 (Default*): 8.5 × 11”24: 11 × 17”30: 8K

Sets the default paper size when the machine is set to select the paper size automatically. Only available when [Paper Tray] is set to [Auto].* The default value will be either [4] or [23] depending on the region of use.

Bypass Size 203 3: A34 (Default*): A45: A514: B415: B521: 8.5 × 14”22: 8.5 × 13”23 (Default*): 8.5 × 11”24: 11 × 17”

Sets the paper size for the bypass tray. Only available when [Paper Tray] is set to [Tray 5 (Bypass)].* The default value will be either [4] or [23] depending on the region of use.

Orientation 205 0 (Default): Portrait1: Landscape

Sets the document orientation.

2 Side Print 206 0 (Default): Off1: On

Sets whether to enable double-sided printing.

17 Appendix

478

Ap

pen

dix

17

Default Font 207 0: CG Times1: CG Times Italic2: CG Times Bold3: CG Times Bold Italic4: Univers Medium5: Univers Medium Italic6: Univers Bold7: Univers Bold Italic8: Univers Medium Condensed9: Univers Medium Condensed Italic10: Univers Bold Condensed11: Univers Bold Condensed Italic12: Antique Olive13: Antique Olive Italic14: Antique Olive Bold15: CG Omega16: CG Omega Italic17: CG Omega Bold18: CG Omega Bold Italic19: Garamond Antiqua20: Garamond Kursiv21: Garamond Halbfett22: Garamond Kursiv Halbfett23 (Default): Courier24: Courier Italic25: Courier Bold26: Courier Bold Italic27: Letter Gothic28: Letter Gothic Italic29: Letter Gothic Bold30: Albertus Medium31: Albertus Extra Bold32: Clarendon Condensed33: Coronet34: Marigold35: Arial36: Arial Italic37: Arial Bold38: Arial Bold Italic39: Times New40: Times New Italic

41: Times New Bold42: Times New Bold Italic43: Symbol44: Wingdings45: Line Printer46: Times Roman47: Times Italic48: Times Bold49: Times Bold Italic50: Helvetica51: Helvetica Oblique52: Helvetica Bold53: Helvetica Bold Oblique54: CourierPS55: CourierPS Oblique56: CourierPS Bold57: CourierPS Bold Oblique58: SymbolPS59: Palatino Roman60: Palatino Italic61: Palatino Bold62: Palatino Bold Italic63: ITC Bookman Light64: ITC Bookman Light Italic65: ITC Bookman Demi66: ITC Bookman Demi Italic67: Helvetica Narrow68: Helvetica Narrow Oblique69: Helvetica Narrow Bold70: Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique71: New Century Schoolbook Roman72: New Century Schoolbook Italic73: New Century Schoolbook Bold74: New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic75: ITC Avant Garde Book76: ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique77: ITC Avant Garde Demi78: ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique79: ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic80: ITC Zapf Dingbats

Symbol Set 208 0 (Default): Roman 81: ISO 8859-1 Latin 12: ISO 8859-2 Latin 23: ISO 8859-9 Latin 54: ISO 8859-10 Latin 65: PC-86: PC-8 DN7: PC-7758: PC-8509: PC-85210: PC-1004 (OS/2)11: PC Turkish12: Windows 3.1 Latin 113: Windows 3.1 Latin 214: Windows 3.1 Latin 515: DeskTop16: PS Text17: MC Text

18: Microsoft Publishing19: Math 820: PS Math21: Pi Font22: Legal23: ISO 4 United Kingdom24: ISO 6 ASCII25: ISO 11 Swedish:names26: ISO 15 Italian27: ISO 17 Spanish28: ISO 21 German29: ISO 60 Norwegian v130: ISO 69 French31: Windows 3.0 Latin 132: Windows Baltic33: Symbol34: Wingdings

Font Size 209 400 - 5000 (Default: 1200): Specifies the point size of a font in increments of 25. The value of 100 represents 1 point.


PCL Emulation

479

Ap

pen

dix

17

Font Pitch 210 600 - 2400 (Default: 1000): Specifies the pitch size of a font. The value of 100 represents the pitch size of 1.

Form Line 211 5 - 128 (Default: 64 or 60*): Specify the number of lines on a page.* The default value will be [64] if the default value of the item 202/203 is [4]; [60] if the value for 202/203 is [23].

Print Sets 212 1 - 999 (Default: 1): Specify the number of print sets.

Image Enhance

213 0: Off1 (Default): On

Sets whether to enable the enhanced image mode.

Hex Dump 214 0 (Default): Off1: On

Sets whether to enable a hex dump.

Draft Mode 215 0 (Default): Off1: On

Sets whether to enable the draft mode.

Color Mode 216 0 (Default): Color1: Monochrome

Sets the color mode.

Binding 217 0 (Default): LEF1: SEF

Specifies which edge of paper is to be bound.

Line Termination

218 0 (Default): Off1: Add-LF (Appends an LF to CR)2: Add-CR (Appends a CR to LF and FF)3: CR-XX (Appends a CR to LF and FF, and LF to CR)


17 Appendix

480

Ap

pen

dix

17

HP-GL2 Emulation

This explains how to operate the HP-GL Mode Menu and the settings that can be made with it.

HP-GL Settings List

Items that can be set using the HP-GL mode menu are explained in two groups: basic settings and advanced settings.

Basic Settings

Document Size 101 99 (Default): Auto100: Paper0: A01: A12: A23: A34: A45: A510: B011: B112: B213: B314: B415: B5

Sets the document size created by a PC client. When Auto (99) is specified, the document size is determined based on the Scaling Mode setting (the item number 160).

Paper Size 102 99: Auto101 (Default): A Size3: A34: A45: A514: B415: B5

Sets the paper size to be printed. This can be set if the paper tray setting is either “Auto” or “Tray 5 (Manual Feed)”. In addition, settings can only be made for cut paper. When Auto (99) is specified, the paper size is determined based on the Scaling Mode setting (the item number 160).

Paper Tray 103 0 (Default): Auto1: Tray 12: Tray 23: Tray 34: Tray 45: Manual Feed

Sets the paper tray to be used for printing.

Coordinate Rotation 104 0 (Default): 0 degree1: 90 degree

Sets the paper orientation for printing.

HP-GL2 Emulation

481

Ap

pen

dix

17

Advanced Settings

Color Mode 105 0 (Default): Color1: Monochrome

Sets the paper orientation for printing.

Auto Layout 106 0 (Default): ON1: OFF

Selects whether aligning the position of the document and the paper is to be done automatically or not.

Active Palette 107 0 (Default): Command1: Panel

Selects whether to use a pen specified by command or set on the panel.

No. of Prints 108 1 - 250 (Default): 1): 1 - 250

Sets the number of prints to be made.

Output Tray 109 0 (Default): Center Output Tray 1: Side Output Tray80: Finisher Tray

Two-Sided Printing 110 0 (Default): None1: Head to head2: Head to toe

Sets the two-sided printing.[None]...Prints one side.[Head to Head]...Place the paper as in the [Paper Orientation], and it prints both sides so that the orientation of the up-sides are aligned for each page when the left side is closed.[Head to Toe]...Place the paper as in the [Paper Orientation], and it prints both sides so that the orientation of the up-sides are aligned for each page when the top side is closed.

Chinese Fonts 111 0: Stroke

Specifies 2-byte character fonts, including Chinese characters. The setting cannot be changed for this model.

Alphanumeric Fonts 112 0: Stroke

Specifies 1 byte character fonts. The setting cannot be changed for this model.

Vertical Position Adjustment

113 0 (Default): Do not 1 to 500 -250 to +250mm

Moves the hard clip area vertically.-1 to -250 mm for setting numbers 1 - 250+1 to +250 mm for setting numbers 251 - 500

17 Appendix

482

Ap

pen

dix

17

Horizontal Position Adjustment

114 0 (Default): Do not 1 to 500: -250 to +250mm

Moves the hard clip area horizontally.-1 to -250mm for setting numbers 1 - 250+1 to +250mm for setting numbers 251 - 500

Print Quantity Setup 115 0 (Default): Protocol1: Panel2: Command

Sets the method for specifying the print quantity.

HP-GL Mode 150 0 (Default): HP-GL1: HP-GL/2

A graphics language can be selected.

Hard Clip 151 0: Standard2 (Default): Paper

Sets the size for the area where drawings can be made (hard clip area).[Standard]...Hard clip area for A4, A3, letter, and ledger are the same as for the Hewlett Packard HP7550A. Hard clip area for other paper sizes is the same as this M/C printable area.[Paper]...Make the hard clip area the same area as the paper.

Eject Command 152 (SP)153 (SPO)154 (NR)155 (FR)156 (PG)157 (AF)158 (AH)

0 (Default): OFF1: ON

Sets the command that indicates a drawing is finished. When the command specified here is received, drawing is terminated and the paper is ejected.[Off]...Does not process as an eject command.[On]...Processes as an eject command.ON is set as the default for SPO only.

Scaling 159 0: OFF1 (Default): ON

Determines the setting to either enlarge or reduce the document size so that the document size fits the paper size.[OFF]...Prints in the same size without enlargement/reduction, even if the document size and paper size are different.[ON]...Prints while enlarging/reducing the data on document size so that it fits the paper size.

HP-GL2 Emulation

483

Ap

pen

dix

17

Scaling Mode 160 0 (Default): Paper Size1: Active Coordinate Area

Determines how the document size and the paper size are determined when Document Size (the item number 101) and/or Paper Size (102) is set to Auto (99).[Paper Size]...Make the document size the minimum size that combines the active coordinate area from the active coordinate determining method and the active coordinate obtained by the settings of Origin Position and Paper Margin.[Active Coordinate Area]...Make the document size the area from which the paper margin is subtracted from the active coordinate area obtained by the active coordinate determining method.

Active Area Determining Command

161 0 (Default): Auto1: PS2: IW3: IP4: Adapted

When auto-scaling is in use, this sets the method for obtaining the active coordinate area.[Auto]...Determines any of the methods listed below: PS, IW, IP, or Adapted.[PS]…Area specified by the first PS command is to be a rectangular area.[IW]...Area specified by the very last IW command is to be a rectangular area.[IP]...Area which combines all the IP Commands is to be a rectangular area.[Adapted]...The maximum/minimum coordinates within the areas and coordinates plotted using the drawing command, and the maximum size of characters and line width specified in the page, are used to calculate the rectangular area.

Paper Margin 162 0~99 (Default): 0): 0~99mm

Sets the paper margin when auto scaling is being used.

Image Enhancement

163 0: OFF1 (Default): ON

Sets whether to artificially increase the resolution of an image and smooth its edges.

Stapling 164 0 (Default): None1: Top Left2: Top Double3: Top Right4: Left Double5: Right Double6: Bottom Left7: Bottom Double8: Bottom Right9: Center

Sets the stapling position.

17 Appendix

484

Ap

pen

dix

17

Manual Feed Tray Check Indicator

165 0: None1 (Default): Yes

Punching 166 0: None1 (Default): Top2: Bottom3: Left4: Right

Sets the punch position.

Pen Width (No. 0-No.15)

800-815 0 to 255 (Default): 3): 0 to 25.5 mm

Sets the width of the pen (thickness of the line).Width units are 0.1mm. Can be set in steps of 0.1mm.

Line End Shape(No. 0-No.15)

850-865 0 (Default): Cut1: Round2: Rectangular

Sets the line end shape.

Pen Intersects (No. 0-No.15)

900-915 0 (Default): None1: Intersect2: Round3: Cut

Sets the process for when pens’ lines intersect.

Pen Color (No. 0~No.15)

950-965 0 - 255 (Color)

Sets the color density.The smaller the number, the lighter the color.

HP-GL2 Emulation

485

Ap

pen

dix

17

Hard Clip Area

In the HP-GL mode, the plottable area is determined in line with the paper size, apart from the printable area. This area is called a Hard Clip Area, and determines the maximum range of pen movement. Accordingly, images cannot be drawn outside the boundary of the hard clip area. This machine allows you to select a hard clip area from the following.

Standard

Defines the printable area of this machine as the hard clip area.

Paper

Defines a size that is the same as the paper as the hard clip area. However, the area that allows actual printing is within the printable area.

The Hard Clip Area can be set either via HP-GL Emulation Mode settings or by the specified hard clip command “& 1”.

The following coordinate values present an example of when the origin is set at the lower left (Auto Layout in HP-GL/2) of A3 sheet.

(16798, 11876)

(16442, 11520)

Standard Hard Clip Area

Paper Hard Clip Ares

Paper Size

(0, 0) Standard origin

(0, 0) Paper origin +X

+Y

17 Appendix

486

Ap

pen

dix

17

Printable Area

The printable area in the HP-GL mode is as follows.

Paper Size and Printable Area

Note • HP-GL Emulation supports 5 paper sizes, A3,A5,A4, B4 and B5.

Paper size

Paper Length (1/7200 inch)

Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)

X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top-right Edge Margin

Width HeightBottom-left X

Bottom Left Y

Long Side

Short Side

Top-right X

Top-right Y

XR YU

A3 119052 84168 1260 1260 116532 81648 117792 82908 1260 1260

A4 84168 59508 1260 1260 81648 56988 82908 58248 1260 1260

A5 59508 41940 1260 1260 56988 39420 58248 40680 1260 1260

B4 103176 72828 1260 1260 100656 70308 101916 71568 1260 1260

B5 72828 51588 1260 1260 70308 49068 71568 71568 1260 1260

Width

Short-side

YU

Long-side

Bottom-left X, Bottom-left Y

(0, 0)

XR

Height

Actual Paper

Printable Area

Top-right X, Top-right Y

HP-GL2 Emulation

487

Ap

pen

dix

17

Note • HP-GL Emulation supports 5 paper sizes, A3,A5,A4, B4 and B5.

Paper size

Paper Length (1/7200 inch)

Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)

X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top-right Edge Margin

Width HeightBottom-left X

Bottom Left Y

Long Side

Short Side

Top-right X

Top-right Y

XR YU

A3 84168 119052 1260 1260 81648 116532 82908 117792 1260 1260

A4 59508 84168 1260 1260 56988 81648 58248 82908 1260 1260

A5 41940 59508 1260 1260 39420 56988 40680 58248 1260 1260

B4 72828 103176 1260 1260 70308 100656 71568 101916 1260 1260

B5 51588 72828 1260 1260 49068 70308 50328 71568 1260 1260

Width

Short-side

YU

Bottom-left X, Bottom-left Y

(0, 0)

XR

Actual Paper

Printable Area

Top-right X, Top-right Y

Long-side

Height

17 Appendix

488

Ap

pen

dix

17

Auto Layout

This section explains Auto Layout.

1. What is Auto Layout?

Auto Layout is a function that evaluates document size based on the HP-GL data entered from the host system and enlarges/reduces it in line with the paper size to be plotted so that the plotted data is laid out in the center of the paper. Using the Auto Scale and Auto Layout functions enables you to print a document in the HP-GL mode without regard for the document size and origin position.

All specification in Auto Layout can be made via the operation panel. The settings cannot be made with advanced commands.

2. Activating the Auto Layout Function

Set the following items with the operation panel to activate the Auto Layout function.

Set the document size to AUTO. The default value is AUTO.

Set the Auto Layout to ON for setting the origin position. The default value is ON.

Set Scaling to ON. The default value is ON.

Select a method for obtaining the active coordinate area using the area determiningmode. The default value is AUTO.

Set the paper margin using Paper Margin. The default value is 0 mm.

Set the Scaling Mode. The default value is Paper Size.

3. Details on Setting Items

Details on each item are as follows.

Document Size

Press the mode button and select AUTO under document size and it will be possible to set Auto Layout to ON.

Auto Layout

After pressing the mode button, press the menu button and set Auto Layout to ON. Once you set it to ON, the settings for scaling, area determination mode, paper margins and scaling mode all become active.

Scaling

Determines the setting to either enlarge or reduce (scaling) the document size so that the document size fits the paper size.

Area Determination Mode

Based on HP-GL data, the methods for obtaining the active coordinates area are as follows:

Auto

The method for determining the active coordinate area is automatically selected from among PS, IW, IP and Adapted.

In this mode the order of priority is PS, IW, IP, Adapted.

HP-GL2 Emulation

489

Ap

pen

dix

17

IW

The area specified by the very last IW command in the data becomes the active coordinate area.

If there are no IW commands in the data, the active coordinate area is determined by Adapted.

IP

The area that encompasses all the areas specified by IP commands in the data becomes the active coordinate area.

If there are no IP commands in the data, the active coordinate area is determined by Adapted.

Adapted

The ACA is determined by the following conditions.

Min/Max position coordinates plotted by drawing commands

Max font size specified within the page

Max line width

PS

The area that encompasses all the areas specified by PS commands in the data becomes the active coordinate area.

If there are no PS commands in the data, the active coordinate area is determined by Adapted.

Paper Margin

Set the range from 0 to 99mm. The default value is 0mm. To get the active coordinate area, subtract the area set in paper margins from the ACA obtained in the area determination mode.

Scaling Mode

Select the mode for determining the document size from the obtained ACA. Also, judge whether it will be portrait or landscape according to the ACA.

If it is an ACA

To get the document size, subtract the area set in paper margins from the area obtained in the area determination mode.

Paper Margins

Cannot plot as hard clip is exceededArea obtained by area determination mode

Area left when paper margin subtracted from area obtained by area determination mode

17 Appendix

490

Ap

pen

dix

17

If it is a Paper Size

Set the document size from the obtained ACA and the origin point setting. The document size can be selected from A-size papers (6 sizes--A0, A1, A2, A3, A4 or A5).

4. How to Determine Document Size

The document size is determined by comparing the hard clip area for each paper size, based on the ACA obtained in the scaling mode, paper margins, and area determination mode.

If the Scaling Mode is a Paper Size

1) Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP-GL data entered, in accordwith the area determination mode.

2) As a margin, add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page, thedefault size or one half the specified pen width, to the ACA obtained in 1.

3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the ACA obtained in 2.

4) The minimum size that includes the ACA obtained in 3 will be the document size.

If the Scaling Mode is the ACA

1) Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP-GL data entered, in accordwith the area determination mode.

2) As a margin, add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page, thedefault size or one half the specified pen width, to the ACA obtained in 1.

3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the ACA obtained in 2.

4) The ACA obtained in the process up to 3 will be the document size.

Ex.

If the following data is entered when the scaling mode = paper size, origin position = Auto, paper margin is 10mm, area determination mode = IP:

All pen width settings are 0.1mm

The following data does not contain a character size specification command and the physical size of the area specified by IP/IW is A3.

IN;

IP-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;

IW-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;

PU;

SP1;

:

:

SP0;

1) As the area determination mode is IP, the ACA is specified as the area -8399,-5938,8399,5938 by an IP command.

YYY

2) In the example above, as there are no font size specification commands and all thepen widths are 0.1mm, add the height/2 of the default font size for A3 size paper(75 plotter units) to the ACA obtained in 1.The ACA obtained in 2 is -8474,-6013,8474,6013.

HP-GL2 Emulation

491

Ap

pen

dix

17

3) The value set in paper margins (10mm = 400 plotter units) is subtracted from theACA obtained in 2.The ACA obtained in 3 is -8074,-5613,80740,5613.

4) As the ACA obtained in 3 exceeds the A4 size and is A3 size, the document size isdetermined to be A3.

In addition, as the ACA area when the paper margin setting is 0mm is 8474,-6013, 8474, 6013, and this exceeds A3, but is A2 or smaller, the document size is determined to be A2.

5. How to Determine Paper Size

If the operation panel settings are as follows, the paper size is determined as below.

Document size: Auto

Paper Tray: Auto

The method for determining the paper size differs according to the paper size and scaling mode settings on the operation panel.

If the Paper Size Setting is A Sizes

The possibilities for paper size are those that are actually loaded in the trays, from among the three sizes, A3, A4 and A5.

If A-sized papers (A3, A4, A5) are not loaded in the trays, all of the sizes, A3, A4 and A5 become possible sizes; a message is displayed on the operation panel prompting the user to load A-sized paper.

If the Paper Size Setting is Auto

The possibilities for paper size are those that are actually loaded in the trays, from among the 5 sizes, A3, B4, A4, B5 and A5.

If A3, B4, A4, B5 or A5 paper is not loaded in the trays, all of the sizes become possible sizes; a message is displayed on the operation panel prompting the user to load paper.

If the Scaling Mode Setting is Paper Size

If the paper size and the document size are the same, select paper that is the same size as the document.

If the document size is larger than any possible paper sizes, select the largest paper.

If the document size is smaller than any possible paper sizes, select the closest paper.

If the Scaling Mode Setting is ACA

Select the smallest paper size that can contain the ACA.

If the ACA is larger than any possible paper sizes, select the largest paper.

If the ACA is smaller than any possible paper sizes, select the closest paper.

Supplementary Notes

If the document size is set to anything other than Auto, the paper size is the size set on the operation panel.

If the paper tray is set to Auto, the paper size is the size loaded in each tray. However, If paper whose size is not supported is loaded, an error message will be displayed prompting the user to load a supported paper.

17 Appendix

492

Ap

pen

dix

17

6. How to Determine the Scaling Factor

When auto-scaling is being used, although the scaling factor is determined by document size and paper size, it differs according to the scale mode setting.

Supplementary Notes

To activate scaling, turn the scaling setting to ON on the operation panel. If it is OFF, it is plotted at the same scale (100%).

If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is Paper Size

The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the paper’s hard clip area.

If the document size = paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).

If the document size > paper size, it plots at a reduced scale.

If the document size < paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).

If the origin position for the plotting position is Layout, the document is laid out and drawn in the center. If the origin position is bottom left or center, the origin of the document and the paper are aligned and drawn.

If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is ACA

The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the advanced hard clip area.

The scaling factor is determined according to the ACA and the paper size. The range for the ACA for each paper size is as follows:

Unit: Plotter Unit

The maximum scaling factor is 210% of the advanced hard clip area for each paper size and the minimum scaling factor is 22.5%.

A3 A4 A5 B4 B5

A0 35 25 100 31 100

A1 50 35 25 43 31

A2 71 50 35 61 43

A3 100 71 50 87 61

A4 100 100 71 100 87

A5 100 100 100 100 100

Paper Size

0 Degrees 90 Degrees

Min Value Max Value Min Value Max Value

P2x - P1x P2y - P1y P2x - P1x P2y - P1y P2x - P1x P2y - P1y P2x - P1x P2y - P1y

A3 7829 5485 73075 51200 5485 7829 51200 73075

A4 5485 3828 51200 35733 3828 5485 35733 51200

A5 3828 2648 35733 24720 2648 3828 44088 35733

B4 6762 4723 63120 44088 4723 6762 44088 63120

B5 4723 3297 44088 30773 3297 4723 30773 44088

HP-GL2 Emulation

493

Ap

pen

dix

17

7. Restrictions When Plotting under Auto Layout

If the Printer is Equipped with Hard Disk(s)

When Auto Layout is used, print data is stored on the hard disk.

If the Printer is Not Equipped with hard disk(s)

When Auto Layout is used, print data is stored in layout memory.

The default layout memory is set at 100kbyte. Consequently, when print data exceeding 100kbyte is received, a printer error occurs.

If this happens, change the Auto Layout memory capacity on the operation panel.

However, the Auto Layout memory capacity max is 5120kbyte. So, print data larger than 5120kbyte cannot be received.

When using the Auto Layout function, we recommend the printer be equipped with a hard disk.

8. Examples of Combinations of Each Function

Below are examples showing the print results that can be achieved by combining various functions.

Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size, Scaling: ON

Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size, Scaling: OFF

Print Area

Document Size Paper Size

Print Area

Document Size Paper Size

17 Appendix

494

Ap

pen

dix

17

Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Active Coordinate Area, Scaling: ON

Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Active Coordinate Area, Scaling: OFF

Print Area

Active Coordinate Area determined by entered data

Paper Size

Print Area

Active Coordinate Area determined by entered data

Paper Size

List of Options

495

Ap

pen

dix

17

List of Options

The following are the principal options available. To purchase these, contact our Customer Support Center.

Note • The products are liable to change.

• For the latest information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Product name Description

Offset stacking module This unit allows to eject paper with an offset.

Finisher C This unit allows to staple or punch printed documents or copies.

Booklet finisher C This unit allows to staple or punch printed documents or copies. Features for folding documents in half, and stapling the folded documents are also available.

512 MB Memory Memory for extending the system memory to 512 MB.

High-compression image kit This kit allows to create DocuWorks files and PDF files with a high compression rate, when using the [E-mail] or [Scan to Mailbox] feature.

USB 2.0 port kit This kit allows USB 2.0 to be used.

Copy management extension kit

You can set the text effect. If you set a text effect and make a copy, the text is embedded in the background.

HDD Data securitykit

This kit increases the security of data written to the hard disk.

Network Scanning kit a This kit allows the scanner feature to be used.(For DocuCentre C5540 I)

Network Scanning kit b This kit allows the scanner feature to be used.(For DocuCentre C6550 I)

High capacity paper tray This tray allows to load 2,300 sheets of paper (When using Xerox P paper).

Large color control panel A control panel with a large color touch panel.

Large color control panel mounting kit (left side)

For installing the large color control panel at the left side of the machine.

Large color control panel mounting kit (right side)

For installing the large color control panel at the right side of the machine.

17 Appendix

496

Ap

pen

dix

17

Notes and Restrictions

This section describes notes and restrictions on the use of the machine.

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine

When the Print Results Differ from the Settings

Insufficient memory for the print page buffer may cause the following effects, giving results not expected from the settings. In this case, more memory is recommended.

Single-sided printing when 2-sided printing was specified

Jobs are canceled (if a page cannot be rendered in the print page buffer, the jobincluding that page is canceled)

Installing and Moving the Machine

When moving the machine from its rack, contact our Customer Support Center.

When moving the machine, do not subject the unit to shocks.

When closing the document cover, be careful not to trap your fingers.

Do not place things close to the ventilation opening of the extractor fan of themachine.

Meter Counts for 2-sided Printing

For 2-sided printing, depending on the application being used and the way in whichthe number of copies is specified, blank pages may be inserted automatically. In thiscase, the blank page inserted by the application is counted for metering purposes.

Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting Job

When interrupting, some jobs such as print jobs set by a client cannot be executed.

The following are the jobs that can/cannot be executed while interrupting.

JobControl Panel*1

Execution

Copy Yes ○

Print Print jobs set by a client.*2 No ×

Print jobs set at [Stored Documents] of the[Job Status] screen on the control panel*3

Yes ○

Scan E-mail, Scan to mailbox, Network scanning,Scan to FTP/SMB

Yes ○

Report Auto print of job reports No ○

Manual print of job reports Yes ○

Mailbox Auto forward of stored documents No ○*4

Manual print of stored documents (scan/print) Yes ×

Auto print of stored documents No ×

Job Flow Job flow set at [Check Mailbox] or [Job Flow]on the control panel.

Yes ○

Notes and Restrictions

497

Ap

pen

dix

17

○ Can be executed while interrupting× Cannot be executed while interrupting△ Receives a job from a client or other machine, however cannot be executed while interrupting*1 Operation on the control panel is necessary to execute a job*2 Normal print, first one copy of Sample print, Delayed print (Auto print)*3 Secure print, Sample print, Delayed print, Charge print*4 Can be executed regardless of interrupting

17 Appendix

498

Ap

pen

dix

17

Simple Procedures

This section lists procedures the subject of frequently asked questions, particularly in relation to the system settings.

Press the buttons in the sequence indicated by arrows.Note • The <Log In/Out> button is described as <Log In/Out>.

• The <Machine Status> button is described as <Machine Status>.

• The default UserID setting is “11111”.

Scan Settings

Storing Address Numbers for Mail

<Log In/Out> UserID input [System Settings] [Setup Menu] [Address Book]

* If [Setup Menu] appears in the menu screen: [Setup Menu] - [Address Book]


Allowing Different Sizes of Original to be Loaded by Default

<Log In/Out> UserID input [System Settings] [System Settings]

[Scan Mode Settings] [Scan Defaults] [Mixed Size Originals] [Yes]For more information, refer to "Mixed Size Originals" (P.251).

Copy Settings

Allowing Different Sizes of Original to be Loaded by Default


[Copy Mode Settings] [Copy Defaults] [Mixed Size Originals] [Yes]For more information, refer to "Mixed Size Originals" (P.231).

Common Function Settings

Changing the UserID for System Administrator

<Log In/Out> - UserID input [System Settings] [System Administrator Settings]

[System Administrator Login ID]

*The default setting is “11111”.

For more information, refer to "System Administrator Login ID" (P.278).

Changing the time for Switching to Power Saving Mode


[Common Settings] [Machine Clock/Times] [Auto Power Saver]For more information, refer to "Auto Power Saver" (P.206).

Changing the Machine Volume


[Common Settings] [Audio Tones] Select sound levelFor more information, refer to "Audio Tones" (P.207).

Simple Procedures

499

Ap

pen

dix

17

Checking the Network Settings (IP Address etc.)

<Machine Status> [Billing Meter/Print Report] [Print Report/List]

[Copy Mode Settings*] [Settings List - Common Items]

* [Copy Mode Settings] can be [Print Mode Settings] or [Scan Mode Settings] depending on the situation.

For more information, refer to "Settings List - Common Items" (P.310).

Printing a Report/List to Check Machine Information

<Machine Status> [Billing Meter/Print Report] [Print Report/List] Select reportFor more information, refer to "Printing a Report" (P.361).

Setting a Report/list to Automatically Print (or Not)


[Common Settings] [Reports] Select reportFor more information, refer to "Reports" (P.219).

Changing the Buttons Shown on the Menu Screen


[Common Settings] [Screen Defaults] [All Services]For more information, refer to "All Services" (P.209).

Changing the Functions Assigned to the Custom Buttons


[Common Settings] [Screen Defaults] [Custom Button 1] [Custom Button 3]For more information, refer to "Custom Buttons 1 to 3" (P.209).

Checking That a Job Has Completed

<Job status> [Completed Jobs]For more information, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.292).

Displaying Only Particular Jobs in the Job Status Screen (Completed Jobs)


[Common Settings] [Screen Defaults] [Job Type on Job Status Screen]For more information, refer to "Job Type on Job Status Screen" (P.210).

Index

501

Ind

ex

Symbols

<All Services> button ................................... 39, 434

<C> (Clear) button ....................................... 39, 435

<Clear All> button ........................................ 38, 435

<Confirmation> indicator...................................... 31

<Copy>, <Custom 2>,

<Custom 3> buttons................. 39, 434

<Interrupt> button ................................................ 39

<Interrupt> button/indicator................................ 435

<Job in Memory> indicator................... 38, 361, 435

<Job Status> button..................................... 38, 435

<Log In/Out> button ..................................... 38, 435

<Machine Status> button ............................. 38, 435

<Online> indicator........................................ 38, 435

<Power Saver> button ................................. 38, 435

<Review> button .......................................... 38, 435

<Start> button .............................................. 39, 435

<Stop> button .............................................. 39, 435

Numerics

2 Sided Book Copy .............................................. 66

2 Sided Copying................................................... 64

2 Sided Copying (System Settings) ................... 231

2 Sided Originals........................................ 118, 124

2 Sided Original Scan Options

(System Settings)............... 233


(System Settings)............... 255

2 Sided Report (System Settings)...................... 219

A

About Emulation................................................. 459

Account ID Characters (System Settings) ......... 284

Account Limit (System Settings) ................ 281, 282

adding originals.................................................... 97

adding stamp/date/page number to copies.......... 85

Address Book..................................... 109, 115, 313

Address Book (System Settings) ....................... 274

Address Search (Directory Service)

(System Settings)............. 256

Address Type (System Settings) ....................... 275

adjusting color balance......................................... 62

adjusting color tone .............................................. 62

adjusting document sharpness........................... 122

adjusting the copy density .................................... 57

adjusting the copy density and contrast ............... 60

adjusting the scan density and contrast ............. 121

adjusting the sharpness and

color saturation of images ............. 61

Alert Tone (System Settings).............................. 208

Allocate Memory (System Settings) ................... 243

All Services (System Settings) ........................... 209

Annotation ............................................................ 85

ART IV, ESC/P, 201H Form Memory

(System Settings) ............ 244

ART IV, ESC/P User Defined List....................... 311

attaching a cover to copies................................... 79

Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3

(System Settings) ........... 259

Attribute Type of Certificate (System Settings)... 259

Attribute Type of Custom Items 1 to 3


Attribute Type of E-mail Address


Attribute Type of First Name


Attribute Type of Last Name


Attribute Type of Recipient Name


Audio Tones (System Settings) .......................... 207

Auditron Administration ...................................... 314

Auditron Mode (System Settings)....................... 288

Auditron Report (Copy Jobs) .............................. 314

Auditron Report (Scan Jobs) .............................. 314

authenticated user .............................................. 320

authentication and

auditron administration ............... 319, 332

Authentication System (System Settings) .......... 240

Auto Clear (System Settings) ............................. 206

Auto Clear Alert Tone (System Settings)............ 208

Auto Exposure .............................................. 61, 122

Auto Exposure (System Settings)............... 230, 251

Index

502

Ind

ex

Auto Exposure (Text & Photo)

(System Settings) ..............234

Auto Exposure (Text) (System Settings) ............234

Auto Exposure Level (System Settings) .............255

auto gradation adjustment ..................................357

Auto Gradation Adjustment (System Settings) ...218

Auto Job Promotion (System Settings) ...............221

Auto Job Release (System Settings) ..................206

Auto Paper by Output Color (System Settings) ..212

Auto Paper Off (System Settings).......................233

Auto Power Saver (System Settings) .................206

Auto Print (System Settings)...............................206

Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail

(System Settings) ...........261

Auto Print Error Mail (System Settings) ..............260

Auto Size Detect .................................................126

Auto Tray Switching (System Settings) ..............215

B

B/W Copy Auto Exposure (System Settings)......218

Background Pattern (System Settings)...............216

Background Suppression....................................122

Background Suppression (System Settings) ......251

Background Suppression Level

(System Settings) ............255

Banner Sheet (System Settings) ........................247

Banner Sheet Tray (System Settings) ................247

Base Tone (System Settings) .............................208

basic copying ........................................................50

Basic Copying Tab (System Settings) ................227

Basic Scanning ...................................................117

Basic Scanning Tab (System Settings) ..............249

Billing Meter ........................................................308

Billing Meter/Print Report ....................................308

Book Copying .......................................................65

Booklet Creation ...................................................76

booklet staple cartridge.................................32, 351

booklet tray ...........................................................32

booklet unit ...........................................................32

Book Scanning....................................................124

bottom left cover ...................................................29

bottom right cover .................................................31

Bound originals ...................................................125

brightness dial...............................................38, 435

Build Job ...............................................................94

built-in fonts ........................................................ 454

C

Calculator % ......................................................... 52

Calling stored programs ..................................... 154


(System Settings) ............ 231, 252

CentreWare Internet Services .................... 158, 168

change the paper size ........................................ 183

Chapter Start/Separators ..................................... 96

Charge Print Settings (System Settings)............ 285

checking completed jobs .................................... 292

checking current/pending jobs............................ 291

checking paper tray status ................................. 304

checking the finished output of the copy .............. 96

Check Mailbox.................................................... 134

Check Password (System Settings) ................... 266

Check User Details (System Settings) ............... 287

circuit breaker................................................. 31, 34

cleaning the machine ......................................... 354

Color (System Settings) ..................................... 216

Color Access (System Settings)......................... 281

Color Balance....................................................... 62

Color Balance - Black (System Settings) ........... 231

Color Balance - Cyan (System Settings)............ 231

Color Balance - Magenta (System Settings) ...... 231

Color Balance - Yellow (System Settings).......... 231

Color Copy Auto Exposure (System Settings) ... 218

color graduation.................................................. 450

Color Saturation ................................................... 61

Color Saturation (System Settings) ............ 230, 255

Color Selection ..................................................... 57

Color Shift............................................................. 62

Color Shift (System Settings) ............................. 231

Color Space........................................................ 123

Color Space (System Settings) .......................... 255

color support....................................................... 450

Common Settings............................................... 204

Connection Interval (System Settings) ............... 205

Connection to Time Server (System Settings) ... 205

Consumables ..................................................... 316

consumables ...................................................... 338

continuous copy pages....................................... 453

continuous copy speed....................................... 452

continuous printing speed .................................. 453

Index

503

Ind

ex

Contrast ....................................................... 60, 121

Contrast (System Settings) ........................ 230, 251

control panel ........................................................ 29

Control Panel Alert Tone (System Settings) ...... 207

Control Panel Select Tone (System Settings).... 207

Copies.................................................................. 65

copy (sheet) size................................................ 450

copy (sheet) size/type ........................................ 455

Copy Control (System Settings)......................... 233

Copy Defaults (System Settings) ....................... 229

copy document................................................... 450

copying facing pages onto separate sheets......... 65

copying multiple sheets onto one sheet............... 81

Copy Job Complete Tone (System Settings)..... 208

Copy Mode Settings........................................... 310

Copy Mode Settings (System Settings) ............. 227

Copy Output (System Settings) ......................... 232

copy paper ......................................................... 450

copy reduction/enlargement ratio....................... 451

Covers.................................................................. 79

Create/Check User Accounts

(System Settings)................ 280

creating a booklet................................................. 76

Custom Buttons 1 to 3 (System Settings) .......... 210

Custom Colors (System Settings)...................... 237

Custom Item 1 (System Settings) ...................... 275



Custom Paper Name (System Settings) ............ 210

Custom Space (System Settings) ...................... 251

D

Data Encryption (System Settings) .................... 225

data processing resolution ................................. 453

Date (System Settings) ...................................... 205

Date Format (System Settings).......................... 215

Date Position (System Settings) ........................ 232

Date Position on Side 2 (System Settings) ........ 235

Daylight Savings ................................................ 207

Default Language (System Settings) ................. 210

Default Print Paper Size (System Settings) ....... 221

Default Programming ......................................... 307

Delete All Data (System Settings)...................... 220

Delete Documents After Retrieval

(System Settings)........... 266

Delete Documents with Expiry Date


Delete Form (System Settings) .......................... 245

Delete Outside/Delete Inside................................ 98

delete outside or inside of

the selected area when copying ........... 98

deleting charge-print documents ........................ 294

deleting delayed print documents....................... 297

deleting sample print documents........................ 296

deleting security print documents ....................... 295

deleting stored documents ................................. 293

deleting stored programs.................................... 152

Density (System Settings) .................................. 216

Device Certificate - SSL Server

(System Settings) ............... 241

Digital Signature ................................................. 132

dimensions ......................................................... 453

dimensions/weight .............................. 455, 456, 457

direct authentication ........................................... 320

Directory Service (LDAP) (System Settings) ...... 257

Display Consumables Screen ............................ 224

Document 50 sheets............................................. 97

Document Expiry Date (System Settings) .......... 263

document feeder........................................... 42, 102

document feeder tray............................................ 31

Document Feeder Tray Elevation

(System Settings) ............. 226

document glass ...................................... 29, 43, 103

document guides .................................................. 31

document jams ................................................... 426

Document List..................................................... 113

Document Name................................................. 131

document output tray............................................ 31

Document Retrieved By Client


document scanning speed.................................. 454

document size/type............................................. 455

document stopper................................................. 31

DocuWorks......................................................... 120

DocuWorks High Compression .......................... 120

Domain Filter (System Settings)......................... 239

Domain Filter List................................................ 312

drum cartridge .................................................... 338

drum cartridges..................................................... 31

Dual Color - Source Color (System Settings) ..... 230

504

Ind

ex

Dual - Non-target Area Color

(System Settings) ................230

Dual - Target Area Color (System Settings) .......230

E

Edge Erase ...................................................69, 127

Edge Erase (System Settings)............................252


(System Settings) ..........231, 252


(System Settings) ..........231, 252

E-mail..................................................................109

E-mail Address (System Settings) ..............275, 281

E-mail Defaults (System Settings) ......................256

E-mail printing.....................................................162

E-mail Receive Protocol (System Settings) ........242

E-mail Settings (System Settings) ......................256

emulation ............................................................454

Emulation mode..................................................459

Encryption...........................................................132

enlarged copies ....................................................50

entering/changing stored program name............152

entering text ........................................................203

erasing edges and margin shadows

in the document .........69, 127

erasing the background color

of documents .............61, 122

error codes..........................................................389

Error History Report ....................................310, 317

ESC/P Settings List ............................................311

ESC/P Stored Programming List ........................311

Ethernet 10Base-T / 100Base-TX connector........29

exit cover ..............................................................32

Extended Features Settings List .........................312

extension flap......................................................180

F

Failed Access Log (System Settings) .................285

fast copy time......................................................451

Faults ..................................................................317

Fault Tone (System Settings) .............................208

Feature in 2nd Column (System Settings) ..........250

Features Allocation (System Settings)................227

features that can be managed

with authentication ............332

feeding method/paper capacity .......................... 453

feeding stage number/paper capacity ................ 455

File Format ......................................................... 119

File Format (System Settings)............................ 251

File Name........................................................... 130

File Name Conflict .............................................. 131

Fine-tune 100% (System Settings)..................... 234

finisher Tray.......................................................... 32

Finishing ............................................................... 75

First Name (System Settings) ............................ 275

floor space when connected to

the main body........ 455, 456, 457

Folding.................................................................. 92

Fonts List............................................................ 311

Force Set Numbering - Client Print

(System Settings) ............... 216

Force Set Numbering - Copy Job

(System Settings) ............... 216

Force Set Numbering - Mailbox Print

(System Settings) ............... 216

Free Size ............................................................ 126

From................................................................... 112

front cover ...................................................... 29, 32

fuser ..................................................................... 31

G

generally shared box .......................................... 327

general shared job flow sheet ............................ 323

Gloss Level (System Settings) ........................... 226

gradation adjustment.......................................... 357

H

handling error terminations................................. 299

Head to Left........................................................ 119

Head to Top........................................................ 119

Hide Account ID (System Settings) .................... 284

Hide User ID (System Settings) ......................... 284

HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory


HP-GL/2 Palette List........................................... 312

HP-GL/2 Settings List......................................... 312

HP-GL/2 Stored Programming List..................... 312

HP-GL2 Emulation ............................................. 480

HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication


Index

505

Ind

ex

HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number


I

Image Compression........................................... 129

Image Compression (System Settings) ............. 252

Image Enhancement (System Settings) ............ 218

Image Quality............................................... 58, 121

Image Quality (System Settings) ............... 213, 217

Image Quality Adjustment (System Settings) .... 217

Image Quality Presets.......................................... 58

image quality problems ...................................... 371

Image Rotation..................................................... 71

Image Rotation (System Settings) ..................... 232

Image Rotation Direction (System Settings) ...... 232

Image Shift................................................... 69, 127

Image Shift - Side 1 (System Settings) .............. 231

Image Shift - Side 2 (System Settings) .............. 231

Image Transfer Screen (System Settings)......... 255

importing scanned data...................................... 164

Incoming E-mail Print Options


Independent X-Y%............................................... 51

Initialize Hard Disk (System Settings)................ 220

inserting blank sheets between transparencies ... 80

interface ............................................................. 454

J

job ...................................................................... 274

Job Assembly....................................................... 94

Job Counter Report............................................ 313

Job Flow............................................................. 144

job flow sheet created in

the mailbox registration screen ........... 324

Job Flow Sheet List Access Default

(System Settings).............. 264

Job Flow Sheets ................................................ 144

Job Flow Sheets (System Settings) ................... 267

job flow sheet types ................................... 323, 334

Job History Report ............................................. 310

Job History Report (System Settings)................ 219

Job Status .......................................................... 290

Job Status/Activity Report.................................. 310

jobs that can be managed for each service ....... 334

Job Template List............................................... 312

Job Type on Job Status screen


JPEG .................................................................. 120

K

keyboard............................................................. 110

Keyboard Input Restriction (System Settings).... 224

L

language............................................................. 210

large color control panel ..................................... 433

Last Name (System Settings)............................. 275

left cover ............................................................... 31

Left Page then Right........................................... 125

lever...................................................................... 31

Lighten/Darken ....................................... 57, 60, 121

Lighten/Darken (System Settings).............. 230, 251

Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox


loading documents ............................................. 102

loading paper...................................................... 177

Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass) ................ 180

local access ........................................................ 321

locking casters...................................................... 29

Login Name ........................................................ 116

Login Name (System Settings)................... 258, 276



Login Setup/Auditron Mode (System Settings)... 287

lonking job flow sheet and mailbox..................... 330

Low Power Mode.................................................. 35

Low Toner Alert Tone (System Settings)............ 208

M

Machine Clock/Timers (System Settings)........... 204

machine components ........................................... 28

Machine Configuration........................................ 303

Machine E-mail Address/Host Name


Machine Information ........................................... 303

Machine Ready Tone (System Settings) ............ 207

Machine Status........................................... 302, 303

machine trouble.................................................. 366

Mailbox ............................................................... 134

506

Ind

ex

Mailbox (System Settings) ..................................265


(System Settings) .............262

Mailbox Access (System Settings) .....................288

mailbox job flow sheet ........................................323

Mailbox List .........................................................313

Mailbox Name (System Settings) .......................266

Mailbox Viewer 2 ........................................107, 158

Mail Contents......................................................112

Maintenance (System Settings)..........................219

making 2 sided copies ..........................................64

making 2 sided copies of facing pages.................66

making copies of documents with

different settings in a single operation .......94

making copies with the image

rotated vertically or horizontally ..........71

making enlarged/reduced copies..........................50

making enlarged copies

spread over multiple sheets...............82

making multiple copies on a single sheet .............93

making multiple copies on one sheet....................83

making reversed copies of images .......................72

manageable deatures and services....................332

Maximum Address Entries (System Settings) ....260

Maximum E-mail Size (System Settings)............260

maximum fill line .................178, 179, 181, 184, 185

Maximum Login Attempts (System Settings) ......279

maximum power consumption ............................453

Maximum Search Results (System Settings) .....259


(System Settings) ...............233, 255

Max No. of Pages for Split Send

(System Settings) ...............261

MDN....................................................................130

memory capacity.................................................454


(System Settings) ................233, 254

messages ...................................................389, 406

Meter (Copy Jobs) for System Administrator

(System Settings) ..........283

Meter Report (Print Jobs) ...................................314

Millimeters/Inches (System Settings)..................224

minimum space requirements.............................453

Mirror Image/Negative Image ...............................72

Mixed Size Originals .....................................68, 126

Mixed Size Originals (System Settings)......231, 251

Mixed Size Originals - Copy to Side 2


Multi-page TIFF.................................................. 120

Multiple-Up ........................................................... 81

N

network authentication ....................................... 321

Network Scan Driver .......................................... 158

Network Scanner Driver ..................................... 166

Network Scanner Utility 2 ................................... 157

Network Scanning .............................................. 114

Network Settings (System Settings)................... 238

Non-Copy Job Complete Tone

(System Settings) ............... 208

non-standard size document ................................ 67

Non-target Area Color .......................................... 56

notes and restrictions ......................................... 496

Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting Job ........ 496

NTP Time Synchronization (System Settings) ... 205

number of originals held ..................................... 455

numeric keypad............................................ 39, 435

O

Object Class of Search Target


Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray)


Operation of Up/Down Buttons


original changing speed ..................................... 455

Original Orientation (System Settings) ....... 232, 251

Originals ............................................................... 65

Original Size ......................................................... 67

Original Size Defaults (System Settings) ........... 235

Originals Orientation............................. 73, 118, 128

Original Type ................................................ 59, 119

Original Type (System Settings)................. 230, 251

Original Type - Auto (Black)

(System Settings) ............... 230

Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)

(System Settings) ............... 230

Original Type - Lightweight Originals

(System Settings) ............... 234

Out of Paper Warning Tone

(System Settings) ............... 208

Index

507

Ind

ex

Output Color................................................. 54, 117

Output Color (System Settings) ................. 229, 250

Output Color Recognition (System Settings) ..... 217

Output Format.............................................. 74, 129

Output Orientation................................................ 93

Output Orientation (System Settings) ................ 232

Output Orientation - Auto (1 Sheet)


Output Orientation - Reverse Order


output resolution ........................................ 450, 453

Output Size Defaults (System Settings)............. 253

outputting by specifying finishing ......................... 75

output tray ...................................................... 31, 32

output tray capacity............................................ 453

overview of auditron administration ................... 332

overview of Authentication ................................. 320

Overwrite Hard Disk........................................... 305

Overwriting Hard Disk (System Settings)........... 224

P

page description language................................. 453

Page Number Position (System Settings).......... 232

Page Number Position on Side 2


Page Number Style (System Settings) .............. 232

paper guides .............................................. 180, 182

paper jams ......................................................... 406

Paper Size (System Settings) ............................ 211

paper size/supported papers ............................. 456

Paper Size/Type (System Settings) ........... 211, 277

Paper Size Settings (System Settings) .............. 222

Paper Supply ....................................................... 52

paper supply (selecting the paper for copying) .... 52

Paper Supply (System Settings) ........................ 229

Paper Supply - 2nd to 4th Buttons

(System Settings).......... 228

Paper Tray Attributes During Loading


Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Menu


Paper Tray Priority (System Settings)................ 212

Paper Tray Settings (System Settings).............. 210

Paper Type (System Settings) ........................... 212

Paper Type Mismatch (System Settings)........... 246

Paper Type Priority (System Settings) ............... 213

paper types......................................................... 174

Password............................................................ 116

Password (System Settings) ...... 258, 266, 277, 281

Password Entry from Control Panel


PCL Emulation.................................................... 477

PCL Form Registration List ................................ 312

PCL Settings List ................................................ 312

PDF .................................................................... 119

PDF High Compression...................................... 120

PDF Settings List................................................ 311

periodical replacement parts .............................. 338

personal job flow sheet....................................... 324

personal mailbox ................................................ 327

Photo .................................................................. 119

Photo & Text Recognition (System Settings) ..... 217

Photograph Scanning......................................... 121

Photo Reproduction Level (System Settings)..... 217

PJL Output Command Control

(System Settings) .......... 285

PJL Receive Command Control


PKI (Public Key) Settings (System Settings) ...... 241

plain paper (printable paper) .............................. 174

Pool Server (System Settings) ........................... 264

Pool Server Login Method (System Settings)..... 264

poor image quality .............................................. 371

POP3 Server Settings (System Settings) ........... 239

Port Number (System Settings).......................... 277

Port Settings (System Settings).......................... 238

Poster ................................................................... 82

PostScript Default Color (System Settings)........ 247

PostScript Font Absence (System Settings)....... 247

PostScript Fonts List........................................... 312

PostScript Font Substitution


PostScript Memory (System Settings)................ 244

PostScript Paper Supply (System Settings) ....... 247

Power Saver mode............................................... 35

power source ...................................................... 453

power switch................................................... 29, 38

preferentially printing pending print jobs............. 298

Preset %....................................................... 51, 128

Preset Repeat Image............................................ 93

Primary Server (System Settings) ...................... 257

508

Ind

ex

Primary Server Port Number

(System Settings) ..............257

Printable Area .....................................................486

Print Area (System Settings) ..............................246

print driver...........................................................156

Print ID (System Settings) ..................................247

printing ................................................................161

printing a report/list .............................................361

printing charge-print documents .........................294

printing control number on the background ..........89

printing delayed print documents........................297

printing sample print documents.........................296

printing security print documents ........................295

printing stored documents ..................................293

Print Mode ..........................................................305

Print Mode Settings ............................................311

Print Mode Settings (System Settings) ...............243

Print Report/List ..................................................310

problem solving...................................................363

Programming ......................................................306

Promote Job .......................................................291

Protocol Settings (System Settings) ...................239

PS Logical Printers List.......................................312

Punching...............................................................76

punching .............................................................456

punch scrap container ..................................32, 352

R

Read Status (MDN) ............................................130

Read Status (MDN) (System Settings) ...............261

Receive Control (System Settings) .....................285

Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk


Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool


Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool


Receiving Buffer - NetWare


Receiving Buffer - Port 9100


Receiving Buffer - SMB Spool


Receiving Buffer - USB (System Settings) .........244

Recipient Name (System Settings) .....................275

Recipient Name/E-mail Address ........................ 111

Reduce/Enlarge............................................ 50, 128

Reduce/Enlarge (System Settings) .................... 229

Reduce/Enlarge -2nd to 4th Buttons


Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd to 4th Buttons



(System Settings) ........... 236, 254

reduced copies ..................................................... 50

registering stored programs ............................... 151

remote access .................................................... 322

Remote Access (System Settings)..................... 287

remote authentication......................................... 321

Remote Authentication Server 1

through 5 (System Settings)......... 240

Remote Authentication Server Settings


Repeat Image....................................................... 83

Reply To ............................................................. 130

Reports (System Settings) ................................. 219

Reset Account .................................................... 282

Reset Total Impressions (System Settings) ....... 282

Reset User Accounts (System Settings) ............ 282

resolution............................................................ 453

Response to Read Status (MDN)


Retrieve Programming ....................................... 305

Right Page then Left........................................... 125

S

S/MIME Certificate (System Settings) ................ 276

Sample Set........................................................... 96

Sample Set (System Settings) ........................... 232

Save in (System Settings) .................................. 276

saving the scanned data .................................... 107

Scan Defaults (System Settings)........................ 250

scan graduation.................................................. 454

Scan Mode Settings ........................................... 312

Scan Mode Settings (System Settings).............. 249

scanning a color photograph .............................. 121

scanning both sides of a document.................... 118

scanning both sides of the document................. 124

scanning different size documents

simultaneously............. 68, 126

Index

509

Ind

ex

scanning facing pages onto separate sheets..... 124

Scan Options ............................................... 64, 124

Scan Resolution................................................. 124

scan resolution........................................... 450, 454

Scan Resolution (System Settings) ................... 251

Scan Service (System Settings) ........................ 254

Scan Size........................................................... 125

scan Size ........................................................... 454

Scan size Defaults (System Settings)................ 252

Scan to FTP/SMB ...................................... 115, 455

Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults (System Settings) .. 252

Scan to Mailbox ......................................... 113, 454

Scope of Search from Root Entry


screen ................................................................ 357

Screen Defaults (System Settings) .................... 209

Search Root Entry DN (System Settings) .......... 258

Search Time-Out (System Settings) .................. 259

Secondary Server (System Settings)................. 257

Secondary Server Port Number


selecting the color to copy ................................... 54

selecting the color to scan ................................. 117

selecting the document type ........................ 59, 119

selecting the format of scanned data ................. 119

selecting the paper for copying ............................ 52

select the image quality ....................................... 58

Send E-mail ....................................................... 455

sender ................................................................ 111

sending E-mail with a digital signature

by S/MIME ............ 132

sending encrypted E-mail by S/MIME................ 132

sending in sections ............................................ 130

Serial Number .................................................... 303

Server ................................................................ 116

Server Application (System Settings) ................ 258

Server - IP Address (System Settings) .............. 240

Server Name/IP Address (System Settings)...... 276

Server - Port Number (System Settings) ........... 240

Server - Server Name (System Settings)........... 240

Server - Server Realm Name

(System Settings)............ 240

Server - Server Setup (System Settings)........... 240

Service Rep. Restricted Operation

(System Settings)............ 225

Set Numbering ..................................................... 89

set the address for reply ..................................... 130

setting procedures when a file name

is overlapped ............. 131

Settings List - Common Items ............ 310, 311, 312

Setup Menu (System Settings)........................... 265

Shared Name ..................................................... 116

Shared Name (SMB Only) (System Settings) .... 276

Sharpness .................................................... 61, 122

Sharpness (System Settings) ..................... 230, 251

shifting the image copy position ........................... 69

Single Color (System Settings)........................... 229

Sleep Mode .......................................................... 35

SMTP Server Settings (System Settings)........... 239

Software Download (System Settings) ............... 226

Software Options (System Settings)................... 220

Software Version ................................................ 304

Source Color......................................................... 56

Special Media ..................................................... 175

specifying a filename to save ............................. 130

specifying a filename to save to ......................... 131

specifying a forward destination ......................... 116

Specifying an image compression ratio.............. 129

specifying a scanning ratio ................................. 128

specifying a scanning resolution......................... 124

specifying color space ........................................ 123

Specifying face up or down .................................. 93

specifying the orientation of

the loaded documents .............. 73

specifying the scan size...................................... 125

specifying the scan size for the document............ 67

Split Send ........................................................... 130

Stamp Color (System Settings) .......................... 232

Stamp Density (System Settings)....................... 235

Stamp Position (System Settings) ...................... 232

Stamp Position on Side 2 (System Settings)...... 235

Stamp Size (System Settings)............................ 232

Standard ............................................................. 175

Standard Size ..................................................... 126

staple .................................................................. 456

staple cartridge..................................................... 32

staple cartridge (Finisher C) ............................... 430

staple cartridge (for Finisher C

and Booklet finisher C) ............ 349

staple cartridge for 50 sheets XE ....................... 338

staple cartridge for booklet finisher XC............... 338

stapler faults ....................................................... 429

510

Ind

ex

stapling .................................................................75

Stop ....................................................................291

Store/Delete Programming .................................306

Stored Programming Tone (System Settings) ....208

Store User Details (System Settings) .................285

Subject................................................................112

Substitute Tray (System Settings) ......................246

supported OS......................................................454

supported protocol ..............................................453

suppressing the document background..............122

System Administrator Login ID


system administrator mode.................................192

System Administrator Password




system administrator shared box........................327

system administrator shared job flow sheet........323

system settings menu list....................................195

T

Tab Margined Shift ...............................................84

Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value


Target Area Color .................................................56

Text.....................................................................119

Text & Photo .......................................................119

Text & Photo (Halftone) Originals


Text/Background contrast (System Settings) .....216

Text Effect (System Settings) .............................215

Text Effect Sample List .......................................315

Text Size (System Settings) ...............................216

Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail


Thumbnail - Scan to FTP/SMB


TIFF ....................................................................120

TIFF Format (System Settings) ..........................255

TIFF Logical Printers List ....................................311

TIFF Settings List................................................311

Time (System Settings) ......................................205

Time Server IP Address (System Settings) ........205

Time Zone...........................................................207

toner cartridges .................................... 31, 338, 339

toner cover ........................................................... 29

top cover............................................................... 31

Top Page then Bottom ....................................... 125

touch screen................................................. 38, 434

Transfer Protocol................................................ 115

Transfer Protocol (System Settings) .......... 252, 276

transfer unit .......................................................... 31

Transparency Separators..................................... 80

Tray 1 ................................................................... 29

Tray 2 ................................................................... 29

Tray 3 ................................................................... 29

Tray 4 ................................................................... 29

Tray 5 (bypass) .................................................... 29

Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults


Tray 5 (bypass) top cover..................................... 29

Tray 6 ................................................................... 29

Tray 6 top cover ................................................... 29

tray capacity ....................................................... 456

tray type.............................................................. 456

trouble during copying ........................................ 376

trouble during dcanning...................................... 384

Trouble during printing ....................................... 381

troubleshooting................................................... 364

type..................................................... 450, 453, 454

types of authentication ....................................... 320

types of boxes .................................................... 327

U

unable to copy .................................................... 376

unable to print..................................................... 381

unauthenticated user.......................................... 320

Unregistered Forms (System Settings) .............. 247

Usable paper ...................................................... 175

USB2.0 interface connector ................................. 29

User Account Billing Meter ................................. 309

User Details Setup (System Settings) ................ 284

UserID (System Settings)................................... 281

UserID Characters (System Settings) ................ 284

User Name (System Settings)............................ 281

using ESC/P Emulation ...................................... 459

V

Variable %.................................................... 51, 128

Index

511

Ind

ex

W

warm-up time ..................................................... 450

waste toner container........................... 31, 338, 340

waste toner container cover................................. 31

WebDAV protocol ...................................... 107, 170

weight................................................................. 453

Customer Response Sheet

ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I, DocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I User Guide (DE3318E2-1)

To improve our publications, we would appreciate your feedback regarding this guide. Please take a few moments to complete and return this form to us.

About Yourself1. How often do you use this guide?

[ ] Daily [ ] Weekly [ ] Monthly [ ] Infrequently

2. When do you usually refer to the guide?[ ] Doing a usual operation [ ] Using unfamiliar features[ ] Solving a problem

3. Which part of the guide do you read frequently?Chapter/Section/Page:

4. Where do you keep this guide?

5. (Optional)Your Name: Occupation:Company or organization:Address:

About the Guide

Other comments:

After completing this form, detach and send it to the address below.(Please use your own envelope and postage stamp.)Thank you for your cooperation.

Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.Ebina Prime Tower2-9-50, Chuo, Ebina-shi, Kanagawa-ken

JAPAN 243-0432.

Stronglyagree

Neutral Strongly disagree

1. It is handy. 1 2 3 4 52. It is easy to read. 1 2 3 4 53. Titles of chapters and sections make sense. 1 2 3 4 54. Information is logically placed. 1 2 3 4 55. Referencing is easy. 1 2 3 4 56. Content is easy to understand. 1 2 3 4 57. The step-by-step instructions are easy to follow. 1 2 3 4 58. All necessary information is included. 1 2 3 4 59. Illustrations aid in the understanding of content. 1 2 3 4 510. The use of color is effective. 1 2 3 4 5

ApeosPort C6550 I/C5540 I, DocuCentre C6550 I/C5540 I User Guide

Manual GroupHuman Interface Design DevelopmentFuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

DE3318E2-1 (Edition 1)February 2005

Copyright© 2005 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.